.

I
FIFTH EDITION

GRAMMAR
m

all,

n.Mv\r\nc^ M. ELBAUM
 HEINLE
C Collins CENGAGE Learning'

The ultimate resource for English language learners!

Unparalleled vocabulary support Full-sentence definitions

Outstanding reference tools Interactive CD-ROM

NEW

level with: (●()iit;il»

1
Word Worlds

Spelling Partners
Sound Partners LOSSARY
Word Builders

Do you have yours?

C. ●' <i5 C08VILD lllusuated Basic Collins COBUILD Advanced Collins COBUILD English/Spanish Student’s
extiono’y <:f Aniciican English Dictionory of American English Dictionary of >Jmsf;cn/i English
softcover with CD-ROM 978-1-42<50-0081-4 Softcover with CD-ROM 978-1-4240-0363-1 Softcover with CD-ROM 978-1-4240-1962-5

C_i.. COSUfiO/nterTned-ote CoHins COBUILD English/Espahol Glossary

Dictionary of Amciicon English Softcover 978-1-4240-1964-9
● :!;-cvS' -.-rtth CD ROM 978-l--J2<J(M)776-9

SOURCE CODE 9ELTAD43

FIFTH EDITION
'*● V.

rjt-jv.. ●
I

GRAMMAR
CONTEXT
1
in

SANDRA N. ELBAUM

\ The cover photo shows the

Leonard P. Zakim Bunker Hill
Bridge over the Charles River
A
\ V ^ ●
in Boston, Massachusetts.

HEINLE
● » CENGAGE Learning-

Australia« Brazil ● Japan ● Korea ● Mexico ● Singapore ● Spain ● United Kingdom ● United States
 \

;● HEINLE
I * CENGAGE Learning-

Grammar in Context 1. Student Book ©2010 Sandra N. Elbaum

Fifth Edition

Sandra N. Elbaum ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. No part of this work covered by the
copyright herein may be reproduced, transmitted, stored or used
in any form or by any means graphic, electronic, or mechanical,
Publisher: Sherrise Roehr
including but not limited to photocopying, recording, scanning,
Acquisitions Editor: Tom Jefferies digitizing, taping, Web distribution, information networks, or
Associate Development Editor: information storage and retrieval systems, except as permitted
Sarah Sandoski under Section 107 or 108 of the 1976 United States Copyright Act,
without the prior written permission of the publisher.
Director of Global Marketing; Ian Martin
Director of US Marketing; Jim McDonough
for permission to use material from this text or product, submit all
Product Marketing Manager; Katie Kelley requests online at www.cengage.com/permissions
Marketing Manager; Caitlin Driscoll Further permissions questions can be emailed to
Content Project Manager: Andrea Bobotas [email protected]

Senior Print Buyer Susan Spencer

Project Manager; Chrystie Hopkins Library of Congress Control Number: 2009936997
Production Services: Nesbitt Graphics, Inc. ISBN 13:978-1-4240-7899-8

Interior Design and Cover Design: ISBN 10; 1-4240-7899-7

Muse Group, Inc.

Heinie

20 Channel Center Street

Boston, Massachusetts 02210

USA

Cengage Learning is a leading provider of customized learning

solutions with office locations around the globe, including
Singapore, the United Kingdom, Australia, Mexico, Brazil, and Japan
Locate our local office at international.cengage.com/region

Cengage Learning products are represented in Canada by Nelson

Education, Ltd.

Visit Heinie online at elt.heinle.com

Visit our corporate website at www.cengage.com

Printed in the United States of America.

123456789 10 13 12 11 10 09
Contents
Lesson 1
Grammar The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This,
That, These, Those 1
Context College Life 1

READING Community College Life in the U.S 2

1.1 Present-Tense Forms of fie 3
1.2 Uses of fie 4
1.3 Word Order with fie 5
1.4 The Subject 6

READING Journal Entry (by Maya Levina) 7

1.5 Contractions with fie 8
1.6 fie with Descriptions 9
1.7 fie with Definitions 11
1.8 Prepositions of Place 13
1.9 Negative Statements with fie 15

READING Conversation About College 18

1.10 Be in Yes/No Questions and Short Answers 20
1.11 Wh- Questions with Be 21
1.12 Comparing Statements and Questions with Be 24
1.13 Questions with What and How 25

READING In the School Cafeteria 28

1.14 This, That, These, Those 29

SUMMARY 30
EDITING ADVICE 31
EDITING QUIZ 32
TEST/REVIEW . . . 34
EXPANSION 36

Lesson 2
Grammar The Simple Present Tense 39
Context The United States 39

READING Washington, D.C 40

2.1 Simple Present Tense—Forms 41
2.2 Simple Present Tense—Uses 42
2.3 Spelling of the -s Form 43
2.4 Pronunciation of the -s Form 44
2.5 Comparing Affirmative Statements—fie and Other Verbs 45
2.6 Negative Statements with the Simple Present Tense . . .
46
2.7 Comparing Negative Statements—fie and Other Verbs. . 48

READING One Country, Many Differences 50

2.8 Yes/No Questions and Short Answers with the Simple Present Tense.. 51
2.9 Comparing Yes/No Questions—Be and Other Verbs 54
2.10 Or Questions . 55

Contents iii
 READING The National Museum of the American Indian 56

2.11 W'/j-Questions with the Simple Present Tense .. 58

2.12 Comparing Statements and Questions with the Simple Present Tense . 59
2.13 Questions About Meaning, Spelling, Cost, and Time. 61
63
2.14 Comparing IV/i-Questions—Be and Other Verbs ..
SUMMARY 64

EDITING ADVICE 65

EDITING QUIZ 67
68
TEST/REVIEW
EXPANSION 73

Lesson 3
Grammar Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time. 75
Context American Holidays 75

READING Three Special Days in the United States . . .

. 76
77
3.1 Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense
3.2 Position of Frequency Words and Expressions. . 78

READING The Fourth of July 81

82
3.3 Prepositions of Time
3.4 Questions with Ever 83

3.5 Questions with How Often and Answers with Frequency Expressions. . 85
SUMMARY 89

EDITING ADVICE . 90

EDITING QUIZ . , 91
91
TEST/REVIEW. . .
EXPANSION 94

Lesson 4
Grammar Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity Words ... 97
Context Americans and Where They Live 97

READING Americans and Where They Live 98

99
4.1 Singular and Plural—An Overview
100
4.2 Spelling of Regular Noun Plurals
4.3 Pronunciation of Plural Nouns 101
102
4.4 Irregular Noun Plurals
READING Finding an Apartment . 104
106
4.5 Using There + Is/Are
4.6 Questions and Short Answers Using There 108

4.7 There vs. They and Other Pronouns 111

113
READING Calling About an Apartment
4.8 Articles with Definite and Indefinite Nouns 114
117
4.9 Making Generalizations
SUMMARY 120

EDITING ADVICE 121

iv Contents
 EDITING QUIZ 122

TEST/REVIEW. 123
EXPANSION , . 125

Lesson 5
Grammar Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 129
Context Families and Names 129

READING Names 130

5.1 Possessive Form of Nouns 131
5.2 Possessive Adjectives 133
5.3 Questions with Whose 134
5.4 Possessive Pronouns 135
5.5 The Subject and the Object 136

READING William Madison's Name 137

5.6 Object Pronouns 138

READING Who Helps Your Parents? 143

5.7 Questions About the Subject or About the Complement. .
144
5.8 Who, Whom, Who's, Whose 146

SUMMARY 148
EDITING ADVICE 149

EDITING QUIZ 150

TEST/REVIEW 152
EXPANSION 155

Lesson 6
Grammar The Present Continuous Tense 157

Context Observations About American Life 157

READING Observations in the Park 158

6.1 The Present Continuous Tense 159
6.2 Spelling of the -ing Form 160
6.3 The Present Continuous Tense—Uses 161

READING Observations Downtown 163

6.4 Questions with the Present Continuous Tense 164

READING Observations in the School Cafeteria. . . . 168

6.5 Present Continuous and Simple Present 169
6.6 Nonaction Verbs 172

6.7 Think, Have, and the Sense Perception Verbs 173

SUMMARY 180
EDinNG ADVICE 181
EDITING QUIZ 181

TEST/REVIEW 182
EXPANSION 186

Contents v
 Lesson 7
Grammar Future Tenses—tVfHand Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses. 189

Context 189
Weddings
190
READING Planning for a Wedding
7.1 Future with Will 191

7.2 Future with Be Going To 192

193
7.3 Choosing Will or Be Going To
197
READING Is the Honeymoon Over?
7.4 Questions with Be Go/ng To 198
7.5 Questions with Will 199

7.6 Future Tense + Time/T/Clause 203

READING Jason and Katie—Starting a Married Life 207

7.7 Comparison of Tenses 208

SUMMARY 212

EDITING ADVICE 213

EDITING QUIZ 214

TEST/REVIEW 214
TEST ON COMPARISON OF TENSES 217
EXPANSION 220

Lesson 8
Grammar The Simple Past Tense 223

Context Flying 223

READING The Wright Brothers—Men with a Vision 224

8.1 The Simple Past Tense of Regular Verbs 225

8.2 Spelling of the Past Tense of Regular Verbs 226

8.3 Pronunciation of -ed Past Forms . . 227

READING Charles Lindbergh and Amelia Earhart 228

8.4 Past Tense of Be 229
8.5 Uses of Be 230

8.6 Questions with WasIWere 231

8.7 Simple Past Tense of Irregular Verbs—An Overview 234

READING Robert Goddard 235

8.8 List of Irregular Past-Tense Verbs 236

8.9 Negative Forms of Past-Tense Verbs 238

READING Hero Pilot 242

8.10 Questions with Past-Tense Verbs 243

8.11 Questions About the Subject 249

SUMMARY 252

EDITING ADVICE . 253

EDITING QUIZ 254

TEST/REVIEW 255
EXPANSION 258

vi Concents
 Lesson 9
Grammar Infinitives; Models; Imperatives 261
Context Smart Shopping 261

9.1 Infinitives—An Overview 262

READING Getting the Best Price 262

9.2 Verbs Followed by an Infinitive 263
9.3 It + Se + Adjective + Infinitive 265
9.4 Be + Adjective + Infinitive 267
9.5 Using an Infinitive to Show Purpose 268

READING Getting a Customer's Attention 270

9.6 Object Before an Infinitive 270
9.7 Overview of Modals 273

READING Smart Shopping: Coupons, Rain Checks, and Rebates 274

9.8 Can 275
9.9 Should 277
9.10 Must 280
9.11 Have To 282
9.12 Must and Have To 284
9.13 Might/May and Will 285
9.14 Making Requests 286

READING The Customer Service Counter 287

9.15 Imperatives 289
9.16 Using Modals to Make Requests and Ask Permission 292

SUMMARY 294
EDIHNG ADVICE 295
EDITING QUIZ 296
TEST/REVIEW 297
EXPANSION 301

Lesson 10
Grammar Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity Words 305
Context Nutrition and Health 305

10.1 Count and Noncount Nouns—An Overview 306

READING A Healthy Diet 306

10.2 Noncount Nouns 307
10.3 Count and Noncount Nouns . 309
10.4 Describing Quantities of Count and Noncount Nouns 310
10.5 A Lot Of, Much, Many 311
10.6 A Few, A Little 312
10.7 Some, Any, No, and A/An 313

READING Eat Less, Live Longer 317

10.8 A Lot Of vs. Too Much/Too Many 318
10.9 Too Much/Too Many vs. Too 320

Contents vii
 SUMMARY 323

EDITING ADVICE 323

325
EDITING QUIZ
325
TEST/REVIEW. . .
EXPANSION . . . . 326

Lesson 11
329
Grammar Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs
Context Great Women 329

READING Helen Keller 330

11.1 Adjectives and Adverbs . 331

332
11.2 Adjectives
334
READING A Special Athlete
11.3 Noun Modifiers 335

11.4 Comparing Adverbs of Manner and Adjectives 337

11.5 Spelling of -ly Adverbs 338

READING Grandma Moses 342

11.6 Too vs. Very 343

11.7 Too and Enough 344

SUMMARY 346

EDinNG ADVICE 346

EDITING QUIZ 348

349
TEST/REVIEW
EXPANSION 350

Lesson 12
Grammar Comparatives; Superlatives 353

Context 353
U.S. Geography
READING U.S. Facts 354

12.1 Comparatives and Superlatives—An Overview 355

12.2 Comparative and Superlative Forms of Adjectives and Adverbs 356

12.3 Superlative Adjectives , 358

12.4 Word Order with Superlatives . 360

READING A Tale of Two Cities 361

363
12.5 Comparisons
12.6 Word Order with Comparisons 366

SUMMARY 369

EDITING ADVICE 369

EDITING QUIZ 370

371
TEST/REVIEW
EXPANSION 372

viii Concents
 Lesson 13
Grammar Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions.. 375
Context Dating and Marriage 375

READING Dating and Marriage 376

13.1 Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either 377
13.2 Auxiliary Verbs with Opposite Statements 378
13.3 Tag Questions 381

READING Saturday with Meg and Don 381

13.4 Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 382
13.5 Answering a Tag Question 386

SUMMARY 390
EDITING ADVICE 391
EDITING QUIZ 392

TEST/REVIEW 393
EXPANSION 395

Lesson 14
Grammar Verb Review 399
Context Washington Interns 399

READING Washington Interns.. 400

14.1 Verbs 402
14.2 Statements and Questions 405

EDITING ADVICE 411

EDITING QUIZ 413

TEST/REVIEW 414
EXPANSION 418

Appendices
A The Verb Get API
B Make and Do APS
C Question Formation AP4
D Alphabetical List of Irregular Past Forms AP6
E Meanings of Modals and Related Words AP7
F Capitalization Rules APS
G Metric Conversion Chart AP9
H Prepositions of Time APll
I Glossary of Grammatical Terms APIS
3 Verbs and Adjectives Followed by a Preposition APIS

K Map of the United States of America AP19

Index
Index II

Contents ix
Acknowledgments
Many thanks to Dennis Hogan, Sherrise Roehr, and Tom Jefferies from
Heinle Cengagc for their ongoing support of the Grammar in Context seties.
I would especially like to thank my development editor, Sarah Sandoski,
for her patience, sensitivity, keen eye to detail, and invaluable suggestions.
And many thanks to my students at Truman College, who have
increased my understanding of my own language and taught me to see life
from another point of view. By sharing their observations, questions, and
life stories, they have enriched my life enormously.
This new edition is dedicated to the millions of displaced people in
the world. The U.S. is the new home to many refugees, who survived
unspeakable hardships in Burundi, Rwanda, Sudan, Burma, Bhutan, and
other countries. Their resiliency in starting a new life and learning a new
language is a tribute to the human spirit.—Sandra N. Elbaum
Heinle would like to thank the following people for their contributions:

El i iobv I li A. A d Ic r-Ci»l cm an Rhon d a J. Tarl ey Bill Keniston MicUcllc Naumami

Sunrise Mountain High Cosumnes River College Norman dale Community Elgin Cotnimmiry' C^>llcgc
School Sacramento, CA College Elgin, il-
L\$ Vegas, NV Bloomington, MN
Jennifer I'aniell Debbie Oekey
Judith A. G. Bcnka University of Connecticut Michael Larserr Fresno, CA
Nonnandale Comimmiry American Language Americ.an Riv'er College
College Program Sacramento, CA Lesa Ferry
Bloomington, MN Stamford, CT University' of Nebnoku ,it
Be<a C- Lawn Omaha
Carol Brut:a Gail Fc man del Cavilan College Omaha, N*F
Chitewny (kunimmity Bergen Community' College Gilroy, CA
C'ollege Pa ramus, NJ Herbert Pier>on
Ne*w Fiav'cn, CT Rob Lee St, John's University
Abigail'Marie F'iattarone Pasadena City College New York City, NY
Lyn Biichhcic Mesa Ct>mmuniry Ctillege P.asadena, QA
Comnuiuiiy College of Mesa, AZ Dina Poggi
Philadelphia Oranit Limmaneeprudert De An:a Ct'llege
Philadelphia, PA Johr^ Camber American River Ccdlege Cui'crtino, CA
American Riwr College Sacramento, CA
Charlotte M. Calohrisi Sacramento, CA StCNcn Rasbba
Northern Virginia Linda Louie University of Bridgeixur
Comimmity' College Marcia Gethin-JontTS HiBhllne Community Bridgeport, iTT
An nan dale, VA Uniwrsity of Connecticut College
American Language Des Moines, WA Mark Ran
Gahricla Cambiasso Program American Riwr CCollege
Harold Washinion Ctdiege Smrrs, CT MeUnie A. Majeski Sacramento, CA
Chicago, IL Naugatuck Valley
Kimlee ButtacavoU Grant Community College Maria Spclleri
Jeanette Clement The Leona Gr<>up, LLC Waretbury, CT State Ctillegc I'f F*lori<i.i
Ihikjiivsne University PhcK’nix, AZ M a natoo-Sa rasi51 a
Pmsburgh, P.A Maria Sfarln Venice, FL
Shelly Hedstrom De Anm College
Allis Cole Palm Beach Community Cupertino, CA Eva Teagarden
Shoreline CkjinmunitY College Yuba College
'I lege Uke Worth, FL Michael 1. Massey Marysville, CA
Shoreline, WA HlllsK'^rough Community
Linda Holden College-Yhor Clry Can'lpa^ Nico W^iersema
FiUishen DiGiovanni College of Lake County Tampa, FL Texas A^SiM Internutionul

Glen dale Community Cir.ayslakc, IL Uniwrsity

College Mario McClurg-Mackinnon Laredo, TX
Glendale, CA Sandra Kawamum Consumnes River College
Sacramento City College Sacramento, CA Susan Wilson
Sacramento, CA Sait Jose C'lry C^'llvgv
Snn Jose, CA

X Acknowledtiments
A word from the author
My parents immigrated to the U.S. from Poland and
learned English as a second language. Born in i the
U.S., I often had the task as a child to explain the
intricacies of the English language. It is no wonder
that I became an English language teacher.

When 1 started teaching over forty years ago,

grammar textbooks used a series of unrelated
sentences with no context. 1 knew instinctively that V

there was something wrong with this technique.

It ignored the fact that language is a tool for
communication, and it missed an oppt)rtuniry to spark the student’s
curiosity. As I gained teaching experience, I noticed that when I used
interesting stories that illustrated the grammar students became more
motivated, understood the grammar better, and used it more effectively.

In 1986, 1 published the first edition of Grammar in Context and have

continued to search for topics that teach grammar in contexts that are
relevant to students’ lives. The contexts I’ve chosen each tell a story:
practical ones about students’ everyday experiences (such as renting
an apartment) to inspirational ones about ordinary people doing
extraordinary things (such as the pilot who landed his broken plane safely
in the Hudson River). Whether the task is a fill-in grammar exercise, a
listening activity, an editing exercise, an interactive conversation activity, or
free writing, the context is reinforced throughout the lesson.

I hope you enjoy the new edition of Grammar in Context!

Sandra N. Elbaum

In memory of
Herman and Ethel Elbaum

A word from the author XI

Welcome to Grammar in Context,
Fifth Edition
Grammar in Context presents grammar in interesting contexts that are
relevant to students’ lives and then recycles the language and context
throughout every activity. Learners gain knowledge and skills in both
the grammar structures and topic areas.
The new fifth edition of Grammar in Context engages learners with
updated readings, clear and accessible grammar explanations, and
a new full-color design.

Editor.!
Men vrithaVis^ Full-color design makes grammar
the
more visually contextualized and
Xou Bead 1. rv* even easier to study and teach from.
ic

.U
I -

,, V...
lU
gno.v;
M ● ».n<
: »:

■'l
Rtscisf a
L1
\n
●ril .vrtVl
s .ibo’i"
U>
acvi
●r
0^^
TVS ,«n

tV.ux”"' 111
iba'
A: ciir*'
K. ' ,h- *
?. Liftdlvtili U'» 0^*
A:
n.N, J d><
iM

\\r<
3. Hartutt tfun'
.IsOS
tKc. ,|M=" .1"
H: m"""' to
he<«
(totft
I: .r.-C’
.» UnV:
,ut'
,it« , Cu’ I''*
\\st*
*● ^-'"JJ'erjfh*var.«nn, It'
,d W oV.o*'”
A;
r. iM
●a
.tbU SxO'^
■ wr*-""
iVou’
5« Ijn»?h«rifh v,-« l„ »«
i#
e k'* ir>
A!
..1U V\'‘'
Lihr’"
i:
^90^
Th< WViiht hj.Bh^rs '*trc rAmoii., (s»J„)
A: a;

g: Ove rtie«
Wiv,j«n'f Vetbs-
A: «rt«'
0;
past 1^" ^^eggS^«Ml?5 - ,.u» "* ●'●●

RRCIS! IB Fill In 111, bu a.i

“llrFr nicKury P*il-l«nj» form of e». Ad( \
■<)) *r t_
tpt
I: I >r/)rtl j(« ttt VI
; k-nw I ' 'i’'iff<-n
A: UVr*
rk

>« DC It*
A:

Contextualized dialogues improve

TheN
Dl
learners’ listening skills and act as
models for speaking (also included
on the Audio CD).

xii Welcome to Gmmnuir in Contc.xi

 Hero Pilot 1
Before

Updated For
Read
r’s'eJhufe’

This Edition!
?. tl,
if'** jrrr h»«'
foliowiM
<onver«t<on.

High-interest, informative
(0 P4sr-t«A}e

iK readings present grammar

*● Vn Ufn
in context, illustrating the
● cf

hen*
*SuLy* fr>t grammatical structure in an
B: What diJ h« di,'
Hi»siri\Janj had >nalr
i informative and meaningful way.
UiWini g Srt-iiiru,-
iSt/uiwr
frwf I5C
many rc^Jedicxr

B. why diJ |i< nuk« »n

♦"Wffcfwry tanjift*'
As J**Mii'«hnrtancUi r'**fr
fis HnwJidiUf-*
As Afli.i' ij/hinkrtfl,,, rhc Grammar is presented in
9 : .V >r,ht
rfy.

iiin«
nrjn'i h 'tn a.'' Ju.L' clear, manageable sections
8: So„k<„d.dh,!,nJ’
A: JIffnade
fhcHn A
to make learning easier.
6: Dfjihc
As 'SfsDx
Past-tense Verbs
SUne they 8.10 Questiocvsw'th
As Jl.|-nt)>fy^CW, Jt., Compare glflnwatt^
^ma. Ofcamj VatB
0*4
W- i*orf _

tbe pUM.
rnapAM at Jirpet? H.. h« ,
he
Ut«d in th!
CHd kand?
did se
Ui l,s.,.K kost p»iV»*-
The sUf>e gn y*sgip«e?
Vn
in* Siidl v«
Old the purse gn
llM
did il
N0»

, ,Vi«» "“1, M
*ert
Grammar charts offer
»●
straightforward
Compare n?ga<|^
utememi ana Vert
CMBgtt****^ _ explanations and
“to th«
provide contextualized
Ot^'t dsdn'toe
The pil:i\ r
t*c»'
he >4C«t9tW
Olim't go

examples of the
he girpCit
didrt't
\
structure.
i4 aos* ith a

“«:SSiS5SEs;‘ l-i' 't' . vAjdki_

KtHClSE
, the

Jec»«'o’ ●
usJrf’-
● tKe

.●L i p*
*: I K"( itn^'
irtkes)'
I; Jv3 VA* *p*
I cru matfseJ M4IS ap>

1.
I ● .r .r-i !4'
].
. 1 h.>u«ht tMiish d-,'i'>han, t.lw'
>.

i. 1 keft r^>

. I cause rts, U.^

(hrk'S WhateW
4. _ I «V
1.

1.
'Language Notes' refine students’
♦.
l TV
- lisVh) understanding of the target structure by
providing meaningful examples of the
10. -
E^flish l-he.d
u. -

IJ «e>-
grammar in natural language.
AlOUITOU1
Exsnass a

T.
1 * yT'”' _U,s^.«h»lsnis
'About You' communicative activities
1.
».
1. |.«0 sch'*'*
1
1. I pUesd s-xsvt
_U-p-0c^' . I ifudreki
enhance learning by personalizing the
y w..
,na\k.-s*fwf
n.
p>«uee
«. .ttK>u(S«t8K<rs
,V mosK !«*●'
IS.
srammar.
4. '

«4H

Welcome to Grammar in Context xiii

 Enhanced fo’^
Editing Advice
This Edition'
Enhanced editing section guides
*. IV «t»< Klw ef.t

I ar
n»* tKe WM i**i. gtfer «.
^
students to first identify and then correct
spflliiy
common grammatical errors in context.
Iu«0>Mfor tK Ini int
He4*«Whn pffxtL
i. LV Ok !^k &«t altffWof jj,'(

She dnin't u««, |)K

father t/ie U S,?
*● I «tJ»e
»t4ue'*»ii

Undated For
*h«fe ^

%is Edition:
(

ih. “●^■1"'
I. rv*^’
Comprehensive 'Expansion' section for
la. rv'fi't «tU
each lesson provides opportunities for
Ahat
students to interact with one another
Editing Quiz and further develop their speaking and
are
C writing skills.
uxfttMiruC

●rfO« ’I '■

●● *rf0C« *1'"^'
Expansion
»! 1
Classroom
Activities o «' ●'« »● .ntlrt tU., I,wvl- t stv4ci>l who
iT". 5r"”’""“ '● ”"
*! UuW-
h«r flrrt *ip«rf«Acif
,4j1V»KAn
*. H< UVr?J«J
vtv , . I** “^n H'u
fti^ari.

A;1nlW.
him
,, 04JV«e*<*^ cofltfioeni of itU Ufe aftar h«*
*^l*the U.S.»ndtn«
iA« Utniit 2» *»i« miv«. wni» yoyr
aivl ITMr mo4«t.
IX*»f»u A; VtlsfuJiJ. kavT
vi-jntn’

r f,, I,- ^.
funWt kO ●«' N'* iirv|«r*tn,S.f»h
,(iU alr^
*: »>> 6-hi,.pn'
I; i.

^ S,s He^** >MA«f

Talk y«vAar«
I: iv^auheW
About It o Do rou tH*ik W(t ocpleration is InpertarU? Why «» iftir not?
«w Uw.--
0 Do yen Ihfnk i$ Kfa another planei>

O i*0oU you want to take a tHp to Dte moon or to another plamtt

whyiwt?

Write

About It O your penanal hero, VOtt ■rrlte ate«t a famity

iMf. Hend. teMlWQ roworkot, someono |m read ab«at. Telt
why |nu admire (Ms porsan.

0 Write » MrafQph aMat a lamoas person Uut yov admire, TrU

More Writing Models

what this penoA d<d>

% This Edition!
fZANeiC

A^ham Lbcoln
i I V*^"^AOfAKan-l -— 16th
pWdent o'tv U S No.>nt«o mneypvneei to
Writing models provide PO frr« M that t-n«. the-* -1 th* i) Q
:'*:**'-a-tad to en^ aUvff^
additional writing practice
using the grammar structure For mote Mctke uilti) Jrsmnur In <eetb>t
for that lesson. Meat* visit owe Wrb siu.

XIV Welcome to Grammar in Context

 Additional resources for each level
FOR THE STUDENT:

New To ,
This Edition.
● Online Workbook features additional exercises that learners can access

in the classroom, language lab, or at home.

● Audio CD includes all readings and dialogues from the student book.
● Student Web site features additional practice: http://elt.hein le.com/
grammarincontext

FOR THE TEACHER:

Online Lesson Planner is perfect for busy instructors, allowing them to

create and customize lesson plans for their classes, then save and share
them in a range of formats.
Updated For
%s Edition.'
Assessment CD-ROM with Exam View® lets teachers create
and customize tests and quizzes easily and includes many new
contextualized test items.

Teacher’s Edition offers comprehensive teaching notes including

suggestions for more streamlined classroom options.
Instructor Web site includes a printable Student Book answer key.

: *●

3
BAStal 2
GRAMMAR GRAMMAR
GRAMMAR "■CONTEXT GRAMMAR ■●'COhJTEXT
"’CONTEXT "■CONTEXT

Welcome to Grammtir in Context xv

Lesson

1
Grammar
The Present Tense
of the Verb Be

Prepositions of Place
This, That, These, Those

Context
College Life
Community College Life in the United States
Before
You Read Circle Tfor true or F for false and discuss your answers.

1. Most of the students in my class are immigrants. T F

2. My school is in a convenient' location. T F

Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to is and are.
cdi.tr 01

A community college (or two-year college) is a good place

to begin your education in the U.S. The tuition is usually cheaper
than at a university, Because a community college is often smaller than a
university, foreign students are often more comfortable. They are closer to
Did You
their professors and get more attention.
Truman College is a typical community college. It Ls one of seven City
Know? ^ Colleges of Chicago. It is a two-year college on the north side of Chicago.
The average age of '
a community college
It is near public transportation—buses and trains—so it is convenient for
everyone. For students with a car, parking is free. Credit classes arc $75 per
credit hour for Chicago residents. Adult education classes are free.
Truman College is an international school. Many of the students are
from other countries and arc in ESL courses. Some of the students are
immigrants. Some of the students are international students. International
students are in the U.S. only to study. Tuition for international students is
- much higher.
Many of the students
have jobs, so evening
and weekend classes are
convenient for these students.
Some students have small
children, so Truman has a
I child-care center.
I The semester is 16 weeks
3 Kmg. A summer semester is 8
“ weeks long. Students are free
to choose their own classes.

‘Somethinc lli.it i. c<mi»nii-m is«s>- forymi. conv-eniunt location is near your house or near public iransporl.ilion.
Convenient el.isses are at a time that is itosul for you.

2 Lesson 1
 Read the following student composition. Pay special attention to is,
am, and are.

About Me

My name ie Ro\ando Lopez, I am from Guatemala.

I am a student at Truman College. My major Is
engineering. I am married, and I work during the day.
My engineering classes are at night, and my English
class is on Saturdays. The college is a good place for
me to start my education in the U.S. because the

tuition is \owand the attention to students is very

high. My plan is to take 60 credit hours here and then
go to a four-year college, such as the University of
Illinois, I like it here because the teachers are friendly
and helpful, and the students from other countries
are interesting. I am unhappy about one thing: Chicago
is cold in the winter.

1.1 Present-Tense Forms of Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Form of Be Complement

I am a college student. Use am with I.

My teacher an American, Use is with he, she, it, and singular

He friendly, subjects {teacher, college, wife).
My college is a City College,
It in Chicago,
My wife a student,
She busy.
We students, Use are with we, you, they, and plural
You are the teacher, subjects.
The students from all over the world,
They immigrants.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, Then, These, Those 3
 EXERCISE 1 Fill in the blanks with is, are, or am.
is Rolando Lopez.
EXAMPLE My name

1. I from Guatemala.

2. My wife from Mexico.

3. My wife and I students.

4. The University of Illinois a four-year college,

5. My classmates from many different countries.
6. We immigrants.
7. The professors at my college friendly and helpful.
8. My major engineering.

9. The semester 16 weeks long.

1,2 Uses of Be

( EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

The college is good. Use a form of be with a description of

Evening classes are convenient for me. the subject.
The tuition is low.
The teachers are very friendly.

Truman College is a community college. Use a form of be with a classification or

The University of Illinois is a four-year college. definition of the subject.

Truman College is in Chicago. Use a form of be with the location of the

Chicago is in Illinois. subject.
The college is near public transportation.
I am from Guatemala. Use a form of be with the place of origin
My wife is from Mexico. of the subject.

I am 24 years old. Use a form of be with the age of the

My teacher is about 40 years old. subject.

It is cold in Chicago in the winter. Use is with weather. The subject is it.
It is warm in Guatemala all year.
It is 6 o'clock now. Use is with time. The subject is it.
It is late.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks to make true statements. Answers will vary.
in Illinois
EXAMPLE Chicago is
(iocalion)

1. Chicago is a . Illinois is a state.

(cLissi/iaiiion)

4 Lesson 1
 2. My college is
(location)

3. The teacher is about years old.

(age)

4. The teacher is from

(fiiucc o/ origin)

5. It is now.
(time)

6. It is today.
(ucather)

7. This college is
(Jescription)

1.3 Word Order with Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Be Complement ● The subject is first. The subject tells

I am from Guatemala. whom or what we are talking about.
● The verb (am, is, ore) is second.
Guatemala IS in Central America.
● The complement is third. The
It IS
a small country. complement finishes, or completes, the
sentence with a location, classification,
Spanish IS my native language. description, etc.
You are from Vietnam.

It IS in Asia.

EXERCISE Q Put the words in the correct order to make a statement.

Use a capital letter at the beginning and a period at the end.
EXAMPLE a two-year college/my college/is My college is a two-year college.

1. am/I/a student

2. my parents/in Guatemala/are
3. high/is/tuition at a four-year college

4. is/convenient for me/my college

5. my teacher/is/40 years old
6. is/from New York/my teacher
7. eight weeks long/the summer semester/is

8. Rolando/married/is
9. cold/it/is/in the winter

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; Thh, Tuit, These, Those 5
1.4 The Subject
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I am from Guatemala. The subject pronouns are: I, you, he, she, it,
You are an American citizen. we, they.
It is warm in Guatemala.
We are happy in the United States.
Chicago is very big. ● Subject pronouns {it, she, he, they) can take
It is in Illinois. the place of nouns {Chicago, wife, teacher,
My wife is a student. parents).
She is from Mexico. ● A noun can be singular {my father) or plural
(my parents). A plural noun usually ends in s.
My teacher is American.
● When the subject is "another person and I,"
He is a native speaker of English.
put the other person before I. Use we to
My parents are in Guatemala. substitute for "another person and I."
They are happy.
Note: In conversation you sometimes hear
My wife and I are in the United States.
"me and another person" in the subject
We are in Chicago.
position. This is common but incorrect.
My classmates are from many countries. We use they for plural people and things.
They are immigrants.
English and math are my favorite subjects.
They are useful subjects.
The U.S. is a big country. The United States {the U.S.) is a singular
It is in North America. noun. Use the before United States or U.S.

You are a good teacher. You can be a singular or plural subject.

You are good students.
It is cold in Chicago in the winter. Use it to talk about time and weather.
It is 6 o'clock now.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the correct pronoun.

EXAMPLE Nicaragua and Guatemala are countries. They are in Centra! America.

1. My wife and I are students are students at Truman College.

2. Guatemala is a small country. is south of Mexico,

3. is warm in Guatemala all year.

ATLANTIC
0 C E A N
4. Some students are international students.
M <
are from China, Japan, and Spain,
●bih
5. am a busy person.
/ f ' .
PACIFIC
OCEAN
6. English is a hard language, IS
CMU PWWM * VMMCWM

Cbm Hit necessary in the U.S.

6 Lesson 1
 7. Adult classes at my college are free. are for ESL students.
8. My book is new. is Grammar in Context.

9. My parents are in Guatemala. _ are old.

10. My teacher is a nice woman. _ is from Boston.

11. My classmates and I are interested in American life, are

new in this country.

Journal Entry (by Maya Levina)

Before
You Reac Circle T for true or F for false and discuss your
answers.

1. All the students in my class are from the same

country. T F

2. Most of the students in my class are the same

age. T F

-I)) Read the following journal entry. Pay special

CD 1. TR 02 attention to contractionswith am, is, and are.

C..

c
College is so different here. Students in my class are all ages. I’m
22—that's a normal age for college students back home. But some
students here are in their 50s or 60s. One man in my class is 74. He’s from
<L Korea. This is very strange for me. but it’s interesting too. Some students
C.
are married. Most students have jobs, so we’re all very busy.
The students are from all over the world. One student’s from Puerto
C.
Rico. Her native language is Spanish, but Puerto Rico isn’t a foreign country
and it isn’t a state of the U.S. It’s a special territory. It’s a small island near
C. the U.S.
c The ciassroomsaredifferent here too. They’re big and comfortable. But
the desks are so small. Another strange thing is this: The desks are in a
c.
circle, not in rows.

c. In my country, education’s free. But here it’s so expensive. At my

c
college, the tuition’s $125 per credit hour. And books are expensive too.
The teacher’s young and informal. He’s about my age. His name’s Rich
c
Weiss, and he’s very friendly. We’re always welcome in his office after
c
class. But English is so hard, it’s not hard to read English, but it’s hard to
understand American speech.
c. I’m in Minneapolis. It’s in the northern part of the U.5. It’s January now.
c. It’s very cold here in the winter. But the summers are warm and sunny.
c. I’m happy to be in the U.5.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, That, Tlxcsc, Those 7
1.5 Contractions with Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I am I'm in Minneapolis. We can make a contraction with a subject

You are You're a student of English. pronoun and am, is, and are. We take out
She is She's a young teacher. the first letter of am, is, and are and put an
He is He's 74 years old. apostrophe (’) in its place. We usually use
It is It's cold in winter. contractionswhen we speak. We sometimes
We are We're so busy. use contractions in informal writing.
They are They're big.
My class is big. We don't make a contraction with is if the
Beli^ is in Central America. noun ends in these sounds: s, z, sh, ch, or
English is the language of the U.S. soft g.
Rich is my English teacher.
College is different here.
Books are expensive. We don't make a contraction with a plural
The classrooms are big. noun and are.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the correct form of be {am, is, or are).
Make a contraction whenever possible. Not every sentence can
have a contraction.

EXAMPLE The United States ie a big country. It ^ between

Canada and Mexico.

1. Puerto Rico an island. Puerto Ricans

American citizens.

2. English the main language of the U.S. Spanish and

English the languages of Puerto Rico.
3. My classmates and I immigrants. We in

the U.S.

4. Maya in Minneapolis. She at a city

college there.
5. Minneapolis _ a big city. It in the northern part
of the U.S.

6. The teacher informal. He friendly,

7. The students _ from all over the world. They
nice people.
8. The classroom on the first floor. It big.

8 Lesson 1
 EXERCISE Fill in the blanks. Make a contraction whenever possible.
Not every sentence can have a contraction,
●i)) I’m
CD 1, TR 03
(exampL’;
a student of English at Truman College m
(0

happy in the U.S. My teacher American. His

(2)

name Charles Madison. Charles an

(3) H)

experienced teacher. patient with foreign students.

15)

My class big- interesting. All the students

<6) (7)

immigrants, but we from many different

(8) (9)

countries. Five students from Asia. One woman

(10) (ii)

from Poland. from Warsaw, the capital of Poland. Many

(12)

students from Mexico.

(13)

We ready to learn English, but English a

(W (15)

difficult language. 1 sometimes tell Charles, “You a very kind

06)

teacher.” Charles says all good students, and 1

07) 08)

happy to teach you English.

1.6 Be with Descriptions

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Be (Very) Adjective After a form of be, we can use a word that
My teacher IS young, describes the subject. Descriptive words
The desks are very small, are adjectives. Very can come before an
The weather IS cold in winter. adjective.

The school is big. Descriptive adjectives have no plural form.

The classrooms are big. Wrong-. The classrooms are bigs.
Some of my classmates are married. Some words that end with -ed and -ing are
My class is interesting. adjectives: married, divorced, worried, tired,
I'm interested in American life. interested, interesting, bored, boring.
It's cold. We use a form of be with physical or mental
I'm thirsty. conditions: hungry, thirsty, cold, hot, tired,
We're afraid. happy, etc.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, T/uit, TTiese, Those 9
 EXERCISE a Complete each statement with a subject and the correct form of be.
Write a contraction wherever possible. Make a true statement. Use
both singular and plural subjects.
EXAMPLES Mv teachers are intelligent.

The library’s quiet.

1. expensive.

2. cheap.
3. new.

4. big.
5. friendly,
6. difficult.

7. interesting.

8. married.

EXERCISE 8 Write a form of be and an adjective to describe each of the

following nouns. You may work with a partner,
EXAMPLES This classroom is clean.

New York City is interestinfi.

1. The teacher

2. This city
3. This college
4. Today’s weather
5. American students
6. The school library
7. The students in this class

8. The tuition at this school

9. The school cafeteria

10. I

10 Lesson 1
1.7 Be with Definitions
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Singular Be A/An Singular We use a noun after a form of be to classify or

Subject Noun define the subject.
I student,
am a
Use a or an before the definition of a singular
You are a teacher, noun. Use a before a consonant sound. Use an
Puerto Rico is an island. before a vowel sound. (The vowels are a, e, i, o, u.)
Plural Be Plural Don't use a or an before the definition of a plural
Subject Noun noun.

You and I are students. Wrong: You and I are a students.

They are Americans.

Subject Be (A) Adjective Noun We can include an adjective as part of the

Chicago is big definition.
a city.
We are good students.

EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks to change from a singular subject to a plural

subject.
EXAMPLE Math is a subject.
Math and biologyare subjects.

1. I am a student.

and I
2. Chicago is a city.
Chicago and
3. Wednesday is a school day.
Wednesday and
4. Rick is an English teacher.
Rick and
5. Spanish is a language.
Spanish and
6. Puerto Rico is an island.

Puerto Rico and

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, That, These, Those 11
 EXERCISE fSI Add an adjective to each statement. Be careful to use a before
a consonant sound and an before a vowel sound.
EXAMPLE Maya is a student.
Maya is a new student.

1. January is a month. 4. I’m a student.

2. Puerto Rico is an island. 5. Minneapolis and Chicago are cities.

3. Grammar in Context is a book. 6. History is a subject.

EXERCISE fO Fill in the blanks with the correct form of be. Add a or an for
singular nouns only. Don't use an article with plural nouns.
EXAMPLES The U.S. iea big country.
The U.S. and Canada are
big countries.

1. The University of Illinois state university.

2. It old university.
3. Chicago interesting city.

4. Chicago and New York big cities.

5. You English teacher.
6. Some students immigrants.

EXERCISE fS Fill in the blanks to talk about this dty. Make true statements.
Remember to add a or an for a singular noun. You may work with
a partner.
EXAMPLES Chez Paul is an expensive restaurant in this city.
January and February are cold months in this city.

1. popular tourist attraction.

2. big stores.
3. beautiful months.

4. beautiful park.
5. inexpensive restaurant.
6. busy streets.
7. good college.

12 Lesson 1
 EXERCISE 13 Fill in the blanks to make true statements about the U.S.
EXAMPLES Hip-hop music is popular.
Mhletes are irch.

1.
the biggest city,
2.
the most common language(s).
3.
a popular sport.
4. a common last name.
5. a beautiful place.

1.8 Prepositions of Place

We use prepositions to show location and origin.
PREPOSITION EXAMPLES

On The book is on the table.

m
The cafeteria is on the first floor. ]

At (a general area) I am at school.

.fA
My brother is at home.
They are at work.

In (a complete or The students are in the classroom.

partial enclosure) The wastebasket is in the corner.

In front of The blackboard is in front of the students.

In back of/Behind The teacher is in back of the desk. is*

The blackboard is behind the teacher. "'-A'-

Between The empty desk is between the two students.

Over/Above The exit sign is over the door. o

IJOl

The clock is above the exit sign.

(concmwed)
Thi; Prc.sent Tense of che Verb Be; Prepo.sition.s of Place; This, That. These, Those 13
 PREPOSITION EXAMPLES

Below/Under The green textbook is below the desk.

The red dictionary is under the textbook.

By/Near/Close to The pencil sharpener is by the window.

The pencil sharpener is near the window.
The pencil sharpener is close to the window. %

Next to The light switch is next to the door.

-M.
Far from Los Angeles is far from New York.

Across from Room 202 is across from Room 203.

In (a city) The White House is in Washington, D.C.

On (a street) The White House is on Pennsylvania Avenue.
At (an address) The White House is at 1600 Pennsylvania Avenue.
From Rolando is from Central America. He is from Guatemala.

EXERCISE C ABOUT YOU Use a form of be and a preposition to tell the location
of these things or people in your classroom or school.
EXAMPLE My dictionary
My dictionary is in my book bag.

1. My classroom
2. I

3. The library
4. The cafeteria

5. The parking lot

6. The teacher

7. We

8. My books

14 Lesson 1
1.9 Negative Statements with Be
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I am not married. We put not after a form of be to make a

Maya is not at home. negative statement.
We are not Americans.

English isn't my native language. We can make contractions for the negative.
The students aren't in the cafeteria now.

Language Note: There is only one contraction for 1 am not There are two negative contractions
for all the other combinations. Study the negative contractions:
I am not I'm not
you are not you're not you aren't
he is not he's not he isn't
she is not she's not she isn't
it is not it's not it isn't
we are not we're not we aren't
they are not they're not they aren't
Tom is not Tom's not Tom isn't

EXERCISE 15 Fill in the blanks with a pronoun and a negative verb.

Practice using both negative forms, if possible.
EXAMPLE The classroom is clean and big.
It isn’t dirty. It’s not small.

1. We’re in the classroom.

in the library. in the

cafeteria.

2. Today’s a weekday.
Saturday. Sunday.
3. I’m a student.

a teacher.

4. The students are busy.

lazy. tired.

5. You’re on time.

early late.

6. My classmates and 1 are in an English class.

in the cafeteria in the
library.

The Present Ten.se of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; Tim, That, These, Those 15
 EXERCISE Ca ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks with a form of be to make a true
affirmative statement or negative statement.
EXAMPLES busy on Saturdays,
isn’t in the morning.
My English class

1. My class small.

2. The students . all the same age.

3. The students _ from many countries.
4. Books in the U.S. expensive,
5. The teacher from my native country.
6. The seats in this class in a circle.

7. I a full-time student.

8. My classes easy,

9. We in the computer room now.

EXERCISE f9 Put a check under "true" or "false" to give your opinion. Discuss
your ideas.
True False

1. English is easy for me.

2. English is easy for children.
3. American teachers are very strict.’
4. This school is in a nice area.

5. This course is expensive.

6. Most Americans are friendly.
7. A college education is important.
8. Algebra is an important subject.

EXERCISE ABOUT YOU If you are from another country, tell your classmates
about life there. Fill in the blanks with a form of be to make an
affirmative or negative statement,
EXAMPLES I !ni from the capital city,
1 'm not from a small town.

1. 1 happy with the government of my country,

2. I from the capital city.
3. American cars common in my country.

4. Teachers strict.

*A sine; icacKcr has a lot ot* rules.

16 Lesson 1
 5. Most people rich.

6. Gas cheap.
7. Apartments. expensive,

8. Bicycles a popular form of transportation.

9. Public transportation _ good,
10. A college education free.

11. The president/prime minister a woman.

12. My hometown in the mountains.

13. My hometown very big.

14. It very cold in the winter in my hometown.
15. Cell phones popular in my country.

EXERCISE 19
Use the words in parentheses () to change each sentence into a
negative statement.
EXAMPLE My teacher is American. (Canadian)
He isn’t Canadian.

1. Los Angeles and Chicago are cities, (states)

2. I’m from Guatemala. (Mexico)

3. The U.S. is a big country. (Guatemala)

4. We’re in class now. (in the library)

5. You’re an English teacher, (a math teacher)

6. Chicago and Springfield are in Illinois. (Miami)

7. January is a cold month in Chicago. (July and August)

EXERCISE @ ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks with the affirmative or negative of
the verb be to make a true paragraph.
is from an
My name . I
(iiampli;) (joKi name) (/)

English-speaking country. I a student at a community college.

(2)

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; T/uii, These, Those 17
 in my English class now. The class (4)
(3)

big. My teacher a man. He/She very

(5) (6)

very nice. It clean.

young. The classroom (7) (8)

My classmates all very young students. We no)

(9)

all from the same country. We all immigrants.

ni)

Conversation About College

Before
You Read 1. Is your family in this city?
2. How do you communicate with your family and friends from
other cities?

■^)) Read the following conversation between Mohammad (M),

CD 1, TR 04 a student in the U.S., and Ali (A), his brother back home.
Pay special attention to questions.

A: Hi, Mohammad.

M: Hi, Ali. How are you?

A: I’m fine.

M: Where are you now?

A; I’m in the college

computer lab. Are
you at home?

M: Yes, I am. It’s late.

A: It’s 4:15 P.M. here.

What time is it
there?

M: It’s 1:15 A.M. here.

A: Why are you still up?^

M: r m not sleepy.

‘To be up means lo hv awoke.

18 Lesson 1
A: Why aren’t you sleepy?
M: I’m nervous about my test tomorrow.
A: Why are you nervous?

M; Because my class is very hard.

A: How’s college life in the U.S.? Is it very different from here?
M: Yes, it is. But it’s exciting for me. My new classmates are so interesting.
They’re from many countries and are all ages. One man in my class is
very old.
A: How old is he?

M: He’s 75.
I
A: Are you serious?

M: Of course, I’m serious. He’s an interesting man and a great student.

A: Where’s he from?

M: Korea.

A: All my classmates are young.

M: Where are Mom and Dad?

A: They’re at work.
M: Are they worried about me?
A: A little.

M: Why?
A: Because there’s so much freedom in the U.S.

M: Tell them I’m a good student. I’m on the dean’s list.

A: What’s that?

M: It’s a list of students with a high grade point average.

A: That’s great. Bye for now.
M: Bye.

The Present Ten.se of the Verb be; Preposition.s of Place; T/iis, That, These. Those 19
1.10 Be in Yes/No Questions and Short Answers
Compare statements, yes/no questions, and short answers.
SHORT ANSWER EXPLANATION
STATEMENT YES/NO QUESTION
I am a student. Am I a good student? Yes, you are. ● In a yesfno question, we
You are in bed. Are you sleepy? No, I'm not. put om, is, or are before the
He is old. Is he a good student? Yes, he is. subject.
She is from Africa. Is she from Nigeria? No, she isn't. ● We usually answer ayes/no
It is cold today. Is it windy? Yes, it is. question with a short answer.
We are here. Are we late? No, you aren't. A short answer contains a
They are worried. Are they angry? No, they aren't. pronoun.

Language Note: We don't use a contraction for a short yes answer. We usually use a contraction
for a short no answer.
Pronunciation Note: We usually end a yes/no question with rising intonation. Listen to your
teacher pronounce the questions above.

EXERCISE 61 Answer the questions based on the conversation on pages 18 to 19.

EXAMPLES Is Ali in the U.S.? Is Mohammad in the U.S.?
No, he isn’t. Yes, he is.

1. Is Mohammad tired?

2. Are Ali’s parents at work?

3. Are they worried about Mohammad?
4. Is it the same time in the U.S. and in Mohammad’s native country?

5. Is Mohammad a good student?

6. Are all the students in Mohammad’s class from the same country?

7. Is Ali at home?

EXERCISE @ ABOUT YOU Close your book. The teacher will ask you some
questions. Answer with a true short answer. If the answer is
negative, you may add more information.
EXAMPLE Is your book new?
Yes, it is.

1. Is your hometown big? 6. Am I a strict teacher?

2. Is Spanish your native language? 7. Are all of you from the same
3. Is English hard for you? country?
4. Are you a citizen of the U.S.? 8. Are all of you the same age?
5. Is my pronunciation clear to you?

20 Lesson 1
 EXERCISE 23 Ask and answer questions about this school and this class. Use the
words given. Use the correct form of be.
EXAMPLE school/big
A: Is this school big?
B: Yes, it is.

1. it/near public transportation 6. this course/free

2. the cafeteria/on this floor 7. the textbooks/free
3. it/opennow 8. the teacher/strict
4. the library/in this building 9. this room/clean
5. it/closed now 10. it/big

EXERCISE ABOUT YOU Ask another student questions about his or her
country with the words given,
EXAMPLE movie stars/rich
A; Are movie stars rich in your country?
B: Yes, they are. They’re very rich.

1. a high school education/free 6. houses/expensive

2. college books/free 7. people/friendly
3. medical care/free 8. Japanese cars/popular
4. doctors/rich 9. fast'food restaurants/popular
5. jeans/popular 10. movie tickets/cheap

1.11 Wh- Questions with Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Wh- Word Be Subject Complement A wh- question asks for

Where are Mom and Dad? information.

Why are they worried?

How old is the teacher?
Where is he from?
Why aren't you sleepy?

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, TIuit, These, Those 21
study the question words below.
MEANING OF
QUESTION ANSWER
QUESTION WORD

Who is your teacher? My teacher is Rich Weiss. Who = person

Who are those people? They're my parents.

What is your classmate's name? His name is Park. What “thing

What is that? It's a cell phone.

When is your test? It's on Friday. When = time

When is the class over? It's over at 10 o'clock.

Why are they worried? They're worried because you're alone. Why = reason
Why aren't you in bed? I'm not in bed because I'm not tired.

Where is your classmate from? He's from Korea. Where = place

Where are Mom and Dad now? They're at work.
Which is your book, the green The green one is my book. Which = specific
or the red? thing
Which class is your favorite? English is my favorite class.
How is your life in the U.S.? It's great! How = description,
How are you? I'm fine. health, or weather
How is the weather? It's cold today.

Language Notes:
1. The wh- word + is can form a contraction: who's, what's, when's, where's, how's, why's.
We can't make a contraction for which is.
We can't make a written contraction for a wh- word + are.

2. We usually end a wh- question with falling intonation. Listen to your teacher say the
questions in the boxes above.

EXERCISE ^3 It's the first day of school and two students, Maya and Ricardo, are
talking. Fill in the blanks with the correct question word and a form
of be. Make contractions, if possible.

R; You’re in my math class, right?

M: Yes, I am. What’s your name?
Icxnmple)
R: Ricardo Gomez. your name:
?

(I)

M: Maya Levina. I think we’re in the same English class too.

R: your English teacher?

<2i

M: Rich Weiss.

R: He’s my English teacher too. your class?

(3)

M: It’s at 7:30 I’.M. on Monday and Wednesday.

22 Lesson 1
 R: That’s my class, too!
M: I’m from Russia you from?
(4)

R: I’m from Costa Rica.

M: Costa Rica?
151

R: It’s in Central America,

M: you here?
(6)

R: I’m here to learn English and get my degree in engineering.

M: I’m here to learn English too.
R:
(7)
that big book with the funny letters?
M: Tliat’s my Russian/English dictionary.
The Russian alphabet is different.

I
R: English is hard. But my
alphabet is the same.

I
M: I’m late for my computer class.
See you later in English class.
R: Bye now.

EXERCISE 26 Test your knowledge. Circle the correct answer to the following
questions. Use the map in Appendix K to help with some items. The
answers are at the end of the exercise. You may work with a partner.
1. Where’s Dallas?
a. in California b. in Texas C. in Illinois

2. When is American Independence Day?

a. July 4 b. May 31 c. December 25

3. It’s 8 A.M. in New York. What time is it in Los Angeles?

a. 11 A.M. b. 5 A.M. c. 10 A.M.

4. On what day is Thanksgiving?

a. on Friday b. on Sunday C. on Thursday
5. Which one of these is the name of a Great Lake?
a. Mississippi b. Missouri c. Michigan

6. Where is the Statue of Liberty?

a. in San Francisco b. in New York City c. in Los Angeles
The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, T/uit, These, Those 23
 7. What is the first day of summer?
a. June 1 b. June 21 C. June 30

8. When is Labor Day in the U.S.?

a. in May b. in June C. in September

9. What's the biggest state?

a. Alaska b. Texas C. New York

Answers: lb, 2a, 3b, 4c, 5c, 6b, 7b, 8c, 9a

1.12 Comparing Statements and Questions with Be

Affirmative Statements and Questions
Wh- Word Be Subject Be Complement Short Answer

Mom and Dad are out.

Are they at the store? No, they aren't.
Where are they?
It IS late.
Is it 1 A.M.? No, it isn't.
What time IS it?

Negative Statements and Questions

Wh- Word Be + n't Subject Be + n't Complement
You aren't in bed.
Why aren't you sleepy?
He isn't in the U.S.
Why isn't he with his parents?

EXERCISE 27 Respond to each statement with a question.

EXAMPLE Mom and Dad are not here. Where are they?

1. Mom and Dad are worried about you. Why.

2. I’m not sleepy. Why
3. My teacher is great. Who
4. My classes are early. When
5. My roommate’s name is hard to pronounce.
What

6. My cell phone isn’t on. Why

7. Mom isn’t in the kitchen. Where

24 Lesson 1
1.13 Questions with What and How
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

What is a verb? What can ask for a definition.

It's an action word.

What is the dean's list?

It's a list of the best students.

What nationality is the teacher? A noun can follow what:

She's American. ● what nationality
What day is today? ● what day
● what time
It's Friday.
● what color
What time is it?
It's 4:15 p.M.
● what kind of
● what month
What color is the dictionary?
It's yellow.
What kind of book is this?
It's a grammar book.
How is your new class? We can use how to ask for a description.
It's great.
How is the weather today? We use how to ask about the weather.
It's cool.

How is your sister? We can use how to ask about health.

She's fine.

How old is your brother? An adjective or adverb can follow how:

He's 16 (years old). ● how old
● how tall
How tall are you?
I'm 5 feet, 3 inches tall. ● how long
● how much
How long is this course? ● how big
It's 16 weeks long. ● how fast
How long is the table?
It's 3 feet long.
How much is the tuition at this college?
It's $75 per credit hour.
Usage Notes:
1. For height, Americans use feet (') and inches (").
He's 5 feet, 8 inches tall, or He's five-eight, or He's 5'8".‘'
2. How are you? is often just a way to say hello. People usually answer, "Fine, thanks.
How are you?"

'See Appendix G for tonversion from feet tind indies to meters ami centimeters.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, That, These, Those 25
 EXERCISE @ Fill in the blanks to complete the questions.
EXAMPLE How old are your parents? They’re in their 50s.

1. What_ _it?

It’s 3 o’clock.
2. What car ●that?
That’s a Japanese car.
3, What words tall, old,
neif, and good?
They’re adjectives.
4. What your new car?
It’s dark blue.
7
5. How
My son is 10 years old.
6. How
My brother is 6 feet tall.
7
7. How
I’m 25 years old.
7
8. How
That car is $10,000.
9. How
The movie is 2 '/z hours long.

EXERCISE @ ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks to make true statements about yourself.
Then find a partner from a different country, if possible, and interview
your partner by asking questions with the words in parentheses ().
EXAMPLE I’m from Bosnia . (Where)

A: I’m from Bosnia. Where are you from?

B: I’m from Taiwan.

1. My name is _. (What)

2. I’m from . (Where)

3. The president/prime minister of my country is

. (Who)

4. The flag from my country is (What colors)

5. My country is in ,. (Where)
(coniinfm or icjjion)
6. I’m feet, inches tall. (How tall)

7. My birthday is in (When)
(7iion[K)
8. My favorite TV show is _. (What)
26 Lesson 1
EXERCISE 13 Complete the following phone conversation between Cindv fC)
and Maria (M). ' ^
C: Hello?
CD 1, TR 05
M: Hi, Cindy. This is Maria.
C: Hi, Maria. How are you 7

(example)

M; I’m fine.
C: your first
(j)

day of class?
M: Yes, it is. I’m at school now, but
I’m not in class.

C: Why- in class?
(21

M: Because it’s break time now.

C: How the break?
fj)

M: It’s 10 minutes long.

C: How 7

M: My English class is great. My

classmates are very interesting.
C: Where from?
(5)

M: They’re from all over the world.

C: American?
(6)

M: Yes. My teacher is American. What time 7

(1)

C: It’s 3:35.

M: Oh, I’m late.

C: Let’s get together soon. Are you free this weekend?
M: I’m free on Saturday afternoon.
C: I have a class on Saturday.
M: When free?
(8)

C: On Sunday afternoon.
M: Sunday’s fine. Talk to you later.

The Present Ten.se of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, Then, These, Those 27
In the School Cafeteria

Before
You Reac 1. Do you like American food?
2. Do you eat in the school cafeteria?

Read the following conversation between an American student (A)

CD 1, TR 06 and his Chinese roommate (C). Pay special attention to this, that,
these, and those.

A: Is this your first time in an American college?

C: Yes, it is.

A: Let me show you around the cafeteria. This is the cafeteria for students.
That’s the cafeteria for teachers. The vending machines are in that
room. When the food service is closed, that room is always open.

C: The food is in a machine?

A: Yes. And that’s the change machine. This is the line for hot food.
C: What are those?

A: They’re tacos.
C: Tacos? What are
tacos?

A: They’re Mexican
food.

C: What’s that?

A: It’s pizza. It’s Italian food.

C: What’s this?

A: It’s chop suey. It’s a Chinese dish.

C: I’m from China, and I’m sure this is not a Chinese dish. Where’s the
American food in America?

A: This is American food—Mexican, Italian, Chinese—it’s all American food.

C: Where are the chopsticks?
A: Uh . . . chopsticks? Those are the forks and knives, but there are no
chopsticks here.

28 Lesson 1
1.14 This, That, These, Those
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Singular This is pizza. Use this and these to identify near objects
Plural These are tacos. and people.
Singular That is the change machine. Use that and those to identify far objects and
Plural Those are forks and knives. people.

This is pizza. It's an Italian food. After we identify a noun, we can use subject
Those are knives and forks. They're clean. pronouns.
That's my teacher. She's a nice woman.
That room is for the teachers. A noun can follow this, that, these, and those.
Those forks are clean.

Language Note: Only that is can form a contraction in writing: That's the change machine.

EXERCISE §9 Imagine that you are showing a new student the school cafeteria.
Use this, that, these, and those, and a form of be to complete each
statement. The arrows indicate if the item is near or far.
EXAMPLES This is the school cafeteria,
Thoseare the clean dishes. —

1. the trays. —>

2. today’s special. —>
3. the napkins.
4. the forks, knives, and spoons,
5. the cashier. —>

6. the vending machines. —>

7. the eating area.
8. the teachers’ section.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, That, These, Those 29
Summary of Lesson 1

1. Uses of Be
DESCRIPTION: Chicago is big.
identification/classification: This is Chicago. It is a cit>’.
LOCATION: Chicago is in Illinois.
PlAiCE OF ORIGIN; The teacher is from Chicagcx
AGE: 1 am 25 (years old).
PHYSICAL OR MENTAL CONDITION: He is hungry. I am thirst>'.
She is worried.
TIME: It is 6 P.M.
WEATHER; It is warm today.
2. Subject Pronouns
I we he she it you they
3. Contractions
Subject pronoun + form of be:
I’m, you’re, he’s, she’s, it’s, we’re, they’re
Subject noun + is: the teacher’s, Tom’s, Mary’s
Is or are + not: isn’t, aren’t
Wh'word + is: what’s, when’s, where’s, why’s, how’s, who’s
4. Articles a/an
Chicago is a big city.
Puerto Rico is an island.

5. Statements and Questions with Be

AFF1RM.ATIVE: She is busy.
NEGATIVE: She isn’t lazy.
YES/NO QUESTION: Is she busy on Saturday?
SHORT ANSWER: No, she isn’t.
WH' QUESTION: When is she busy?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why isn't she busy on Saturday?
AFFIRMATIVE: You are late.
NEGATIVE: You aren’t on time.
yes/no QUESTION: Are you OK?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, I am.
WH- QUESTION: Why are you late?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why aren’t you on time?
6. This/That/These/Those
This is an English book.
That is a pen.
These are pencils.
Those are pens.

30 Lesson 1
Editing Advice

1. Don’t repeat the subject with a pronoun.

My father he Lives in Australia.

2.
Use the correct word order. Put the subject at the beginning of the
statement.

Cuta is small.
Is small Cuba.

3.
Use the correct word order. Put the adjective before the noun,
small country.
Cuba is a eeuntry smalL
4. Use the correct word order in a question,
is he
Where he-is from?

5. Every sentence has a verb. Don’t omit be.

is

My sister^a teacher.
6. Every sentence has a subject. For time and weather, the subject is it.
It’s
Is 6 o'clock now.
It's

Is very cold today.

7. Don’t confuse this and these.
This

Those is my coat.
These

This are my shoes.

8. Use the before US. and United States.
the
My sister is in U.S.

9. Don’t use a contraction for am not.

I'm not
I am n't an American.

10. Put the apostrophe in place of the missing letter,

isn't

She here today.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; This, TIuu, These, Those 31
 11. Use an apostrophe, not a comma, for a contraction.
I’m
a good student.
12. Use the article a or an before a singular noun.
a

New York is big city. A

an

San Francisco is interesting city.A

13. Don’t use a before plural nouns.

July and August are a warm months.

14. Don’t use the article a before an adjective with no noun.

New York is a big.

15. For age, use a number only or a number + jears old.

He's 12 years, or He’s 12 years old,

16. Don’t use a contraction for a short yes answer.

lam

Are you from Mexico? Yes,

17. Don’t separate how from the adjective or adverb,

old is he?
How is-ho old?

18. Don’t make a contraction with is after s, z, sh, or ch sounds.

IS

Los Angeles^ a big city. A

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
C I’m
A: Hi. My name’s Leo. -Lm from Latvia. What’s your name?
(exiimple) (ixutnpW (U

B: My name’s Diane.
12)

A: Nice to meet you, Diane. Where youl3l are from?

32 Lesson 1
 B: I from Burundi.
(4)

A: Where Burundi is?

(5)

B:
Ik
(6)
in Central Africa. Burundi is a country very small
What’s Latvia? It is a city or a country^
i9> ’
A: Latvia is country. It s in Europe. Tell me more about Burundi.

What’s the language of Burundi?

My native language^isKirundi. French’s also a language in Burundi.
B:

Whats your native language?

A: Latvian. Russian’s also a language in Latvia.
(151

B: We both speak several languages! Cool!

A: You are married?
U6)

B: Yes, I’m. My husband he is’nt from Burundi. He’s from Congo.

(17) (18) (191 (20)

Are you married?

(21)

A; No, I I’rti only 18 years.

(23)
I’m in U.S. with my parents and sister.
(24)

B: How your sister is old?

(25)

A: She’s 16.
(26)

B: Is in high school your sister?

(27)

A: Yes, she is.

(28)

B: '^is are pictures of my kids, Joseph and Jimmy.

A: Are they a twins?

B: No. Jimmy has

(31)
eight and Joseph has seven years.
(32)

A: They’re a cute.
(33)

B: This is a interesting exercise, but is time to go. Fun talking to you.

134) (35) ’
A: Same here.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; Tliis, That, Tliese, Those 33
Lesson 1 Test/Review
PART 1 Fill in the blanks to complete this conversation. Use contractions, if
possible. Not all blanks need a word. If the blank doesn't need
a word, write 0.

A: Where are you from ?

(rtiimpL:)
0 Mexico.
B: I’m from
fejampli)

A: Are you happy in . U.S.?

(i)

B: Yes, I The U.S. is great country.

(2) (3)

A: from big city?

(4) (5)

B: Yes. I’m from Mexico City. It’s very big city. This city is
16)

big too. But cold in the winter.

(7) (8)

A: from Mexico too?

(9)

B: No. My roommate from Taiwan. I’m happy in the

no)

U.S., but he happy here.

(ID

A: Why happy?
(12)

B: He homesick. His parents in Taiwan.

(13) (14)

He alone here.
(15)

?
A: How
(16)

B: He’s very young. He only 18 years

(17) (IS)

A: What his name?

(19)

B: His name Lu.

(20)

34 Lesson 1
PART Q Write a contraction of the words shown. If it's not possible to write
a contraction, put an / in the blank,
EXAMPLES she is she’s

X
English is

1. we are
6. Los Angeles is
2. you are not
7. Mary is not
3. I am not 8. he is not
4. they are 9. what is
5. this is 10. what are

PART O Read the conversation between two students, Sofia (S) and
Danuta (D). They are talking about their classes and teachers.
Fill in the blanks. Use contractions, if possible.
D: Hi, Sofia. How’s your English class?
S: Hi, Danuta. It ^ wonderful. I very happy with it.
(exampli;) (I)

D: .’m in level 3. What level in?

(2) ii)

S: I in level 2.
i-ti

D: My English teacher Ms. Kathy James. a very

(5) (6)

good teacher. Who ?

(7)

S: Mr. Bob Kane is my English teacher. very good too.

18}

D: an old man?
t9)

S: No, he . He’s young man. He

(JO) (JJ) (J2)

about 25 years .. How

(J3) (14)

D: Ms. James about 50 years old.

(I5J

S: How ?

(16)

D: She’s about 5 feet, 6 inches tall.

S: Is she American?

D: Yes, she . She’s from New York.

IJ7)

S: 7

(18)

The Pre.sent Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; T/u's, TTuit, These, Those 35
 from many
D: Yes. My class is very big. The students 119)

countries. Ten students from Asia, six students

(20)

from Europe, one student from Africa, and

(22)
(21)

five are Central America. Is your class big?

(23)

S: No, it
(24)
?
D: Where
(25)

S: The students all from the same country. We

(26) (27)

all from Russia.

D: Russian?
(28)

S: No. Mr. Kane isn’t Russian. He’s from Canada, but he’s
(29)

American citizen now.

7
D:
(30)

S: No. That’s not Mr. Kane. That my husband. I (32)

1311

late! See you later.

Expansion
Classroom
Activities O write a few sentences about yourself. Give your height, a physical
description, your nationality, your occupation, your age (optional),
and your gender (man or woman). Put the papers in a box. The teacher
will read each paper. Guess which classmate is described.
EXAMPLE I’m 5 feet, 8 inches tall.
I’m Mexican.
I’m thin.
I’m 21 years old and male.

36 Lesson I
 0 Work with a partner. Describe a famous person (an actor, a singer,
an athlete, a politician, etc.). Report your description to the class. Do
not give the person's name. See if your classmates can guess who it is.
EXAMPLE He is a former basketball player.
He’s tall.
He’s famous.
He’s African-American.

O Check the words that describe you. Find a partner and ask each
other questions using these words. See how many things you have
in common. Tell the class something interesting you learned about
your partner,

a. happy g> afraid to speak English

b. from Africa h. an only child’
c. from Asia i. an American citizen
d. from Europe J- hungry
e.
interested in politics k. married
f. under 20 years old 1. athletic

O Work with a partner from the same country, if possible. Fill in a

few items for each category. Report some information to the class.
EXAMPLE Typical of the U.S.

Common Popular Popular Language(s) Capital city Other

last names tourist sports big cities
attractions

Johneon Disneyland baseball English Washington New York

Wilson
Grand Canyon basketball Los Angeles
football Chicago

Typical of (name of country)

Common Popular Popular Language(s) Capital city Other

last names tourist sports big cities
attractions

Wn onK chiU has no si>tcrs t»r hrivthers.

The Present Tense of the Verb Be; Prepositions of Place; TTiis, That, These, Those 37
Talk
About It Give your opinion. Fill in the blanks and discuss your answers.
1. Colleges/schools in the U.S. are
2. Students in the U.S. are
3. Parking at this school is
4. The textbook for this course is
5. The teachers at this college/school are
6. The location of this college/school is

Write
About It Write a paragraph using Exercise 20 as a model. For every negative
statement that you write, add an affirmative statement. You may add
other information, too.

EXAMPLE

About Me

My name is Mohammad. I’m not from an English

speaking country. I'm from Iran, I’m not a student at
City College. I’m a student at Roosevelt University. I’m
in English class now,.,

For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

38 Lesson 1
 Lesson

Grammar
The Simple Present
Tense

Context
The United States

●Ay ■.y m:r

'. *' ●i'r t- t, '~S
■:m
X
’'XK- ,T?-V
V
● *.H.
●r/ V V. '●'ft*
9^ ●tS X.

)*

T? tffrr...
<
. t* : / r'

K* ;
r“* n-
’^.rvl -fl

The White House, Washington, D.C.

'm/, -.y.
●y

■P-"':
Washington, D.C.
Before
You Read 1. What capital cities do you know?
2. What do you know about Washington, D.C.?

●i)) Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to the
CD 1, TR 07 present-tense verbs.^

Washington, D.C., is the capital pf the United States.

"D.C." means District of Columbia. The District of Columbia
is not a state; it is a special government district. It is very small. It is only
61 square miles (158 square kilometers). More than half a million people
Did You live in Washington. Washington doesn’t have factories. Government and
Know? 1 tourism are the main businesses of Washington. Washington doesn’t have
The first location tall buildings like other big cities.
oftheU.S. capital Some people who work in
Washington don’t live there. They
City.
live in the nearby states: Virginia and
Maryland. Washington has a good
subway (Metro) system. It connects
Washington to nearby cities in Virginia
and Maryland.
The Capitol, the building where
Congress meets, is on a hill. Senators
and representatives from each state
work on Capitol Hill. They make the
country’s laws.
Tourists from all over the United
States and many other countries
visit Washington. They come to see
the White House and the Capitol The Capitol
building. Many visitors want to see
the Vietnam War Memorial. This wall of dark stone lists all the names of
American soldiers who died in the war in Vietnam.
Besides government buildings, Washington also has many important
museums and monuments. The Smithsonian Institution has a zoo and 19
museums.

Tourists don’t pay to see government buildings and museums. However,

they need tickets to see many places because these places are crowded.
A trip to Washington is an enjoyable and educational experience.

'Sec the map in Appemlix K to find the location of Waxhington, D C.

40 Lesson 2
2.1 Simple Present Tense—Forms
A simple present-tense verb has two forms: the base form and the -s form.
' EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Base Form Complement We use the base form when the subject is
I
I, you, we, they, or a plural noun.
You
We live in Washington.
They
My friends

Subject -s Form Complement We use the -j form when the subject is

He
he, she, it, or a singular noun.
She
Family is a singular subject.
It lives in Washington.
The president
My family

I have friends in Washington, D.C. Have is an irregular verb,

Washington has many museums. have —> has

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb.
EXAMPLE Visitors lika the museums.
(likeAikes)

1. The president in the White House.

((iu/iim)

2. Many people in Washington for the government.

(u'orli/u'orki)

3. Washington many beautiful museums.

(hai'e/hai)

4. Millions of tourists Washington every year.

(I'isit/i'isiK)

5. The Metro Washington to nearby cities.

(connecl/connecis)

6. The Vietnam War Memorial the names of men and

(lisl/lists)

women who died in the war.

7. “D.C. District of Columbia.

The Simple Present Tense 41

2.2 Simple Present Tense—Uses
EXAMPLES USES

The president lives in the White House. With general truths, to show that something
Washington has a good subway system is consistently true
(the Metro).
The president shakes With customs
-B

hands with many k.

people.

I
He waves to people. t
V.

We take a vacation every summer. To show regular activity (a habit) or

We sometimes go to Washington. repeated action
I come from Bosnia. To show place of origin
He comes from Pakistan.

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Write the correct form of the verb. Add more words to
give facts about you and your country,
EXAMPLE I come from Colombia.
(come)

1. In my native city, 1 especially

(liM

2. My family
(live)

3. The capital of my country

(have)

4. Most people in my country

Upeak)

5. Tourists in my country
(visil)

6. My native city
()uive)

7. The president
(liie)

8. Many people in my country

(uani)

42 Lesson 2
2.3 Spelling of the -5 Form
RULE
BASE FORM -S FORM

Add -s to most verbs to make the -s form. hope hopes

eat eats

When the base form ends in ss, sh, ch, orx, add miss misses

-es and pronounce an extra syllable. wash washes

catch catches
mix mixes

When the base form ends in a consonant +y. carry Carnes

change the y to i and add -es. worry worries

When the base form ends in a vowel +y, add -s. pay pays
Do not change they. enjoy enjoys
Add -es to go and do. go goes
do does

EXERCISE Write the-s form of the following verbs.

EXAMPLES eat_ eats

study studies

watch watches

1. try 11. say

2. play_ 12. change

3. have _ 13. brush _

4. go — 14. obey —
5. worry 15. reach-
6. finish 16. fix

7. do 17. work _

8. push. 18. raise —

9. enjoy. 19. charge.

10. think 20. see

Tlie Simple Presenr Tense 43

2,4 Pronunciation of the -s Form
RULE EXAMPLES
PRONUNCIATION

N Pronounce /s/ after voiceless hope—hopes pick—picks

eat—eats Laugh—laughs
sounds: /p, t, k, f/.
N Pronounce /z/ after voiced sounds: grab—grabs sing—sings
read—reads fall-falls
/b, d, g, V, m, n, g, L, r/
and all vowel sounds. hug—hugs hear—hears
live—Lives see—sees

hum—hums borrow—borrows
run—runs play—plays

Pronounce /oz/ when the base form watch—watches

/oz/ miss—misses

ends in ss, ce, se, sh, ch, ge, x. dance—dances change—changes

use—uses fix—fixes
wash—washes

Pronunciation Note: The following verbs have a change in the vowel sound. Listen to your
teacher pronounce these examples,
do/du/—does/dAz/
say/sei/—says/sez/

EXERCISE Q Go back to Exercise 3 and pronounce the base form and -s form of
each verb.

EXERCISE B Fill in the blanks with the -s form of the verb in parentheses (). Pay
attention to the spelling rules on page 43. Then say each sentence.
EXAMPLE A teacher tries to help students learn.
(try)

1. A pilot an airplane.
l/K')

2. A dishwasher dishes.
(uosfi)

3. A babysitter children.
(utItL'h)

4. A soldier an officer.
(uiiey)

5. A citizen taxes.

6. A mechanic machines.

7. A student
(study)

8. A student homework.
(do)

9. A carpenter a hammer.
(itso)

10. A teacher students.

(todch)

44 Le.sson 2
 EXERCISE Q Write at least three sentences to teU what the president of the U.S.
does. You may work with a partner.

2.5 Comparing Affirmative Statements—Be and Other Verbs

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I am a student. Don't include a form of be with a simple

I study English. present-tense verb.
You are irght. Wrong: I'm study English.
You know the answer. Wrong: You're know the answer.
He is busy. Wrong: He's works hard.
He works hard.

EXERCISE B A student is comparing himself to his friend. Fill in the blanks with
the correct form of the underlined verb.

EXAMPLES My friend and I are very different.

I get up at 7 o’clock. He cjets up at 10 o’clock,
He^ a lazy student. I ’HL a good student.

1. I study every day. He only before a test.

2. 1 always get an A on my tests. He aC.

3. 1 have a scholarship. He a government loan.

4. He lives in a dormitory. I in an apartment,
5. He^ from Japan. I from the Philippines.
6. He studies with the radio on. I in a quiet room.
7. He watches a lot of TV. 1 TV only when I have free time.
8. He eats a lot of meat. I a lot of fish.

9. He uses a laptop computer. 1 _ a desktop computer.

The Simple Pre.‘;ent Tense 45

2.6 Negative Statements with the Simple Present Tense
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

The president lives in the White House. Use doesn't + the base form with he, she, it,
The vice president doesn't live in the or a singular noun.
White House. Compare: Lives doesn't live
has ^ doesn't have
Washington has many government buildings.
Doesn't is the contraction for does not.
It doesn't have tall buildings.
Visitors pay to enter museums in most cities. Use don't + the base form with I, you, we,
They don't pay in Washington museums. they, or a plural noun.
Compare: pay ^ don't pay
We live in Maryland.
live ^ don't live
We don't live in Washington.
Don't is the contraction for do not.

Usage Note: American English and British English use different grammar to form the negative
of have. Compare:
American: He doesn't have a dictionary.
British: He hasn't a dictionary. OR He hasn't got a dictionary.

EXERCISE Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb,
EXAMPLE You need tickets for some museums. You don’t need money for
the museums.

1. Washington has tourism. It factories.

2. Visitors gay to enter museums in most cities. They

to enter museums in Washington, D.C.
3. The Metro runs all day. It after midnight on
weeknights.
4. You need a car in many cities. You a car in

Washington.
5. Washington has a subway system. Miami a

subway system.
6. My friend lives in Virginia. He in Washington,
7. 1 like American history. I geography.
8. The president lives in Washington. He in

New York.
9. The president serves a four-year term. He a

six-year term.
10. We have a president. We a prime minister.

11. The U.S. Congress makes the laws. The president

the laws.

46 Lesson 2
EXERCISE B Tell if the city or town you live in has the following items.
EXAMPLES a lake
This city has a lake.
OR

This city doesn’t have a lake.

1. tall buildings 6. government buildings

2. an art museum 7. monuments

3. a subway 8. parks
4. a large university 9. modern buildings
5. factories 10. movie theaters

EXERCISE fQ Make an affirmative statement or a negative statement with the

words given to state facts about the teacher. Use the correct form of
the verb,
EXAMPLES speak Arabic
The teacher speaks Arabic.
OR

The teacher doesn’t speak Arabic.

1. talk fast 6. pronounce my name correctly

2. speak English well 7. wear glasses
3. speak my language 8. wear jeans to class
4. give a lot of homework 9. teach this class every day
5. give tests 10. watch the students during a test

EXERCISE fQ ABOUT YOU

Check (>/) the items that describe you and what you
do. Exchange your book with another student. Make statements
about the other student.
EXAMPLES I have children. ^ I like cold weather.
Marta doesn’t have children. Marta likes cold weather.

1. I speak Chinese. 6. 1 like summer.

2. I live alone. 7. I like hot weather.
3. I live near school. 8. I have a laptop.
4. I walk to school. 9. 1 use the Internet.
5. I speak Spanish. 10. 1 have a dog.

The Simple Present Tense 47

2,7 Comparing Negative Statements—Be and Other Verbs
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION
I'm not from Washington. Don't use be to make the negative of a simple
I don't work for the government. present-tense verb.
The museums aren't open on Christmas Day. Wrong: I'm not work for the government.
They aren't have tours.
They don't have tours on Christmas Day. It isn't have tall buildings.
Washington, D.C. isn't a very big city.
It doesn't have tall buildings.

EXERCISE 12 ABOUT YOU Check {/) the items that describe you and what you
do. Exchange your book with another student. Make statements
about the other student.
EXAMPLES I’m an immigrant. I have a computer.
Margarita isn’t an immigrant. Margarita has a computer.
She comes from Puerto Rico.

1. I’m married. 7. I’m a full-time student.

2. I have children/a child. 8. 1 have a pet."

3. I have a laptop. 9. I’m an immigrant.
4. I’m an American citizen. 10. I’m happy in the U.S.
5. 1 like this city. 11. I like baseball.

6. 1 have a job. 12. I understand Americans.

EXERCISE ID Choose one of the items from the list below. Write sentences telling
what this person does or is. Include negative statements. You may
work with a partner. Read some of your sentences to the class,
EXAMPLES a good teacher
A iOood teacher explains the lesson.
A toood teacher doesn’t net angry at students.
A iOOod teacher doesn’t walk away after class if students have questions.
A good teacherispatient.

1. a good friend 3. a good doctor

2. a good mother or father 4. a good son or daughter

'A !Ki is an .inimal tli.ii lives in someone's house. Dogs anJ e.its are common pets.

48 Lesson 2
EXERCISE d Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb in parentheses ().

●<)> Sara Harris is

Ewmpit: (fw)
a 30'yearold woman. She
(/ ii.v)
in

CD 1, TR 08
Arlington, Virginia. She _ in Washington because
f2 not/lke)

rent is cheaper in Arlington. Arlington _ far from

(3 bi'/mii)

Washington. Sara a car because her apartment

(4 not/need)

near a Metro stop. She

(5 be)

the Metro to go to work

(6 use)

every day. Sara works in Washington.

but she for the

(7 not/uori)

government. She a tour guide.

18 be)

She groups on tours of the Capitol. Tour groups

19 mice)

to pay to enter the Capitol, hut they do

(10 nol/need) (II need)

a reservation.

Sara married. She two roommates.

02 be/nolj (13 fuH'e)

They in government offices. Sara and her roommates

04 u-orb)

hard, so they much time to visit

05uwk) 06 not/Iuii-e)

the museums. When Sara’s friends from out of town, Sara

07 mil)

them to museums and other tourist attractions.

(18 take)

The Simple Present Tense 49

One Country, Many Differences
Before
You Read 1. Does your country have a national language?
2. Do citizens of your country pay income tax?

Read the following questions and answers about the U.S.

CD1,TR 09 Pay special attention to yes/no questions and short answers.

Q: Does the U.S. have a national language?

A: No, it doesn’t. About 81 percent of Americans speak English at
home. Spanish is the second most common language.
Q: Does the U.S. have a national religion?
A: No, it doesn’t. Americans have freedom of religion.
Q: Do Americans have to vote?

A: No, they don’t.

Q: Does the U.S. control education?

A: No, it doesn’t. Each state makes its own decisions about education.

Q: Do all citizens pay income tax to the U.S. government?

A: Yes, they do. But they don’t all pay the same amount.
Q: Does every state have a sales tax?
A: No. Some states, like California and Illinois, have a high sales tax.
Some states, like Alaska and Montana, have no sales tax.
Q: Does the U.S. have one
time zone or more?

A: The U.S. has six time

zones.

The United States Constitution

50 Lesson 2
2,8 Yes/No Questions and Short Answers
with the Simple Present Tense
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Does Subject Verb Complement To form a question with he, she, it, everyone,
Does Sara have a car? family, or a singular subject, use:
Does everyone pay taxes? Does + subject + base form...?
Does your family visit you? Wrong: Does she works in Washington?
Do Subject Verb Complement To form a question with I, you, we, they, or a
Do you work hard? plural noun, use:
Do Americans vote for the president? Do + subject + base form...?
Do they pay taxes?

Does the U.S. have a national religion? We usually answer ayes/no question with
No, it doesn't. a short answer.
Does the U.S. have six time zones? Short answer:
Yes, it does.
Yes, + subject pronoun + do/does.
No, + subject pronoun + don't/doesn't.
Usage Note: American English and British English use different grammar to form a question with
have. Compare:
American; Does she have a car? Yes, she does.
British: Has she a car? or Has she got a car? Yes, she has.

Compare statements and questions.

Do/Does Subject Verb Complement Short Answer

The U.S. has a president,

Does the U.S. have an official language? No, it doesn't.
You pay taxes,
Do a lot?
you pay Yes, I do.

EXERCISE 15 Go back and read Exercise 14 on page 49. Then answer with a short
answer.

EXAMPLE Does Sara work in Washington, D.C.? Yes, she does.

1. Does Sara live in Washington, D.C.?

2. Does she work for the government?
3. Does the Metro go to Virginia?
4. Does Sara need a car?

5. Do Sara and her roommates often visit museums?

6. Do her roommates work for the government?

7. Does Sara have out-of-town visitors?

The Simple Present Tense 51

 . .?" and the words
EXERCISE 16 Ask your teacher a question with "Do you .
given. Your teacher will respond with a short answer.
EXAMPLE drive to school
A; Do you drive to school?
B: Yes, I do. OR No, 1 don’t.

1. like your job 7. like to read students’ homework,

2. teach in the summer 8. live far from the school

3. have another job 9. have a fax machine

4. speak another language 10. have trouble with English spelling

5. travel a lot 11. have a scanner

6. know my language 12. like soccer

EXERCISE [g ABOUT YOU Put a check {/) next to customs from your native
country. Then make an affirmative or negative statement about your
native country or culture. Ask another student if this is a custom in
his or her native country or culture.
✓
EXAMPLES People take off their shoes before they enter a house.
A: Russians take off their shoes before they enter a house. Do Mexicans
take off their shoes before they enter a house?
B: No, we don’t.

Schoolchildren study English.

A: Romanian schoolchildren don’t study English. They study French.
Do German schoolchildren study English?
B: Yes, they do.

1. People take off their shoes before they enter a house.

2. People bow when they say hello.
3. People shake hands when they say hello.
4. People bring a gift when they visit a friend’s house.
5. People eat with chopsticks.
6. On the bus, younger people stand up to let an older person
sit down.

7. High school students wear a uniform.

8. People visit friends without calling first.
9. Men open doors for women.
10. Men give flowers to women for their birthdays.
11. People celebrate Children’s Day.
12. Women wear a veil.

52 Lesson 2
EXERCISE 18
A tourist in Washington, D.C., has a lot of questions. Fill in the
blanks to make questions.
EXAMPLE Most big cities have tall buildings. Poes Washington have tall buildings?
No, it doesn’t.

1. The Metro trains run all day 24 hours a day?

No, they don’t. On weekdays they run only from early morning to
midnight. On weekends they run later.
2. In my city, all passengers pay the same fare on the subway.
the same fare on the Metro in Washington?
No, they don’t. Passengers pay according to the distance they ride.
3. You need a ticket to enter museums in my
hometown a ticket to
enter museums in Washington? Yes, you do, but
the museums are free.

4. The Washington Monument is very tall.

an elevator?
Yes, it has an elevator.
5. The president works in Washington.
on Capitol Hill?
No, he doesn’t. He works in the White House.
6. the laws?
No, he doesn’t. The president doesn’t make the Washington Monument
laws. Congress makes the laws.

EXERCISE 19 Two students are comparing teachers. Fill in the blanks to complete
this conversation.

like
A: Do you your English class?
(txampie: like)

B: Yes, I a very good teacher.

(I) (2 )uuv)

Her name is Ms. Lopez.

A: Spanish?
(3)

B: No, she doesn’t. She comes from the Philippines.

She English and Tagalog.
(4 sfvak)

A: My teacher is very good too. But he fast, and sometimes

(5 [(ilk)

I him. He a lot of homework.

(6 nol/underscand)

a lot of homework?
18)

B: Yes, she does. And she a test once a week.

(continued)

The Simple Present Tense 53

 A: My teacher jeans to class. He’s very informal.
(JOutfur)

jeans to class?
(in

B: No, she doesn’t. She always wears a dress.

A: My teacher always to us about American culture.
U2ialk)

you about American culture?

(13)

B: Yes, she . She also teaches us about American government.

(w

2.9 Comparing Yes/No Questions—Be and Other Verbs

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Are you lost? No, I'm not. Don't use be to make a question with a simple
Do you need help? No, I don't. present-tense verb.
Am I irght? Yes, you are. Wrong: Are you need help?
Do I have the answer? Yes, you do. Wrong: Am I have the answer?
Is he from Haiti? Yes, he is. Wrong: Is he speak French?
Does he speak French? Yes, he does.

EXERCISE ^ Read each statement. Write a yes/no question about the words in
parentheses (). Then write a short answer.
EXAMPLES California has a sales tax. (Alaska) (no)
Poes Alaska have a sales tax? No, it doesn’t.

Washington, D.C., is on the East Coast. (New York) (yes)

Is New York on the East Coast? Yes, it is.

1. Sara works from Monday to Friday, (on the weekend) (no)

2. You are interested in American culture. (American government)

3. The president lives in the White House, (the vice president) (no)

4. The museums are free, (the Metro) (no)

5. Washington has government buildings, (tall buildings) (no)

54 Lesson 2
 6. The U.S. doesn’t have a national language, (a national religion) (no)

7. Washington, D.C. is in the eastern time zone. (Los Angeles) (no)

8. The Metro runs all day. (after midnight on weeknights) (no)

9. The Metro is clean, (quiet) (yes)

2.10 Or Questions
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Do you study English or French? An or question gives a choice of answers.

I study English.
Is Washington, D.C., on the East Coast or
the West Coast?
It's on the East Coast.

Pronunciation Note: The first part of an or question has irsing intonation; the second part has
falling intonation. Listen to your teacher pronounce the examples above.

EXERCISE 21 ■ ABOUT YOU Circle the words that are true for you. Then ask an
or question. Another student will answer.
EXAMPLE I drink {^offe^/ tea) in the morning.
A: I drink coffee in the morning. Do you drink coffee or tea in the morning?
B: I drink coffee too.

1. I speak (English / my native language) at home.

2. I prefer (classical music / popular music).
3. I’m a (resident of the U.S. / a visitor).
4. I’m (married/single).
5. I live in (a house / an apartment / a dormitory).
6. I write with my (right hand / left hand).
7. I’m from (a big city / a small town).
8. I prefer (morning classes / evening classes).
9. I prefer to (eat out / eat at home).
10. English is (easy / hard) for me.
11. I live (with someone / alone).

The Simple Present Tense 55

2.11 Wh~ Questions with the Simple Present Tense
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Wh- Does Subject Verb Complement To form a question with he, she, it,
Word everyone, family, or a singular subject.
What does the museum have? use:

What does the theater show? Wh- word + does + subject + base form
How often does the Metro run on Saturdays? Use the base form after do or does.
Where does it go? Wrong: Where does the Metro goes?
Wh- Do Subject Verb Complement To form a question with I, you, we,
Word they, or a plural subject, use:
When do you plan to go? Wh‘ word + do + subject + base form
Why do I need a ticket?
Where do we enter the museum?
How much do you need to pay?
Wh- Do/ Subject Verb Preposition In informal written and spoken
Word Does English, we usually put the preposition
Where do you come from? at the end of a wh- question.
Who does she live with?
What floor do you live on?

Prep. Wh- Do/ Subject Verb In formal written and spoken English,
Word Does we put the preposition before the
With whom does she live? question word.
On what floor do you live?

Language Note: We use whom, not who, after a preposition. We often use who when the
preposition is at the end of the sentence. Compare:
Formal: With whom do you travel?
Informal: Who do you travel with?

EXERCISE ^3 Answer the questions.

1. Where does the president of the U.S. live?

2. What state does he come from?

3. Why does Washington, D.C. get a lot of visitors?

4. What kind of transportation does Washington, D.C. have?
5. What kinds of museums does Washington, D.C. have?
6. Why don’t museums in Washington, D.C. charge money?

58 Lesson 2
 2.12 Comparing Statements and Questions with the
Simple Present Tense
Affirmative Statements and Questions
Wh- Word Do/Does Subject Verb Complement Short Answer
Sara works in Washington,
Does she work at the museum? No, she doesn't.
Where does she work?
You pay taxes,
Do you pay income tax? Yes, I do.
Why do you pay taxes?

Negative Statements and Questions

Wh- Word Don'tfDoesn't Subject Verb Complement
Museums don't charge money,
Why don't they charge money?
Sara doesn't Live in D.C.
Why doesn't she live in D.C.?

EXERCISE B| ABOUT YOU

Ask and answer questions with the words given.
First, ask another student a yes/no question. Then use the words in
parentheses () to ask a wh- question, if possible,
EXAMPLE like to travel (why)

A: Do you like to travel?

B: Yes, 1 do.
A: Why do you like to travel?
B: I like to see new places and learn new things,
1. like museums(what kind)
2. like to learn about American history (why)
3. visit museums in this city (which museums)
4. know a lot about American Indians (which American Indians)
5. plan to take a vacation (where/go)
6. travel with someone (who OR whom/with)

The Simple Present Tense 59

 EXERCISE 24 Read each statement. Write a question with the words in
parentheses ().
EXAMPLE The museum has several floors, (how many)
How many floors does it have?

1. It has a garden with native American plants, (what kinds)

2. We don’t have to pay to go into the museum, (why)

3. They have programs in the theater, (what kinds of programs)

4. The museum opens at 9 a.m. (what time/close)

5. The U.S. doesn’t have an official language, (why)

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks to complete the conversation.

A: Let’s do something fun this weekend.
CD 1,TR 11
B: What do you want to do?

A: I want to go to a museum.
B: I don’t like museums.

A: Really? Why museums?

(I)

B: They’re boring.
A; No, they’re not. You learn a lot when you go to a museum. Come on.
Let’s go.
B: Which museum visit?
(2)

A: How about the history museum? It’s free on Fridays.

B: I don’t like history.
?
A: Why
(3)

B: History is just a bunch of facts and dates.

A: No, it’s not. History is a very interesting story. It’s a true story.

B: I prefer to go to the movies.

A: Come with me to the museum. Please?

60 Lesson 2
 B: What this museum ?
14) (5)

A: It has exhibits about American life in the past.

B: What time 7

16)

A: The museum closes at 5 P.m.

B: OK. Let’s go at 4 P.M., and then we can go to a movie, okay? I

have a good one in mind.
A: What time 7

(7)

B: It starts at 6:10. We can leave the museum, get something to eat,

and then see the movie.

A; Fine.

2.13 Questions About Meaning, Spelling, Cost, and Time

Wh- Word Do/Does Subject Verb Complement Explanation
What does
/f

D.C. mean? Mean, spell, say,

How do and cost are
you spell "government"? verbs and should
How do you say "government" in be in the verb
your language? position of a
How much does a Metro ticket cost? question.
How long does it take to see the We use the verb
museum? take with time.
The subject is it

EXERCISE ^3 Read each statement. Then wnte a question beginning with the
words given.

EXAMPLE The museum isn’t free. How much does it cost 7

to enter;

1. It takes a long time to see everything in the museum. How long

7

2. The spelling of “government” is difficult. How

“government”?
3. IRS means “Internal Revenue Service.” What.
D.C. 7

4. In English, we say “museum." In Spanish, we say “mwseo.” How

“museum” in your language?
The Simple Present Tense 61
 EXERCISE EO Fill in the blanks in the conversation below with the missing words,
A: What’s your name?
(t.uimpL'l

B: My name is Martha Gomez.

A: How spell “Gomez”?
III

B: G'O'M'E'Z. It’s a Spanish name.

A: Are you Spain?
(2)

B: No, I’m
(3)
7
A: What country you come
14) (5)

B: I come from Guatemala.

A: What language they in Guatemala?

(6J (7)

B: They speak Spanish in Guatemala,

A: your family here?
(8)

B: No. My family is still in Guatemala. 1 call them once a week.

A: Isn’t that expensive?
B: No, it . I use a phone card.
(9)
A: How much cost?
I JO)

B: It five dollars. We can talk for 35 minutes. I like

(Ji)

to say hello to my family every week.

A: How hello” in Spanish?
(12)

B: We say “hola." Please excuse me now. I’m late for my class. Hasca luego.
A: What hasta luego ?

(J3i (14)

B: It means “see you later” in Spanish.

62 Lesson 2
2.14 Comparing Wh- Questions—Be and Other Verbs
EXAMPLES
EXPLANATION

Where is the museum?

Don't forget to use do or does in a question
How many floors does it have? with a simple present-tense verb.
What do you want to see? Wrong: How many floors it has?
What are you interested in? Wrong: What you want to see?
When is the museum free? Don't use be to form a simple present-tense
How much does it cost to enter? question.
Wrong: How much is it costs?

EXERCISE @ Read this conversation between two students. Fill in the blanks with
the missing words.

■^)) A: Are these your children?

CD 1. TR12
B: Yes, they are.
A; How old are they 7

(examfilt)

B: Jessica’s 23 and Brian’s 29.

A: Do they live with you?

B: Oh, no. Jessica lives in New York, and
Brian lives in Washington, D.C.
A: for the government?
(1)

B: Yes, he does. He works at the IRS.

A: What at the IRS?
12)

B: He audits people’s taxes,

A: What audit 7

O) (41

B: It means he checks to see if people pay all their taxes,

A: in D.C.?
(5)

B: No, he doesn’t. He takes the Metro into D.C. every day.

A: Where ?

(6)

B: He lives in Maryland with his wife. 1 plan to visit them next month,
A: How long to fly from here to D.C.?
(7)

B: It only takes an hour and a half. But I plan to drive there. It takes about
five hours from here.
(continued)

The Simple Present Tense 63

 A; You know, my niece lives in Maryland, too.
B: Where _ in Maryland?
(8)

A: She lives in Fallston.

7
B: I don’t know that city. How (9)

A: F-A-L-L-S-T-O-N.

B: What do? for the

(10) (ID
?
government;

A: No. She’s a teacher in Fallston.

B: Fm late for an appointment. Ciao.

7
A: What
(12)

B: It means “good-bye” in Italian. How good-bye

(13)

in Spanish?
A: We say “hasta luego.”

Summary of Lesson 2

1. The simple present tense has two forms: the base form and the -s form:

Base Form -s Form

I Everyone
You He

We eat. She eats.

They It

(Plural noun) (Singular noun)

2. Simple present-tense patterns with the -s form:

AFKIRM-ATIVE; The president lives in Washington, D.C.
NEGATIVE: He doesn’t live in New York.
YES/NO QUESTION: Does he live in the White House?
SHORT ANSWER; Yes, he does.
WH-QUESTION; Where does the vice president live?
NEGATIVE QUESTION; Why doesn’t the vice president live in the
White House?

64 Lesson 2
 3. Simple present-tense patterns with the base form:
AFFIRMATIVIi:
We study English in class.
NEGATIVE:
We don’t study American history in class.
m/NO QUESTION: Do we study grammar?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, we do.
WH-QUESTION: Why do we study grammar?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why don’t we study history?
4. Present-tense patterns with the verb be:
AFFIRMATIVE: The teacher is absent.
NEGATIVE:
She isn’t here today.
m/NO QUESTION: Is she sick?
SHORT ANSWER: No, she isn’t.
WH- QUESTION: Where is she?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why isn’t she here?
5. We use the simple present tense with:

General truths and facts Washington, O.C., has over half a million
people.
Americans speak English.
Customs Japanese people take off their shoes when
they enter a house.
Americans don't visit friends without an
invitation.

Regular activities {more He visits his parents every summer.

on this use in Lesson 3) I play soccer once a week.

Editing Advice

1. Don’t forget to use the -s form when the subject is he, she, it, or a
singular noun.
5

He need more money.

A

has

This school have a big library.

2. Use the base form after cioe.s and doesn’t,
have

My father doesn't has a car.

Does your mother speaks English well?

3. Don’t forget do/docs in a tiuestion.

iio does
Where your parents live? Where your mother work?
A AT

The Simple Prc-sent Tense 65

 4. Use the correct word order in a question.
your l^rother live
Where does live your brothef?
does your father have
What kind of car has your father?
don't you
Why you don't like pizza?
5. Don’t use be with another verb to form the simple present tense.

have three brothers.

She'-s lives in New York.

I don't
I'm not have a car.

6. Don’t use be in a simple present-tense question that uses

another verb.
Does

Is your college have a computer lab?

Do
Are you speak French?

7. Use the correctspelling for the -s form.

studies

She studys in the library.

watches
He watchs TV every evening.

8. Use the correct negative form.

doesn't
He net know the answer.
don't
They no speak English.

9. Don’t use an -ing form for the simple present tense.

write

1 writing a letter to my family once a week.

10. Famib is a singular word. Use the -s form.

5

My family live in Germany.

11. Use the same auxiliary verb in a short answer as in a yes/no question.
am

Are you hungry? Yes, I do.

do
Do you like baseball? Yes, I am.
66 Lesson 2
 12. Use correct question formation for meaning, spelling, cost, and time.
does "wonderful" mean
What means"wonderful-?
do bananas cost
How much cost bananas this week?
doyou
How^spell "opportunity"?
doyou
How_^say "opportunity" in your language?
does

How longjt takes to finish this Lesson?

Editing Quiz

PART Q Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
I live C
I’m live in Chicago. Chicago has many tourist attractions. My family
(exampk) (example)

like to go to the zoo in the summer. We going there at least three times every
m (2)

summer. The zoo have all kinds of animals, but it doesn’t has any elephants.
ii) 141

1 don’t know why. My daughter really like the monkeys. She watchs them very
(5) (6) (7)

carefully. But she doesn’t likes the reptiles. She’s afraid of snakes. She crys when
(8) (9)

we want to see the snakes. We not want to make her unhappy so we don’t go
(10) (ID

there anymore. She’s likes the giraffes too. They eating from tall trees. A trip to
(J2) (13)

the zoo is a very enjoyable time for my family.

do
PART Q A: Where^ou live? You live near the college?
(sxiimple) (i)
B: I live on the north side of town.

A: How long it takes you to get to school?

(2)
B: It takes me about half an hour.

A: How you get to school?

B: I take the bus, but I need a transfer.

The Simple Present Tense 67

 A: What means “transfer”?
(4)

B: It’s a paper I use to change buses.

A: How much costs the transfer?
(5)
B: It costs 25 cents extra.

A: I have a car, bur I walk to school. It’s about two miles.

B: Why you don’t drive to school?
(6)

A: Parking is expensive. And there’s a lot of traffic.

B: How much costs parking at school?
a)
A: It’s $ 100 per semester. It’s easier to take the bus. I come with my friend.
B: Where your friend lives? Does he lives with you?
(8> (9J
A: No, he isn’t. He lives in the same building, but in a different apartment.
(10)

B: What’s your friend’s name? Do 1 know him?

iJi)

A: His name is Dmitry.

B: How spell Dmitry?

U2)

A: D-M'I'T'R'Y. 1 don’t think you know him. He’s from Russia, like me.
B: How say “see you later” in Russian?
(13)

A: We say “da svidanja.”

B: That’s hard. I’ll just say “see you later.

Lesson 2 Test/Review
PART a Write the -s form of the following verbs. Use correct spelling,
EXAMPLE take takes

1. go
2. carry.
3. mix_

4. drink

5. play _
6. study
7. catch

8. say

68 Lesson 2
PART in the first blank with the affirmative form of the verb in
parentheses (). Then write the negative form of this verb,
EXAMPLES A monkey lives in a warm climate.
(ii.e)
It doesn’t live in a cold climate.

Brazil is a
big country.
(M
Haiti isn’t
a big country.

1. The English language. the Roman alphabet.

(ll.w)

The Chinese language the Roman alphabet.

2. We English in class.
(speak)
We our native languages in class.
3. March 31 days.
(/uii't;)

February 31 days.
4. Mexico and Canada in North America.
(he)
Colombia and Ecuador in North America.

5. You the “k” in “bank.

((wonounce)
You the “k” in “knife.”

6. The teacher the English language.

(teacli)

He/She American history.

7. A green light. go-
(iiu'un)

A yellow light go-

8. [ from another country.

(comi)
from the U.S.

9. English hard for me.

(fw)

My language hard for me.

The Simple Present Tense 69

 PART O Write a yes/no question about the words in parentheses ().
Then write a short answer.

EXAMPLE China is in Asia. (Korea) (yes)

Is Korea in Asia? Yes, it is.

1. The U.S. has 50 states. (Mexico) (no)

2. The post office sells stamps, (the bank) (no)

3. San Francisco is in California. (Los Angeles) (yes)

4. Americans pay sales tax. (income tax) (yes)

5. January and March have 31 days. (April and June) (no)

6. Senators work on Capitol Hill, (the president) (no)

7. Americans speak English. (Canadians) (yes)

8. We come to class on time, (the teacher) (yes)

PART Q Read each statement. Then write a wh- question about the words in
parentheses (). You don't need to answer the question.
EXAMPLES February has 28 days. (March)
How many days does March have?

Mexico is in North America. (Venezuela)

Where is Venezuela?

1. Mexicans speak Spanish. (Canadians)

2. Washington, D.C. has one zoo. (museums)

3. The president meets with foreign leaders, (how often)

70 Lesson 2
 4. Thanksgiving is in November. (Christmas)

5. You spell “occasion” O-C-C-A-SI-O-N. (“tomorrow”)

6. “Occupation” means job or profession, (“occasion”)

7. The president doesn’t make the laws, (why)

8. Marek comes from Poland, (you)

part B Read this interview. Fill in the blanks with the missing word(s).

A: How old are you ?

B: I’m 30 years old.

A: married?
0)

B: No I’m single.
A: with your parents?
(2)

B: No, I don’t live with my parents.

A: Why with your parents?

O)

B: I don’t live with my parents because they live in another city.

A: Where ?

i-u

B: They live in Chicago.

A: you Washington?
(5) (6)

B: Yes, I like it very much.

A: Why Washington?
il)

B: I like it because it has so many interesting museums and galleries. But I

don’t have time to visit these places very often. I work every day. When
my parents visit, we go to galleries and museums.
A: When
<8)

B: They visit me in the spring. They love Washington.

(continued)

The Simple Pre.sent Tense 71

 A: Why Washington?
(9)

B: They love it because it’s a beautiful, interesting city. Anti they love it
because I’m here.
?
A: What kind of job
(10)

B: I have a job with the government. I work in the Department of

Commerce.
?
A: What
(ID
B: Commerce means “business.
7
A: How
(12)
B: OO-M-M-E-R-C'E.

A: your job?
1(3)

B: Yes, I like my job very much.

7
A:
114)

B: I live a few blocks from the White House.

A: have a car?
1(5)

B: No, I don’t. I don’t need a car.

A: How to work?
((6)

B: I go to work by Metro. If I’m late, I take a taxi.

A: How much 7

1(7)

B: A taxi ride from my house to work costs about $12.

A: clean?
(18)

B: Oh, yes. The Metro is very clean,

A: all night?
(19)

B: No, the trains don’t run all night. They run until midnight.
A: In my city, we don’t say “the metro.’’ We use a different word.
B: What in your city;
7

(20)
I

A: We say “subway.

72 Lesson 2
Expansion
Classroom
Activities O Check {>/) all the items below that are true for you. Find a partner
and compare your list to your partner's list. Write three sentences
telling about differences between you and your partner. You may read
your list to the class.

a. I have a cell phone. g- I play a musical instrument.

b. 1 own a home. h. I sing well.
c. I live in an apartment. i. I’m a good driver.
d. 1 exercise regularly. ]● I like pizza.
e. I’m a vegetarian. k. I use an electronic calendar.

f. I live with my parents. 1. 1 write with my left hand.

Q Game: One student thinks of the name of a famous person

and writes this person's initials on the board. Other students ask
questions and try to guess the name of this person.
SAMPLE Is he an athlete? Is he tall?
QUESTIONS Where does he come from? How old is he?

0 Game: One student comes to the front of the room. He or she

thinks of an animal and writes the name of this animal on a piece of
paper. The other students try to guess which animal it is by asking
questions. The person who guesses the animal is the next to come
to the front of the room,

EXAMPLE lion
Does this animal fly? No, it doesn’t.
Does it live in water? No, it doesn’t.
What does it eat? It eats meat.
Does this animal live in Africa? Yes, it does.

o In a small group, discuss differences between classes and teachers

in this school and another school that you know about.
EXAMPLES In my college back home, students stand up when they speak.
This class has some older people. In my native country, only young
people study at college.

Tlio Simple Present Tense 73

Talk
About It 0 Talk about taxes. What kind of taxes do we pay? What do we get for
our tax money?

0 Talk about the public transportation in this city. Do you think it's
good?

o Talk about the language(s) in your native country. Does your

country have an official national language? Does everyone speak that
language?

o Talk about elections in your native country. Does your country have
free elections? Does everyone vote?

Write
About It Write about a tourist attraction in your country {or in another country
you know something about).

EXAMPLE

The Hermitage Museum

The Hermitage is a popular tourist attraction in my
country. Russia. It is a big museum in St. Petersburg. It

has art from all over the world. Many people visit this
museum...

For more practice using grammar in context,

^ please visit our Web site.

74 Lesson 2
Lesson

3
Grammar
Frequency Words with the
Simple Present Tense
Prepositions of Time

Context
Amencan Holidays
Three Special Days in the United States
Before
You Read 1. What is your favorite holiday? When is it?
2. Do you celebrate Mother’s Day? When?
3. Do you send cards for special occasions?
Read the following Web article. Pay special attention to the
●i)) frequency words.
CD 1,TR 13

reatlintfrnrn 0.r

Valentine’s Day is a day of love. It is always on

Did You February 14. On this day, people often give flowers
Know? M or candy to their spouses or sweethearts. Candy
Some people believe 1 manufacturers make candy or candy boxes in the
that Valentine’s Day shape of a heart. People sometimes send cards, called
began in ancient valentines, to close friends and relatives. Red is the color associated with
Rome to honor Juno, k
the Roman goddess A Valentine’s Day. A valentine usually has a red heart and a message of
of women and love. It often has a picture of Cupid, a symbol of romantic love. Florists
marriage. sell a lot of red roses on Valentine’s Day. Young children usually have a
party at school and exchange cards.
Another special day is Saint Patrick’s Day. It is
always on March 17. It is really an Irish holiday, but
many Americans like St. Patrick’s Day even if they are
not Irish. We sometimes say that on St. Patrick’s Day,
everybody is Irish. In New York City, there is always
a parade on St. Patrick’s Day. Green is the color associated with St.
Patrick’s Day. People often wear green clothes on this day. One symbol
of St. Patrick’s Day is the shamrock.
Businesses are never closed for Valentine’s Day or St. Patrick’s Day.
People never take a day off from work for these days. Schools and
government offices are always open (except if these days fall on a Sunday).
Another special day is Mother’s Day. It is always in May,
but it isn’t always on the same date. It is always on the
second Sunday in May. People usually buy presents for
their mothers and grandmothers or send special cards.
Families often have dinner in a restaurant. Florists sell a
lot of flowers on Mother’s Day.
People enjoy these holidays. Greeting card companies
also enjoy these holidays. They always sell a lot of cards and make a lor , k

of money at these times.

76 Lesson 3
3.1 Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense
FREQUENCY WORD FREQUENCY EXAMPLES

Always 100% Mother's Day is always in May.

Usually I usually take my mother out to dinner.
Often People often wear green on St. Patrick’s Day.
Sometimes I sometimes watch the parade.
Rarely/Seldom T We rarely give flowers to children.
Never 0% Businesses are never closed for Valentine's Day.

EXERCISE O Choose the correct word to fill in the blanks.

often
EXAMPLE People give flowers or candy on Valentine’s Day.
Inever/sehiom/ofien)

1. Valentine’s Day is on February 14-

(aluays/somciimt's/m.'i'L'rJ

2. People send valentine cards to their sweethearts.

(rarely/often/net’er)

3. A valentine card has a red heart and a

(nexer/rarety/u^ually)

message of love.

4. Young children have a

(loualN/aluays/nuivT)

Valentine’s Day party at school.

5. Saint Patrick’s Day is on

(aluajs/somecimcs/ticivT)

March 17.

6. A St. Patrick’s Day card

(aiuajs/itsualij/ncciTj

has a red heart.

St. Patrick's Day Parade

7. In New York City, there is

a parade on Saint Patrick’s Day.

8. Card companies do a lot of business before

(ner'er/alu'ayt/ieldumj

holidays.

9. Businesses are closed for St. Patrick’s Day.

(alii-ajs/usually/mtiT)

10. Mother’s Day is on a Saturday in the U.S.

(aluvm/nei’cr/somi.’Iimt.’s)

Frequency Words widi the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 77

 EXERCISE Q Fill in the blank with an appropriate frequency word about this class
or this school.

EXAMPLE We sometimes use a dictionary in class,

1. The teacher — wears a suit to class.

2. The school is _ closed on Labor Day.

3. The students _ ask questions in class.
4. The windows of the classrooms are open,

5. The students talk to each other during a test.

6. The door of the classroom is open,

7. We write a composition in class.

8. The teacher writes on the board.

9. The students write on the board.

10. The students stand up when the teacher

enters the room.

3.2 Position of Frequenq^ Words and Expressions

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Businesses are never dosed for St. Patrick's Day. The frequency word comes after the verb be.
Mother's Day is always in May.
I usually buy a card for my mother. The frequency word comes before other
I sometimes wear green on St. Patrick's Day. verbs.

Sometimes I take my mother to a restaurant. Sometimes, usually, and often can come at
Usually the weather is nice in May. the beginning of the sentence too.
Often we give gifts.

EXERCISE a ABOUT YOU Add a frequency word to each sentence to make a true
Statement about yourself.
EXAMPLE I eat fish.
I usually eat fish on Fridays.

1. 1 cook the meals in my house.

2. I stay home on Sundays.
3. 1 buy the Sunday newspaper.
4. I read the newspaper in English.

78 Lesson 3
 5. 1 use public transportation.
6. I’m tired in class.

7. I use my dictionary to check my spelling.

8. I buy greeting cards.

vi

EXERCISE Q Add a verb phrase to make a true statement about people from your
country or cultural group.
EXAMPLE people/ often
Russian people often go to the forest on the weekends to pick berries.

1. people/often

2. people/seldom

3. women / usually

4. women / rarely

5. men / usually

6. men / rarely

Frequency' Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 79

 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Add a verb phrase to make a true statement about
yourself.
EXAMPLE I/never
I never aotohed after 11 o’clock.
oil

I’m never in a tjood mood in the morning.

1. I / never

2. I / always / in the morning

3. 1/ usually/ on Sunday

4. I / often / on rhe weekend

5. I / sometimes/in class

EXERCISE ^9 Use the words below to make sentences.

EXAMPLE Americans / often
Americans often send areetinn cards on holidays.

1. American doctors / rarely

2. American teachers/sometimes

3. students at this school / often

4. this classroom / never

5. American hospitals / always

6. American children / often

80 Lesson 3
The Fourth of July
Before
You Read 1. Do you like ro see fireworks?
2. Do you celebrate any American holidays? What’s your favorite
American holiday?

Read the following student composition. Pay special attention to

CD 1. TR 14 prepositions of time.

My Favorite American Holiday

My favorite holiday in the U.S. ie American
independence Day. We celebrate it on Juiy 4. In fact, we

often cali this holiday "the Fourth of July."

In the morning, my family and I prepare hamburgers
for a barbecue. Our guests arrive in the afternoon,
and we cook hamburgers and hot dogs on the griil in
the backyard. We usually start to eat at about three
o'clock. We have a lot of barbecues in the summer, but

my favorite is on the Fourth of July.

We usually stay in our yard from about two o’clock
to six o’clock. Then, in the evening, we usually go to the
park. Most of our town goes there too, so we visit with
each other whiie we wait for the fireworks. Finaily, at

night when it’s completely dark, the fireworks show

begins.

This is an exciting time for ail of us. We celebrate our

nation’s independence, and we have a lot of fun.

Frequency Word,s widi die Simple Pre,sent Ten.se; Prepositions of Time 81

3.3 Prepositions of Time
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION
PREPOSITION

in We prepare for the barbecue in the morning. Use in with morning,

We eat in the afternoon. afternoon, and evening.
We go to the park in the evening.
in Americans elect a president every four years: Use in with years.
in 2012, 2016, 2020, and so on.

in We often have a barbecue in the summer. Use in with seasons:

It's too cold to have a barbecue in the winter. summer, fall, winter,
spring.
in We celebrate Independence Day in July. Use in with months.
We celebrate Mother's Day in May.
on We celebrate Independence Day on July 4. Use on with dates and
This year the holiday is on a Tuesday. days.
at We start to eat at 3 o'clock. Use at with a specific
We start the grill at noon. time of day.
We go to bed at midnight.
at The fireworks show starts at night. Use at with night.
from ... to We stay in the backyard from 2 to 6 o'clock. Use from ... to or till or
from . . . till The fireworks show lasts from 9 till 10. until with a beginning
from . . . until We stay there from 6 until midnight. and an ending time.

EXERCISE a ABOUT YOU Answer these questions. Use the correct preposition.

1. What time do you get up in the morning?

2. What time do you go to bed at night?
3. What time does your English class begin?
4. What days does your English class meet?
5. What time do you get to school?
6. When do students have vacation?

7. When do you do your homework?

8. What hours do you go to school?
9. When is your birthday?

82 Lesson 3
3.4 Questions with Ever

We use ever in a question when we want an answer that has a frequency word.
Do/Does Subject Ever Verb Complement Short Answer
Do you ever cook outside? Yes, we sometimes do.
Does your brother work
ever
on a holiday? Yes, he often does.

(Be Subject Ever Complement Short Answer

Are the stores ever
open on a holiday? Yes, they sometimes are.
Is the park crowded on the Fourth of July?
ever
Yes, it always is.
Language Notes:
1. In a short answer, the frequency word comes between the subject and the verb.
2. If the frequency word is never, don’t use a negative verb.
Is the school ever open on the Fourth of July?
No, it never is.
Do you ever eat hot dogs?
No, I never do.

EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Add ever to ask these questions. Another student
will answer.

EXAMPLES Do you ear in a restaurant?

A: Do you ever eat in a restaurant?
B: Yes, I often do.
Are you bored in class?
A: Are you ever bored in class?
B: No, I never am.

1. Do you use public transportation? 8. Do you drive and use your cell
2. Do you drink coffee at night? phone at the same time?
3. Do you drink tea in the morning? 9. Are you homesick?
4. Do you speak English at home? 10. Are you lazy on Saturdays?
5. Do you watch TV at night? 11. Does it snow in March?

6. Do you rent DVDs? 12. Do you ask for directions on

the street?
7. Are you late to class?

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 83

 EXERCISE Q Add ever to these questions to ask about Americans. Another
student will answer.
EXAMPLES Do Americans eat fast food?
A: Do Americans ever eat fast food?
B: Yes, they sometimes do.
Are Americansfriendlyto you?
A: Are Americans ever friendly to you?
B: Yes, they usually are.

1. Do Americans eat with chopsticks?

2. Are American drivers rude?

3. Do Americans say, “Have a nice day”?

4. Do Americans kiss when they meet?
5. Do Americans pronounce your name incorrectly?
6. Are Americans impolite to you?
7. Do Americans shake hands when they meet?
8. Do Americans ask you what country you're from?
9. Are Americans curious about your native country?

EXERCISE m ABOUT YOUFill in the blanks with a frequency word to make a

statement about yourself. Then ask a question with ever. Another
student will answer,

EXAMPLE 1 never
jog in the morning.
A: Do you ever jog in the morning?
B: No, I never do.

1. I ride a bike in the summer,

2. 1 visit relatives on Sunday,

3. I go to sleep before 9 p.m.
4. I eat meat,

5. I take a nap in the afternoon,

6. I eat in a restaurant,

7. 1 use cologne or perfume,

8. I check my e-mail in the morning,
9. I borrow money from a friend,
10. I leave a light on when I sleep,
11. I buy the newspaper.

84 Lesson 3
3.5 Questions with How Often and Answers
with Frequency Expressions
We ask a question with how often when we want to know the frequency of an activity.
' EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

How often do you eat hamburgers? Expressions that show frequency are:
Once in a while.
● every day, week, month, year
How often do you go to the park? ● every other day, week, month, year
Every week. ● from time to time
How often does the park have fireworks? ● once in a while
Once a year.
I learn more about life in America every day. Frequency expressions can come at the
Every day I learn more about life in America. beginning or the end of the sentence.
From time to time, I eat hamburgers.
I eat hamburgers from time to time.

EXERCISE 11 ABOUT YOU Ask a question with "How often do you ... ?" and the
words given. Another student will answer,
EXAMPLE get a haircut
A: How often do you get a haircut?
B: I get a haircut every other month.

1. come to class

2. shop for groceries

3. wash your clothes
4. use your cell phone
5. go out to dinner
6. use public transportation
7. use your dictionary
8. buy the newspaper
9. go to the movies
10. check your e-mail

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 85

 EXERCISE 12 Linda has a list to remind her of the things she has to do on a
regular basis. Write questions and answers about her activities.

● drive daughter to ballet lessons—Tu. Th

● pick up son at baseball practice—Mon. Wed
● shop for groceries—Sat
● take the dog for a haircut—3rd day of every month
● go to the beauty salon—5th day of every month
● visit Mom—Fri

● go to the gym—Mon. Wed. Fri morning

● prepare the kids’ lunches—Mon to Fri
● change the oil in the cai—^Jan. April. July. Oct

EXAMPLE How often does she drive her daughter to ballet lessons?
She drives her daughter to ballet lessons twice a week.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

86 Lesson 3
EXERCISE [Q ABOUT YOU
Write a few sentences about a member of your family
or another person you know. Use frequency words.
EXAMPLE My sister never helps with the housework.
She sometimes leases dirty dishes in the sink.
She always gets good grades.

EXERCISE 9 Use the words in parentheses () to complete this conversation.

Put the words in the correct order. Use the correct form of the verb.

■|)) Let’s go to a movie tonight.

cDi.TRis B: I can’t. My mother always makes dinner for me on Fridays.
(example: makf/iiluiiys^
If 1 don’t visit her, she And if I don’t call her,
(I complain/mxialiy)
she worries.

A: her?
(2 Jo/hou/ofien/you/call)
B:
13 1/ei-erj day/call her)
A: Why do you call her so often?
B: She’s old now, and she lonely.
(4 o/jen/Jv)
A: Well, invite your mother to go to the movies.
B: Thanks, but she has a favorite TV show on Friday
nights. She it.
(5
A: go out?
(6 do/ever/she)
B: She . She prefers to stay home.
(7 rarety/Jo)
She likes to cook, knit, and watch TV.

A: Is she a good cook?

B: Not really. She the same

/S usually/cook)

thing every week: chicken on Friday, fish on Saturday

meatloaf on Sunday . . . Her routine
(9 cfuinje/net«r)
Only Mother’s Day is different.

(continued)

Frequency Words witli the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 87

 A: What on Mother’s Day?
(iO-jou/do/usiiaUy)
B: My sister and I her flowers and take her to a
(Jl iisudlljAiy*
restaurant.

A: Does she like that?

B: Not really. She , “Don’t waste your money,

(12 iisuaUy/sayl
Flowers in a day or two. And my cooking is
(13 die/alunysl
better than restaurant food.

A: hard to please?
114 he/she/always}
B: Yes, she is.
A: satisfied?
(15 beAhc/et’er)

B: Not usually. She. I don’t want Mother’s Day

(16 ii(tuijs/sny)
once a year. I want it every day.”

EXERCISE 15 A student wrote a composition about the Fourth of July. The teacher
underlined the student's mistakes. Correct these mistakes.

My favorite holiday in the U.S. is the Fourth of July. My

always puts
family piitfi always an American flag in front of the house.
(I'.xumpli’)
Always my friends and I get together for a barbecue. We cook usually
(J) (2)

hamburgers and hot dogs on the grill. Sometimes we cook fried chicken

and steaks. The men in the family usually cookinL^ (Rarely they cook
(3J (-U

the rest of the year!) We usually have the barbecue at my house, but
sometimes we’re have the barbecue in a park. We always has a wonderful
(51 ~W

dinner; everyone brings a different dish. My mother always bake a

(7)

delicious apple pie.

Our city always has a parade at the Fourth of July from noon ^
(8) (9)

one o’clock. In the night, we usually go to see the fireworks at the main
UO)

park. The park always is crowded. The weather is usually nice, but ids
(ID (ill

88 Lesson 3
 sometimes rains and the fireworks show is canceled. When that
hapj3
we are
very disappointed. Luckily, that seldom happens.
Most businesses and schools is closed on the Fourth of lulv The
(N)

library, banks, and offices always are closed. I’m never work on this
(J5) 06J

holiday, but my brother is a police officer and he sometimes work on the

(!7>

Fourth of July. Some businesses, such as sunermarkets. stavs onen for

118)

half the day. People often forjjets to buy something and need to get some
last-minute items.

I always look forward to this holiday because I see all my family and

we 1^ a lot of fun together. Also my birthday is on July and I get a lot of

ai)

presents.

Summary of Lesson 3

1. Frequency Words:

Most frequent always 100%

i
usually
often
sometimes
T
rarely/seldom
Least Frequent never 0%

2. The Position of Frequency Words:

After THE verb be: He is always late.

Before A M.AIN VERB: I usually walk to work.

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 89

 3. The Position of Frequency Expressions:
Every day I watch TV.
I watch TV every day.
4. Frequency Questions and Answers:
Do you ever wear a suit? 1 seldom do.
Are you ever bored in class? Yes, I sometimes am.
How often do you go to the library? About once a month.
5. Review prepositions of time on page 82. Review the simple present
tense in Lessons 1 and 2.

Editing Advice

1. Put the frequency word in the correct place.

am never

1 never-am bored in class.

I always
Always 1 drink coffee in the morning.

2. Don’t separate the subject and the verb with a frequency phrase.
once in a while
She once in n while visits her grandmother. A

Every other day we

Wc-cvcry other day write a composition.

3. Don’t use a negative verb with never.

do

Do you ever take the bus to school? No, I never don’t.

We never don’t eat in class.

4. Use ever in questions. Answer the question with a frequency word.

sometimes

Do you ever listen to the radio in the morning? Yes, 1 ever do.

90 Lesson 3
Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
I always celebrate
I m not married and I don’t have a boyfriend, but I’m alwoyo celebrate
C
Valentine’s Day. It’s always a special day for me: a day of friendship.
faamplt)

1 never don’t buy cards. I usually make my own cards. I’m never mail the
II' (’) (3)

cards. Always I visit my friends and give them my cards personally. It’s
important to tell friends that we love them. What often do you tell
(5)

your friends that you love them? Do you once in a while tell them?
(6)

Do you tell them

(7)
every day? Probably not. Once a year, it’s a good idea
(8)

to tell them. Do you think ever about this? I always am.

(9) n6i

Lesson 3 Test/Review

PART O This is a conversation between two students. Fill in the blanks to

complete the conversation.

16
A: Who your English teacher?
(I'lampit)
B: His name David.
(/)
A: David?
(2)

B: Yes. 1 like him very much,

A: he wear a suit to class?
(3)

B: No, he He always jeans and running shoes.

(4) 15)
A: 7

(6)
B: He about 60 years old.
(7)

(continued)

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 91

 A: your language?
(S)
Polish and Russian.
B: No. He doesn’t speak Spani,sh. But he (9)

And English, of course.

A: often does your class meet?
(10)

B: It meets three days a week: Monday, Wednesday, and Friday,

A: My class two days a week: Tuesday and Thursday.
(li)

B: Tell me about your English teacher.

A: Her name Dr. Misko. She never jeans to class.
(12) (13)

She wears a dress or suit. She my

(14) (15)

language. She only English.

(16)

B: Do you like her?

A: Yes, but she . a lot of homework and tests,
(17)
B: does she give a test?
(IS)

A: Once a week. She gives a test every Friday. 1 like tests.

(19)

B: My teacher sometimes teaches us American songs (20)

your

teacher you American songs?

(21) (22)

A: No, she never

(23)
7
B: What book —
(24)

A: My class uses GTammar in Context.

7
B: What
(25)

A: “Context” means the words that help you understand a new word or idea.
7
B: How
(26)
A: C-O-NT-E-XT.

PART Q Fill in the blanks with the correct preposition.

on
EXAMPLE Many people go to church Sundays.

1. We have classes the evening.

2. Valentine’s Day is February.
3. Valentine’s Day is _ February 14.
4. A news program begins 6 o’clock.

5. I watch TV night.

92 Lesson 3
 6. We have vacation the summer.

7. Many Americans work 9 5 o’clock.

8. I drink coffee the morniny.
9. I study the afternoon.

PART Q Review the Editing Advice sections in Lessons 1 and 2. Then read this
student's composition for mistakes with the shaded words. If the
shaded words are correct, write C. Add the verb be where necessary,

is teaches

My English teacher Barbara Nowak. She ^aeh grammar and

composition at City College. She very nice, but she’s very strict. She give
(1) (2) f3)

a lot of homework, and we take a lot of tests. English’s hard for me.
<4) (5)

Every day, at the beginning of the class, she takes attendance and
16) (7)

we hand in our homework. Then she’s explains the grammar. We do

(8) (9) ” (10)
exercises in the book. The book have a lot of exercises. Most exercises is
'Ill (121

easy, but some are hard. Sometimes we says the answers out loud, but
113}

sometimes we write the answers. Sometimes the teacher asks a student to

(W (15)

write the answers on the board.

The students like Barbara because she make the class interesting. She
(16) (17)

brings often songs to class and we learn the words. Sometimes we watch
fl8) (19) (20)

a movie in class. Always I enjoy her lessons.

(21i

After class 1 sometimes going to her office if 1 want more help.

(22)

She very kind and always try to help me.

(23) (24)

Barbara dresses very informally. Sometimes she wears a skirt, but

(25) (26)

she wears usually jeans. She about 35 years old, but she’s looks like a
(27) (28) (29)

teenager. (In my country, never a teacher wear jeans.)

(30)

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 93

 1 (31)
very happy with my teacher. She understand
(32)
the problems of a
foreigner because she’s also a foreigner. She’s comes from Poland, but she
® (33) 04)

speaks English very well. She know

(36)
it’s hard to learn another language.
(35)

Expansion
Classroom
ActivitisS O Find a partner. Interview your partner about one of his or her
teachers, friends, or relatives. Ask about this person's usual activities.
EXAMPLE A: What’s your math teacher’s name?
B: Her name is Kathy Carlson.
A: Does she give a lot of homework?
B: No, she doesn’t.
A: What does she usuallywear to class?
B: She usually wears a skirt and blouse.
A: Docs she ever wear jeans to class?
B: No, she never does.

© In a small group or with the entire class, use frequency words to

talk about the activities of a famous person (the president, a singer,
an actor, etc.).
EXAMPLE The president of the U.S. often meets with leaders of other countries.

0 Find a partner. Talk about a spedal holiday that you and your fam
ily celebrate. Ask your partner questions about the date of the holiday,
food, clothing, preparations, activities, and so on.
EXAMPLE A: We celebrate the Lunar New Year.

B: Do you wear special clothes?

A: Yes, we do.
B: What kind of clothes do you wear?

O Look at the list of Linda's activities on page 86. Write a list to

remind yourself of things you do on a regular basis. Find a partner.
Compare your list to your partner's list.

94 Lesson 3
Talk
A JOUt It In the left column in the following table is a list of common customs
in the U.S. Do people in your native country or cultural group have
similar customs? If so, put a check (^) in Column A. If not, put a
check (■/) in Column B. Discuss your answers in a group.

A B
SIMILAR DIFFERENT
CUSTOM IN CUSTOM IN
MY NATIVE MY NATIVE
COUNTRY COUNTRY
OR CUL OR CUL
TURAL TURAL
AMERICAN CUSTOMS GROUP GROUP

1. Americans often say, “Have a nice day.

2. When someone sneezes, Americans usually say, “Bless
you.

3. Americans often ask, “How are you?” People usually

reply, “I’m fine, thanks. How are you?”
4. Americans rarely visit their friends without calling first.
5. Americans are often in a hurry. They rarely have free time.
6. Americans often eat popcorn in a movie theater.
7. Americans often eat in fast-food restaurants.

8. Americans often say, “OK.

9. Americans often wear shorts and sandals in the summer.

10. Americans often listen to MP3 players.

11. Banks in the U.S. often have a time/
temperature sign.

12. American restaurants usually have salt and pepper

shakers on the table.

13. When a radio or TV breaks down, Americans often buy a

new one. They rarely try to repair it.

14. Americans often send greeting cards to close friends

and relatives for birthdays, anniversaries, holidays, and
illnesses.

15. The Sunday newspaper often has store coupons.

16. There is a special day for sweethearts.

Frequency Words with the Simple Present Tense; Prepositions of Time 95

Write
About It 0 Write about one of your teachers. Describe your teacher and write
about his or her classroom behavior and activities.

0 Write about a holiday that you celebrate. Explain how you

celebrate this holiday. Or write about how you celebrate your birthday
or another special day.

EXAMPLE

The Day of the Dead

The Day of the Dead is an important holiday in my country,
Mexico.On this day, we go to the cemeteryto visit the graves
of our dead relatives.We clean the graves and bring flowers.
We also bring food and eat at the cemetery...

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

^ please visit our Web site.

96 Lesson 3
Lesson '

4
Grammar
Singular and Plural
There + Be + Noun

Articles and Quantity

Words

Context
Americans and Where

!* t
Americans and Where They Live^
Before
You Reac 1. Do you know anyone who lives alone?
2. Does your family own a house or rent an apartment?

Read the following Web article. Pay special attention to plural nouns.
CD 1, TR 16

htcnt/Aw-w.wel'sicc’rcnJing-coin

There are over 300 million people in the United States.

● The average family has 3.19 people.
● 6% of children live in households run by one or both grandparents.
● 68% of children live with two parents.
● 16% of males 25-34 live at
home with one or both parents.
● 9% of females 25-34 live at
home with one or both parents.
● 27% of Americans live alone.
(Compare this figure to the
percentage in 1940—8%.)
● 39% of households have a dog.
Ka-T' — ● 31% of households have a cat.

Homes:
● 67% of American families own their homes.
' ● 25% of homeowners are over 65 years old.
● The price of homes depends on the city where you live. Some cities,
such as San Francisco, Boston, San Diego, Honolulu, and New York,
have very expensive homes.
● The average American moves a lot. In a five-year period, 46% of
Americans change their address. Renters move more chan owners.
Young people move more than older people.
7 ■* >1^1

'Statistics arc from the 2007 American C;omnmnic>- Surve> cimJuctcd hy the U.S. Census Bureau.

98 Lesson 4
4.1 Singular and Plural—An Overview
EXAMPLES
EXPLANATION

Some kids Live with one parent. Singular means one. Plural means more than
Some kids live with two parents. one. Plural nouns usually end in -s or-es.
Everyone pays taxes.
Some young men and women Live with their Some plural forms are irregular. They don't
parents. end in -s or -es.
Some children Live with their grandparents. man —> men

woman —> women

child - children

EXERCISE a Tell whether the statement is true (T) or false (f).

EXAMPLE
Homes in Boston are very expensive. T

1.
Most American children live with their grandparents.
2. More Americans live alone now than in 1940.
3. Most people rent an apartment.
4. Americans stay in the same house for their entire lives.
5. Cats are more popular than dogs in American homes.
6.
Families in the U.S. are small (fewer than five people).
7. Most children live with both parents.
8.
The price of homes depends on where you live.
9. Most homeowners are over 65 years old.
10.
More males 25-34 than females 25-34 live with their parents.
11. Homes in San Francisco are very expensive.

Singular and Plural; There; + Be + Noun; Articles and Quanrit>' Words 99

4.2 Spelling of Regular Noun Plurals
EXAMPLE WORDS PLURAL ADDITION PLURAL FORM
WORD ENDING

bee + -s bees
Vowel
banana bananas

pie pies

bed + -s beds
Consonant
pm pins
month months

class classes
55, sh, ch, X + -es

dish dishes
church churches
box boxes

Vowel+ y boy + -5 boys

day days
monkey monkeys

lady ladies
Consonant +y y+ -les
story stories

party parties

Vowel + 0 patio + -5 patios

stereo stereos

radio radios

Consonant + o mosquito + -es mosquitoes

tomato tomatoes

potato potatoes

Exceptions: photos, pianos, solos, altos, sopranos, autos, avocados

f or fe leaf -ves leaves
calf calves
knife + -ves knives

Exceptions: beliefs, chiefs, roofs, chefs

EXERCISE Q Write the plural form of each noun.

EXAMPLES leaf leaves

toy toys

1. dish 6. girl _
2. country 7. bench

3. half 8. box

4. book 9. shark

5. boy _ 10. stereo

100 Lesson 4
 11. knife 22. roach

12. story 23. fox

13. sofa 24. house _
14. key 25. turkey.
15. movie 26. chicken

16. squirrel — 27. wolf.

17. mosquito 28. dog _

18. lion 29. bath.

19. fly 30. pony

20. cow 31. duck
21. table 32. moth

4.3 Pronunciation of Plural Nouns

The plural ending has three pronunciations: /s/, jzf, and /az/.
PRONUNCIATION RULE EXAMPLES

N Pronounce /s/ after voiceless lip—lips

sounds: /p, i, k, f, 0/. cat—cats
rock—rocks
cuff—cuffs
month—months

N Pronounce /z/ after voiced cab—cabs can—cans

sounds: /b, d. g, v, m, n, g, I, r/ lid—lids thing—things

and all vowels. bag—bags bill—bills
stove—stoves car—cars

sum—sums bee—bees

/az/ Pronounce /az/ when the base bus—buses dish—dishes

form ends in s, ss, ce, se, sh, ch, class—classes beach—beaches
ge, and x. place—places garage—garages
cause—causes tax—taxes

EXERCISE B Go back to Exercise 2 and pronounce the plural form of each word.

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantiq’ Words 101
4.4 Irregular Noun Plurals
SINGULAR PLURAL EXPLANATION

man men Some nouns have a vowel change in the plural form.
woman women Singular: Do you see that old woman?
tooth teeth Plural: Do you see those young women?
foot feet
goose geese

sheep sheep Some plural forms are the same as the singular form.
fish fish Singular: I have one fish in my tank.
deer deer Plural: She has ten fish in her tank.

child children For some plurals, we change to a different form.

person people Singular: She has one child.
mouse mice Plural: They have two children.
pajamas Some words have no singular form.
clothes Examples: My pants are new. Do you like them?
pants/slacks My glasses are dirty. I can't see with
(eye)glasses them.
scissors

dozen Exact numbers use the singular form.

hundred Examples: The U.S. has over 300 million people.
thousand I need to buy two dozen eggs.
million

dozens The plural form of a number is not an exact number.

hundreds Examples: Thousands of people live alone.
thousands Millions of people live in New York City.
millions

Pronunciation Note:
You hear the difference between woman (singular) and women (plural) in the first syllable.
Listen to your teacher pronounce one woman and two women.
Language Note:
The plural of person can also be persons, but people is more common.

EXERCISE El The following nouns have an irregular plural form. Write the plural,
men
EXAMPLE man

1. foot 5. fish

2. woman 6. mouse

3. policeman 7. sheep
4. child 8.tooth

102 Lesson 4
EXERCISE B Fill in the blanks with the correct plural form of the noun in
parentheses ().
EXAMPLE Some people like to live alone.
●Pltsoh)

1. Most in the U.S. own a house.

f/umily)

2. The U.S. has over .300 million

(fxrrson)

3. Americans move many

([imi; J

4. Some earn
more money than their
(uumim)

l/iiuhanJ)

5. are very expensive in some

(Home)

Idly)

6. Divorce is very high in some

(cuK nirs)

1. Some live with only one parent.

(chilJ)

8. How many square does your house or

(foot)

apartment have?

9. Some live with

(JciJ) ('jjriimi/mrent)

10. The average family has 3.19

(prison)

11. Some apartments have a problem with

(mouse)

12. are popular in the U.S.

(pel)

13. are more common than

(Jog)

(cai)

14. are interesting to watch.

(fish)

Singular and Plural; T/iert.’ + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity’ Words 103
Finding an Apartment
Before
You Read 1. Do you lis'e in a house, an apartment, or a dorm?- Do you live alone?
2. Do you like the place where you live? Why or why not?

Read the following Web article. Pay special attention to there + be

CD 1, TR 17 followed by singular and plural nouns.

ft
om + ● / /\\*vv'vV-U*r*l^<» i ti? * rtiru liner ri’tm
i
There are several ways to find an apartment. One way is to look in the
newspaper. There is an “Apartments for Rent” section in the back of
the newspaper. There are many ads for apartments. There are also ads
for houses for rent and houses for sale. Many newspapers also put their
listings online.
Did You Another way to find an apartment is by looking at the buildings in the
Know? ^ neighborhood where you want to live. There are often “For Rent” signs
Nowadays, people on the front of the buildings. There is usually a phone number on the
searchforapartments sign. You can call and ask for information about the apartment that you
online using Web j are interested in. You can ask;
sites such as A
Craigslist.org. ● How much is the rent?
● Is heat included?
● What floor is the apartment on?
● Is there an elevator?
● How many bedrooms are there in the apartment?
● How many closets are there in the apartment?
● Is the apartment available’ now?
If an apartment interests you, you can make an appointment to see
it. When you go to see the apartment, you should ask some more
questions, such as the following:
● Is there a lease?'’ How long is the lease?
● Is there a janitor or manager?

short for ciomutc^rj, n building where stud cl U' live.

‘Atiiilcihle mc.ins ready to Use mm'.
*A ieuv is a conmet K●t^^ccn the owner (landUirJ or l'.uidlaJy) and (he rcnrcr ((el^ant). It telK how mo<h the rent is, him- Umc
the tenant can >tav ii"! the a|\trtmont, and other

104 Lesson 4
 renovated kitchen

bathroom
''S bedroom
,'s:
<r.

/-.

/.

Ci

O,

air-conditioning

hardwood floors

● Is there a parking space for each tenant? Is it free, or do I have to pay

extra?
● Are there smoke detectors? (In many places, the law says chat the
landlord must put a smoke detector in each apartment and in
the halls.) L
● Is there a laundry room in the building? Where is it?
The landlord may ask you a few questions, such as;
● How many people are there in your family?
● Do you have any pets?
You should check over the apartment carefully before you sign the lease.
If there are some problems, you should talk to the landlord to see if he
will take care of them before you move in.

LJ
f
1 * ' A

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Article and Quantity Words 105
4,5 Using There + Is/Are
We use there + is or there + are to introduce a subject into the conversation
when we show location or time.
EXAMPLES

Affirmative There is a/an/one Singular Subject Location/Time

Singular There IS a janitor in my building,
There IS an air conditioner in the bedroom,
There IS one dryer in the basement,
There IS a rent increase this year.
Note: There's is the contraction for there is.

Negative There isn't a/an Singular Subject Location/Time

Singular There isn't a back door in my apartment,
There isn't an elevator in the building.
There's no Singular Subject Location/Time
There's no balcony in my apartment,
There's no heat this month.

Affirmative There are Plural Word Plural Subject Location/Time

Plural There are several windows in the bedroom,
There are many children in the building,
There are some cats in the building,
There are two closets in the hall,
There are curtains on the windows.
Note: We don't write a contraction for there are.

Negative There aren't any Plural Subject Location/Time

Plural There aren't shades on the windows,
any
There aren't any new tenants this month.

There are no Plural Subject Location/Time

There are no cabinets in the kitchen.

Language Note:
1. When two nouns follow there, use a singular verb (is) if the first noun is singular. Use a
plural verb (are) if the first noun is plural.
There is a closet in the bedroom and two closets in the hall.
There are two closets in the hall and one closet in the bedroom.

There is a washer and dryer in the basement.

2. There never introduces a specific or unique noun. The definite article (the) indicates a
specific or unique noun.
Wrong: There's the Eiffel Tower in Paris.
Right: The Eiffel Tower is in Paris.

106 Lesson 4
 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Use the words given to make a statement about the
place where you live (house or apartment). If you live in a dorm,
use Exercise 7 instead.

EXAMPLES carpet / in the living room

There’s a carpet in the living room.

H trees / in front of the building

H There are no trees in front of the building.

1. porch I

2. blinds / on the windows

3. door / in every room

4. window / in every room
porch 5. lease

6. closet/in the living room

I
rr

7. number/ on the door of blinds

the apartment or house ●>>

a 8. overhead light / in every room

/● V ■

■ /
9. microwave oven / in the kitchen (.

10. back door

\
11. fireplace \ /..

12. smoke detector s

^ . I
fireplace
smoke detector

EXERCISE D ABOUT YOU Make a statement about your dorm and dorm room
with the words given. (If you live in an apartment or house, skip
this exercise.)
EXAMPLES window / in the room
There’s a window in the room.

curtains / on the window

There are no curtains on the window.
There are shades.

1. closet / in the room 6. snack machines / in the dorm

m 2. two beds / in the room 7. noisy students / in the dorm

window shades 3. private bath / for every room 8. numbers / on the doors of the rooms
4. men and women / in the dorm 9. elevator(s) / in the dorm
5. cafeteria / in the dorm 10. laundry room / in the dorm

Singular and Plural; Thm + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 107
4.6 Questions and Short Answers Using There
Compare statements and questions with there. Observe short answers.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Singular There is a laundry room in Question word order:

Statement the building. Is + there + a/an + singular noun...?
Short answers:
Yes/Ho Is there an elevator in the
Yes, there is. (no contraction)
Question building?
No, there isn't, or No, there's not.
Short Answer Yes, there is.

Plural There are some children in the Question word order:

Statement building. Are + there + {any) + plural noun...?
We often use any to introduce a
Yes/No Are there (any) children on plural noun in a yes/no question.
Question your floor? Short answers:

Short Answer No, there aren't. Yes, there are.

No, there aren't.

Plural There are ten apartments in my Question word order:

Statement building. How many + plural noun + are there...?

Information How many apartments are there

Question in your building?

Short Answer Thirty.

EXERCISE 8 ABOUT YOU Ask and answer questions with there and the words
given to find out about another student's apartment and building.
(If you live in a dorm, use Exercise 9 instead.)
EXAMPLES a microwave oven / in your apartment
A: Is there a microwave oven in your apartment?
B: No, there isn’t,
closets / in the bedroom
A: Are there any closets in the bedroom?
B: Yes. There’s one closet in the bedroom.

1. children / in your building

2. a dishwasher / in the kitchen

108 Lesson 4
 3. a yard / in front of your building
4. trees / in front of your building
5. a basement / in the building
6. a laundry room / in the basement
7. a janitor / in the building
8. noisy neighbors / in the building
9. nosy’ neighbors / in the building
10. an elevator / in the building
11. parking spaces / for the tenants
12. a lot of closets / in the apartment
13. how many apartments / in your building
14. how many parking spaces / in front of your building

EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Ask and answer questions with there and the words
given to find out about another student's dorm. (If you live in an
apartment or house, skip this exercise.)
EXAMPLE a bicycle room
A: Is there a bicycle room in your dorm?
B: No, there isn’t.

1. married students

2. private rooms
3. a bicycle room
4. a computer room
5. an elevator

6. a bulletin board

7. graduate students
8. a quiet place to study
9. an air conditioner / in your room
10. parking lot/ for your dorm
11. how many rooms / in your dorm
12. how many floors / in your dorm

A nosy pcrsem is a per.'^'u who to kniAS CNcryone’s lni>jnc>>.

Sin-jular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantiq- Words 109
 EXERCISE 10 Use the words given to ask the teacher a question about his or her
office. Your teacher will answer.

EXAMPLES pencil sharpener

A: Is there a pencil sharpener in your office?
B; No, there isn’t,
books

A: Are there any books in your office?

B: Yes. There are a lot of books in my office.
1. phone 7. calendar

2. file cabinet 8. bookshelves

3. photos of your family 9. plants

4. radio 10. pictures
5. copy machine 11. fax machine

6. windows 12. computer

EXERCISE {Q A student is calling about an apartment for rent. Fill in the blanks
with there is, there are, is there, are there, and other related words
to complete this phone conversation between the student (S) and
the landlord (L).

S: I’m calling about an apartmentfor rent on GroverStreet,

There’s
coi, TR18 L: We have two apartmentsavailable, a four-room

apartment on the first floor and a three-room apartment on the fourth

floor. Which one are you interested in?
S: I prefer the smaller apartment, an elevator in
(1)
the building?
L: Yes, there is. How many people in your family?
(2)
S: It’s just for me. I live alone. I’m a student. I need a quiet apartment. Is
this a quiet building?
£ L: Oh, yes no kids in the building. This is a very
Oj
quiet building.
S: That’s good. I have a car. parking spaces?
(4)
L: Yes twenty spaces in the back of the building.
(5)

S: How apartments in the

(6) (7)
building?

110 Lesson 4
 L: 30 apartments.
(8)

S: Twenty parking spaces for thirty apartments? Then

(9)
enough spaces for all the tenants.
L: Don’t worry. Not everyone has a car. Parking is on a first-come,
first-served basis.^ And plenty of' spaces on the
UOi
street.

S: a laundry room in the building?

mi

L: Yes. There are washers and dryers in the basement.

S: How much is the rent?

L: It’s $850 a month.

S: I hear a dog. Is that your dog?
L: Yes, but don't worry. 1 don’t live in the building
(12)
no dogs in the building.
S: When can I see the apartment?
L: How about tomorrow at six o’clock?
S: That’ll be fine. Thanks.

4.7 There vs. They and Other Pronouns

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

There's a janitor m the building. He's in the basement. To introduce a new noun,
we use there + is/are.
There's a Little girl in the next She's cute. When we use this noun
apartment. again as the subject of
another sentence, we use
There's an empty apartment on the It's available now. he, she, it, or they.
first floor.

There are two washing machines. They're in the basement.

Pronunciation Note: We pronounce there and they're exactly the same.
Spelling Note: Don't confuse there and they're.
There are dogs in the next apartment.
They're very friendly.

'A/ii3i«>t7K-, fmi-tmrJ hasi' miMiis that peopli- uh,> arrive firrt w ill net ximechinc lir-t (parking sp.ieer, llieater tickcir,
classe^ ar regirtration ore.).
'Plenry of mean.' "a lot!)(."

Singular and Plural; Tforc + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 111
 EXERCISE 12 Fill in the blanks with there's, there are, it's, or they're.
EXAMPLE There’s a small apartment for rent in my building,
It’s on the fourth floor.

1. two apartments for rent. not on

the same floor.

2. a laundry room in the building. in

the basement.
for
3. The parking spaces are in the back of the building,
the tenants with cars.

4. The parking spaces don’t cost extra. free for the tenants.

5. The apartment is small on the fourth floor.

6. The building has 30 apartments a big building,

7. The student wants to see the apartment. on Gro\-er
Street.

8. The building is quiet because no kids in

the building.
9. How much is the rent? $850 a month.
10. Is the rent high? No, — not high,
11. no dogs in the building.
12. a quiet building.

EXERCISE 13 Ask a question about this school using there and the words given.
Another student will answer. If the answer is "yes," ask a question
with where.

EXAMPLE lockers

A: Are there any lockers at this school?

B: Yes, there are.
A: Where are they?
B: They’re near the gym.

1. a library 8. tennis courts

2. vending machines 9. dormitories

3. public telephones 10. a parking lot

4. a computer room 11. a bookstore

5. a cafeteria 12. copy machines

6. a gym 13. a student lounge
7. a swimming pool 14. an auditorium

112 Lesson 4
Calling About an Apartment
Before
You Read
1. Does your neighborhood have more apartment buildings or houses?
2. Do you prefer to live alone, with a roommate, or with your family? Why?

Read the following phone conversation between a student (S) and

CD 1, TR 19 the manager (M) of a building. Pay special attention to the definite
article (the), the indefinite articles {a, an), and indefinite quantity
words {some, any).

S: Hello? 1 want to speak with the landlord.

M: I’m the manager ot the building. Can I help you?
S: I need to find a new apartment.
M: Where do you live now?
S; I live in a big apartment on Wright
Street. I have a roommate, but he’s
graduating, and I need a smaller
apartment. Are there any small
apartments for rent in your building?
M: There’s one.

S; What floor is it on?

M: It’s on the third floor.

S: Does it have a bedroom?

M: No. It’s a studio apartment. It has a

living room and a kitchen.

S: Is the living room big?

M: So-so.'

S: Does the kitchen have a stove and a refrigerator?

M: Yes. The refrigerator is old, but it works well. The stove is pretty new.

S; Can I see the apartment?

M: I have a question for you first. Do you have a dog? We don’t permit
dogs. Some dogs make a lot of noise.

miMns incJium or averni*c. (continued)

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity' Words 113
 S; I don’t have a dog.

M: I’m happy to hear chat.

S: But I have a snake.

M: A snake?

S; Snakes are quiet.

M: Yes, but.. .

S; Don’t worry. I keep the snake in a glass box.

M: I hope the box is always closed.
S: It is. I only open it to feed the snake. I feed it mice.
M: Oh.

S: When can I see the apartment?

M: I have to speak to the landlord. I’m not sure if you can have snakes
and mice in the apartment.

4.8 Articles with Definite and Indefinite Nouns

Singular
INDEFINITE DEFINITE EXPLANATION

I live in a big The building is near We introduce a singular noun with the indefinite
building. the college. articles (o or an). When we refer to this noun
There's a janitor in The janitor lives on again, we use the definite article the.
the building. the first floor.

May I speak to the We use the before a singular noun if this noun
landlord? is the only one or if the speaker and listener
He lives on the third share an experience and are referring to the
floor. same one. (In this case, they are talking about
the same building.)
The basement is dirty.

114 Lesson 4
Plural
INDEFINITE DEFINITE EXPLANATION

My building has The washing We introduce a plural noun with some, any, or
(some) washing machines are in
no article. When we refer to this noun again,
machines. the basement. we use the definite article the.
Are there (any) Where are the diyers?
dryers?
The tenants are We use the before a plural noun if the speaker
angry. and the listener share the same experience.
The washing machines (In this case, they are talking about the same
don't work. building.)

EXERCISE 14 Fill in the blanks in the conversations between two students.

Use the, a, an, some, or any.
CONVERSATION 1 A: Is there a cafeteria at this school?
ftarampk’)
B: Yes, there is.
A: Where’s cafeteria?
(/)
B: It's on first floor.
(2)
A: Are there snack machines in cafeteria?
13) (4)

B: Yes, there are.

A: I want to buy sandwich.

(5)
B: sandwich machine is out of order today.
(6)

CONVERSATION 2 A: Is there bookstore for this college?

(7)

B: Yes, there is.

A: Where’s bookstore?
(8)
B; It’s on Green Street.

A: 1 need to buy English dictionary.

(9)

B: Today’s holiday. bookstore is closed today.

UO) (ID

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 115
 EXERCISE Fill in the blanks in the conversation about apartment problems.
Use the, a, an, some, or any.

A: I have a
problem in my apartment.
(exiimplt)
B: What’s - problem?
landlord doesn’t provide enough
(2)
heat. 1 have to wear sweater or
(3)

overcoat all the time in the

i4)

apartment.

B: Why don’t you talk to building

(5)

manager? Maybe heating system is

broken. If he doesn’t solve problem
n)

you can send letter to

(8) (9)

Department of Housing,
A: That’s good idea. There’s one more problem.
(JO)

1 have neighbor who has small dog.

(ID (12)

dog harks all the time when neighbor isn’t

(13) (14)

home. We share wall, and I can hear dog

(15) (16)

barking through wall.

(17)
B: Talk to neighbor. Tell him there are dog services. For
(18)

price, someone can go to his house every day and play

(19)
with dog and take it out for a walk.
(20)

A: I don’t think he wants to pay for this service.

B: Then talk to _ landlord.Tell him about problem.
(2D (22)

A: Do you have problems in your apartment?

(23)

B: Of course we have problems. But we have very

(24) (25)

nice landlady. She lives in building. If there’s

(26) (27)

problem, 1 send her e-mail, and she usually takes care of it

(28)

right away.

116 Lesson 4
4.9 Making Generalizations
A generalization says that something is true of all members of a group.
SINGULAR PLURAL EXPLANATION

A snake is quiet. Snakes are quiet. To make a generalization about the subject, use
A dog makes Dogs make noise. the indefinite article (o or on) with a singular
noise.
subject or no article with a plural subject.
I don't like snakes. To make a generalization about the object,
Snakes eat mice. use the plural form with no article.

EXERCISE 16 The following sentences are generalizations. Change the subject

from singular to plural. Make other necessary changes.
EXAMPLE A single parent has a difficult life.
Single parents have a difficult life.

1. A house in San Diego is expensive.

2. A homeowner pays property tax.

3. A dog is part of the family.

4. A renter doesn’t have the freedom to make changes.

5. An owner has the freedom to make changes.

EXERCISE f9 Use the noun in parentheses () to give general information about

your native country or hometown. Use the plural form with no article.
EXAMPLE (woman)
Generally, women don’t work outside the home in my native country.

1. young (person) 5. (house)

2. old (person) 6. poor (person)
3. (woman) 7. (car)
4. (man) 8. (doctor)

Singular and l'’liirai; There + Be + Noun; Articie.s and Quantity Word 117
 EXERCISE Add a plural subject to make a generalization.
EXAMPLE Students need a cheap apartment.

1. need a big apartment,

2. don’t want to rent to people with pets,
3. sometimes make a lot of noise in an apartment,
4. need an apartment with an elevator,
5. are sometimesnoisy and sometimesnosy,
6. like houses with a garden,
7. move a lot from place to place,
8. are expensive in the U.S.

EXERCISE 19 ■ ABOUT YOU Use the plural form of each noun to tell if you like or
don't like the following in the place where you live,
EXAMPLE tall building
1 like tall buildings.

1. white wall 6. blind on the window

2. curtain on the window 7. high ceiling

3. picture on the wall 8. bright light
4, plant 9. rug
5. friendly neighbor 10. hardwood floor

curtains hardwood floors

118 Le.sson 4
EXERCISE SS ABOUT YOU
Ask Do you like + the plural form of the noun. Another
student will answer.
EXAMPLES child

A: Do you like children?

B: Yes, I do.
snake

A: Do you like snakes?

B: No, I don’t.

1. cat 7. comic book

2. dog 8. computer
3. hamburger 9. computer game
4. American car 10. strict teacher
5. American movie 11. American supermarket
6. fashion magazine 12. American textbook

EXERCISE 21 This is a conversation between two students. Fill in the blanks with
the, a, an, some, any, or X for no article.
A: Is there a
copy machine in our library?
(I'vmnpli'l

B: Yes. There are several copy machines in library.

(I)

A: Are copy machines free?

(2)
B: No. You need to use nickel'’ for copy machines.
(3) (4)

What do you want to copy?

A: 1 want to copy my classmate’s textbook.

B: The whole thing? Why?

A: textbooks in the U.S. are too expensive,
(5)

B: There’s law against copying an entire book,

16)

A: What’s law?
17)

B: You can’t copy books without permission from the publisher.

(6)

A: In my country, we copy books all the time,

(9)

B: But it’s illegal. People who copy books, CDs, and movies
110)

without permission are called “pirates.

'A nicWI is a fiw-cvni coin.

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Arciclc.s and Quantity Words 119
 Summary of Lesson 4

1. Singular and Plural

Regular Irregular

boy—boys man—men

box—boxes woman—women

story—stories child—children
tomato—tomatoes foot—feet
wife—wives fish—fish

2. There + be
Tliere’s an empty apartment in my building.
There are two washing machines in the basement.
Are there any parking spaces?
3. Articles
● To introduce a new noun into the conversation:
SINGULAR I have a dog.
PLURAL 1 have (some) turtles.
I don’t have (any) birds.
● To talk about a previously mentioned noun:
SINGULAR I have a dog. The dog barks when the
letter carrier arrives.
PLUR.AL 1 have some turtles. 1 keep the turtles
in the bathroom.

● To talk about specific items or people from our experience:

SINGULAR The janitor cleans the basement once
a week.
PLURAL The tenants have to take out their
own garbage.
● To talk about the only one:
The president lives in Washington, D.C.
The Statue of Liberty is in New York.
● To make a generalization:
SINGULAR A dog has good hearing.
PLURAL Dogs have good hearing.
Statue of Liberty 1 like dogs.

120 I.cs'.ion 4
Editing Advice

1. People is a plural noun. Use a plural verb form.

arc

People in my country is very poor.

2. Don’t use the with a generalization.
0

The dogs are friendly animals.

3. Don’t confuse there with thej’re.

They're
I have two brothers. There in Florida.

4. Use there + is/are to introduce a new subject.

there are

In my class five students from Haiti.

A

5. Don’t confuse it’s and there’s.

There's

a closet in my bedroom.
6. Don’t confuse have and there.
There's
Have a closet in my bedroom.

7. Don’t use the + a unique noun

after there.

There-s-the Golden Gate Bridge

in California.

8. Don t use the with the first mention

of a noun when you and the
listener do not share a common
Golden Gate Bridge
experience with this noun.

I have the new watch.

9. Don’t use an apostrophe for a plural ending.

brothers
She has three brother’s.

Singular and Plural; Thoe + Be Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 121
Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

A: Let me show you around my new apartment.

C
B: It’s a big apartment.
There
A: It’s big enough for my family. They’re
(wiiinple)
are four bedrooms and two
bathrooms. Has a large closet in each bedroom, Let me show you my
ni
kitchen too.

B: Oh. It’s a new dishwasher in your kitchen.

<2)
A: It’s wonderful. You know how I hate to wash dishes.
'J)

B: Is there a microwave oven?

M)

A: No, there isn’t.

(5)

B: Are any washers and dryers for clothes?

(6)
A: Oh, yes. They’re
(7)
in the basement. In the laundry room are
(8)
five
washers and five dryers. I never have to wait.
B: There are a lot of people in your building?
19)
A: In my building 30 apartments.
(10)

B: Is a janitor in your building?

Ui)
A: Yes. There’s a very good janitor. He keeps the building very clean.
112)

B: I suppose this apartment costs a lot.

A: Well, yes. The rent (li)
is high. But I share the apartment
(14)
with my cousins.

122 Lesson 4
Lesson 4 Test/Review
PART 1 Write the plural form for each noun,
box boxes month child
card match, desk
foot shelf key
potato radio story
woman mouse bush

PART El Fill in the blanks with there, is, are, it, or they or a combination of
these words.

A: Are there
teumpli)
any people from your country in your building?
B: Yes. a few people from my country in my
(j;

building.. very friendly.

(2)

A: a laundry room in your building?

(3)

B: Yes,
(4)

A: Where the laundry room?

(5)

B: on the third floor.

(6)

A: any lockers in your apartment building?

(7)

B: Yes, there are. in the basement.

(8)

A: a bicycle room in your building?

(9)

B: Yes, there is. in the basement.

(10)

A: How many floors in your building?

til)

B: four floors and a basement.

(12)

A: an elevator in your building?

(13)

B: Yes. but very slow.

(M) (15)

I usually walk up the stairs.

Singular and Plural: There + Bl' + Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 123
 PART B Fill in the blanks with the, a, an, some, any, or X for no article.
A: Do you like your apartment?
B: No, I don’t.
A: Wlty not?
the
B: There are many reasons. First, I don’t like (exampW
janitor.

He’s impolite.
A: Anything else? Are there other problems?
(J)

B: Yes. I want to get dog.

(2)

A: So?

B: It’s not permitted. _ landlord says that dogs

(3) (4)

make a lot of noise.

A: Can you get cat?

(5)

B: Yes, but 1 don’t like cats.

(6)

A: Is your building quiet?

B: No. There are children in building. When
(7) (8)

I try to study, I can hear children in the next apartment.

19)

They watch TV all the time.

A: You need to find apartment in a different building.
(10)

B: 1 think you’re right.

124 Lesson 4
Expansion
Classroom
ActivitisS O Make a list of things you have, things you don't have but would
like to have, and things you don't need. Choose from the list below
and add any other items you can think of. Then find a partner and
compare lists.
a computer a house a credit card
a DVD player a diamond ring a speaker phone
a digital camera a CD player a cell phone
an encyclopedia an electric can opener a flat-screen TV
an electric toothbrush a microwave oven a letter opener
a pet a waterbed a hair dryer
a scale an electronic calendar an orange juice squeezer

bathroom scale orange juice squeezer

I have: 1 don’t have, but I 1 don’t need:

would like to have:

Discuss your chart with a partner. Tell why you need or don’t need some
things. Tell why you want some things that you don’t have.

Singular and Plural; There + Be -* Noun; Articles and Quantity Words 125
 Q People often use the newspaper to look for an apartment. The
Sunday newspaper has the most ads. Bring in a copy of the Sunday
newspaper. Look at the section of the newspaper that has apartments
for rent. Ask the teacher to help you understand the abbreviations.

0 What other sections are there in the Sunday newspaper? Work

with a partner and make a list of everything you can find in the
Sunday paper.
EXAMPLE There’s a TV schedule for this week’s programs.
There are a lot of ads and coupons.
There’s a crossword puzzle.

o Look at the information about two apartments for rent below. What
are some of the advantages and disadvantages of each one? Discuss
your answers with a partner or with the entire class.

Apartment 1 Apartment 2

a view of a park on a busy street

rent = $950 rent = $750

fifth floor (an elevator in the

third floor walk-up
building)
new kitchen with a dishwasher old appliances in the kitchen

pets not allowed pets allowed

hardwood floors a carpet in the living room
the owner lives in the building on
the janitor lives in the building the first floor

management controls the heat the tenant controls the heat

air conditioners in the bedroom

no air conditioners
and living room

faces north only faces east, south, and west

one-year lease no lease

large building—50 apartments a small building—6 apartments

washers and dryers on each floor laundry room in the basement

parking spaces on first-come,
first-served basis
a parking space for each tenant

126 Lesson 4
 0 Do you have a picture of your house, apartment, or apartment
building? Bring it to class and talk about it.

0 Find a partner and pretend that one of you is looking for an

apartment and the other person is the landlady, landlord, or manager.
Ask and answer questions about the apartment, the building, parking,
laundry, and rent. Write your conversation. Then read it to the class.

Talk
About It In a small group or with the entire class, discuss the following:
a. How do people rent apartments in your hometown? Is rent high? Is
heat usually included in the rent? Does the landlord usually live in
the building?
b. What are some differences between a typical apartment in this city
and a typical apartment in your hometown?

Write
About It 0 Write a description of a room or place that you like very much.
(Review prepositions in Lesson 1.)

0 Write a comparison of your apartment in this city and your

apartment or house in your hometown.

Two Apartments
There are many differences between my apartment
here and my apartment in Kiev. Ukraine, in my Kiev
apartment, there is a door in every room, in my
apartment here, only the bedrooms and bathrooms
have doors...

w For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

Singular and Plural; There + Be + Noun; Articles and Quantity' Words 127
Lesson

5
Grammar
Possession

Object Pronouns
Questions About the Subject

Context
Families and Names
Names

Before
You Read 1. Whar is your complete name? What do your friends call you?
2. Do you like your name?

Read the following Web article. Pay special attention to possessive

CD 1,TR 21
forms.

< ; ^ .wpbsite*readinQ.com/

Americans usually have three names: a first name, a middle name, and
a last name (or surname). For example, Marilyn Sue Ellis or Edward I
I

David Orleans. Some people use an initial when they sign their names: I

Marilyn S. Ellis, Edward D. Orleans. Not everyone has a middle name.

American women often change their last names when they get married.
For example, if Marilyn Ellis marries Edward Orleans, her name becomes
Did You Marilyn Orleans. Not all women follow this custom. Sometimes a woman
Know? 1 keeps her maiden name’ and adds her husband’s name, with or without
The five most a hyphen (-): For example, Marilyn EllisOrleans or Marilyn Ellis Orleans.
common last names I Sometimes a woman does not use her husband’s name at all. In this
in the U.S. are i: case, if the couple has children, they have to decide if their children will
Smith. Johnson, A use their father’s name, their mother’s name, or both. A man does not
Williams. Brown,
and Jones.
usually change his name when he gets married. I

Some people have their mother’s last name as a middle name: John
Fitzgerald Kennedy, Franklin Delano Roosevelt.-

Mark Robert Smith 3015

20 Light Way. Apt4E
DATE
New York, NY 10060

PAY TO THE
ORDER OF.

"7^ DOtURS

Choice Bank
MEMO

i:o;?3U5Ei7aSi: 0ia3Li5&7BSl01in* 3015

mtn*(/cn namd is a woinni^’.s family before she i*eis married.

TTresc are the names of ru\> Americati presidents.

130 Lesson 5
5.1 Possessive Form of Nouns

We use the possessive form to show ownership or relationship.

'noun ENDING EXAMPLES

Singular Noun Add apostrophe + s I use my father's last name.

father I don't use my mother's last name.
mother My dog's name is PeeWee.
dog
Plural Noun Ending in -s Add apostrophe only My parents' names are Ethel and Herman.
parents The boys' names are Ted and Mike.
boys
Irregular Plural Noun Add apostrophe + s What are your children's names?
children Marilyn and Sandra are women's names.
women

Names That End in -s Add apostrophe + s Do you know Mr. Harris's wife?
Mr. Harris Do you know Charles's daughter?
Charles
Note: Sometimes you will see only an
apostrophe when a name ends in s.
Do you know Charles' daughter?
Inanimate Objects Use "the of " The door of the classroom is closed.
the classroom Do not use apostrophe Washington College is the name of my
the school + s. school.

EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks with the possessive form of a noun to make
a true statement.

EXAMPLE I use my father’s [^st name.

1. I use my last name.

2. I don’t use my last name.
3. A married American woman often uses her . last name.
4. A married woman in my native culture uses her last name,
5. A single American woman usually uses her last name.
6. An American man rarely uses his _ last name.
7. President John F. Kennedy had his _ maiden name as a

middle name.

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 131

 EXERCISE Q Some of the following sentences can show possession with's or
Rewrite these sentences only. Write "no change" for the others.
EXAMPLES The teacher knows the names of the students.
The teacher knows the students’ names.

The door of the classroom is usually closed.

No change.

1. The teacher always corrects the homework of the students.

2. The name of the textbook is Grammar in Context.

3. The job of the teacher is to explain the grammar.

4. What are the names of your parents?

5. The color of this book is blue.

6. Do you use the last name of your father?

7. What is the name of your dog?

8. The names of the children are Jason and Jessica.

132 Lesson 5
5.2 Possessive Adjectives
Possessive adjectives show ownership or relationship.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Compare subject pronouns and possessive Subject Possessive

adjectives. Pronouns Adjectives
I like my name. I my
You are a new student. What's your name? you your
He likes his name. he his
She doesn't like her name. she her
Is this your dog? Is it friendly? What's its name? it its
We use our nicknames. we our

They are my friends. Their last name is Jackson. they their

Be careful not to confuse his and her. Match the possessive adjective to the
preceding noun.
My sister loves her husband. Wrong: My sister loves his husband.
My uncle lives with his daughter. Wrong: My uncle lives with her daughter.

My sister's name is Marilyn. We can use a possessive adjective (my, her)

Her son's name is David. and a possessive noun {sister's, son's) together.
My sister's husband's name is Edward. We can use two possessive nouns together
{sister's husband's).

EXERCISE D Fill in the blanks with the possessive adjective that relates to
the subject.
EXAMPLE 1 like my teacher.

1. He loves mother.

2. She loves _ . father.

3. A dog loves master.

4. Many American women change names when they

get married.
5. Sometimes a woman keeps maiden name and adds

husband’s name.

6. American men don’t usually change names when they

get married.
7. Do you use father’s last name?

8. I use middle name.

9. We write names at the top of the page.
10. Do you like name;
7

11. I use father’s last name.

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 133

5.3 Questions with Whose
Whose + noun asks about possession or ownership.
QUESTIONS ANSWERS

Whose + Noun + Aux. Verb + Subject + Verb

Whose name do you use? I use my father's name.
Whose composition do you like? I like Lisa's composition.
Whose + Noun + Be + Subject
Whose pen IS this? It's Bob's pen.
Whose glasses are those? They're my glasses.

EXERCISE Q Write a question with whose and the words given. Answer with the
words in parentheses ().
EXAMPLES wife/that (Robert)
Whose wife is that? That’s Robert’s wife.

children/these (Robert)
Whose children are these? These are Robert’s children.

1. office/this (the dean)

2. offices/those (the teachers)

3. dictionary/that (the teacher)

4. books/those (the students)

5. car/that (my parents)

6. house/this (my cousin)

7. papers/those (Mr. Ross)

8. pencits/rhese (the teacher)

134 Lesson 5
5.4 Possessive Pronouns

We use possessive pronouns to avoid repetition of a noun.

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

You don't know my name. I know yours. When we omit the noun, we use the
{yours = your name) possessive pronoun.
Compare:
Your name is easy for Americans. Mine is hard. Possessive Possessive
{mine = my name) Adjectives Pronouns

my mine
My parents are in the U.S. Theirs are in Russia.
{theirs = their parents) your yours
his his
her hers
our ours

their theirs

Robert's wife speaks English. Peter's doesn't. After a possessive noun, we can omit the
{Peter's ~ Peter's wife) noun.

EXERCISE B Replace the underlined words with a possessive pronoun.

Mine
EXAMPLE Your name is long. My name is short.

1. My sister likes her name. I don’t like iny name,

2. I like my first name. Do you like your first name?

3. My sister uses her middle name. My brother doesn’t use his middle name.

4. My wife and I have different last names. My last name is Roberts.

Her last name is Paulson.

5. Your last name is easy for Americans to pronounce. Their last name is hard.

6. My brother’s children are grown-up. Our children are still small.

EXERCISE Circle the correct word in parentheses () to complete this

conversation,

■i)) with / yours) parents?

C0 1.tr 22

B: No, 1 don’t. Do you live with {your/yours)l

(I)

(continued)

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 135

 A: No. I live with {my/ mine) sister. (Our/ Ours) parents are back
(2) (2)

home. They live with (my/mine) brother.

(4)

B: (Your / Yours) brother is single, then?

(5)

A: No, he’s married. He lives with his wife and (our/ours) parents.
(6)

B: If he’s married, why does he live with (your/ yours) parents?

(7)

A: In (our / ours) country, it’s an honor to live with parents.

18)

B: Not in (my / mine). Grown children don’t usually want to live with
(9)

(their / theirs) parents, and parents don’t usually want to live with
(iO)

(their/ theirs) grown children.

(ID

A: Where do {your/yours) parents live?

(J2)

B: They live in another state.

A; Isn’t that hard for you?
B: Nor really. I have (my /fJJ)mine) own life, and they have (their/ theirs).
(14)

5.5 The Subject and the Object

EXPLANATION
I
EXAMPLES

S V 0 The subject (S) comes before the verb (V).

Bob Likes Mary. The object (0) comes after the verb. The
We Like movies. object is a person or a thing.

S V 0 S V 0 We can use pronouns for the subject and

Bob Likes Mary because she heLps him. the object.

S V 0 S V 0
I Like movies because they entertain me.
/ts
't

136 Lesson 5
William Madison's Name

Before
You Reac 1. What are common American names?

2. What is a very common first name in your country or natis'e culture?

What is a very common last name? Is your name common in your
country or native culture?

Read the following conversation. Pay spedal attention to object

CD 1, TR 23 pronouns.

A: I have many questions about

1

American names. Can you

answer them for me?

B: Of course.

A: Tell me about your name.

B: My name is William, but
my friends call me Bill.
A: Why do they call you Bill?
B: Bill is a common nickname
for William.

A: Is William your first name?

B: Yes.

A; What’s your full name?

B: William Michael Madison.

A: Do you ever use your middle name?

B: I only use it for very formal occasions. I sign my name
William M. Madison, Jr. (junior).
A: What does “junior” mean?
B: It means that I have the same name as my father. His name is William
Madison, Sr. (senior).
A: What’s your wife’s name?
B: Anna Marie Simms-Madison. I call her Annie.
(continued)

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 137

 A: Why does she have two last names?
B: Simms is her father’s last name, and Madison is mine. She uses both
names with a hyphen (-) between them.
A: Do you have any children?
B: Yes. We have a son and a daughter. Our son’s name is Richard, hut we
call him Dick. Our daughter’s name is Elizabeth, but everybody calls
her Lizzy.

A: What do your children cal! you?

B; They call us Mommy and Daddy, of course.

5.6 Object Pronouns

SUBJECT OBJECT EXAMPLES

Subject Verb Object

I me You Love me.

you you I love you.

he him She loves him.
she her He loves her.
it .> it We love it.
we us They love us.

they them We love them.

138 Lesson 5
We can use an object pronoun after the verb or after a preposition.
' OBJECT NOUN OBJECT PRONOUN EXPLANATION

I have a middle name.

We can use an object
I use it when I sign my name. pronoun to substitute for
an object noun.
He loves his wife. The kids love her too.

You know my son. Friends call him Dick.

We have two children.

We use them for plural
We love them.
people and things.

I need my books. I use them in class.

An object pronoun can

I have two lasf^names. I use both o/them. follow a preposition {of,
about, to, from, in, etc.).
My sister has a son. She always talks about him.

EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks. Substitute an object pronoun for the

underlined words.

1. I visit my parents, and my parents visit

2. I use my middle name when I si^n my name, but I don’t use

any other time.

3. My parents live far away, so I don’t visit often.

4. I miss my mother. I call every day.

5. You are a new student. 1 don’t know . What’s your name?
6. We are very informal in the U.S. The teacher calls by our
first names.

7. My brother is very busy, so I don’t see very often.

EXERCISE O This is a conversation between two students, one from China (A),
and one from the U.S. (B). Fill in the blanks with an appropriate
object pronoun.
A: Americansare very informal about names. The teacher calls
-<))
CD 1, TR 24 us
by our first names.
(I’xiimpW
B: What does the teacher call in your country?
(I)

A: In my country, when a teacher talks to a woman, he calls

“Miss” or “Madam.” When he talks to a man, he calls

(2)

Sir.
(3)
(coTUinweci)

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions Alvnit the Subject 139

 B: 1 like it when the teacher calls by my first name.
(4)

A: I cion’t. There’s another strange thing: In my country, we never use a

first name for our teachers. We call Professor" or
(5)

Teacher.” Our teacher here gets mad when we call

(6)

Teacher.” She doesn’t like . She says it’s impolite. But in

(7)

my country, “Teacher” is a term of great respect.

B: Only small children in the U.S. call their teacher “Teacher." If you
know your teacher’s name, use
18)

A: Do you mean I should call Dawn?

(9)
B: If that’s what she likes.

A: I’m sorry. I can’t do . She’s about 50 years old.

(JO)

and I’m only 20.

B: Then call Ms. Paskow.
(ID
A: She doesn’t like to use her last name. She says everyone

mispronounces Sometimes I call, Ms. Dawn,

(12) (13)

but she says no one does that here.

B: We have an expression, “When in Rome, do as the Romans do.
A: It’s hard for to change my customs after a lifetime of
(M)

following
(15)

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with I, I'm, my, mine, or me.

I’m a foreign student, I
EXAMPLES come from Japan,
My roommate’s parents live in the U.S., but mine
live in Japan.

1. roommate’s name is Kelly. is Yuki.

2. roommate helps with my English.
3. study at the University of Wisconsin.
4. _ major is engineering.
5. 20 years old.
6. parents don’t live in the U.S.
7. parents call twice a week.

' Tl\is c●xp^cs^io^ mc<ins kUm slum Id folios^' lI^c ilu' place arc in.

140 Lesson 5
EXERCISE 10 Fill in the blanks with he, he's, his, or him.
EXAMPLE I have a good friend. His name is Paul, He’s Puerto Rican.
He lives in New York. I like him

1. married,

2. works in an office.

3. an accountant,

4. son helps m business.

5. 37 years old— wife is 35.

6. My wife and wife are friends.

7. My wife is a doctor. IS a computer programmer.

EXERCISE 11 Fill in the blanks with she, she's, her, or hers.

EXAMPLE 1 have a friend. Her name’s Diane, She’s American.

She lives in Boston. My native language is Korean. Hers

is English.

1. an interesting person.
2. I like very much.
3. married,

4. has two children.

5. My children go to Dewey School. go to King School.

6. a nurse. likes job.
7. husband is a teacher.

EXERCISE IS Fill in the blanks with they, they're, their, theirs, or them.
EXAMPLE Diane and Richard are my friends. They live in Boston. Their

house is beautiful. They’re happy. 1 see them on the weekends.

1. Americans,

2. both work,

3. have two children,

4. children go to public school,

5. My house is small. is big.
6. interested in art.

7. 1 talk to once a week.

Posse.ssion; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 141

 EXERCISE 13 Fill in the blanks about a cat. Use it, it's, or its.
It
EXAMPLE It’s an independent animal, always lands on
its feet.

1. likes to eat fish,

2. a small animal,

3. fur is soft,

4. catches mice,

5. claws are sharp,

6. a clean animal.

7. Do you see that cat? Yes, I see

EXERCISE f9 Fill in the blanks with we, we're, our, ours, or us.
EXAMPLE We study English, We’re foreign students.
Our teacher is American. He helps us

1. come from different countries,

2. in class now.
3. classroom is comfortable.

4. The teacher asks a lot of questions.

5. Tlie teacher’s textbook has the answers, don’t have the answers.

6. interested in English.

EXERCISE 15 Fill in the blanks with you, you're, your, ox yours.

EXAMPLE You’re a good teacher. Students like you My other teacher’s
name is hard to pronounce. Yours IS easy to pronounce.

1. explain the grammar well.

2. We all understand

3. Our pronunciation is sometimes hard to understand is clear.

4. a kind teacher,

5. class is very interesting,

6. have a lot of experience with foreign students.

142 Lessi)ii 5
Who Helps Your Parents?
Before
You Read 1. At what age should adult children leave home if they’re not married?
2. Should adult children take care of their parents?

Read the following conversation. Pay special attention to

CD 1, TR25 wh- questions.

A: Where does your dad live?

B: He lives back in our country.

A: Is he in good health?
B: H is health is so-so.

A: Who takes care of him?

B: My brother and his wife do.

A: Do they go to his house every day?
B: No. They live with him.

A: Why do they live with him?

B: It’s the custom in my country. What about in America? Do you live with
your parents?

(continued)

Possession: Object Pronouns; Que.srions About rbc Subject 143

 A: Of course not. I’m 25.1 live with my roommate.

B: Where do your parents live?

A: My parents are divorced. My mother lives just a couple of miles from

me. My dad lives in another state.
B: How often do you see your parents?
A: 1 see my dad a couple of times a year. I see my mom about once or twice
a month.

B: Is that all? Who helps them? Wlio shops for them? Who cooks for
them?

A: They’re in their 60s and in great health. They can do everything.

No one takes care of them. What’s wrong with that?

B: What about when they get older?

A: I never think about it. Who knows about the future?

5.7 Questions About the Subject or About the Complement

Compare these statements and related questions about the complement.
Subject Verb Complement Wh- Does/ Subject Verb We use do and
Word Do does to ask a
Dad lives in Korea. Where does Dad live? question about
L
the complement
Dad lives with someone. Whom* does he live with? of the sentence.
L

I visit once a month. When do you visit?

i

*Language Note: In formal English, we put the preposition at the beginning and use whom.

Compare these statements and related questions about the subject.

Subject Verb Complement Who/ Verb Complement When we ask a
What -s Form question about
Someone helps my father. Who helps your father? the subject, we
I don't use do or
does. We can use
Nobody knows. Who knows about the future?
the -5 form in the

Something is wrong. What IS wrong with that? question.

i

144 Lesson 5
EXERCISE f3 ABOUT YOU Talk about some jobs in your house. Ask another
student, "Who s in your house?" The other student
will answer.

EXAMPLES take out the garbage vacuum the carpet

A: Who takes out the garbage A: Who vacuums the
in your house? carpet in your house?
B: My brother does. B: Nobody does. We
don’t have carpet.

1. dust the furniture 6. take in the mail

2. shop for groceries 7. wash the clothes

3. pay the bills 8. cook the meals

4. wash the dishes 9. sweep the floor

5. make your bed

EXERCISE ^3 l^ill in the blanks to complete this conversation.

A: Po you like going to school in the U.S.?
B: Yes, 1 like it very much. But 1 miss my parents.
A: Where .do they live
I

B: They live in Korea.

A: How old are they 7

{example)

B: They’re in their 60s.

A: Who of them?
(I)

B: No one takes care of them. They’re in

great health.
A: alone?

B: No, they don’t. They live with my oldest sister.

A:
(3)

B: No, she isn’t single. She’s married. She’s a

nurse, and her husband is a doctor.

A: How many 7

14)

B: They have three kids. The girl is seven, and the hoys are six and three,
A: Who the kids when your sister and her
(5)

husband go to work?

B: The older two are in school. My parents take care of the youngest.
Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 145
 A; How often your parents?
(6)

B: I talk to them about once a week.

A; Is it expensive to call your country?

B: Not really. 1 buy a phone card.
7
A: How much
(7)

B: It costs $5.00. We can talk for 30 minutes.

A: Do you plan to see them soon?

B: Who .? Maybe yes, maybe no. I hope so.
I8>

5.8 Who, Whom, Who's, Whose

Compare who, whom, who's, and whose.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Who needs the teacher's help? We do. Who = Subject

Who(m) do you love? I love my parents. Who{m) = Object
Who's that man? He's my dad. Who’s = Who is
Whose book is this? It's mine. Whose = Possession (ownership)

EXERCISE 19 Fill in the blanks with who. whom, who's, or whose.

A: Whose Hst name do you use? Your mother’s or your father’s?
(fxampl*;)

B: I use my father’s last name. But I don’t live with my father.

A: Why not?
B: My parents are divorced.
A: do you live with, then? Your mother?
(II

B: No. I live with Nina,

A: that?
12)

B: That’s my sister.
A: Do you get along?'*
B: Not really. She’s so lazy. She never washes the dishes.

*To iict alonuwjtlT someone men ns \o ha\*e an imnv, peaceful relation ship with fhar person.

146 Lesson 5
 A: - washes the dishes then?
(3)

B: I do. I have to do everything. When I say, turn is it?" she

(4)

always says, “I know it’s my turn, but I’m so busy today.

B: Then don’t ask. Just tell her it’s her turn. pays the rent?
(5)
B: We both do.

A: I guess you need her, then.

B: I guess I do—for now.

EXERCISE Ca Circle the correct word(s) to complete this conversation between

two students.

EXAMPLE A: (Who/(^^/Wh
(I’xampI,’)
ose / Whom) your English teacher?
B: (My/Mine/Me) teacher’s name is Charles Flynn.
CO 1, TR 26
A: (My/Mine/
(2)
Me) is Marianne Peters. She’s Mr. Flynn’s wife.
B: Oh, really? His last name is different from (she/her/hers).
13)

A: Yes. She uses (her/hers/his/he's) father’s last name,

141

not her (husband’s / husbands’/ husbands / husband).

(5)

B: Do they have children?

A: Yes.

B: (Whose / Who’s / Who / Whom) name do the children use?

16)

A: (They / They’re / Their/ Theirs) children use both last names.

(7)

B: How do you know so much about (you / you’re / your / yours) teacher
(6)

and (she/she’s/her/hers) children?

(9)

A: We talk about (we/ us/ our/ours) names in class. We also talk about
(101

American customs. She explains her customs, and we explain

(our / ours / us).
nil

B: Mr. Flynn doesn’t talk about (her/ his/he’s/hers) family in class.

(12)

A: Do you call (her/ his / him / he) “mister”?

113)

B: Of course. (He / He’s / His) the teacher. We show respect.

ii4)

(continued)

Possessioiv. Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 147

 hers / she) first name. (She / She’s
A; But we call Marianne by (her / (151 (16)
/ Her)
prefers that.
B: I prefer to call (our / us / ours) teachers by {they /they're / their/theirs)
(17) (181
last names. That’s the way we do it in my country.
A: In (me /my / mine) we just say “Professor.” But (we/ we’re/us) in the
(19) (20)
U.S. now. There’s an expression: “When in Rome, do as the Romans do.

Summary of Lesson 5

1. Possessive Forms of Nouns

Jack’s car is old.
His parents’ car is new.
The children’s toys are on the floor.
What’s the name of our textbook?

2. Pronouns and Possessive Forms

SUBaECT OBJECT POSSESSIVE POSSESSIVE

PRONOUN PRONOUN ADJECTIVE PRONOUN

I me my mine

you you your yours

he him his his
she her her hers
it it its
we us our ours

they them their theirs

who whom whose whose

SUBJECT I come from Cuba They come from Korea. Who comes from Poland?

OBJECT The teacher helps The teacher helps them. Who(m) does the
me. teacher help?
POSSESSIVE My name is Rosa. Their names are Kim and Whose name do you use?
ADJECTIVE Park.

POSSESSIVE Your book is new. Your book is new. This is your book.
PRONOUN Mine is used. Theirs is used. Whose is that?

148 Lesson 5
Editing Advice

1. Don’t confuse you’re (you are) and your (possessive form).

You're
a good person.
your
Where's you're book?

2. Don’t confuse he’s (he is) and his (possessive form).

His
name is Paul.
He's
M+s a good student.

3. Don’t confuse it’s (it is) and its (possessive form).

It's

fts a beautiful day today.

its

A monkey uses it^ tail to climb trees.

4. Don’t confuse his and her.

his

My brother loves her daughter.

her
My sister loves son.

5. Don’t confuse my and mine.

my
1 don't have mwe book today.

6. Don’t confuse they’re and their.

Their

I have two American friends. They're names are Bob and Sue.
They're
Th«tf very nice people.

7, Use the correct pronoun (subject or object).

her

1 have a daughter. I love she very much.

My father and me like to go fishing.

8. Don’t use the with a possessive form.

M

Tho my friend is very tall.

I need the your dictionary.

Possession; Object Promnins; Questions About the Subject 149

 9. Don’t use do or does in a who question about the subject.
has
Who does have a Spanish dictionary?

10. Don’t separate u/hose from the noun.

hook
Whose is this heek?

11. Don’t confuse tvliose and who’s.

Whose
Who's coat is that?

12. Use the correct word order for possession.

My neighbor’s dog
Dog my neighbor makes a lot of noise.

13. Put the apostrophe in the right place.

parents'
My pafent^ car is new.

14. Don’t use the possessive form for nonliving things.

nameofthebook
Grammar in Context is the hook's name.

15. Don’t use an apostrophe for plural nouns.

friends

She has many friend's.

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
C
A: What’.s your name?

B: Lisa Simms-Evans.

your
A: Do you like you’re name?
l.-tdinpli-)

B: No, 1 don’t. Its too long.

t\)

A: Why do you have two last name’s?

(2)

B: 1 use both my mother’s and my father’s last names.

(3) (41

150 Lesson 5
A: What are your parent’s names?
(5) (6)

B: The
y’re names are Mary Simms and Ron Evans.
(7

A: Do you have any brothers or sisters?

(8) (9)

B:
I have one brother. He’s
(10)
name is Leslie. His
(ID
not happy with him
(12)
name.

In fact, he hates it.

(13)

A: Why?
B: Leslie can be a boys’ name or a girls’ name. Her wife calls him Les.
(H) (15) (16) (17)

My parents and me call him “More or Less.

j)

(18) tl9l

A: That’s funny.
B: And I have a sister too. Hers name is Holly. She doesn’t like his name either.
(20) (21)

A: In your family, who does have a good name;7

(22)

B: My goldfish! It’s name is Goldie.

(23)

A: The dog my neighbor has that name. She’s a Golden Retriever. But 1
(24)

don’t like hers. She’s barks all the time.

(25) (26)

B: My Goldie doesn’t make any noise. It just quietly swims around in it’s bowl.
(27) (28)

A: Well, class is over. Whose is that coat? Is it your’s?

(29) (30)

B: It’s not my. I think it’s the teacher’s.

(3D (32)

A: And that book on the floor. Is it yours or mines?

(33) (34)

B: What’s the book’s name?

(35)

A: Bioiog^ Today. It’s not my.

(36)

B: Its not mine either. Who’s name is in the book?

(37) (38) (39)

A: John Park. Let’s take it and give it to him next time.

(40) (4D

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 151

Lesson 5 Test/Review

PART O Choose the correct word(s) to complete these sentences.

EXAMPLE Most American women change c names when they get married,
but not all do.
a. her b. hers c. their d. theirs

1. I have two
a. sisters b. sister’s c. sisters’ d. sister

2. names are Marilyn and Charlotte,

a. Their b. Theirs c. They’re d. They e. Hers

3. both married,

a. Their b. They’re c. They d. Them e. There

4. Marilyn uses
a. the last name her husband
b. the last name of his husband
c. her husband’s last name
d. his husband’s last name

5. Charlotte uses father’s last name,

a. we b. our c. ours d. us

6. 1 have one brother, married.

a. He’s b. His c. He d. Him

7. wife is very nice,

a. Him b. Her c. His d. He’s

8. first name is Sandra,

a. My b. Mine c. I’m d. Me

9. My friends call Sandy.

a. me b. my C. mine

10. My sister often uses her middle name, but I rarely use
a. my b. mine c. me d. I’m

11. You have a dog, but I don’t know name.

a. It b. it’s c. Its

152 Lesson 5
 12. your teacher?
a. Whom b. Who c. Whose d. Who’s

13. Her — names are Ricky and Eddie,

a. childs b. children’s c. childrens d. childrens’

14. has the newspaper?

a. Whom b. Whose c. Who d. Who’s

15. Who _ more time with the test?

a. need b. does need C. needs d. does needs

16. The teacher’s name is on

a. the door of her office
b. her office’s door
c. the door her office
d. her the office’s door

17.

a. Who’s is that office?

b. Whose is that office?
c. Who’s office is that?
d. Whose office is that?

PART Two women are talking about names. Fill in the blanks with
possessive forms, subject pronouns, or object pronouns. Some
blanks need an apostrophe or an apostrophe + s.

A: What’s your last name?

B: It’s Woods.

A: Woods sounds like an American name. But you’re Polish, aren’t you?
(exam(>(0

B; Yes, hut Americans have trouble pronouncing name, so I

ii)
use the name “Woods.”

A: What’s real last name?

Ill

B: Wodzianicki.

A: My name is hard for Americans too, but like my

(3)

name, and I don’t want to change ,. I’m proud of it.

(4)
B: What’s last name?
(5)

A: Lopez Hernandez.

Posse.ssioni Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 153

 B: Why do have two last names?
(6)

A: 1 come from Mexico. Mexicans have mo last names. Mexicans use

both parents names.
a)

B: What happens when a woman gets married? Does she use (8)

parents names and husband

(9) (10) (ID
7
name too.'

A: No. When a woman gets married, she usually drops (12)

mother name. She adds “of” (in Spanish, “de”) and

(13)

husband name. My sister is married.

IH) (15)

name is Maria Lopez de Castillo. Lopez is (17)

(16)
father name and Castillo is her husband
(18) (19)

name. kids last name is Castillo Lopez.

(20) (21)
B: That’s confusing. Everybody in the family has a different last name.
A: It’s not confusing for us. You understand your customs, and we
understand
(22)
B: Do your sister kids have American first names?
(23)
A: My sister gave Spanish names, but friends
(24) (25)

gave them American names. Her daughter name is Rosa,

(26)

but friends call her Rose. son

(27) (28) (29)

name is Eduardo, but friends call

(30) (31)

Eddie. Ricardo is the youngest one. still a baby, but

(32)

when he goes to school, friends will probably call

(33)

Rick.
(34)

154 Lesson 5
Expansion
Classroom
Activities O Find a partner. Compare yourself to your partner. Compare physical
characteristics, clothes, family, home, job, car, etc. Report some
interesting facts to the class.
EXAMPLE My hair is straight. Mark’s is curly.
His eyes are blue. Mine are brown.
My family lives in this city. Mark’s family lives in Romania.

O One student will ask these who questions. Raise your hand if this
is a fact about you. The first student will answer the question after he
or she sees raised hands.

EXAMPLE Who has kids?

Ben, Maria, and Lidia have kids.
Who has a pet bird?
No one has a pet bird.

1. Who has kids?

2. Who likes cartoons?

3. Who plays soccer?

4. Who has a laptop computer?
5. Who is a sports fan?
6. Who likes to swim?

7. Who is a vegetarian?
8. Who wants a grammar test?
9. Who has American friends?

10. Who has a pet?

11. Who lives in a house?
12. Who is over 6 feet tall?

13. Who has a motorcycle?

14. Who has an e-mail address?

15. Who gets a lot of junk mail?

16. Who exercises every day?
17. Who watches TV in the morning?
18. Who has a middle name?

19. Who wants to become an American citizen?

20. Who plays a musical instrument?

Possession; Object Pronouns; Questions About the Subject 155

 0 Think of something unusual that you do or are. Write a sentence
telling what you do or are. Then ask a question to find out who else
does or is this.

EXAMPLES I have a pet snake. Who else has a pet snake?

I play volleyball. Who else plays volleyball?
I am a baseball fan. Who else is a baseball fan?

(Variation: On a piece of paper, write something unusual that you do

or are.Give the papers to the teacher. The teacher reads a statement.
Other students—and the teacher—try to guess who wrote it.
Example: Someone has a pet snake. Who has a pet snake?)

Talk
About It 0 What are some popular first names in your native country or culture?

0 How do people choose a first name for their babies in your native
country or culture?

Write
About It Write about naming customs in your native culture. Do people have
a middle name? Do fathers and sons ever have the same name? Tell
about your name. Does it mean something?

My Name
My name i6 Yelena Ivanova Galinsky. i’m from
Russia. Yelena is my first name, but in the U.5.
everyone calis me Ellen. My father’s name is Ivan.
“Ivanova" means that I’m Ivan’s daughter.In Russia, we
always use our father’s name as our middle name...

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

156 Lesson 5
Lesson

6
Grammar
The Present Continuous
Tense^

Context
Observations About
American Life

The present cominuous tense is sometimes CiilieJ the present progressive tense.
Observations in the Park

Before
You Read 1. Do you ever write in a journal?
2. Do you ever compare the behavior of Americans to the behavior of
people from your native culture?

Read the following entry from Dan's journal. Pay special attention to
CD 1, Tfi 27 the present continuous tense.

C.

c
September 9
c

c. I’m taking an E6L course this semester. Our teacher wants us to keep a
journal. She wants us to write in it every day, I’m beginning my Journal now.
c I’m in the park now. It’s a beautiful day. The sun is shining. I’m sitting on a
c.
park bench and observing the behavior of people around me.
It’s warm and most of the people are wearing shorts, but I’m wearing
c.
long pants. Even old people are wearing shorts. This surprises me.
c.
Some people arejogging. They are all carrying MP3 players and wearing
headphones. They are all jogging alone, A lot of people are going by on roller
C skates. Some young kids are using skateboards. It seems that these are
C. popularactivities here,
c A group of young men is playing soccer. I don’tthink they’re Americans. I
think Americans don’t like soccer. Americans prefer baseball. In another part
of the park, small children are playing baseball. Their parents are watching
c.
them. This is called Little League. Little League is very popular here.
One man is riding a bike and talking on a cell phone at the same time.
c.
Some people are having a picnic. They are barbecuing hamburgers.
c. There is a group of teenagers nearby. They are talking very loudly. They
c. have a big boomboxand are listeningto hip-hop music. They’re making a lot
of noise.
c.
I’m learning a lot about the American lifestyle.
c.

c.

c.

<L

158 Lesson 6
6.1 The Present Continuous Tense
To form the present continuous tense, use a form of be (is, am, are) + verb -ing. We
use the present continuous tense to describe an action in progress at this moment.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Be Verb + -ing Complement

I am taking an ESL class. I > am ^
The sun IS shining,
A man is jogging, He/She/It IS
He IS wearing shorts. Singular Subject IS > + verb -ing
You are reading Dan's journal,
Kids are listening to music, We/You/They are

They are talking very loudly, Plural Subject are J

We are learning about Americans.

I'm taking an ESL class this semester. We can make a contraction with the
They're listening to music. subject pronoun and a form of be. Most nouns
The sun's shining. can also form a contraction with isJ

Dan isn't writing a composition. He's writing To form the negative, put not after the verb
in his journal. am/is/are.
The teenagers aren't paying attention to Negative contractions:
other people. They're listening to music. is not = isn't
are not = aren't
There is no contraction for am not.

A man is riding his bike and talking on his When the subject is doing two or more things,
cell phone. we don't repeat the verb be after and.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the missing part of each sentence,
EXAMPLES r m. writing in my journal.
I’m learn about life in the U.S.

1. Most people are wear _ shorts.

2. Some young men playing soccer.

3. Some children are play baseball,

4. Teenagers listening to music,

5. I looking at people in the park.
6. The sun shining.
7. A man is riding his bike and talk on
his cell phone.

'Sti; Lesson I, p.-i*;!; 8 ft>r exceptions.

The I’resent Continuous Tense 159

6.2 Spelling of the -ing Form
Forms
VERBS -ING FORM
r RULE
Add -ing to most verbs. eat eating
(Note: Do not drop they of the base form.) go going
study studying

For a one-syLlable verb that ends in a consonant + plan planning

vowel + consonant (CVC), double the final consonant 'i' 'I'
and add -ing. CVC
stop stopping
'i' 'I' '1'
CVC
s i t sitting
'1' X '1'
CVC

Do not double a final w, x, ory. show showing

mix mixing
stay staying

For a two-syllable verb that ends in CVC, double the refer referring
final consonant only if the last syllable is stressed. admit admitting
begin beginning

When the last syllable of a two-syllable verb is listen listening

not stressed, do not double the final consonant. open opening
offer offering
If the verb ends in a consonant + e, drop the e before live living
adding -ing. take taking
write writing

EXERCISE Q Write the -ing form of the verb. (Two-syllable verbs that end in the
CVC pattern have accent marks to show which syllable is stressed.)
EXAMPLES play
make makint^

1. plan 7. stay
2. open 8. grow _
3. sit
9. marry
4. begin — 10. grab _
5. hurry — 11. write.

6. happen 12. fix

160 Lesson 6
 13. wipe 17. wait -

14. carry 18. serve.

15. drink 19. visit-
16. drive 20. occur

EXERCISE B Fill in the blanks with the present continuous tense of the verb in
i
parentheses (). Use correct spelling,
EXAMPLE Dan is observing people in the park.
(ohscTu;)

1. He about his observations.

(write)

2. Some men soccer.

(pidvj

3. A man a bike.
(ride)

4. Some people
(lag)

5. The sun
(sfiine)

6. He on a park bench.
(sit)

7. Some people by on roller skates and skateboards.

feo)

8. Some people an MP3 player.

(aim)

6.3 The Present Continuous Tense—Uses

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I am writing in my journal now. To show that an action is in progress now,

I am observing people in the park. at this moment
Children are playing baseball.
Teenagers are listening to music.
I'm learning about the American lifestyle. To show a long-term action that is in
I'm taking an ESL course this semester. progress. It may not be happening at this
I'm keeping a journal this semester. exact moment.

Most people are wearing shorts. To describe a state or condition, using the
I'm sitting on a park bench. following verbs: sit, stand, wear, sleep

The Present Continuous Tense 161

 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Make a true affirmative statement or negative
statement about your activities now with the words given,
EXAMPLES wear a watch
I’m not wearing a watch (now),
drink coffee
I’m drinking coffee (now).

1. sit in the back of the room 6. look out the window

2. speak my native language 7. look at the board

3. pay attention 8. write a composition

4. ask questions 9. use my textbook

5. practice the present continuous tense 10. wear jeans

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Make a true affirmative statement or negative statement

about yourself with the words given. Talk about a long-term action,
EXAMPLES look for a job
I’m looking for a job.
live in a hotel
I’m not living in a hotel.

1. look for a new apartment

2. learn a lot of English
3. gain weight
4. lose weight
5. spend a lot of money
6. save my money

7. keep a journal
8. try to understand American customs
9. meet Americans

10. learn how to drive

11. live in a dorm

12. plan to rerurn to my hometown

162 Lesson 6
Observations Downtown
Before
You Read 1. Do you ever take the bus?
2. Do a lot of petiple in this city dri\’e and talk on a cell phone at the same time?

Dan (D) and his friend Peter (P) are waiting for the bus downtown.
CO 1, TR 28 Read the following conversation. Pay special attention to questions
with the present continuous tense.

D; Is the bus coming?

P: I don’t see it. While we’re waiting for the bus, let’s talk about life
in this city.

D: OK. Look at those women. Why are they wearing running shoes with
business suits? Why aren’t they wearing dress shoes? It looks strange.
P: Women in the U.S. want to be comfortable. They
change to dress shoes when they get to work.
D: Oh. Now 1 understand. Look at that guy. Why
is he talking on the phone and driving at the
same time? Isn’t it dangerous?
P: It seems everyone does that these days. Some
places don’t permit it.

D: And look at those bicycle riders. They’re riding

so fast. Where are they going? And why are
they riding between the cars?
P: They re couriers.There are a lot of them downtown.They deliver
packages from one office to another downtown.
D: Are they getting paid for this?
P: Of course. It’s their job.

D: Look at all these people. Why are they walking so fast?

P: I guess everyone’s in a hurry here. You know what they say: “Ti me
is money.”
D; Finally the bus is coming. Are you going back ho me now;

P: No. I’m going to the library to write in my journal about American

customs.

The Present Continuou.s Ten.se 163

6.4 Questions with the Present Continuous Tense
Compare affirmative statements and questions.
Be Verb + Complement Short
Wh- word Be Subject
Answer
-mg

Women are wearing running shoes,

Are they wearing suits? Yes, they are.
Why are they wearing running shoes?
Who is wearing a business suit?

A man is talking in his car.

Is he talking to a passenger? No, he isn't.
Why is he talking on his cell phone?
Who(m) is he talking to?

Language Notes:
1. We can answer ayes/no question with a short answer. Use the subject plus a form of be.
Are they riding in a bus? No, they aren't.
Are they waiting for the bus? Yes, they are. (Don't make a contraction for an affirmative
short answer.)
2. When the question is "What... doing?" we usually answer with a different verb.
What is Dan doing? He's looking at people.
What is the driver doing? He's talking on his cell phone.
3. Americans often use who instead of whom.
Who is he talking to?

Compare negative statements and questions.

Wh- word Be + n't Subject Be + n't Verb + -ing Complement
They aren't wearing dress shoes,
aren't they wearing dress shoes?
Why

EXERCISE Q Answer the questions based on the conversation on page 163.

1. Is Dan writing in his journal now?
2. Are people walking fast downtown?
3. What is the woman wearing?
4. Why is she wearing running shoes?
5. What are the two students waiting for?
6. Who is going to the library?

164 Lesson 6
EXERCISE HI Use the words given to ask a question about what people in this
class are doing now. Another student will answer.

EXAMPLE we/Lise the textbook now

A: Are we using the textbook now?

B: Yes, we are.

1. the teacher/write on the board

2. the teacher/sit at the desk
3. the teacher/help the students
4. we/practice the past tense
5. we/review Lesson 5
6. where/the teacher/stand or sit
7. what exercise/we/do
8. what/you/think about

EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU

Ask a question about a long-term action with the
words given. Another student will answer.
EXAMPLE you/study math this semester
A: Are you studying math this semester?
B: Yes, I am.

1. you/plan to buy a car

2. you/study biology this semester
3. you/take other courses this semester
4. you/look for a new apartment
5. you/look for a job
6. your English/improve
7. your vocabulary/grow
8. the tcacher/help you
9. the students/make progress
10. you/learn about other students’ countries

The Present Conrimuuis Tense 165

 EXERCISE 0 ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks with I'm or I'm not + the -ing form of
the verb in parentheses () to tell if you are doing these things now
or at this general point in time. Then ask another student if he or
she is doing this activity. The other student will answer.
EXAMPLES (plan) I’m planning to buy a computer.
A: Are you planning to buy a computer?
B: Yes, I am.
(learn) I’m not learning to drive a car.

A: Are you learning to drive a car?

B: No, I’m not.

1. (wear) -jeans.

2. (hold). - a pencil.
3. (chew) _gum.

4. (think) about the weekend,

5. (live) _ in a dorm.

6. (plan). _ to take a vacation.

7. (look) _ _ for a job.

8. (plan). _ to buy a new computer.
9. (take) _ _ a computer class this semester,
10. (get) _ tired.

11. (gain). _ weight.

12. (learn) _ about the history of the U.S.
13. (learn) _ how to drive.

EXERCISE 3 Write a question about each statement below. Use the question
words given.
EXAMPLE Dan and Peter are studying English.
are they Studying English ?

1. Dan and Peter are looking at people.

7
Why
2. They are waiting for the bus.
7
Where

3. People are walking fast.

7
Why
4. A man is talking on his cell phone.
7
Who _ to;

166 Lesson 6
 5. The woman in a suit isn’t wearing dress shoes.
Why ?

6. Dan isn’t writing in his journal now.

Why ?

7. Someone is riding a bicycle.

Who ?

EXERCISE fQ A woman is calling her husband from a cell phone in her car. Fill in
the blanks to complete the conversation. Answers may vary.

A: Hello?
●I))
CO 1, TR 29
B: Hi. It's Betty.

A: Oh, hi, Betty. This connection is so noisy. Where are you calling
(I'xiimple;
from?

B: I from the car. I

III

my cell phone.
A: home now?
(i)

B: No, I’m not. I’m driving to the airport,

A: Why to the airport?
(4)

B: I m going to pick up a client.

A: I can’t hear you. There’s so much noise.
B: Airplanes overhead. They’re very low.
(5)

A: I can’t hear you. Talk louder please,

B: I as loud as 1 can. I
(6) 17)

to the airport to pick up a client. I’m late. Her plane

(5)

now, and I’m stuck in traffic’. I’m getting nervous. Cars aren’t moving,
A: Why moving'
7

(9)

B: There’s an accident on the highway.

A: I worry about you 7

(10)

B: Of course I’m wearing my seat belt.

you are stuck in traffic. \\m .c\nx tmn'c because other cars aren t movinj*. (continued)

The Present Continuous Tense 167

 A: That’s good.
?
B: What now;
Ui)

A: I the computer. I
(12) (13)

for information about cars on the Internet,

B: What doing?
(14)

A: The kids? I can’t hear you.

B: Yes, the kids.

A: Meg TV. Pam her

(15) (J6)

homework.

B: Why Meg doing her homework?

(17)

A: She doesn’t have any homework today,

B: dinner for the kids?
(18)

A: No, I’m not making dinner. I for you to come

09)

home and make dinner.

B: Please don’t wait for me. Oh. Traffic is finally moving. Talk to you later.

Observations in the School Cafeteria

Before
You Read 1. When you observe the students at this school, do you see any strange
behaviors?

2. Is your behavior in this school different from your behavior when you
are with your family or people from your native culture?

168 Lesson 6
 ■I)l Read the following entry from Dan's journal. Pay special attention to
CD 1, TR30 verbs—simple present and present continuous.

c. March 8
c.

C. I’m sitting in the school cafeteria now. I’m writing in my journal. I want
C to know about American customs, so I’m observ'ing the behavior of other
c students. I see many strange behaviors and customs around me.
I’m looking at a young couple at the next table. The young man and
woman are touching, holding hands, and even kissing. It looks strange
c
because people never kiss in public back home. At another table, a young man
c.
and woman are sitting with a baby. The man is feeding the baby. Men never
c. feed their babies in our country. Why isn’t the woman feeding the baby?
c Students in our country are usually single, not married with children.
c. Two women are putting on makeup. I think this is bad public behavior.
c These women are wearing shorts. In our country, women never wear shorts.
c
A group of students is listening to the radio. The music is very loud.
c.
Their music is bothering other people, but they don’t care. I’m sitting far
from them, but I heartheir music.
A young man is resting his feet on another chair. His friend is eating a
<L
hamburger with his hands. Why isn’t he using a fork and knife?
c These kinds of behaviors look bad to me. I’m trying to understand them,
c but I’m having a hard time. I still think many of these actions are impolite.
c

c.

c.

c.

c.

6.5 Present Continuous and Simple Present

Form

SIMPLE PRESENT PRESENT CONTINUOUS

Dan sometimes wears a suit. He is wearing jeans now.

He doesn't usually wear shorts. He isn't wearing a belt.
Does he ever wear a hat? Is he wearing a T-shirt?
Yes, he does. No, he isn't.
When does he wear a hat? What is he wearing?
Who wears a hat? Who is wearing a T-shirt?
(continued)

The Present Continuous Tense 169

Uses
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

a. Dan writes in his journal once a week, We use the simple present tense to talk about:
b. People eat hamburgers with their hands, a. a habitual activity
c. The college cafeteria has inexpensive food. b. a custom
c. a general truth or fact
a. Dan is writing in his journal now. We use the present continuous tense for:
b. He is learning more and more about life a. an action that is in progress at this
in the U.S. moment
b. a longer action that is in progress at this
general time
Compare: When we use live in the simple present, we
Dan's family lives in another country. mean that this is a person's home. In the
Dan is living in a dorm this semester. present continuous, it shows a temporary,
short-term residence.

Compare: What does she dol asks about a profession

What does she do for a living? or job.
She's a nurse.
What is she doingl asks about a present
What is she doing? activity.
She's waiting for the bus.

EXERCISE 13 Two students meet in the cafeteria and discuss American customs
and the customs of their native countries. Fill in the blanks with
the correct form of the verb in parentheses {). Practice the simple
present and the present continuous.

Hi. What are you doing here?

■^)) A:
(example: you/do)
CD 1. TR 31
B: lunch. I alway.s
II '.(III (2 eai)

lunch at this time. But I behaviors and

(3 also/ohsiTt 't)

customs in this country.

A: What do you mean?
B: Well, look at that man over there. He an
(4 'Ueiir)

earring. It looks so strange. Only women

(5 yvcar)

earnngs in my country.

170 Le.sscm 6
A: It is strange. And look at that woman. She
(6 u'ear)

three earrings in one ear.

B: And she running shoes with a dress. In my
17 near)

country, people only running shoes for sports

(8 use)

activities.

A: Look at that student over there. He a colored

(9 use)

pen to mark his textbook. In my country, we never

( JO UTIlO

in our textbooks because they to the college,

(IJ Mong)
not to the students.

B: Many college activities are different here. For example, my English

teacher usually at the desk in class. In my

m sit)

country, the teacher always _ in class. And the

03 stand)

students always when the teacher

(J4 scimd up)
- the room.
(J5ema)

A: And college students always English or

06 study)

another foreign language. Here, nobody knows another language.

My American roommate five courses this
(17 wW

semester, but no foreign language.

B: By the way, how many classes this semester?
(18 you/take)
A: Four. In my country, I usually eight courses a
(J9 take)

semester, but my adviser here says I can only take four.

B: I have to go now. My girlfriend for me at the
(20 uait)

library.

The Present Continuous Tense 171

6.6 Nonaction Verbs
Some verbs are nonaction verbs. Nonaction verbs describe a state or condition,
not an action.

r EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

The music is bothering Dan, but the other We do not usually use the present continuous
students don't care. tense with nonaction verbs. We use the simple
Dan needs a quiet place to write now. present tense, even if we are talking about now.
He doesn't understand the behavior of some
students.

Some Nonaction Verbs:

like need think (that) see

love prefer care (about) hear

hate know understand seem

want believe remember cost

own

Compare action and nonaction verbs.

ACTION (USES THE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE) NONACTION (USES THE SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE)
The music is bothering Dan. He prefers soft music.
Dan is learning about American customs. He cares about good behavior.
He is looking at two people kissing. This behavior seems strange to him.
He is writing about the students. He wants to understand American customs.
He is drinking tea. He likes tea very much.
Some students are listening to the music. Dan hears the music.
Dan is looking at students in the cafeteria. He sees some strange behaviors.
Language Note:
In the above sentences, listen and look are voluntary. They are action verbs. Hear and see are
involuntary. They are nonaction verbs.

EXERCISE IQ Fill in the blanks with the simple present or the present continuous
tense of the verb in parentheses ().
understand
EXAMPLES I the explanation now.
(umit'rsinnj)

am writing now.
(write)

1. I English this semester.

(studj)

2. We the textbook now.

(me)

3. We a lot of practice with verb tenses.

(need)

172 Lesson 6
 4. Wc action and nonaction verbs.
(compnrt)

5. 1 every grammar rule.

6. I the board.
(sec)

7. I at the clock now. I

(not/looM (look)

at my book.
8. I my dictionary now.
(noi/nceJ)

9. We a ctmiposition now.
(noi/«TUi’)

10. We the students in the next room.

(tiol/ht’or)

11. Wc about nonaction verbs.

(IfdTTl)

12. We a lot of grammar.

(Iincw)

6.7 Think, Have, and the Sense Perception Verbs

Think, have, and the sense perception verbs can be action or nonaction verbs.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Action: Dan is thinking about his mother's When we think about something, think is an
cooking. action verb.
Nonaction: He thinks it is wrong to kiss in When we think that something is true, think
public. is a nonaction verb. We are giving an opinion
about something.
Action: He is having lunch in the cafeteria. When have means to experience something
Action: He is having new experiences or to eat or drink something, it is an action
in the U.S. verb.
Nonaction: He has free time now. When have shows possession, relationship, or
Nonaction: He has new American friends. illness, it is a nonaction verb.
Nonaction: His best friend has the flu now.

Action: He is looking at a The sense perception verbs {look, taste, feel,

woman wearing shorts. smell, sound) can be action or nonaction
Nonaction: This behavior verbs.
looks bad to him. When the sense perception verbs describe
Action: He is smelling a state, they are nonaction verbs.
the coffee. When they describe an action, they are
Nonaction: The coffee action verbs.
smells delicious.

The Present Continuous Tense 173

 EXERCISE IQ Fill in the blanks with the simple present or the present continuous
tense of the verb in parentheses ().
EXAMPLES I am thinking about my family.
(chink)

think that life in the U.S. is not perfect.

(think)

. 1. She the flowers.

(smell)

2. The flowers beautiful.

(smell)

3. She about her boy'friend.

(chink)

4. She that her boyfriend is wonderful.

(chink)

5. 1 a good time in the U.S.

(Iwfe)

6. 1 a lot of new friends.

(lune)

7. I a lot of free time.

(not/haiv)

8. My friend a cold today and she can’t go out.

(hare)

so 1 lunch alone now.

(have)

EXERCISE 15 Fill in the blanks with the simple present or the present continuous
of the verb in parentheses (). Use the simple present for regular
activity and with nonaction verbs,
wants
EXAMPLES Dan to understand American behavior.
(uam)

He is looking at some Americans in the cafeteria now.

(look)

1. Dan in his journal now.

(uriie)

2. He in the school cafeteria now.

(sic)

3. He a couple with a baby.

(set)

4. He often to the cafeteria betw'een classes.

fgu)

5. He in his journal once a week.

(write)

6. He that his family to

(chink) (u<mc)

know about American customs.

174 Les.son 6
 7. He at a young man and
(look)

woman. They hands.

(hold)

8. This behavior bad in

(look)

his country.

9. He about American customs now.

(ifiink)

10. Some women shorts now.

luvar)

11. Women in Dan’s country never shorts.

(uvur)

12. American customs strange to him.

(seem)

EXERCISE 16 Read each sentence. Write the negative form of the underlined
words. Use the words in parentheses ().
EXAMPLES Dan is k)oking at Americans, (people from his country)
He Isn’t looking at people from his country.
He knows about customs from his country. (American customs)
He doesn’t know about American customs.

1. The father is feeding the baby, (the mother)

2. Dan’s sitting in the cafeteria, (in class)

3. He understands customs from his country. (American customs)

4. Some men and women kiss in public, (men and women in his country)

5. Americans their hands to eat a hamburger, (to eat spaghetti)

6. The man is wearing an earring, (a bracelet)

7. Americans seem strange to him. (to me)

(continitc’cl)

The Pre.sent Continuous Tense 175

 8. American men like to take care of babies. (Dan)

9. American women often wear shorts in the summer, (women in Dan’s

country)

EXERCISE f9 Read each sentence. Then write a yes/no question about the words
in parentheses (). Write a short answer.
EXAMPLES Women sometimeswear earrings, (men/ever)
Do men ever wear earrings?Yes, they do.

The women are wearing shorts, (the men)

Are the men wearing shorts? No, they aren’t.

1. Dan is writing, (his homework)

2. He’s watching people. (American people)

3. He understands his own customs. (American customs)

4. American men wear shorts in the summer. (American women)

5. The man is eating, (a hot dog)

EXERCISE fS Read each statement. Then write a wh- question about the words in
parentheses (). An answer is not necessary.
EXAMPLES A young man is resting his feet on a chair, (why)
Why is he resting his feet on a chair?

Dan lives in the U.S. (where/his family)

Where does his family live?

1. Dan is writing a letter, (to whom) or (who . .. to)

2. Dan wants to know about American customs, (why)

176 Lesson 6
 3. Two women are putting on makeup, (where)

4. American men and women touch and hold hands in public, (why)

5. Dan writes to his family, (how often)

6. The man isn’t using a fork, (why/not)

7. Women don’t wear shorts in some countries, (why/not)

8. Americans often wear jeans, (why)

9. “Custom” means tradition or habit. (what/“behavior")

EXERCISE 3 This is a phone conversation between Dave (D) and his mother (M).
Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the words in
parentheses () to complete the conversation.
D: Hello?
■i)>
CD 1, TR 32
M: Hi, Dave. It’s Mom.

D: Hi, Mom. How are you doing ?

(t'KimpIc: you/do)
M: We fine. And you?
II M
How college in the U.S.?
(2

D: Great. I it a lot.
(3 like)
a lot of fun.
14 luii't)

?
M: Fun?
15 'uky/ynu/no^/study)
D: 1 am studying. But 1 new people from all over
16 meet)
the world. I about getting an earring.
17 ihink)

M: What? Earrings are for women.

D: But, Mom, all the guys it these days.

18 do)

(continued)

The Present Continuous Tense 177

 M: .. You an eamng.
(9 no(/care} (10 tiw/nefJ)

You just to Study.

(II netfd) (12 you/get)
a
ood grades?
D: You I’m a good student. Of course
(13 knou')

_ good grades,
M: your guitar these days?
(I5wu/f>ractice)
D: Yes, I am. But 1. as much time as before.
(16 not/hfltv)
five classes this semester.
(17 take)
M: Only five? Students here eight classes.
((8 iisiialiv/lake)

D: The system is different here. Freshmen only take four or five classes.
M: What
(19/reshm<in/tnean)
D: A freshman is a student in the first year of college.
M: How’s the food? enough to eat?
(20you/gei)
D: Yes, 1 am. In fact, 1 weight. But I
(21 gain)
the food here.
(22 not/lilu.')

M: Why the food?

(23 not/likt)
D: It’s too greasy. And it like food back home.
(24 not/iasii.')

I really your food.

(25 miss)

M: your favorite dish now.

(26 make)

D: Really? I hungry just thinking about it.

(27 sec)
M: You and Dad that my food is the best.
(28 aluays/ifiink)
D: Where’s Dad?

M: He in the garden now. He’s planting a new tree.

(29 «ork)
D: Thanks for sending me the sweater. I It now.
(30 u'ear)

178 Lesson 6
M: enough warm clothes?
(31 you/katv)
D: For now, I do. But it to get cold these days,
(33suirlt

And the days shorter. Fall is beautiful here.

(33 get)
The trees color. 1
(34 cfuinge) (35 look)

out my window now and I . a beautiful maple

(36 H'c)

tree with red leaves. But I the climate back

(37 pre/er)
home. It’s warm all year. Here it’s really cold in December and January.
M: _ a new sweater for you now. Your sister Ruby
<38 nwke)

you a scarf.
<39 nu\ke)

D: Thanks, Mom. Where’s Ruby? to talk to me now?

(40 sfie/uwni)
M: SO. She a movie
(41 no^/think) (42 Hatch)

with her friends.

D: good grades this semester?

(43 ihe/gei)
M: She too much time with her friends these days.
(44 spcnJ)

D: Well, she’s 16. Friends are really important when you’re 16.
M: I’m worried about her.

D: Don’t worry so much, Mom.

M: Of course 1 worry. I'm a mother. Dad in now.
(45 come)

He to talk to you now.

(46 uant)

D: OK, Mom. Bye.

Tlie Present Continuous Tense 179

Summary of Lesson 6

Uses of Tenses

Simple Present Tense

General truths Americans speak English.
Oranges grow in Florida.
Regular activity, habit I always speak English in class.
I sometimes eat in the cafeteria.
I visit my parents every Friday.
Customs Americans shake hands.
Japanese people bow.

Place of origin Miguel comes from El Salvador.

Marek comes from Poland.

With nonaction verbs She has a new car.

I like the U.S.
You look great today.

Present Continuous (with action verbs only)

Now We are reviewing now.
I am looking at page 180 now.

A long action in progress Dan is learning about American

at this general time customs.

He is studying English.
A descriptive state She is wearing shorts.
He is sitting near the door.
The teacher is standing.

180 Lesson 6
Editing Advice

1. Include be with a continuous tense.

i5

He working now.

2. Use the correct word order in a question.

areyou
Where you're going?
don'tyou
Why you-don^ like New York?

3. Don’t use the present continuous with a nonaction verb.

has
She is having her own computer.

4. Use the -.s form when the subject is he, she, or it.
has s

He Have a new car. He like to drive.

5. Don’t use be with a simple present-tense verb.

need a new computer.

6. Use do or does in a simple present-tense question.

does live

Where Uves your mother?

7. Don’t use the -.s form after does.

Where does he takes the bus?

Revieu' the Editing Advice for the simple present tense on pages 65-67.

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
are you C
A: What you’re doing now?
(I’liimple) (I’xampli)

B: I writing in my journal.
(/I

Tlic Present Continuous Tense 181

 A: Why you doing that?
(2i

B: It’s an assignment for my English class.

A: What are you

(3)
have to do?

B: We’re needing to write about our observations.

(4)

A: I’m thinking that’s a great idea. This way you’re (6)learning about
15)

American life.

B: I’m having trouble with my spelling.

(7)

A: Maybe I can help you.

B: How spell “earring”?

(8)

A: E-A-R-R-I-N-G.

B: Thanks.

A: Why are you write about earrings?

(91

B: Look at that woman. She wearing three earrings in one ear. I’m thinking
(10) (If)

about doing that.

A: Where do they pierce ears?

H2i

B: There’s a place on Main Street.

Lesson 6 Test/Review

PART 1 This is a conversation between two students, Alicia (A) and

Teresa (T), who meet in the school library. Fill in the blanks with
the simple present or the present continuous form of the verb in
parentheses ().

T: Hi, Alicia.

A: Hi, Teresa. What are you doing here?

(example: jou/ilo)

T: I . for a book on American geography. What

(/ Imik)

about you?

182 Lesson 6
 A: I a book.
(2 ri'iUTTi)
to go for
0 you/uiim)

a cup of coffee?

T: I can’t. I for my friend.

(●< «<iu)

We on a geography project together, and

(5uoik)

we
to finish it by next week.
16 nted)

A: your geography class?

(7 yoii/like)

T: Yes. I especially the teacher, Bob. He’s a

(8 like)

handsome young man. He's very casual. He always

jeans and a T-shirt to class. He

(9 uear)

an earring in one ear.

(lOlune)

A: That very strange to me.

(n seem)

that teachers in the U.S. are very informal.

iU thinki

How the class? By lecturing?

(13 Boh/teachl

T: No. We in small groups, and he

(14 usunl/y/u'OTls)

US by walking around the classroom.

(15 help)

A: hard tests?
(16 he/jjive)

T: No. He in tests.
(17 n>t/heliei'e)

A: Why in tests?
08 (le/not/Jwliete)

T: He that students get too nervous during a test.

09 ihmk)

He it’s better to work on projects. This week

(20 suy)

we on city maps.
(21 work)

A: That interesting.
(22 smimO

T: Why me so many questions about my teacher?

(23 yuu/(is.k)

A: about taking a geography course next semester,

(24 think)

(continued)

The Present Continuous Tense 183

 T: Bob’s very popular. Be sure to register early because his classes
always up quickly. Oh. I (26
(25/ill)

my friend now. She _ toward us. 1 have to go now.

(27«<ilfc)

A: Good luck on your project.

T: Thanks. Bye.

PART Q Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined word.
isn’t at home.
EXAMPLE Teresa is in the library. She

1. Alicia wants to go for a cup of coffee. Teresa to

go for a cup of coffee.

2. Teresa is looking for a book. Alicia for a book.

3. They are talking about school. They about the

news.

4. They have rime to talk now. They time for a cup

of coffee.

5. Students in the geography class work in small groups.

They alone.

6. Alicia’s teacher gives tests. Teresa's teacher tests.

7. Teresa is waiting for a friend. Alicia for a friend.

8. The teacher seems strange to Alicia. He strange

to Teresa.

9. Alicia is returning a book. Teresa a book.

PART Q Read each sentence. Then write a yes/no question about the words
in parentheses (). Write a short answer based on Part 1.
EXAMPLE Teresa is looking for a book, (a geography book)
Is she looking for a geography book? Yes, she is.

184 Lesson 6
 1. Bob likes projects, (tests)

2. Alicia has time now. (Teresa)

3. They are talking about their classes, (their teachers)

4. Bob wears jeans to class, (ever/a suit)

5. Alicia wants to go for coffee. (Teresa)

6. American teachers seem strange to Alicia, (to Teresa)

7. Teresa is working on a geography project. (Alicia)

PART Q Read each sentence. Then write a question with the words in
parentheses (). An answer is not necessary.
EXAMPLE Bob is popular. (Why)
Why is he popular?

1. Bob sounds interesting. (Why)

2. Bob doesn’t like tests. (Why)

3. Teresa and her friend are working on a project. (What kind of project)

4. Teresa studies in the library. (How often)

5. Teresa is looking for a book. (What kind)

6. Teresa is waiting for her friend. (Why)

7. Her classmates aren’t writing in a journal. (Why)

The Present Continuous Tense 185

Expansion
Classroom
Activities O Think of a place (cafeteria, airport, train station, bus, playground,
church, opera, movie theater, laundry, office at this school, kindergarten
classroom, restaurant, department store, etc.). Pretend you are at this
place. Write three or four sentences to tell what people in this place
are doing. Other students will guess where you are.
EXAMPLE People are walking fast.
They’re carrying suitcases.
They’re standing in long lines.
They’re holding passports.
Guess: Are you at the airport?

o Pretend you are calling from your cell phone. You are telling your
family where you are. Fill in the blanks to tell what you and other
people are doing. Then find a partner and see how many of your
sentences match your partner's sentences,

a. I’m at the supermarket. I’m

Do you need anything while I’m here?
b. I’m in my car. I’m
c. I’m in the school library. I’m
People me to be quiet because
I’m to you on my cell phone.
d. I’m in a taxi. I’m on my way home. I’m
you to let you know that
e. I’m at the bus stop. 1
f. I’m at a shoe store. I

g. I’m at the playground with the kids. The kids

h. I’m at the movies. 1 can’t talk now because the movie

i. I’m in the bedroom. 1 have to talk softly because my roommate

j. I’m in class now. I can’t talk. The teacher

186 Lesson 6
Lesson

7
Grammar
Future Tenses—14^/7/ and
Be Going To
Comparison of Tenses

Context
Weddings
Planning for a Wedding
Before
You Read 1. In your native culture, what kinds of gifts do people give to a bride
and groom?
2. Are weddings expensive in your native culture?

Read the following magazine article. Pay spedal attention to

CD 1, TR 33
future-tense verbs.

Karyn and Steve are

engaged now and are
planning their wedding.
They need a lot of time to plan.
They’re going to graduate
from college next year, and the
we>.lding will take place a year
and a half after they graduate
from college. They will need
time to choose a photographer
invitations, a place for the
reception,' a wedding dress, flowers, rings a wedding cake, entertainment.
and more . The wedding is going to be very expensive. In addition to paying
Did You for the wedding and reception, they will need to rent a limousine' and pay
Know? ^
Over two million ■
for a rehearsal dinner and a honeymoon. They are going to invite about
250 people, including many friends and relatives from out of town. They
couples get married I are going to pay for the hotel rooms for their grandparents, aunts, and
in America each yea.r' uncles. It is going to take a lot of time and energy' to plan for the wedding.
About half of these Before their wedding, they will register for gifts. They will go to stores
couples will get
divorced. For many
and select the gifts they want to recewe. When guests go to the stores,
couples getting they will choose a gift from tliis list. This way, Karyn and Steve are going
married today, their i to receive exactly what they want. They won’t receive duplicate presents.
wedding debt will A About six or seven weeks before the wedding, they will send out their
last longer than invitations. After they return from their honeymoon in Hawaii, they are
their marriage^^^M going to send thank-you cards to all the guests.
Who’s going to pay for all this? After they graduate, they will work and
save money for their dream wedding. But their parents are going to help

too. Like many young couples, tlaey will have credit card debt for years after
the wedding. This is in addition to college debt.
I

*A Ttfctptton is <1 p<irr> a 'swUlmv.

*A limousine is n c.ir. oTicn than <i normal car. A lurod Jriwr clrisc'' th e var.

190 Lesson 7
 Average Wedding Cost in the
U.S. (2007) = $28,800
Some Typical Costs

Wedding dress = $900

Invitations = $500

Flowers = $1,000

Reception = $13,000

Engagement ring = $3,215

7.1 Future with Will

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Will Verb Complement We use will + the base form for the
They will rent a Limousine, future tense. Will doesn't have an
There will be -s form.
a reception,
The bride will wear a white dress.

They'll register for gifts. We can make a contraction with the

She'll buy a white dress. subject pronoun and will.
He'll rent a tuxedo. I will = I'Ll It will = It'Ll
It'll take them a long time to plan for the wedding. You will = You'll We will = We'll
He will = He'Ll They will = They'll
She will = She'll

They will not receive duplicate presents. Put not after will to form the negative.
They won't pay for everything. Their parents will The contraction for will not is won't.
help them.
I will always love you. You can put an adverb {always, never,
I will never leave you. probably, even) between will and the
We will probably give money as a gift. main verb.

Future Tenses—Will and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 191

 EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb in the future tense.
Practice wilt. Answers may vary.
will be in a church.
EXAMPLE Karyn and Steve’s wedding

1. They 250 guests.

2. The wedding expensive,

3. They to Hawaii on their honeymoon,

4. They debt for many years after the wedding.
5. Guests __ presents that the bride
and groom want.
6. The bride and groom a limousine,

7. Their parents them pay for the wedding.

7.2 Future with Be Going To

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Be Going To Verb Complement Use is/am/are + going to + the base

form for the future tense.
I am going to buy a gift,
You are going to attend the wedding,
They are going to send invitations,
The bride is going to wear a white dress.
They are not going to graduate this year. To make a negative statement, put not
The bride is not going to use her sister's dress. after is/am/are.

They are going to go on a honeymoon. When the main verb is to go, we often
OR delete it.

They are going on a honeymoon.

They are probably going to open their gifts at home. We can put an adverb {always, never,
They are always going to remember their wedding probably, even) between is, am, are and
day. going.

Language Note:
We can make contractions.
The bride's going to wear a white dress.
She isn't going to wear her sister's dress.
We're not going to bring our present to the wedding.
Pronunciation Notes:
1. In informal speech, going to before another verb often sounds like "gonna." We don't write
"gonna."
2. We pronounce "gonna" only if a verb follows to. We don't pronounce "gonna' in the following
sentence: They are going to Hawaii.
Listen to your teacher pronounce the sentences in the above boxes.

192 Lesson 7
 . . t Discuss behaviors that are strange to you. What American behaviors
are not polite in your native culture?

About It Go to the school cafeteria, student union, or other crowded place. Sit
there for a while and observe. Write down some of the things you see.
Report back to the class.

Observations in the Library

I'm in the public library now. I see two ^irls together.
They’re talking and looking at books about dinosaurs.
They have a lot of books on the table. I think they’re
doing a project together ...

j 5^ For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

Tho Present Condnuous Tense 187

 EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb in the future tense.
Practice be going to. Answers may vary.
EXAMPLE They are going to send invitations to the guests.

1. Musicians at the wedding.

2. A professional photographer pictures,
3. There a lot of people at the wedding.
4. The bride a white dress.

5. The wedding a lot of money.

6. The wedding in a church.

7. The wedding cake very expensive.

7.3 Choosing Will or Be Going To

In many cases, you can use either will or be going to. But in a few cases, one is
preferred over the other.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I think the newlyweds will be very happy For a prediction, we can use either will
together. or be going to.
I think the newlyweds are going to be very
happy together.

The wedding will be in a church. For a simple fact about the future, we
The wedding is going to be in a church. can use either will or be going to.
They will send out 250 invitations.
They are going to send out 250 invitations.

A: What are you going to get for a wedding Speaker B is considering her options at the
gift? time of the conversation. She chooses will.
B: Maybe I'll give them a check. Or maybe I'll She did not think about the gift before.
buy something.
A: What are you going to get them? Speaker B is talking about a decision or plan
B: I'm going to get them dishes. made before this conversation. She chooses
A: How many guests is your cousin going to be going to.
invite to the wedding? "I'm going to get them dishes." = “Vm
B: He's going to invite 100 guests. planning to get them dishes."
A: I don't have enough money for the gift. Speaker B is making an offer to help. She's
B: I'll lend you some money. making this decision at the time of the
conversation. She chooses will.

A: Can I borrow $50? Speaker A is making a promise. He chooses

B: Sure. will.
A: I'll pay you back tomorrow.

Future Tenses—W'lll ,ind Be Goin^> To; Comparison of Tenses 193

 EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Tell if you have plans to do these things or not.
Practice be going to.
EXAMPLE meet a friend after class
Tm (not) going to meet a friend after class.

1. get something to eat after class

2. watch TV tonight
3. eat dinner at home tonight
4. go to the library this week
5. go shopping for groceries this week
6. stay home this weekend
7. take a vacation this year
8. move (to a different apartment) this year
9. buy a car this year

EXERCISE a ABOUT YOU Predict if these things are going to happen or not in
this class. Practice be going to.
EXAMPLE we/finish this lesson today
We are going to finish this lesson today.

1. the teacher/give a test soon 7. we/finisb this book by the end

of the semester
2. the tesp/be hard
3. most students/pass the test 8. the next test/cover the future
tense
4. l/pass the test
9. we/have a party at the end of
5. the teacher/give everyone an A
the semester
6. my English/improve

EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks with the future tense of the verb in parentheses {).
Practice be going to. Answers may vary.
EXAMPLE The wedding costs a lot of money. Our parents aregoingtopay for
(pav)
the wedding.

1. Guests will give us gifts. Some people us money.

i fi (gi't'e)

2. We need a wedding cake. We it at the best bakery.

3. We have to send out 250 invitations, We them

(send)

out about two months before the wedding.

194 Le.sson 7
 4. I have to choose a dress. I a lot of money.
(spt’nJ)

5. After the wedding, we thank-you cards to all the

(sfmJ)

guests.

6. My grandparents are coming from another state. They

in a hotel. We for their
(sta?) (puy)

hotel room.

EXERCISE B Use win or be going to to make predictions about the future of

families (either in the U.S. or in your native country). Begin with
/ think or I don't think.
EXAMPLE divorce/increase
I don’t think the divorce rate will increase in the U.S.
OR

1 don’t think the divorce rate is going to increase in the U.S. I think it’s
going to go down.

1. people/get married at an older age

2. the cost of weddings/go down
3. people/have more children
4. grown children/depend on their parents
5. grown children/take care of their parents
6. people/live longer
7. people/save more money

EXERCISE a Some friends of yours are going to have a birthday soon, and you
want to buy them a present or do something special for them.
What will you buy or do for these people?
EXAMPLE Maria’s birthday is in the winter.
I'll buy her a sweater. OR I’ll take her skiing.

1. Bill loves to go fishing.

2. Tina loves to eat in restaurants.

3. Carl needs a new digital camera.

4. Jim has a new MP3 player.
5. Lisa loves the beach in the summer.

6. Tom loves movies.

Future Tenses—Will and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 195

 EXERCISE Q A man is proposing marriage to a woman. He is making promises.
Fill in the blanks with will + verb to complete these statements,
EXAMPLE will be a good husband to you.

1. I love you very much. I (always) _ you.

2. I want to make you happy. I everything I can to

make you happy.
3. I don’t have a lot of money, but 1 hard and try
to save money.

4. We children, and I a

good father to them.

5. We old together,
6. We best friends and take care of each other.

7. You are the only woman for me. I (not) at

another woman.

EXERCISE Q The bride (B) has a lot to do before the wedding. She's getting nervous.
Her sister (S) is offering to help. Use will + an appropriate verb.
Answers may vary.
EXAMPLE B: 1 have to address a lot of invitations.

S: Give me a pen. I’ll help you .

1. B: I have to pick up stamps.

S: I’m going to the post office
2. B: I have to make a reservation for Grandma and Grandpa at a hotel.
S:

3. B: 1 have to write a check for the flowers, and I’m low on money now.
S: Don’t worry.
You can pay me back next week.
4. B: Now the phone is ringing. 1 don’t know what to do.
S: Relax.

5. B: I’m hungry. There’s nothing in the house to eat.

S: Let’s go out to eat.
B: I don’t have money to eat out.
S: That's OK
6. B: We need music for the wedding. I have the names of three bands.
I don’t know which is the best one.
S: I’ll let you know which one
has the best price. By the way, where’s Steve? Why isn’t he doing
some of this?

196 Lesson 7
Is the Honeymoon Over?
Before
You Read 1. Do married people usually agree on how to spend money?
2. In your country, do parents help their children after they get married?
After the wedding, the bnde and groom usually go on a honeymoon.
CD 1, TR 34 They take a trip together. Karyn (K) and Steve (S) are talking about
their honeymoon plans. Pay special attention to questions with the
future tense.

S: 1 have an idea for our honeymoon. How about a week in Hawaii?

K: I hear Hawaii’s very expensive. How much will it cost us?
S: Well, the flight is about $700 per
person.

K: That’s not bad. How about the

hotel?

S: About $3,000 for a week.

K: Why is it going to cost so much
money?
S: It’s one of the best hotels in
Hawaii. And it’s December, so
it’s high season.
K: How will we pay for this?
S: Our parents are going to give us a lot of money. And we’re going to get
a lot of money as gifts. I’m sure.
K: Are we going to spend all our gift money on our honeymoon? That
means we’re going to start our marriage with very little money. Aren’t
we going to save for a house?
S: Don’t worry. When we get back, I’m going to start my new job.
K: I think it’s a bad idea to start married life with so much debt.

S: You worry about money too much.

K: And you don’t worry enough. Am I going to be the only one who thinks
about saving? Maybe we should see a marriage counselor before we get
married. 1 think the honeymoon is going to be over before it begins!

Future Tenses—Will and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 197

7.4 Questions with Be Going To
Compare affirmative statements and questions.
r Wh- Be Subject Be Going To + Complement Short Answer
Word Base Form

They are going to spend a lot of money,

Are they going to spend more than $3,000? Yes, they are.
How much are they going to spend for the honeymoon?
Who is going to spend the money?

Compare negative statements and questions.

r Wh- Be + n't Subject Be + not Going To + Complement
Word Base Form

They aren't going to save money,

Aren't they going to save for a home?
Why aren't they going to save money?

EXERCISE 01 ABOUT YOU Ask another student a yes/no question with are you
going to about a time later today. Then ask a wh- question with the
words in parentheses () whenever possible.
EXAMPLE listen to the radio (when)
A: Are you going to listen to the radio tonight?
B: Yes, I am.
A: When are you going to listen to the radio?
B: After dinner.

1. watch TV (what show)

2. listen to music (where)
3. read the newspaper (what newspaper)
4. go shopping (why)
5. take a shower (when)
6. eat dinner (with whom) or (who . . . with)
7. call someone (whom) or (who)
8. check your e-mail (when)
9. do your homework (when)

198 Lesson 7
 EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU
Ask another student a yes/no question with be going
to and the words given. Then ask a wh- question with the words in
parentheses () whenever possible,
EXAMPLE take another English course after this one (which course)
A: Are you going to take another English course after this one?
B: Yes, I am.
A: Which course are you going to take?
B: I’m going to take level 4.

1. stay in this city (why)

2. study something new (what)
3. look for a job (when)
4. get an A in this course (what grade)
5. buy a computer (why) (what kind)
6. visit other American cities (which cities)
7. transfer to another school (why) (which school)

7.5 Questions with Will

Compare affirmative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Will Subject Will Base Complement Short Answer
Form

The wedding will cost a lot of money,

Will it cost more than $10,000? Yes, it will.
How much will it cost?
Who will pay?

Compare negative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Won't Subject Won't Base Form Complement
The flight won't cost a lot of money,
Won't the flight cost more than $1,000?
Why won't the flight cost more than $1,000?

Future Tenses—Will and Be Goin« To; Comparison of Tenses 199

 EXERCISE 12 Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb in (). Use will
for the future.

●i)) A: When’s your cousin’s wedding?

CD 1, TR 35
B: It’s tomorrow. I ha\-e to go to the store to check tlie wedding registry tonight,
A: lla£ with you.
(exiimpli’: be)
B: But look at the time. It’s late. The store closed
(IM
?
by the time we arrive. What
(2 I/do)
A: You can probably find the registry online.
B: I don’t know how to do that.

A: you.
(3 help)
B: But the gift by tomorrow.
(4 no^^arriiv)
A: It doesn’t have to arrive before the wedding. The bride and groom
their presents after they return from their honeymoon.
(5 pTobtibly/optn)
B: Or maybe I can just give them a check.
A: That’s a good idea. Newlyweds always need money. What time
7

l6 ific ucdding/siart)
B: The invitation says it at 5:30 PM, but
(7 st(in)

usually weddings don’t start exactly on time.

A: Where
(8 the u-edding/be)
B: It’ll be in a hotel.

A: What to the wedding?

(9 ●you/wear)
B: I don’t know. 1 my blue suit. Oh. I just
(10 pTobublj/ut'iir)
remembered that my blue suit is dirty. I time
(11 not/hai'«)
to take it to the cleaners. I wear my gray suit.
(12 have to)

A: How many people. the wedding?

(li allend)

B: About 200 people. the wedding.

(14 attend)
A: What kind of food . at the reception?
(15 ihey/scTvc)
B: There a choice of chicken or fish.
(16 be)
A: How long
(J7 the uedding/liisl)

200 Lesson 7
 B: The ceremony about a half hour. Then
(18 Imhuhly/ldit)
there’s a dinner. People for hours after
(19 I’rohahly/suiy)
the dinner to dance.

A: for their honeymoon immediately?

(20 ifu.’ bn Je und grotmi/lv<ut')

B: Probably not. They tired after the

(21 M

wedding. They _ the next day.

(22 probublj/Icui'i;)
A: Do you think the bride and groom _ happy together?
(23 Ul

B: Yes, I think they. very happy. They love each

124 M

other very much.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with will or be going to plus the verb in
parentheses (). Use contractions. In some cases, more than one
answer is possible.

A: What color are you going to choose for your wedding?

■<»
CO 1, TR36
B: Hmmm. Maybe I ’ll choose light blue or maybe green. I still
(exampli'i cfiooso)
can’t decide.

A: Who are you going to have as your bridesmaids?

B: my sister and my best friend.
(I hm 'i)
A: Where are you going to get your cake?
B: We the cake at Alton’s Bakery.
(2 SCI)

They _ it to the wedding.

(3 dclii'ci)

A: Where are you going to go on your honeymoon?

B: I don’t really know. Maybe we to Hawaii or maybe
(4 go)
we to Puerto Rico.
(5 go)
A: Do you have your dress already?
B: Yes. I my sister’s dress.
(6 uji')

A: When are you going to send out your invitations?

B: We’re finishing writing the addresses now. We
(7 send)

them out next week. We’re so busy. There are .so many things to do.
A: you.
(8 htl(>)

(continued)

Forurc Tense.s—Wiil and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 201

 B: Thanks. I could use help. Could you go to the post office for me and
get me 200 stamps? 1 you back tomorrow.
(9 pny)

A: No problem. How will you decorate your new home?

B: I don’t know yet. We that decision later.

(10 mukc)

EXERCISE ID In this conversation, fill in the blanks using the words in

parentheses (). Choose will or be going to for the future tenses.
In some cases, both answers are possible.

I’m so excited. My sister iscjoingtofiet married next year.

●i))
A:
(t'xamplc; gfl)
CD 1, TR 37
B: Why are yow so excited?
A: I’m going to be a bridesmaid.
B: How many bridesmaids 7

(I ihe/hat'e)
A: Two. Her best friend and I are going to be the bridesmaids.
B: What kind of dresses 7

(2 you/utar)
A: We blue dresses.
13 uviirj
B: in your church?
(4 l/ur uviUins/be)
A: No, it isn’t. It’s going to be outdoors, in a garden. After that, there
a dinner at a restaurant.
(5M
B: Why until next year to get married?
(6 tkcy/uuit)
A: They’re both in college now, and they want to get married after they
finish college.
B: Where after they get married?
A: Probably here for a while. But then they
18 look)

for jobs in the Boston area.

B: How many people to the wedding?

(9 invite)
A: It a big wedding because we have a large
(10 M

family, and so does her fiance^, Joe. They

(11 invite)

about 400 people.

B: Wow! The wedding expensive.
(12 be)

Who for it?

(13 fxij)

‘A /mrk'e b the mnn she is to marry. A man’s /lon.Ve is the woman he is grtiriK to marry.

202 Lesson 7
 A: Our parents and joe’s parents They
IN I>ay)
the cost 50/50. A lot of relatives

and friends here from out of town.

116 coins)
B: Where ?

(17 they/stay)
A: In hotels.

B: It expensive for the guests too. They

(J8 M

pay for their flights, hotels, and a wedding gift.

U9 /uii'c to)

A: I know. But they want to come. Of course, some people

because it too
(20 not come) 121 M

expensive for them.

7.6 Future Tense + Time///Clause^

TIME OR CLAUSE MAIN CLAUSE
(SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE) (FUTURE TENSE) EXPLANATION

After they graduate, they are going to work, The sentences on the left
Before they get married, they are going to send out have two clauses, a time or if
invitations, clause and a main clause.

When they return from the they will send thank-you We use the future tense only
honeymoon. cards, in the main clause; we use
If their grandparents come they will pay for their the simple present tense
from out of town. hotel. in the time/ff clause.

MAIN CLAUSE TIME OR IF CLAUSE

(FUTURE TENSE) (SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE) EXPLANATION

They are going to work after they graduate. We can put the main clause
Their grandparents will stay before the time/if clause.
in a hotel if they come.
Punctuation Note: If the time/?/clause comes before the main clause, we use a comma to
separate the two parts of the sentence. If the main clause comes first, we don't use a comma.
Compare:
If I get an invitation. I’ll go to the wedding.
I'll go to the wedding if I get an invitation.
Usage Note:
There is a proverb that means "I will decide when I need to decide." The proverb is:
I'll cross that bridge when I come to it.
*A ciauie is a of ssx'rcU that h»if^ a subject and a verb. Some sentences have more thiiii one clause.

Future Tenses—Will and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 203

 EXERCISE 15 Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the verb in parentheses ().
EXAMPLE Before they get married, they are ^oin^ to send
(send)
invitations.

1. If their grandparents to the wedding, they

(come)

in a hotel.
(smj)

Karyn and Steve a photo album when they

J
2.
'I' (muki.’)

from their honeymoon.

(rctHTn)

3. They into their new home when they

(moic)

from their honevmoon.

(ii’li(m)

4. When they back from the honeymoon, they

feet)

their gifts.
(ofvn)

5. They their money before they

(sai«) (hiiiv)

children.

6. Their grandparents home after the

feo)

wedding over.
(he)

EXERCISE 16 ABOUT YOU Complete each statement.

EXAMPLES When this class is over. I’ll go home.

When this class is over. I’m going to get something to eat.

1. When this semester is over,

2. When this class is over,
3. When 1 get home today,
4. When I graduate (or finish my courses at this school),

5. When 1 return to my country / become a citizen,

6. When 1 retire,
7. When I speak English better,

204 Lesson 7
EXERCISE 17 ABOUT YOU Complete each statement.
EXAMPLES If I drink too much coffee, [ won’t sleep tonii^ht.
If I drink too much coffee, I’m going to feel nervous.

1. If 1 practice English,
2. If I don’t study,
3. If I don’t pay my rent,
4. If 1 pass this course,
5. If we have a test next week,
6. If the teacher is absent tomorrow,
7. If I find a good job,

EXERCISE 18 A young Korean woman and her fiance, Kim, are planning to get
married. Her friend is asking her questions about her plans. Fill In
the blanks to complete this conversation.

A: I’m getting married!

CD 1, TR 38
B: That’s wonderful! Congratulations. Are you ejoing to have a big
(example: hatt;

wedding?

A: No, we’re going to have a small wedding. We

(J imilt)

about 50 people.
B: Where 7

(2 be)

A: It’ll be at St. Peter’s Church. We a reception

(3 hmc)

at a Korean restaurant after the wedding,

B: a wedding dress?
(4 buj)
A: No, I my sister’s dress for the wedding.
use)

Then, for the reception, 1 a traditional

16 wear)
Korean dress.

B: Where after you get married?

/? lite)
A: For a few years, we with Kim’s parents.
<8 liw)

When Kim college and

(9 /misW (10

a job, we our own apartment.

(II g«)
B: You’re going to live with your in-laws? I can’t believe it.
(continued)

Future Tenses—V/i/l and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 205

 A: In my country, it’s common. My iivlaws are very nice. I’m sure it
a problem. We
112 noiAi-’) ((3 Ttoi/hat<:}

children right away.

B: here for the wedding?
114 come)
A: No, my parents aren’t going to come. But a month after the wedding
we a trip to Korea, and Kim can meet my
05 loW

parents there.
B: When married?
06 get)
A: On May 15. I hope you’ll be able to attend. We
07 send)

you an invitation.

B: glad to attend.

A traditional Korean bride

206 Lesson 7
Jason and Katie—Starting a Married Life
Before
You Read 1. Do you think life is hard for newlyweds? In what way?
2. In your community, do parents help their children after they get
married?

Jason and Katie are newlyweds. Read Katie's journal page.

CD 1, TR 39 Pay special attention to verb tenses: simple present, present
continuous, and future.

C.

c
April 27
The wedding is oven the honeymoon was great, we opened our gifts, and
<L. our life as a married couple is beginning. We are learning that we have many
responsibilities as a married couple.
1 work as a nurse full-time. Everyone thinks I work in a hospital, but
c.
I don’t. I go to people’s homes and help them there. Jason isn’t working
now. He’s still attending college. He’s in his last year. He’s studying to be
c
a lawyer. After classes every day, he studies at home or goes to the law
c.
library at his college. He’s going to graduate next June. When he graduates,
he will have to take a special exam for lawyers. If he passes it. he’ll get a
c. good job and make good money, But when he starts to work, he’ll have to
c. pay back student loans. For now. we’re both living on my salary.
c. We’re saving money little by little. We’re planning to buy a house in a
suburb some day. We’re also thinking about having two children in the future,
S>ut we want to be financially stable before we have children. Our parents
sometimes offer to help us, but we don’t want to depend on them. Because
CL
Jason is so busy with his studies and I’m so busy with my job, we rarely go
out. Staying at home helps us save money.

Funire Tense.s—\\7ill ;nul Be Going To; Compari'.’on of Tenses 207

7.7 Comparison of Tenses
Uses

r EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

a. Katie works as a nurse. Jason studies law. Use the simple present tense:
Lawyers make a lot of money in the U.S. a. with facts
b. Grown children don't like to depend on b. with customs
their parents, c. with habits and regular activities
c. Jason goes to the library almost every day. d. with nonaction verbs
d. Jason and Katie have a lot of e. in a time clause or an //clause when
responsibilities now. talking about the future
e. When Jason graduates, he will look for
a job.
a. I am reviewing verb tenses now. Use the present continuous tense:
a. with an action in progress now, at this
b. Jason and Katie are saving money to buy moment
a house. They are planning to move to a b. with a long-term action that is in progress;
suburb. it may not be happening at this exact
moment

a. Katie thinks Jason will be a good lawyer, Use will for the future:
b. The law exam will be in March, a. with predictions
c. "I'll always love you, Katie," says Jason, b. with facts
d. "I'll help you in the kitchen," says Katie, c. with promises
e. What will you do next year? I'll cross that d. with an offer to help
bridge when I come to it. e. when you don't have a previous plan;
when you decide what to do at the time
of speaking
a. I think they are going to have a wonderful Use be going to for the future:
life. a. with predictions
b. For many years, they are going to receive b. with facts
bills for student loans, c. with plans
c. Jason is going to look for a job next year.

208 Lesson 7
Forms

SIMPLE PRESENT TENSE PRESENT CONTINUOUS TENSE

Jason studies in the library. They are saving money to buy a house.
He doesn't study at home. They aren't saving to buy a new car.
Does he study every day? Are they saving for a vacation?
Yes, he does. No, they aren't.
When does he study? How are they saving money?
Why doesn't he study at home? Why aren't they saving to buy a car?
Who studies at home? Who is saving money?

f FUTURE WITH WILL FUTURE WITH BE GOING TO

Jason will graduate next year. They are going to buy a house.
He won't graduate this year. They aren't going to buy a new car.
Will he graduate in January? Are they going to buy a house in the city?
No, he won't. No, they aren't.
When will he graduate? Where are they going to buy a house?
Why won't he graduate in January? Why aren't they going to buy a house there?
Who will graduate in January? Who is going to buy a house?

EXERCISE 19 Fill in the blanks with the correct tense and form of the verb in
parentheses ().
EXAMPLE Jason is cjoinct to ejraduate next year.
IpuduaU’l

1. He a good job when he

(fiai'e) fenuiudte)

2. He in the library.
(y/ten/sliiJj)

3, Jason and Katie out.

(rarely/go)

4. They their money now.

(sm't'J

5. They about buying a house.

(chink)

6. They it’s better to live in a suburb.

(think)

EXERCISE @ Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb,
aren’t
EXAMPLE They are young. They old.

1. They have an apartment now. They a house.

2. They want children, but they children right now.

3. Katie is working. Jason now. He’s going to school.

(continued)

Future Tenses—VViil and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 209

 on their
4. They depend on each other. They
parents.

5. Jason will graduate in June. He — in January.

EXERCISE 21 Read each statement. Then write ayes/no question with the words
in parentheses (). Write a short answer. Refer to Katie's journal
entry on page 207.
EXAMPLE Katie works as a nurse, (in a hospital).
Does she work in a hospital? No, she doesn’t.
1. Jason is a student. (Katie)

2. Jason is attending college now. (Katie)

3. Jason will have a job. (a good job)

4. They are thinking about buying a house, (about having children)

5. They are going to have children, (five children)

● r ●'

210 Lesson 7
EXERCISE E2J Read each statement. Then write a wh- question using the words in
parentheses (). An answer is not necessary.
EXAMPLE Katie works as a nurse. (Where)
Where does she work as a nurse?

1. They are saving their money, (why)

2. They don’t want to depend on their parents, (why)

3. Jason will make good money, (when)

4. Jason wants to be a lawyer, (why)

5. Katie isn’t going to work when her children are small, (why)

6. Jason will pay back his student loans, (when)

7. They don’t go out very much, (why)

8. Jason is attending college, (what college)

9. He is going to graduate, (when)

10. Jason isn’t earning money now. (who)

11. Someone wants to help them, (who)

12. They are learning about responsibilities, (how)

Inmirc Tenses— and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 211

Summary of Lesson 7

1. Future patterns with will;

AH-IRMATIVE: He will buy a car.
NEGATIVE: He won’t buy a used car.
YES/NO QUESTION: Will he buy a new car?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, he will.
WH- QUESTION: When will he buy a car?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why won’t he buy a used car?
SUBJECT QUESTION: Who will buy a car?
2. Future patterns with be going to:
AEEIRMATIVE: He is going to buy a car.
NEGATIVE: He isn’t going to buy a used car.
YES/NO QUESTION: Is he going to buy a new car?
SHORT ANSWER: Yes, he is.
WH-QUESTION: Wlien is he going to buy a car?
NEGATIVE QUESTION: Why isn’t he going to buy a used car?
SUBJECT QUESTION: Who is going to buy a car?
3. Uses of be going to and will;

USE WILL B£ GOING TO

Prediction You will become irch and You are going to become
famous. rich and famous.

Fact The sun will set at 6:32 pm The sun is going to set
tonight. at 6:32 pm tonight.
Plan I'm going to buy a new
car next month.

Promise I will help you tomorrow.

Offer to A: I can't open the door.
help B: I'll open it for you.
No previous A: I need to go to the store.
plan B: I'll go with you.

4. Review and compare the four tenses on pages 208-209.

212 Lesson 7
Editing Advice

1. In a future with will, don’t add be before the main verb.

I will be go.

2. Use be in a future sentence that has no other verb.

be

He will angry.
be

There will a party soon.

3. Don’t combine will and be going to.

IS

He wttt going to leave, or HewilUeave.

4. Don’t use the present tense for a future action.

II
I'm going home now. I see you later.

5. Don’t use the future tense after a time word or if.

When they wHl go home, they will watch TV.

6. Use a form of be with going to.

IS

He going to help me.

7. Use to after going.

to

I'm going study on Saturday.

8. Use the correctword order for questions.

aren'tyou
Why you-aren't going to eat lunch?

Future Tense'.;—Wi7l and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 213

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

To: MomHelen@e"mail.com

Subject: ^ewjob:

Dear Mom,
am C
Next week I witt going to start a new job. I'm so excited. My pay will be
(i'X(impit')

higher. I going to make $10,000 a year more than I do now. Isn't that
ill

great? And I will having a company car. When I'Ll get the car. I'm going send
Iat ti) (4)

you a picture of it.

When you will come and visit me? Soon, I hope. I send you money for a
(5i (6)
L
ticket. If I'll have time. I'll take you to visit many places. But that depends
(7) (S)

on my job. Anyway, it will nice to see you again.

(9)

I write you more later.

(10)

Love,
Anne

Lesson 7 Test/Review

PART a Fill in the blanks with a form of be + going to or with will. In some
cases, both answers are possible.
EXAMPLES I believe the next president will OR is going to be a woman.
’ll
You can’t move your piano alone. I help you do it.

1. We eat in a new restaurant tomorrow. Do you

want to go with us?
2. My friend is planning her wedding. She invite

150 guests to her wedding.

214 Lesson 7
 3. I promise I clean my room tomorrow.
4. If you come to work late every day, you lose
your job.
5. You don’t know anything about computers? Come to my house. I
teach you.
6. The teacher give a test next Friday.
7. Next week we _ begin Lesson 8.
8. Mother: Please call me when you arrive.
Daughter: Don’t worry, Mom. 1 call you as soon
as I arrive.

9. We’re planning a picnic, but I think it _ ram

tomorrow.

PART (9 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined word.
EXAMPLE She will get married in a church. She won’t get married at
home.

1. She is going to invite all her relatives. She all

her friends.

2. He will wear a tuxedo. He a suit.

3. I am going to buy a gift. I dishes.

4. I’ll help the bride, but I her today.

5. You are going to meet my parents. You my

brothers.

Fiiuire Tenses—V/i!l and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 215

 PART Q Read each statement. Then write a yes/no question about the words
in parentheses (). Write a short answer.
EXAMPLE She will write a letter, (a postcard) (no)
Will she write a postcard? No, she won’t.

1. They will send a gift, (money) (no)

2. You’re going to invite your friends, (relatives) (yes)

3. They arc going to receive gifts, (open the gifts) (yes)

4. They will need things for their kitchen, (for their bathroom) (yes)

5. There will be a party after the wedding, (music at the party) (yes)

PART Q Read each statement. Then write a question with the words in
parentheses (). No answer is necessary.
EXAMPLES I’m going to buy something. (What)
What are you going to buy?

1. They’ll use the money. (How)

2. I’m going to send a gift. (What kind of gift)

3. They’ll thank us. (When)

4. They’re going to get married. (Where)

5. They aren’t going to open the gifts at the wedding. (Why)

6. There will be a lot of people at the wedding. (How many people)

7. Some people will give money. (Who)

216 Lesson 7
Test on Comparison of Tenses
PART B Read the following e-mail. Fill in the blanks with the simple
present, the present continuous, or the future tense.

● ^ ●

To* [email protected]
Subject:, Heitoi

Dear Judy,
have
Please excuse me for not writing sooner. I rarely
(example: have)
time to sit and write an e-mail. My husband on
(1 uwk)

his car now, and the baby .. So now

(2 sleep)
I a few free moments.
(3 hmi)

a student now. I to
(4 be) <5 go)
Kennedy College twice a week. The school a few
16 be)

blocks from my house. I usually to school, but

(7 uailc)
sometimes I . My mother usually
(8 driie)

the baby when I'm in school. This semester

(9 uaich)
I English and math. Next semester
(lOscudy)
a computer course. I
(II cake) (12 thinW

knowledge about computers me find a good job.

(13 Wp)
When the semester over, we
(14 M

to Canada for vacation.

(15 go)
We my husband's sister. She
(16 t isic) <17 lice)
in Montreal. We Christmas with her efmily this year.
(IS sptftiJ)
When we to Montreal, I
(19 get) (20seiuJ)

you a postcard.

Please write and tell me what is happening in your life.

Love,
Barbara

Fiiuive Ten.se.<—V7(li and Bi.’ Going To; Comparison of Tenses 217

 PART B Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb,
isn’t a teacher.
EXAMPLE Barbara!s a student. She

1. She’s writing an e-mail now. She a composition.

2. Her mother sometimes takes care of her baby,

Her father care of her baby.
3. They’re L>oinc’ to visit her husband’s sister. They
her mother.
to Truman
A. She goes to Kennedy College. She
College.
5. Barbara and her husband live in the U.S. They
in Canada.

6. Her family will go to Montreal. They to

Toronto.

PART B Read each statement. Then write a yes/no question with the words
in parentheses (). Write a short answer, based on the e-mail.
EXAMPLE Barbara’s studying English, (math)
Is she studying math? Yes, she is.

1. The baby’s sleeping, (her husband)

2. She sometimesdrives to school, (ever/walkto school)

3. She's going to take a computer course next semester, (a math class)

4. She’ll go to Canada. (Montreal)

5. She’s going to send Judy a postcard, (a letter)

6. She sometimes writes e-mails, (write an e-mail/now)

7. Her sister-in-law lives in Canada, (in Toronto)

218 Lesson 7
PART Q Read each statement. Then write a wh- question with the words in
parentheses (). Write an answer, based on the e-mail.
EXAMPLE Barbara goes to college. (Where)
A: Where does she go to college?
B: She goes to Kennedy College.

1. Her baby’s sleeping. (What/her husband/do)

A:

B:

2. She’s taking two courses this semester. (What courses)

A:

B:

3. Someone watches her baby. (Who)

A:

B:

4. She’s going to take a course next semester. (What course)

A:

B:

5. They’ll go on vacation for Christmas. (Where)

A:

B:

6. Her husband’s sister lives in another city. (Where/she)

A:

B:

7. She doesn’t usually drive to school. (Why)

A:

B:

Future Tense.s—V/iil arid Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 219

Expansion
Classroom
Activities 0 Check (^) the activities that you plan to do soon. Find a partner.
Ask your partner for information about the items he or she checked
off. Report something interesting to the class about your partner's
plans.
EXAMPLE ✓ move

When are you going co move?

Why are you going to move?
Are your friends going to help you?
Arc you going to rent a truck?
Where are you going to move to?

a. get married
b. go back to my country
c. spend a lot of money
d. send a package
e. buy something (a computer, a DVD player, a TV, etc.)
f. go to a party

g- have a job interview

h. transfer to another college
1. become a citizen

j- eat in a restaurant

O Role-play the following characters. Practice the future tense,

a. A fortune-teller and a young woman. The woman wants to know her
future,

b. A man proposing marriage to a woman. The man is making promises,

c. A teenager and his/her parents. The teenager wants to go to a party on
Saturday night,
d. A politician and a voter. The politician wants votes,
e. A landlord and a person who wants to rent an apartment. The person
wants to know what the landlord will do to fbc up the apartment.

220 Le.sson 7
 o What are your concerns and plans for the future? Write one or two
sentences (statements or questions) for each of the categories in the
box below. Then find a partner. Discuss your concerns and plans with
your partner.

Job/Career

Money

Learning English

Home

Family and children

Health

Fun and recreation

Other

EXAMPLE Job/Career: I’ll get my degree in two years. Where will I find a job?

o Imagine that you are going to buy a gift for someone in the
following circumstances. What gift would you buy? Find a partner
and compare your list of gifts to your partner's list,
a. a friend in the hospital after surgery
b. a couple with a new baby
C. a cousin graduating from high school
d. a friend getting married for the second time
e. a friend moving into a new apartment
f. a family that invites you to dinner at their house

Future Tenses—Will and Be Going To; Comparison of Tenses 221

Talk
About It 0 In a small group or with the entire class, talk about gift-giving
customs in your native culture. What kinds of gifts do people give
for weddings? How much money do they spend? Do newlyweds
open presents at the wedding? Do they send thank-you cards?
What kind of gifts do people give for other occasions?

o Once a couple marries, both people often work. Sometimes only

the man or only the woman works. In your native culture, does a
woman ever support a man financially? Discuss.

Write
About It Use one of the topics in the chart on page 221 (job, money, learning
English, etc.). Write a short composition about your plans or concerns
for the future.

After 1 Graduate

I’m going to graduate next May. I’m worried about

finding a job. Will I find ajob in my profession? Will I
have to move to another city? I don’t want to move.
But if 1 don’t find ajob here, I’ll move to 6an Antonio
because my brotherlives there ...

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

222 Lesson 7
Lesson

8
Grammar
The Simple Past Tense

Context
Flying
 The Wright erothers-Hen with
Before * “W

\ '
You Read 1. Do
ycHi like to rra\-el by airplane? Why\^ hy n(.)v.
2. What are the
names of some famous invenV^g?
●<)) Read the foUowinq textbnnk arhvj □
CD 2. TR 01 past-tense verbs. attention^S^^*
‘

Did You
Know?
CK'er 100 years ago, people only dreamed
out lymg. The Wright brothers, Wilbur and
The Wright e world.
brothers never Wilbur Wright was born in 1867 and
married. Their Orville was born m
i
only love was recei\ed a
1871. In 1878, they
aviation. %ing toy from their father
Wilburwright 1867-191?. .1 with kites and started to think
Orville wnS le/ligla "‘’T flight,

iieir first flying machme-a kite made of wood, wire, and ciLh It had
I j pilot. Because of wind, it was difficult to control. They continued to studv
no

^ I I n=nS
^ ■ f wfc
L I S:
^ '“r“ r™"'
^ machine, but it crashed. They fixed it and
f vw It for the first nme on December )7, 1903, with Orville as the pilot Tire
i fea fl"’l,*7"‘' 'tT'''" ■' '■■“''“'"fl “ °f '20
' in *ru7'.’'cSist^^^^^ moment.

: The Wright brothers offered their invention to the U.S. government

i but the government rejected^ their offer at first. The government didn’t ’
, believe that these men invented a flying machine. Finally, President
1 heodtwe Roosevelt investigated their claims and offered the inventors a
contract
to build airplanes for the U.S. Army.
December 17, 2003, marked 100 years of flight. There was a six-day
celebration at Kitty Hawk, North Carolina, the location of the first flight
A crowd of 35.000 people gathered to see a replica’ of the first plane fly
The cost to recreate the plane was $ 1.2 million. However, it rained hard
that day and the plane failed to get off the ground.
You can now see the Wright brothers’ original airplane in the Air and
bpace Museum in Washington, D.C.

'A<ToJ,rwmici is the branch ot mechanics ih.at deals with the motion of air and irs effect on things.
’Reject means not accept.

'^^e5l^lca is a top’j oi an otiginai.

8.1 The Simple Past Tense of Regular Verbs
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

The Wright brothers started a bicycle business. To form the simple past tense of regular
They dreamed about flying. verbs, we add -ed to the base form.
They designed an airplane. Base Form Past Form
The president offered them a contract. start started
dream dreamed
design designed
offer offered
The past form is the same for all persons.
The Wright brothers wanted to fly. The verb after to does not use the past
They continued to study aerodynamics. form.

The Wright brothers invented the airplane We often use ago in sentences about the
over 100 years ago. past. Ago means before now.
We celebrated the 100th anniversary of flight
a few years ago.

EXERCISE 1 Read more about the Wright brothers. Underline the past tense
verbs in the following sentences.
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers lived in Dayton, Ohio.

1. Their father worked as a Christian minister.

2. The boys learned mechanical things quickly.
3. They loved bicycles.
4.
They opened the Wright Cycle Company repair shop, where they
repaired bicycles.
5.
They started to produce their own bicycle models.
6. The first airplane weighed over 600 pounds.
7. They succeeded in flying the first airplane in 1903.
8.
Wilbur died nine years later, of typhoid.'’
9. Orville lived to be 76 years old.

Tjphoid is ,i scrioiiv infection I'lnisiiij! ;i fever .iihI often death.

The Simple Past Tense 225

8.2 Spelling of the Past Tense of Regular Verbs
RULE BASE FORM PAST FORM

start Started
Add -ed to most regular verbs.
ram rained

When the base form ends in e, add -d only. die died

live Lived

When the base form ends in a consonant + y, change y carry carried

to i and add -ed. study studied

When the base form ends in a vowel+ y, add -ed. stay stayed
Do not change they. enjoy enjoyed

When a one-syllable verb ends in a consonant-vowel- stop stopped

consonant, double the final consonant and add -ed. hug hugged

Do not double a final w or x. show showed

fix fixed

occurred
When a two-syllable verb ends in a consonant-vowel- occur

consonant, double the final consonant and add -ed permit permitted
only if the last syllable is stressed.
When the last syllable of a two-syllable verb is not open opened
stressed, do not double the final consonant. offer offered

EXERCISE Q Write the past tense of these regular verbs. (Accent marks show you
where a word is stressed.)
EXAMPLES learn learned rlnp clapped
love loved listen listened

1. play 11. enjoy

2. study 12. drag -

3. decide. 13. drop
4. want 14. start _

5. like 15. follow

6. show 16. prefer

7. look 17. like

8. stop 18. mix

9. happen 19. admit.

10. carry 20. propel

226 Lesson 8
8.3 Pronunciation of -ed Past Forms

f PRONUNCIATION RULE EXAMPLES

A/ Pronounce /t/ after voiceless jump—jumped kiss—kissed

sounds: /p, k, f, s, s, c/ cook—cooked wash—washed
cough—coughed watch—watched

/d/ Pronounce /d/ after voiced rub—rubbed name—named

sounds: /b, g, v, d, z, z. j, m, drag—dragged learn—learned
n, t], I, r/ and all vowel love—loved bang—banged
sounds. bathe—bathed call—called
use—used care—cared
massage—massaged free—freed
charge—charged
Ad/ Pronounce /ed/ after /d/ or wait—waited add—added
/t/ sounds. hate—hated decide—decided
want—wanted

EXERCISE Q Go back to Exercise 2 and pronounce the base form and past form of
each verb.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the past tense of the verb in parentheses (}.
Use the correct spelling.
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers received a flying toy from their father.
(receiie)

1. They with kites.

(ptay)

2. They about flying.

(lircam)

3. They everything they could about flying.

IstuJvl

4. They a bicycle business.

(start)

5. They the bicycle shop to design airplanes.

(Uji)

6. They to fly their first plane in 1899.

(irv)

7. Their first plane

(crash)

8. They It.
(fix)

9. In 1903, their plane in the air for 12 seconds.

(stay)

10. They their invention to the U.S. government.

(offer)

11. The government to offer them a contract.

(JcciJc)
(continuecJ)
The Simple Past Tense 227
 12. Wilbur Wright in 1912.
(die)

13. Orville Wright for many more years.

("iiiv)

14. Their invention the world.

fcluinjjt')

Charles Lindbergh and Amelia Earhart

Before
You Read 1. When was the first time you traveled by airplane?
2. Do you recognize the people in the photos below?

Read the following textbook article. Pay special attention to the

CD Z, TR 02 past-tense forms of be.

At the beginning of the twentieth century,

flight was new. It was not for everyone. It was only
for the brave and adventurous. Two adventurers
were Charles Lindbergh and Amelia Earhart.
Charles Lindbergh loved to fly. He wa.s born
in 1902, one year before the Wright brothers’
historic flight. In 1927, a man offered a $25,000
reward for the first person to fly from New York
to Paris nonstop. Lindbergh was a pilot for the
United States Mail Service at that time. He
Charles Lindbergh
1902-1974 wanted to win the prize.
He became famous because he was the first person
!! to fly alone across the Atlantic Ocean. His plane
'' was in the air for 33 hours. The distance of the
I

flight was 3,600 miles. There were thousands of

i people in New York to welcome him home. He
' was an American hero. He was only 25 years old.
'j Another famous American aviator" was Amelia
', Earhart. She was the first woman to fly across
! the Atlantic Ocean alone. She was 34 years old. Amelia Earhart,
I! Americans were in love with Earhart. In 1937, 1897-1937

ii however, she was on a flight around the world

ii when her plane disappeared somewhere in the Pacific Ocean.
No one really knows what happened to Earhart.

'Ai'iaior pilot.

228 Lesson 8
8.4 Past Tense of Be

The verb be has two forms in the past: was and were,
' EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Was Complement

I He
interested in the story,
Charles a pilot, She > was
He brave, It
Amelia was
a pilot too. singular subject
She popular,
The airplane new in 1903.
It in the air for 12 seconds.

Subject Were Complement We

We You
interested in the story, were
You in class yesterday, They
were
Amelia and Charles brave, plural subject
They adventurous.

There Was Singular Subject There + wos + singular noun

There was a celebration in 2003.
There Were Plural Subject There + were + plural noun
There were thousands of people.
Charles Lindbergh was not the first person to fly. To make a negative statement, put
We were not at the 2003 celebration. not after was or were.

I wasn't here yesterday. The contraction for was not is wasn't.

You weren't in class yesterday. The contraction for were not is weren't.

EXERCISE 19 Fill in the blanks with was or were.

EXAMPLE Lindbergh and Earhart were
. v'ery famous.
1. The Wright brothers _ the inventors of the airplane,
2. The first airplane in the air for 12 seconds.

3. Lindbergh and Earhart aviators,

4. There thousands of people in New York to welcome

Lindbergh home.
5. Earhart the first woman to fly across the Atlantic Ocean.
6. I _ interested in the story about Earhart and Lindbergh,
7. you surprised that a woman was a famous aviator?
8. Lindbergh in Paris.

9. We happy to read about flight.

10. There a celebration of 100 years of flight in 2003.
11. There thousandsof people at the celebration.
ThcSimplePascTen.se 229
8.5 Uses of Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Lindbergh was an aviator. Classification of the subject

Lindbergh was brave. Description of the subject

Lindbergh was in Paris. Location of the subject
Earhart was from Kansas. Place of origin of the subject
She was born in 1897. With bom

There were thousands of people in New York With there

to welcome Lindbergh.
Lindbergh was 25 years old in 1927. With age

EXERCISE Q Read each statement. Then write a negative statement with the
words in parentheses ().
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers were inventors. (Earhart and Lindbergh)
Earhart and Lindberah weren’t inventors.

1. The train was common transportation in the early 1900s. (the airplane)

2. Earhart was from Kansas. (Lindbergh)

3. Lindbergh’s last flight was successful. (Earhart’s last flight)

4. Lindbergh’s plane was in the air for many hours, (the Wright brothers’
first plane)

5. The Wright brothers were inventors. (Earhart)

6. There were a lot of trains 100 years ago. (planes)

7. Lindbergh was born in the twentieth century, (the Wright brothers)

8. The 1903 flight at Kitty Hawk was successful, (the 2003 flight)

230 Lesson 8
8.6 Questions with WasfWere
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Was the first flight Long? Yes/No Questions

No, it wasn't.
Was/were + subject. . . ?
Was the first flight successful? Short answers
Yes, it was.
Were the Wright brothers inventors? Yes, + subject + wasiwere.
Yes, they were. No, + subject + wasn't/weren't.

Were there a lot of people at the 100-year celebration? There Questions

Yes, there were.
Was/were + there . . . ?
Was there a Lot of rain that day? Short Answers
Yes, there was.
Yes, there ms/were.
No, there wasn't/weren't.
How Long was the first flight? Wh- Questions
Where was the first flight? Wh- word + wasfwere + subject. . . ?
Why wasn't Amelia successful? Negative Questions
Why weren't you there? Why + wasn't/weren't + subject. . . ?
Who was with Earhart when she disappeared? Subject Questions
How many people were in the airplane? Who + was . . . ?
How many . . . + were . . . ?

Compare affirmative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Was/Were Subject WasfWere Complement Short Answer
Amelia was born before 1903.
Was she born in the U.S.? Yes, she was.
When was she born? In 1897.
Charles and Amelia were famous,
Were they inventors? No, they weren't.
Someone was with Amelia,
Who was with Amelia? A copilot.
Many people were at the celebration,
How many people were at the celebration? Thousands.

Compare negative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Wasn't/Weren't Subject Wasn'tf Weren't Complement
Air travel wasn't safe 100 years ago.
Why wasn't it safe?

The Wright brothers weren't afraid of flying,

Why weren't they afraid?

The Simple Pa.st Tense 231

 EXERCISE B ®3ch statement. Then write a yes/no question with the words
in parentheses (). Give a short answer.
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers were inventors. (Lindbergh)
Was Lindbergh an inventor? No, he wasn’t.

1. The airplane was an important invention, (the telephone)

2. Thomas Edison was an inventor, (the Wright brothers)

3. Amelia Earhart was American. (Lindbergh)

4. Travel by plane is common now. (100 years ago)

5. There were telephones 100 years ago. (airplanes)

6. You are in class today, (yesterday)

7. I was interested in the story about the aviators, (you)

8. I wasn’t born in the U.S. (you)

EXERCISE 8 ABOUT YOU Interview a classmate who is from another country.

1. Where were you born?

2. Were you happy or sad when you left your country?
3. Who was with you on your trip?
4. Were you happy or sad when you arrived?
5. What was your first impression of your new home?
6. Were you tired when you arrived?
7. Who was at the airport to meet you?
8. How was the weather on the day you arrived?

232 Lesson 8
EXERCISE Q Read each statement. Then write a wh~ question with the words in
parentheses (). Answer the question.
EXAMPLE Lindbcrj’h was very famous, (why)
A: Why was Lindbergh famous?
B: He was one of the first aviators.

1. Lindbergh was a hero, (why)

A:

B:

2. Lindbergh was American, (what nationality/Earhart)

A:

B:

3. Earhart was 34 years old wlien she crossed the ocean, (how old/Lindbergh)
A:

B:

4. Lindbergh was a famous aviator, (who/the Wright brothers)

A:

B:

5. Lindbergh was horn in 1902. (when/Earhart)

A:

B:

6. The Wright brothers were famous, (why)

A:

B:

7. The flight at Kitty Hawk in 2003 wasn't successful, (why)

A:

B:

EXERCISE fQ Fill in the blanks with the correct past-tense form of be. Add any
other necessary words.

1^^^ A: I tried to call you last weekend, worried about you.

was

(exampk)
CD 2, TR 03
B: I home. I out of town.
(/ not) (2)
A: Where- 7

(3)

B: In Washington, D.C.
A: alone?
i-f)
(continued)

The Simple Past Tense 233

 B: No. 1 . I was with my brother.
15)

A: expensive?
(6)

B: No. Our trip wasn’t expensive at all.

A: Really? Why expensive?
a)

B: The flight from here to Washington cheap.

(8)

National Air and Space Museum

And we stayed with some friends in their apartment.
They very helpful. They showed us a lot of beautiful
(9)

places in Washington. But my favorite place was the Air and

Space Museum.
A: a lot of people at the museum?
(10)

B: Yes, there were. It very crowded. But it

(W (J2)

wonderful to see the Wright brothers’ airplane and the airplane that

Lindbergh used when he crossed the Atlantic. Also it

(J5)

interesting to see the spacecraft of the astronauts. We

(14 not)

bored for one minute in that museum,

A: How long your flight to Washington?

(15)

B: It only 2 hours and 15 minutes from here. We don’t think

(16)

about flying as anything special anymore. But just a little over

100 years ago, flight just a dream of two brothers.

07)

Can you believe it? There only 66 years between the first
08)

flight in 1903 and the trip to the moon in 1969!

A: That’s amazing!

8,7 Simple Past Tense of Irregular Verbs—An Overview

C EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I came to the U.S. by plane. Many verbs are irregular in the past tense.
My flight took six hours. An irregular verb does not use the -ed
I felt happy when I arrived. ending.

234 Le.s.son 8
Robert Goddard

Before
You Read
1. Did you ever see the first moon landing in 1969?
2. Are you interested in astronauts and rockets?

Read the following textbook article. Pay spedal attention to

CD 2, TR 04 past-tense verbs.

m
■i Robert Goddard was born in 1882. When
Did You
he was a child, he became interested in
Know?
firecrackers and thought about the possibility’
The first woman of space travel. He later became a physics
in space was a professor at a university. In his free time, he
Russian, Valentina
built rockets and took them to a field, but
Tereshkova, in
1963. they didn’t fly. When he went back to his
university after his failed attempts, the other
professors laughed at him.
In 1920, Goddard wrote an article about
Robert Goddard with early
rocket, 1926 rocket travel. He believed that one day it
would be possible to go to the moon. When
The New York Times saw his article, a reporter wrote that Goddardhad less
knowledge about science than a high school
student. Goddard wanted to prove that The
New York Times was wrong. ^.5
'' 1
I In 1926, he built a ten-foot rocket, put
it into an open car, and drove to his aunt’s /●cS
I ■ ‘
nearby farm. He put the rocket in a field
and lit the fuse. Suddenly the rocket went
Astronaut BuzzAldrin o1
into the sky. It traveled at 60 miles per hour
Apollo 11 on the moon, 1969
' : 1
(mph) to an altitude of 41 feet. Then it fell
into the field. The flight lasted Vh seconds, hut Goddard was happy about
I \
!
I

his achievement. Over the years, his rockets grew to 18 feet and flew to
9,000 feet in the air. No one made fun of him after he was successful.
When Goddard died in 1945, his work did not stop. Scientists
continued to build bigger and better rockets. In 1969, when the American
rocket Apollo 11 took the first men to the moon, The New York Times
wrote: “The Times regrets'’ the error.”
I

' Rtwt inciins to be sorry for.

Tlw Simple Past Tense 235

8.8 List of Irregular Past Tense Verbs^
f VERBS WITH NO CHANGE FINAL d CHANGES TO t

bet—bet hurt—hurt bend—bent send—sent

cost—cost Let—let build—built spend—spent
cut—cut put—put lend—lent
fit—fit quit—quit
hit—hit shut—shut

f VERBS WITH A VOWEL CHANGE

feel—felt Lose—lost bring—brought fight—fought
keep—kept mean—meant® buy—bought teach—taught
leave—left sleep—slept catch—caught think—thought

break—broke steal-stole begin—began sing—sang

choose—chose speak—spoke drink—drank sink—sank
freeze—froze wake—woke ring—rang swim—swam

dig—dug spin—spun drive—drove shine—shone

hang—hung win—won ride—rode write—wrote

blow—blew grow—grew bleed-bled meet—met

draw—drew know—knew feed—fed read—read^

fly—flew throw—threw lead—led

sell—sold tell—told find—found wind—wound

shake—shook mistake—mistook lay—laid pay—paid

take—took say—said^°
tear—tore wear—wore bite—bit hide—hid
light—Lit
become—became eat—ate fall-fell hold-held
come—came

give—gave lie—lay run—ran see—saw

forgive—forgave sit—sat

forget—forgot get—got stand—stood

shoot—shot understand—understood

f MISCELLANEOUS CHANGES
be—was/were go—went hear—heard
do—did have—had make—made

'For :in nipimbecical list of irrcK^iLtr wtbs, sec Appciulix D.

Tlierc is a chanKe in the miwcI sound. Meant rhymes with sem.
The past form tif erad is pronounced like the color red.
''Said rhymes with bed.

236 Lessoa 8
EXERCISE 11 Read the following facts about the history of rockets. Underline the
verbs. Write R for a regular verb. Write I for an irregular verb.
EXAMPLE Goddard published a paper on rockets in 1920. R.

1. Goddard built and flew rockets from 1926 to 1939.

2. Germany used the first rockets in World War II in 1944.

3. The Russians launched their first satellite, Sputnik 1, in 1957.
4. The Americans sent up their first satellite, Explorer 1, in 1958.
5. Yuri Gagarin, a Russian, became the first person in space in 1961.
6. Alan Shepard, an American, went into space in 1961.
7. The United States put the first men on the moon in 1969.
8. A spacecraft on Mars transmitted color photos to Earth in 2004.

EXERCISE E9 Fill in the blanks with the past tense of one of the words from the
box below.

fly think drive be fall

write put become v' see

EXAMPLE Goddard became interested in rockets when he was a child.

1. He a professor of physics.
2. People that space travel was impossible.
3. Goddard his first rocket in a car and to his
aunt’s farm.

4. The rocket for IVi seconds and then it to

the ground.
5. Goddard never the first moon landing.
6. The New York Times about their mistake 49 years later.

EXERCISE [Q Fill in the blanks with the past tense of the verb in parentheses ().
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers’ father gave them a flying toy.
((.’ifd

1. They a dream of flying.

(h(iu')

2. They interested in flying after seeing a flying toy.

(becomi'l

3. They many books on flight.

(raid)

(continued)

TheSimplePastTen.se 237
 4. They bicycles.
(5.11)

5. They the first airplane.

(build)

6. At first they- problems with wind.

(have)

7. They _ some changes to the airplane.

(make)

8. They for the first time in 1903.

9. Only a few people the first flight.

(see)

10. President Theodore Roosevelt about their airplane.

(hear)

11. The airplane was an important invention because it

(brinj)

people from different places closer together.

12. Thousands of people to North Carolina for the 100th

(go)

anniversary of flight.

8.9 Negative Forms of Past Tense Verbs

Compare affirmative (A) and negative (N) statements with past-tense verbs.
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

A. Lindbergh returned from his last flight. For the negative past tense, we use
N. Earhart didn't return from her last flight. didn't + the base form for ALL verbs,
regular and irregular.
A. The Wright brothers flew in their airplane.
N. Goddard didn't fly in his rocket. Compare:
returned—didn't return
A. Goddard built rockets.
flew—didn't fly
N. He didn't build airplanes. built—didn't build
A. The Russians put a woman in space in 1963. put—didn't put
N. The Americans didn't put a woman in Remember: Put and a few other past-tense
space until 1983. verbs are the same as the base form.

238 Lesson 8
EXERCISE 14 Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined words,
didn’t believe
EXAMPLE Goddard believed in space flight. Other people
in space flight at that time.

1. The Wright brothers dreamed about flying. They

about rockets.

2. They sold bicycles. They cars.

3. Their 1903 airplane had a pilot. Their first airplane

a pilot.
4. The Wright brothers wanted to show their airplane to the U.S.
government. The government to see it at first.

5. The Wright brothers built the first airplane. They

the first rocket.

6. Goddard thought his ideas were important. His colleagues

his ideas were important.
7. He wanted to build rockets. He to build
airplanes.
8. In 1920, a newspaper wrote that he was foolish. The newspaper
about the possibility of rocket travel.
9. In 1926 his rocket flew. Before that time, his rockets

10. The first rocket staved in the air for IVi seconds. It

in the air for a long time.

11. Goddard saw his rockets fly. He rockets go to
the moon.

12. In 1957, the Russians put the first man in space. The Americans
the first man in space.
13. In 1969, the first Americans walked on the moon. Russians
on the moon.

14. A rocket went to the moon in 1969. A rocket

to the moon during Goddard’s lifetime.

Tlic Simple Past Tense 239

 EXERCISE f9 ABOUT YOU If you came to the U.S. from another country, fill
in the blanks with the affirmative or negative form of the verb in
parentheses to tell about the time before you came to the U.S. Add
some specific information to tell more about each item.
studied
EXAMPLES I English before I came to the U.S. I studied with a
(siuJv)

private teacher for three months.

OR

j didn t study English before I came to the U.S. I didn’t have

(SIIKiv)

enough time.

1. 1 my money for dollars before I came to

(I'xtluiTige)

the U.S.

2. I a passport.
(set)

3. 1 for a visa.

4. 1 English.
(siKtix)

5. 1 my furniture.
(tell)

6. I goodbye to my friends.
(silj)

7. I an English dictionary.
(huy)

8. 1 a clear idea about life in the U.S.

(fuH'i.’)

9. I afraid about my future.

(l)e)

10. I to another country first.

(*o)

11. I English well.

(unJ^TSinmi)

12. I a lot about American life.

(knou')

240 Lesson 8
EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU If you come from another city or country, tell if these
things happened or didn't happen after you moved to this city.
Add some sperific information to tell more about each item.
EXAMPLE find an apartment
I found an apartment two weeks after I arrived in this city.
OR

I didn’t find an apartment right away. I lived with my cousins for

two months.

1. find a job 6. go to the bank

2. register for English classes 7. visit a museum

3. rent an apartment 8. see a relative

4. buy a car 9. buy clothes

5. get a Social Security card 10. get a driver’s license

EXERCISE f9 ABOUT YOU Tell if you did or didn't do these things in the past
week. Add some spedfic information to tell more about each item.
EXAMPLE go to the movies
I went to the movies last weekend with my brother. We saw a great movie.
OR

I didn’t go to the movies this week. I didn’t have time.

1. use the Internet 7. buy a magazine

2. write a letter 8. work hard

3. go to the library 9. look for a job

4. do laundry 10. rent a DVD

5. buy groceries 11. send e-mail

6. use a phone card 12. read a newspaper

Tlie Simple Past Tense 241

Hero Pilot

Before
You Read 1. Do you think that plane travel is safe?
2. Do you know of any heroes?

■^)) Read the following conversation. Pay special attention to past-tense

CD 2, TR 05 questions.

A: Last night there was a great program

about heroes on TV. Did you see it?
B: No, I didn’t. Was it good?
A: Yes. There was a part about a pilot,
Chesley Sullenberger, or ‘ Sully” for
short. He was a real hero.

B; What did he do?

A: His airplane had to make an Chesley Sullenberger, pilot of Flight 1549

emergency landing a few minutes
after takeoff. Sully saved the lives of more than 150 passengers.
B: That’s amazing! But how many people died?
A: No one died. That’s why everyone says he’s a hero.
B: Why did he make an emergency landing?
A: Because his plane lost power.
B: How did it lose power?
A: A flock" of birds flew into the engine.
B: You say he was close to the airport. Didn’t he try to go back?
A: No, he didn’t. He didn’t have time.
B: So where did he land?

A: He made a perfect landing on the Hudson River, next to New York City.
B: Did the passengers fall into the water?
A: No. The passengers waited on the wings for rescue.
B: I’m sure they were scared. When did this happen?
A: In January 2009. It was a week before the inauguration of President
Obama. Obama invited him and his crew to attend the inauguration.

'A /l(Kk I't hirtls is n birUs that fly together.

242 Les.son 8
8.10 Questions with Past-Tense Verbs

Compare affirmative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Did Subject Verb Complement Short Answer
The pilot landed the plane,
Did he land at an airport? No, he didn't.
Where did he land? On the Hudson River.

The plane lost power,

Did the plane lose an engine? Yes, it did.
How did it Lose an engine? Birds flew into the engine.
Language Notes:
1. To form a yesino question, use:
Did + subject + base form + complement
2. To form a short answer, use:
Yes, + subject pronoun + did.
No, + subject pronoun + didn't.
3. To form a wh- question, use:
Wh- word + did + subject + base form + complement

Compare negative statements and questions.

Wh- word Didn't Subject Verb Complement
The pilot didn't go to the airport,
Didn't he go back?
Why didn't he go back to the
airport?

EXERCISE f3 Read the questions and answer with a short answer.

EXAMPLE Did you read about the pilot? Yes. I did.

1. Did the pilot return to the airport?

2. Did he make the right decision?
3. Did any of the passengers die?
4. Did the plane go into the river?
5. Was the pilot brave?

Tlie Simple Past Tense 243

 EXERCISE Eg ABOUT YOU Use these questions to ask another student about the
time when he or she lived in his or her native country.

1. Did you study English in your country?

2. Did you live in a big cit>>?
3. Did you live with your parents?
4. Did you know a lot about the U.S.?
5. Did you finish high school?
6. Did you own a car?
7. Did you have a job?
8. Did you think about your future?
9. Were you happy?

EXERCISE 20 Read each statement. Write a yes/no question about the words in
parentheses (). Write a short answer.
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers had a dream. (Goddard) (yes)
Did Goddard have a dream? Yes, he did.

1. Wilbur Wright died in 1912. (his brother) (no)

2. The Wright brothers built an airplane. (Goddard) (no)

3. Earhart loved to fly. (Lindbergh) (yes)

4. Lindbergh crossed the ocean. (Earhart) (yes)

5. Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service. (Earhart) (no)

6. Lindbergh became famous. (Earhart) (yes)

7. Earhart disappeared. (Lindbergh) (no)

8. Lindbergh was born in the twentieth century. (Earhart) (no)

244 Lesson 8
 9. Lindbergh won money for his flight, (the Wright brothers) (no)

10. People didn’t believe the Wright brothers at first. (Goddard) (no)

11. The Wright brothers dreamed about flight. (Goddard) (yes)

12. Sully made an emergency landing, (a safe landing) (yes)

13. Birds flew into one engine, (both engines) (no)

14. Sully was safe, (the passengers) (yes)

EXERCISE EB blanks with the correct words.

EXAMPLE What kind of engine did the first airplane have? 7

The first airplane had a gasoline engine.

1. Where 7

The Wright brothers built their plane in their bicycle shop.

2. Why 7

The first plane crashed because of the wind.

3. Why the
first flight in 1903?
Many newspapers didn’t report it because no one believed it.
4. Where 7

Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service.

5. Why 7

He crossed the ocean to win the prize money.

6. How much money 7

He won $25,000.
7. How old when he crossed the ocean?
Lindbergh was 25 years old when he crossed the ocean.
8. Where
Earhart was born in Kansas.

9. Where 7

She disappeared in the Pacific Ocean.

(continwed)

The Simple Past Tense 245

 ?
10. Why
Nobody knows why Earharr didn’t return.
11. When
The first man walked on the moon in 1969.

12. Why the first moon landing?

Goddard didn’t see the first moon landing because he died in 1945.
?
13. Why
Sully was a hero because he saved lives.
7
14. How many
He saved 150 lives.
7
15. Why
He didn’t return to the airport because he didn’t have time.

EXERCISE @ Read each statement. Then write a question with the words in
parentheses (). Answer with a complete sentence. (The answers are
at the bottom of page 247.)
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers were born in the nineteenth century. (Where)
Where were they born?

They were born in Ohio.

1. The Wright brothers were born in the nineteenth century.

(When/Li ndbergh)

2. Their father gave them a toy. (What kind of toy)

3. They had a shop. (What kind of shop)

4. They designed airplanes. (Where)

5. They flew their first plane in North Carolina. (When)

246 Lesson 8
 6. The first plane stayed in the air for a few seconds. (How many seconds)

7. The U.S. government didn’t want to see the airplane at first. (Why)

8. The Wright brothers invented the airplane. (What/Goddard)

9. Goddard took his rocket to his aunt’s farm. (Why)

10. People laughed at Goddard. (Why)

11. Sully landed his plane. (Where)

12. Sully received an invitation from the president. (When)

13. The president thanked him. (Where)

ANSWERS TO EXERCISE 22:

uouejnSneui aip au (£[) ‘600Z

Ajenuef ui ‘Aai^ ui JSAi'y uospnj-j oip uo (| [) ‘(]ooj u su.w
ai| H|Snoi]a Aaiji) uiiij 9A3]]3q 5,upip Aatp (qj) ‘Aj_j ppioM ji nas (6)
‘aaqaoj mp (g) ‘ai SAaipq 3 upip Aaq; {/,) ‘spuooos n (9) <£06l (5)
‘doijs 9]aADiq iiaqs ui (.p) ‘doqs sioAoiq v (p) ‘A03 x1iiiA|j e (^) ‘306I (1)

The Simple Past Tense 247

 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Check {>/) all statements that are true for you. Then
read aloud one statement that you checked. Another student will ask
a question with the words in parentheses (). Answer the question.
EXAMPLES ^ I did my homework, (where)
A: I did my homework.
B: Where did you do your homework?
A: I did my homework in the library.
^ [ got married, (when)
A: I got married.
B: When did you get married?
A: I got married six years ago.

1. I graduated from high school, (when)

2. 1 studied biology, (when)
3. I bought an English dictionary, (where)
4. 1 left my country, (when)
5. I came to the U.S. (why)
6. 1 brought my clothes to the U.S. (what else)
7. I rented an apartment, (where)
8. 1 started to study English, (when)
9. I chose this college/school, (why)
10. I found my apartment, (when)
11. 1 needed to learn English, (when)
12. I got a driver’s license, (when)

EXERCISE ABOUT YOU Check {y) which of these things you did when you were
a child. Make an affirmative or negative statement about one of these
items. Another student will ask a question about your statement.
EXAMPLE _1 attended public school.
A: I didn’t attend public school.
B: Why didn’t you attend public school?
A: My parents wanted to give me a religious education.

1. 1 participated in a sport. 7. 1 had a pet.

2. I enjoyed school. 8. I lived on a farm.

3. I got good grades in school. 9. 1 played soccer.

4. 1 got an allowance.'" 10. 1 studied English.
5. 1 lived with my grandparents. 11. 1 had a bike.

6. I took music lessons. 12. 1 thought about my future.

'-An ullommre is children sec from their parents, usu-.illy once a week.

248 Lesson 8
8.11 Questions About the Subject
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Verb Complement When we ask a question about the subject,

Someone saved the passengers, we use the past-tense form, not the base
Who saved the passengers? form. We don't use did in the question.
Something happened to Sully's plane, Compare:
What happened to Solly's plane? Where did the pilot land the airplane?
Who landed the airplane?
A president invited Sully.
Which president invited Sully? When did the accident happen?
What happened?

EXERCISE @ Choose the correct words to answer these questions about the
subject. (The answers are at the bottom of the page.)
EXAMPLE Who invented the airplane?
Wright hrothe^/ Goddard / Lindbergh)
1. Which country sent the first rocket into space?
(the L/.S. / China / Ritssia)
2. Who walked on the moon in 1969?

(an American / a Russian / a Canadian)

3. Who sent up the first rocket?
(the Wright brothers / Goddard / Lindbergh)
4. Who disappeared in 1937?
(Earhart/ Goddard/ Lindbergh)
5. Who won money for flying across the Atlantic Ocean?
(Earhart / Lindbergh / Goddard)
6. Which president showed interest in the Wright brothers’ airplane?
(T. Roosevelt/ Lincoln/Wilson)
7. Which newspaper said that Goddard was a fool?
(Chicago Tribune / The Washington Post / The New York Times)
8. How many people died in Sully’s emergency landing?
(150/ 10/no one)

ANSWERS TO EXERCISE 25:

9UO ou (8) ‘sauiix (i) ‘jiaASSOO-y (9)

‘i|bjnqpu]-j (g) ‘latJLjjBq (^) ‘pjuppoQ (p) ‘uBaijaiuy ub (^) ‘Bissn-y (j)

The Simple Past Tense 249

 EXERCISE @ ABOUT YOU Read one of the who questions below. Someone will
volunteer an answer. Then ask the person who answered "I did" a
related question.

EXAMPLE A: Who went to the bank last week?

B: I did.

A: Why did you go to the bank?

B: I went there to buy a money order.

1. Who brought a dictionary to class today?

2. Who drank coffee this morning?
3. Who wrote a composition last night?
4. Who watched TV this morning?
5. Who came to the U.S. alone?

6. Who made an international phone call last night?

7. Who studied English before coming to the U.S.?
8. Who bought a newspaper today?

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks in this conversation between two students about
their past.

A: was born in Mexico. I

(e.vampL'; bom) (I comt')

to the U.S. ten years ago. Where born?

(2 M

B: In El Salvador. But my family to Guatemala

(3 moi-e)

when I ten years old.

(4 W

A: Why to Guatemala?
(5 mou )

B: In 1998, we our home.

(6 lose)

7
A: What
(7 luip(ien)

250 Le.sson 8
B: A major earthquake my town. Luckily,
(8 hit)

my family was fine, but the earthquake

(9 destroy)

our home and much of our town. We

no so)

to live with cousins in Guatemala.

A: How long in Guatemala?

(11 stay)

B: I Stayed there for about three years. Then I

(12 comet

to the U.S.

A: What about your family? to the U.S. with you?

(13 come)

B: No. They _ until I a job

(H uait) n5/ind)

and my money. Then I

<16 sate) (17 Imns)

them here later.

A: My parents with me either. But my older

(18 not/come)

brother did. 1 to go to school as soon as I

(19 start)

(20 arrtu’)

B: Who you while you were in school?

(21 support)

A: My brother
(22)

B: I to school right away because I

(23 not/go)

to work. Then I
(24 haiv) (25 get)

a grant and to go to City College.

(26 start)

A: Why City College?

(27 clioose)

B: I chose it because it has a good ESL program.

A: Me too.

The Simple Past Tense 251

Summary of Lesson 8

The Simple Past Tense

1. Be

Was Were

I
We 1
He
> was in Paris. You > were in Paris.
She
They ,
It

There was a problem. There were many problems.

Was Were

AI-l-lRMATIVE
He was in Poland. They were in France.
NEO.ATIVF.
He wasn’t in Russia. They weren’t in England.
YE.S/NO QUESTION
Was he in Hungary? Were they in Paris?
SHORT ANSWER
No, he wasn’t. No, they weren’t.
WH-QUESTION Where was he? When were they in France?
NEC5ATIVE QUESTION
Why wasn’t he in Russia? Why weren’t they in Paris?
SURJEtT QUESTION Who was in Russia? How many people were in France?

2. Other Verbs

REGULAR VERB {WORK) IRREGULAR VERB {BUY)

AEI-IRMATIVE
She worked on Saturday. They bought a car.
NEGATIVE
She didn’t work on Sunday. They didn’t buy a motorcycle.
VE.S/NO QUESTION
Did she work in the morning? Did they buy an American car?
SHORTANSWER
Yes, she did. No, they didn’t.
vm QUESTION Where did she work? What kind of car did they buy?
NEtiATlVE QUESTION
Why didn’t she work on Why didn’t they buy an
Sunday? American car?
SURJEcrr QUESTION
Who worked on Sunday? How many people bought an
American car?

252 Le.sson 8
Editing Advice

1. Use the base form, not the past form, after to.
t>uy
I wanted to bought a new car.

2. Review the spelling rules for adding -ed, and use correct spelling.
studied
1 studyed for the last test.
dropped
He droped his pencil.

3. Use the base form after did or didn’t,

know
She didn't etew the answer.
come

Did your father eame to the U.S.?

4. Use the correct word order in a question.

yourmothergo
Where did go your mother?
did your sister buy
What bought your sister?

5. Use be with bom. (Don’t add -ed to born.) Don’t use be with died,
was born

Her grandmother horned in Russia.

She wos died in the U.S.
was

Where did your grandfather born?

did

Where was your grandfather died?

6. Check your list of verbs for irregular verbs.

brought
I bringed my photos to the U.S.
saw

I seerr the accident yesterday.

7. Use be with age.

was

My grandfather had 88 years old when he died.

8. Don’t confuse was and were.

were

Where was you yesterday?

The Simple Past Tense 253

 9. Don’t use did in a question about the subject.
took
Who did take my pencil?

10. Don’t use tvas before happened.

What was happened to the airplane?

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.
had C
A: Last week we kave an interesting homework assignment. We had to
teumple) (example)

wrote about a famous person.

(j)

B: Who you wrote about?

l2)

A: I wrote about Yuri Gagarin.

B: Who’s that?

A: He was the first person in space.

B: He was an American?
'4)

A: No, he was Russian.

15)

B: When he went into space?

16)

A: In 1961.

B; Did he went alone?

(7)

A: Yes. But he wasn’t the first living thing in space. There was fruit flies
(8) (9)

and dogs in space before him. And later there were

(JO)
chimpanzees and

even turtles in space.

B: Is Gagarin still alive?

A: No. He was died in 1968.

(ID

B: When did he born?

(12)

254 Lesson 8
 A: He born in 1934. He had only 34 years old when he died. He never see
'<3) IH) (15) (16)

the moon landing. That was happened

(lii
in 1969, one year before he died.
118)

B: Who did walk on the moon first? 1 forgetted his name.

09) (20)

A: That was Neil Armstrong.

B: How did Gagarin died?

f2I)

A: He were in a plane crash.

(22)

B: That’s so sad.

A: Yes, it is. They named a town in Russia after him.

123)

Lesson 8 Test/Review

PART Q Write the past tense of each verb,

EXAMPLES live lived feel felt

1. eat 11. drink

2. see 12. build

3. get 13. stop _

4. sit. 14. leave.
5. hit 15. buy_
6. make 16. think

7. take. 17. run _

8. find _ 18. carry.

9. say 19. sell_

10. read . 20. stand

PART Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
EXAMPLE Lindbergh worked for the U.S. Mail Service. Earhart
didn’t work
for the U.S. Mail Service.

1. There were trains in 1900. There any airplanes.

TIk Simple Past Ten.se 255

 2. The 'Wright brothers flew a plane in 1903. They
a plane in 1899.
3. Charles Lindbergh was an aviator. He
president.
4. The Wright brothers invented the airplane. They
the telephone.
5. Wilbur Wright died of typhoid fever. He in

a plane crash.
6. Lindbergh went to Paris. Earhart to Paris.

7. Lindbergh came back from his flight. Earhart

back from her last flight.
8. Goddard was born in the nineteenth century. He
in the twentieth century.
9. Goddard built a rocket. He _ an airplane,
10. Sully lost one engine. He _ both engines.

PART Q Read each statement. Write ayes/no question about the words in
parentheses {). Write a short answer.
EXAMPLE Lindbergh crossed the ocean. (Earhart) (yes)
Did Earhart cross the ocean? Yes, she did.

1. Wilbur Wright became famous. (Orville Wright) (yes)

2. Lindbergh was an aviator. (Goddard) (no)

3. Lindbergh flew across the Atlantic Ocean. (Earhart) (yes)

4. Lindbergh was born in the U.S. (Goddard) (yes)

5. Goddard wrote about rockets, (the Wright brothers) (no)

6. The Russians sent a man into space, (the Americans) (yes)

7. Goddard died in 1945. (Wilbur Wright) (no)

256 Lesson 8
 8. The U.S. put men on the moon in 1969. (Russia) (no)

9. People laughed at Goddard’s ideas in 1920. (in 1969) (no)

10. Sully landed the airplane in the river, (safely) (yes)

PART Q Write a wh- question about the words in parentheses (). An answer
is not necessary.
EXAMPLE The Wright brothers became famous for their first airplane.
(why/Lindbergh)
Why did Lindbergh become famous?

1. Earhartwas born in 1897. (when/Lindbergh)

2. Lindbergh crossed the ocean in 1927. (when/Earhart)

3. Lindbergh got money for his flight, (how much)

4. Earhart wanted to fly around the world, (why)

5. Many people saw Lindbergh in Paris, (how many people)

6. Goddard’s colleagues didn’t believe his ideas, (why)

7. Wilbur Wright died in 1912. (when/Orville Wright)

8. A president examined Goddard’s ideas, (which president)

9. Sully lost an engine, (how)

10. Someone made an emergency landing, (who)

The Simple Past Tense 257

Expansion
Classroom
Activities O In a small group or with the entire class, interview a student who
recently immigrated to the U.S. Ask about his or her first experiences
in the U.S.

EXAMPLES Where did you live when you arrived?

Who picked you up from the airport?
Who helped you in the first few weeks?
What was your first impression of the U.S.?

© Find a partner from another country to interview. Ask questions

about the circumstances that brought him or her to the U.S. and the
conditions of his or her life after he or she arrived. Write your
conversation. Use Exercise 26 as your model.
EXAMPLE A: When did you leave your country?
B: 1 left Ethiopia five years ago.
A: Did you come directly to the U.S.?
B: No. First I went to Sudan.
A: Why did you leave Ethiopia?

0 Finish these statements five different ways. Then find a partner

and compare your sentences to your partner's sentences. Did you have
any sentences in common?
EXAMPLE When 1 was a child, 1 didn’t like to do mv homework.
When I was a child, my parents sent me to camp every summer.
When I was a child, my nickname wasXurly^

a. When I was a child.

When I was a child,
When I was a child.
When I was a child.
When 1 was a child.

b. Before I came to the U.S.,

Before I came to the U.S.,
Before I came to the U.S.,
Before I came to the U.S.,
Before I came to the U.S.,

258 Lesson 8
Talk
About It O Do you think space exploration is important? Why
or why not?

o Do you think there is life on another planet?

o Would you want to take a trip to the moon or to another planet?

Why or why not?

Write
About It O Write about your personal hero. You can write about
a family
member, friend, teacher, coworker, or someone you read about. Tell
why you admire this person.

0 Write a paragraph about a famous person that you admire. Tell

what this person did.

EXAMPLE

Abraham Lincoln

I really admire Abraham Lincoln. He was the 10th

president of the U.5. He wanted every person to

be free. At that time, there were slaves in the U.S.

Lincoln wanted to end slavery...

For more practice using grammar in context,

^ please visit our Web site.

The Simple Past Tense 259

Lesson

9
Grammar
Infinitives

Modals

Imperatives

Context
Smart Shopping
9.1 Infinitives—An Overview

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I want to go shopping. An infinitive is to + the base form: to go,

I need to buy a new DVD player. to buy, to compare, to be
It's important to compare prices.
It’s not hard to be a good shopper.

Getting the Best Price

Before
You Read 1. Do you like to shop for new things such as TVs, DVD players,
computers, and microwave ovens?
2. Do you try to compare prices in different stores before you buy
an expensive item?

Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to

CO 2, TR 06 infinitives.

Are you planning to buy a new TV,

digital camera, or DVD player? Of course

you want to get the best price. Sometimes you see

an item you like at one store and then go to another
store to compare prices. If you find the same item
at a higher price, you probably think it is necessary
to go back to the first store to get the lower price. But it usually isn’t. You
can simply tell the salesperson in the second store that you saw the item at
a better price somewhere else. Usually the salesperson will try to match' the
other store’s price. However, you need to prove that you can buy it cheaper
elsewhere.' The proof can he an advertisement from the newspaper. If
you don’t have an ad, the salesperson can call the other store to check the
price. The salesperson doesn’t want you to leave the store without buying
anything. He wants his store to make money. Some salespeople are happy to
call the other store to check the price.
What happens if you buy something and a few days later see it cheaper
at another store? Some stores will give you the difference in price for a
limited period of time (such as 30 days). It’s important to keep the receipt
to show when you bought the item and how much you paid.
Every shopper waiits to save money.

To rruitcK ,\ price men ns to give you nn price,

●filfeuTtc’te incnns :?omewhcrc cl>c, .mother pince.

262 Lesson 9
 9.2 Verbs Followed by an Infinitive
We often use an infinitive after certain verbs.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Verb Infinitive Complement We use an infinitive after these verbs:

I plan to buy a camera. begin hope prefer

continue [ike promise
We want to get the best price,
decide [ove start
You need to be a smart shopper. expect need
She likes to save money. forget plan want

They want to buy a DVD player, An infinitive never has an ending.

We
It never shows tense. Only the first
wanted to buy a new TV.
verb has an ending or shows tense.
He is planning to buy a microwave
Wrong: He wanted to bought a
oven.
new TV.

Pronundation Notes;
1. In informal speech, wont to is pronounced "wanna." Listen to your teacher pronounce these
sentences:

I want to buy a DVD.

Do you want to go shopping with me?
2. In other infinitives, we often pronounce to like "ta" (after a consonant sound), "da" (after a
vowel sound), or "a" (after a "d" sound). Listen to your teacher pronounce these sentences:
Do you like to watch movies at home? ("ta")
I plan to buy a new DVD player, ("ta")
Try to get the best price, ("da")
We decided to buy a digital camera, ("a")
I need to compare prices, ("a")

EXERCISE 1 Fill in the blanks with an infinitive. Answers may vary.

EXAMPLE 1 want to buy a new TV.

1. I like money.

2. I decided about $500.

3. I want the best price.
4. I forgot . the Internet before going to the stores,
5. 1 need a smart shopper.
6. Some people prefer online.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 263

 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Make a sentence about yourself with the words given.
Use an appropriate tense. You may find a partner and compare your
sentences to your partner's sentences,
EXAMPLES like/cat
I like to cat pizza.
Icarn/spcak
I learned to speak German when 1 was a child,
try/find
I’m trying to find a bigger apartment.

1. love/go
2. like/play
3. need/have
4. expect/get
5. want/go
6. plan/huy
7. need/understand
8. not need/have
9. try/learn

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Ask a question with the words given in the present
tense. Another student will answer,

EXAMPLE like/shop

A: Do you like to shop?

B: Yes, I do. or No, 1 don’t.

1. try/compare prices
2. plan/buy something new
3. like/shop alone
4. like/shop online
5. like/use coupons
6. try/get the best price

264 Lesson 9
 EXERCISE a Ask a question with "Do you want to ... ?" or
ABOUT YOU

Do you plan to ... ?" and the words given. Another student will
//

answer. Then ask a wh- question with the words in parentheses ()

whenever possible.
EXAMPLE buy a car (why)

A: Do you plan to buy a car?

B: Yes, 1 do.
A: Why do you want to buy a; car?
B: I don’t like public transportation.

1. take a computer course next semester (why)

2. move (why) (when)
3. leave this country (why) (when)
4. get a job/get another job (what kind of job)
5. become an American citizen (why)
6. transfer to a different school (why)
7. take another English course next semester (which course)
8. learn another language (which language)
9. review the last lesson (why)

9.3 It + Be + Adjective + Infinitive

We often use an infinitive with sentences beginning with an impersonal it.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

It Be (+ not) Adjective Infinitive Phrase An infinitive can follow these

It IS important to save your receipt, adjectives:
It is easy to shop, dangerous hard good
It isn't necessary to go back to the possible difficult expensive
first store. impossible easy boring
important necessary nice

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 265

 EXERCISE Q Complete each statement.
EXAMPLE It’s expensive to own a bid car.

1. It’s important to learn

2. It’s hard to pronounce
3. It’s hard to lift

4. It’s necessary to own

5. It’s easy to learn
6. It’s hard to learn

7. It isn’t necessary to know

EXERCISE Q Complete each statement with an infinitive phrase,

EXAMPLE It’s easy to ride a bike.

1. It’s boring
2. It’s impossible _
3. It’s possible
4. It’s necessary
5. It’s dangerous
6. It’s hard

7. It isn’t good
8. It isn’t necessary

EXERCISE O Answer the following questions. (You may work with a partner and
ask and answer with your partner.)
1. Is it important to be bilingual?
2. Is it important to know English in your native country?
3. Is it possible to find a job in the U.S. without knowing any English?
4. Is it easy to learn English grammar?
5. Is it dangerous to text while driving?
6. Is it necessary to have a computer?

266 Lesson 9
9.4 Be + Adjective + Infinitive
We often use an infinitive after certain adjectives.
' EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Subject Be Adjective Infinitive Phrase We can use an infinitive after

I am ready to buy a camera, these adjectives:
The salesman IS glad to help you. happy afraid lucky
He IS prepared to make a sale. sad prepared proud
glad ready pleased

EXERCISE 8 ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks.

to do the exercise.
EXAMPLE I’m ready

1. I’m lucky
2. I’m proud
3. I’m happy
4. I’m sometimes afraid

5. I’m not afraid

6. I’m not prepared

7. I was sad

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Answer the following questions.

1. Are you happy to be in this country?

2. Are you afraid to make a mistake when you speak English?
3. Were you sad to leave your country?
4. Are you prepared to have a test on this lesson?
5. Are you happy to be a student at this school?
6. Are you afraid to walk alone at night?

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 267

9.5 Using an Infinitive to Show Purpose
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I went to a store to buy a digital camera. We use an infinitive to show

I went to a second store to compare prices. the purpose of an action.
The saleswoman called the first store to check the price. Do not use/or to show
purpose.
Wrong: 1 went to a store/or
buy a digital camera.
I use a digital camera to e-mail photos to my friends. To for purpose is the short
I use a digital camera in order to e-mail photos to my friends. form of in order to.

EXERCISE 10 Fill in the blanks to show purpose.

EXAMPLE I bought a phone card to call my friends.

1. 1 use my dictionary to
2. He went to an appliance store in order to

3. She worked overtime in order to

4. I bought the Sunday newspaper to

5. You need to show your driver’s license to

6. Some people join a health club in order to

7. On a computer, you use the mouse to

8. When you return an item to a store, take your receipt in order to

9. Shoppers use coupons in order to

10. Many people shop online to

EXERCISE fQ Fill in the blanks to complete this conversation. Answers may vary.

■^)) Do you want to see my new digital camera?

CD 2, TR 07
B: Wow. It’s so small. Does it take good pictures?
to take
A: Absolutely. 1 use this camera all my pictures.
faampk)
B: Was it expensive?

268 Lesson 9
A: Not really. 1 went online prices. Then I
(J)

went to several stores in this city the best price.

f2)

B: Do you take a lot of pictures?

A: Oh, yes. And I e-mail them to my family back home.
B: Do you ever make prints of your pictures?
A: Yes. I buy high-quality glossy paper prints for
(3)

my family album.
B: Is it hard to use the camera?

A: At first 1 had to read the manual carefully

(4)

how to take good pictures and transfer them to my computer.

But now it’s easy. I’ll take a picture of you. Smile.

B: Let me see it. My eyes are closed in the picture. Take another picture
of me.

A: OK. This one’s better. But 1 don’t like the background. It’s too dark.

I can use a photo-editing program the color.

(5)

B: Can you use the program me more handsome?

(6)

Infinithes; Modals; Imperatives 269

Getting A Customer's Attention

Before 1. Do you try free samples of food in supermarkets?

You Read 2. Do you ever go to the movies early in the day to get a cheaper ticket?

Read the following magazine article. Pay spedal attention to objects

CD 2. TR 08
before an infinitive.

Stores use several techniques to get your

business. Did you ever go to a food store and see
someone giving away free samples? Many supermarkets
encourage you to buy a product by giving you a free
sample. They think that if you try this product, maybe
you will buy it. Often they encourage you even more by
giving you a coupon for the product.
Sometimes a store will ad\’ertise “two for the price of
one.” This is a marketing technique to get your interest.
After you come into the store for the sale item, the
manager wants you to do the rest of your shopping there too.
Movie theaters will lower their price in the early hours. This is because
most people don’t think of going to a movie early in the day. Both you and
the movie theater benefit when you take advantage of the reduced price.
You help fill the theater and get a cheap ticket in return.
Another way to get customer attention is with good service. Sometimes
as you’re leaving a store, a salesperson may ask you, “Do you want me to
take this out to your car for you?” There is no extra charge for such service.
With so much competition between businesses, owners and managers
have CO use all kinds of techniques to get our attention and encourage us to
shop at their score and return often.

9.6 Object Before an Infinitive

r EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

They like you to try the free samples. After like, want, need, expect,
Do you want me to carry this out to your car for you? and encourage, we can use a
They want us to do all our shopping in one store. noun or object pronoun (me,
I expect salespeople to be courteous. you, him, her, it, us, them) +
I expect them to be helpful, too. an infinitive.

270 Lesson 9
EXERCISE 12 Circle the correct words in parentheses () to complete each
conversation.

Conversation 1
CD 2, TR 09

Salesman: Do you want i) (to hell) / help) you

(U

find something?

Mother: Yes. We could use your help. Our daughter

wants (we/ us) (bought/ to buy) her a new

(2) 13)

cell phone. We don’t know which plan to buy.

Salesman: How many minutes a month does she talk on the phone?

Mother: She never stops talking on the phone. I want

(her to use / that she use) it just for emergencies, but she chats with
(4)

her friends all the time.

Salesman: Here’s a plan I want (you to consider / that you consider).

15)

It has unlimited calls at night and on weekends.

Mother: You don’t understand. We want (her/she) to use the phone

(6)

less, not more.

Conversation 2

Man: I’m going to buy a digital camera on Saturday. I need

(that ;you / you to) come with me.

Ih

Friend: Why? How do you want (that 1 / me to) help you?

(2)

Man: You already have a digital camera, so you can give me advice.

Conversation 3

Husband: Oh, look. There’s free food over there. Do you want

(me to get/ that I get) you a little hot dog?

(I)

(continued)

Infinitives; Modats; Imperatives 271

 Wife: No. They just want (us / we) to spend our money on things
(2)

we don’t need.

Conversation 4

Grocery Clerk: Excuse me, miss. You have a lot of bags. Do you want

(me / ]) (to help / helping) you take them to your car?

(It (2)

Shopper: Thanks. My husband’s in the car. 1 wanted (him(3)/ he)

(to help / helped) me, but he hates shopping. He prefers

M)

to wait in the car. Besides, he has a bad back, and I

don’t want (that he/ him to) lift anything. We’re having a
(5)

dinner party on Saturday and we invited 20 guests, but 1. ..

Grocery Clerk: Uh, excuse me. I hear my boss calling me. He needs

me now (to give / giving) him some help.

(6)

EXERCISE EQ Two brothers are talking. Fill in the blanks with the first verb, an
object pronoun, and the second verb.

A: Mom and Dad say I spend too much money. They gxpxiimf)!.-:
ectmetosave
'txpeL'[/s<nL‘)
W.

my money for the future. I me alone.

(] u'ant/li'duO

B: You do? 1 thought you you a car.

(2 uanied/buy)

A: Well, I do. You know how much I hate to take the bus. I
to them for me. Tell them I need a car.
(3 wam/talk)

B: I’m not going to do that. They are trying to

(4 cncoura^cA’^)
more responsible.

A: I am responsible.

B: No, you’re not. Remember when you told Mom you wanted a

new MP3 player? You it for you.

(5 expicted/hiy)
And remember when you lost your cell phone? You told Dad because

you you a new one.

(6

272 Lesson 9
 A: Well, I’m still in school and I don’t have much money.

B: Mom and Dad and start to take

(7

responsibility for yourself. You buy too much stuff.

A; No, I don’t. By the way, did I tell you 1 broke my camera?

9.7 Overview of Models

LIST OF MODALS FACTS ABOUT MODALS

can 1. Modals are different from other verbs because they don't have an -s, -ed,
or -ing ending.
could He can compare prices, (not: He cans)
2. Modals are different from other verbs because we don’t use an infinitive
should after a modal.^ We use the base form.
COMPARE:
will
He wants to buy a digital camera.
would
He might buy a digital camera.
3. To form the negative, put not after the modal.
You should not throw away the receipt.
may
Hurry! These prices may not last.
might 4. Some verbs are like modals in meaning: have to, be able to.
You must return the item within 30 days. = You have to return the item
must within 30 days.
He can't get a credit card. = He is not able to get a credit card.

Compare affirmative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Modal Subject Modal Base Form Complement Short Answer
You should buy a new TV.
Should you buy a DVD player? No, you shouldn't.
What should you buy?
Who should buy a new TV?

She can compare prices,

Can she compare prices online? Yes, she can.
How can she compare prices online?
Who can compare prices?

Compare negative statements and questions.

Wh- Word Modal Subject Modal Base Form Complement
He shouldn't buy an expensive camera,
Why shouldn't he buy an expensive camera?

l:sic|Hinn: (fUj’Ki to. Ou"hi to inciu'*' slum Id.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 273

Smart Shopping: Coupons, Rain Checks, and Rebates

Before 1. Do you see coupons in magazines and newspapers? Do you use them?
You Reac 2. Do you see signs that say “rebate” on store products? Do you see signs
that say “Buy one, get one free”?

MANUFACTURER'S COUPON DO NOT DOUBLE

I EXPIRES 12n»0t1 I

Good Time Gniwy Rain Check

Save 504: QL,_!i?:

I
I Date Item size
I Item Discount
RFTAftfR. PIMM r*M«m lor iK*
vMjo as ifmdiod Ariy oMf uM I
conotUmiraud Item quantity Item Price Expiration ... _
Cash ^.1/ICO I

# I
I
I
Good toward similar item ofequal or lesser value
I Authorization

Read the following magazine article. Pay spedal attention to modals

CD 2, TR 10 and related expressions.

Do you ever receive coupons in the mail?

Rebattt Form

Manufacturers often send coupons to shoppers. They zs

want people to try their products. If you always use the

same toothpaste and the manufacturer gives you a ■**1 piptiiifit

coupon for a different toothpaste, you might try the new jm/np

brand.’’ Coupons have an expiration date. You should

pay attention to this date because you cannot use the coupon after this date.
Stores have weekly specials. But there is usually a limit. If you see a sign
that says, “Eggs, $1.69 a dozen. Limit 2,” this means you can buy only two
dozen at this price. If you see a sign that says, “3 for $1.00,” you don’t have to
buy three items to get the special price. If you buy only one, you will pay 344.
What should you do if a store has a special but you can’t find this item on
the shelf? If this item is sold out, you can go to the customer sen’ice desk and
ask for a rain check. A rain check allows you to buy this item at the sale price
even after the sale is over. A rain check usually has an expiration date. You
must buy this item hy the expiration date if you want to receive the sale price.
If you see a sign that says “rebate,” this means that yt>u can get money
back from the manufacturer. You have to mail the proof of purchase and
the cash register receipt to the manufacturer to prove that you bought this
product. Also you have to fill out a small form. The manufacturer will return
some money to you. It may take six to eight weeks to receive this money.
These sales techniques help manufacturers get your attention, but they
also help you save money.

"Tin; hriiml is tliu ciiini'any naiiit-.

274 Lesson 9
9.8 Can

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I can find many ways to save money. Ability

I can explain how to use a rebate.
If you use coupons, you can save money. Possibility
If the item is sold out, you can get a rain check.
The sign says, "Eggs $1.69 a dozen. Limit 2." You can Permission
buy only two cartons of eggs at the special price.
You can return an item within 30 days.
I can't afford to eat in a restaurant every day. Can afford to means have enough
Can you afford to buy steaks? money to buy something.
You cannot buy more than the limited quantity. The negative of can is cannot. The
You can't use a coupon after the expiration date. contraction is can't.

Pronunciation Notes:
1. In affirmative statements, we usually pronounce can /kan/. In negative statements, we
pronounce can't /kaent/. Sometimes it is hard to hear the final t, so we must pay attention
to the vowel sound and the stress to hear the difference between can and can't. Listen to
your teacher pronounce these sentences:
I can go. /ken/
I can't go. /k*nt/
2. In a short answer, we pronounce can /ksn/.
Can you help me later?
Yes, I can. /keen/

EXERCISE 9 These sentences are true about an American supermarket.

Check {v') which ones are true about a supermarket in
another country.

1. You can use coupons.

2. You can sometimes buy two items for the price of one.
3. You can cash a check.

4. You can buy stamps.

5. You can get a rain check.
6. You can pay by check or credit card.
7. You can’t bargain^ for the price.
8. You can return an item if you’re not satisfied. You can get your

money hack.

'To haTsatn for <* price* mc.in> to make a it offer lower than the price the .'eller is ask ini’.
(continwecl)

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 275

 9. You can get free bags (paper or plastic).
10. You can use a shopping cart. Small children can sit in the cart.
11. If you have a small number of items, you can go to a

special lane.
12. You can shop 24 hours a day (in some supermarkets).

EXERCISE f9 ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks with can or can't to tell about your
abilities.

EXAMPLE 1 can drive a car.

can’t
fly a plane.

1. [ read without glasses,

2. I speak Spanish,
3. 1 drive a car.

4. I play tennis,
5. I sing well,
6. 1 change a tire,
7. I save money,

8. I read the newspaper without a dictionary.

EXERCISE 16 ■ ABOUT YOU Ask a question about a classmate's abilities with the
word(s) given. Another student will answer.
EXAMPLE speak Spanish

A: Can you speak Spanish?

B: Yes, I can. or No, I can’t.

1. write with your left hand 6. play the piano

2. type without looking at the keyboard 7. speak French
3. run fast 8. bake a cake

4. play chess 9. play the guitar

5. ski 10. sew

EXERCISE fa ABOUT YOUWrite down one thing that you can do well. Share your
answer with a partner or with the entire class.

276 Lesson 9
9.9 Should

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

You should use coupons to save money. We use should to give or ask for
What should I do if the item is sold out? advice.
You should compare prices before you buy.
You should not waste your money. The negative of should is should not.
You shouldn't buy things you don't need. The contraction is shouldn't. We use the
negative to give advice or a warning.

EXERCISE m If someone from another country is going to live in the U.S., what
advice would you give him or her about shopping? Work with a
partner to write six sentences of advice.
EXAMPLE You should always look at the expiration date on a food product.
You should shop for eummer clothes in July and August. Summer
clothes are cheapeet at that time.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

EXERCISE 19 Write a sentence to give advice in each of the following situations.

Answers will vary.
EXAMPLE The price of strawberries is high this week.
Maybe we shouldn’t buy them this week.

1. I love this coffee. It’s half price this week.

2. I have a rain check for eggs. It expires tomorrow.

3. 1 spent too much money on groceries last week.

4. My supermarket gives you 10<l^ for every bag you bring back.

(continued)
Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 277
 5. I have ice cream in my bag, and it’s a warm day today.

6. My kids always want me to buy them sweets.

7. I get coupons in the mail, but 1 always throw them away.

EXERCISE @ A wife (W) and husband (H) are at the supermarket. Fill in the
blanks with should + a verb to complete the conversation. Answers
may vary.

W: Should we buy ice cream? It’s on sale.

●i)) (t'jlllllpic)
CD 2, TR 11
H: It's SO hot today. And we have to stop at the dentist before we go home.
We it today. It’ll melt.
(i)

H: Look. Our favorite coffee is half price this week,

(2)

a bag?
W: We a lot.
0)

H: How about candy for the kids? They always ask us for candy.
W: That’s not a good idea. They so much
(4)

candy. It’s not good for them. Where’s our shopping list? We

our list and not buy things we don’t need,

(5)
We careful how we spend our money.
(6)
H: You’re right. Cheese is on our list. (Husband picks up cheese.)
W: You at the expiration date. This cheese has
<7i

tomorrow’s date. We fresher cheese. You

I8J

almost never come shopping with me. You

(9)

with me more often. You can learn to be a better shopper.

H: You’re right. Look. The sign says, “Bring your own bags. Get 10*^ for
each bag.’’ Next time we our own bags. You see?
(JO)

I’m learning.
W: Great with a credit card or use cash?
{ID

H: I’ve got enough cash on me. Let’s use cash.

278 Lesson 9
EXERCISE Q| Check (/) if you agree or disagree about what schoolchildren
should or shouldn't do. Discuss your answers with the whole class
or in a small group.

I agree. I disagree.

1. Children should go to a teacher when they

have a family problem.

2. They shouldn’t play video games.

3. They should select their own TV programs.

4. They shouldn’t trust all adults.

5. They should always tell the truth.

6. They should be responsible for taking care

of younger sisters and brothers.

7. They should select their own friends.

8. They should always obey their parents and

teachers.

9. They should learn to use a computer.

10. They should study a foreign language.

11. They should help their parents with small

jobs in the house.
12. They should learn about money when
they’re young.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperath’es 279

 EXERCISE ES each statement. Then ask a question with the word(s) in
parentheses (). Another student will answer.
EXAMPLE The students should do the homework, (why)

A: Why should they do the homework?

B: It helps them understand the lesson.

1. The students should study the lessons, (why)

2. The teacher should take attendance, (when)
3. The students should bring their textbooks to class, (what else)
4. I should study modals. (why)
5. We should register for classes early, (why)
6. The teacher should speak clearly, (why)
7. The students shouldn’t talk during a test, (why)
8. We shouldn’t do the homework in class, (where)
9. The teacher should announce a test ahead of time, (why)

9.10 Must

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

To get a rebate, you must send the proof of purchase. We use must to talk about rules and
You must include your receipt. laws. Must has a very official, formal
tone.

It's late. I must get to the store before it closes. We can use must for personal necessity.
We're almost out of milk! It shows a sense of urgency.

You must not use the handicapped parking space if For the negative, use must not The
you don't have permission. contraction is mustn't. Must not and
The store mustn't sell a cannot are very close in meaning.
product after its expiration You must not park in the handicapped
date.
space = You cannot park in the
handicapped space.

280 Lesson 9
EXERCISE 23 Here are some rules in a supermarket. Fill in the blanks with must
or must not.

1. Employees in the deli department wear gloves,

2. Employees touch food with their bare hands.

3. When employees use the washroom, they wash their hands

before returning to work.
4. The store _ sell food after the expiration date.
5. Customers _ take shopping carts out of the parking lot.

EXERCISE 9 Name something. Discuss your answers.

EXAMPLE Name something you must have if you want to drive.
You must have a license.

1. Name something you must do or have if you want to leave the country.
2. Name something you must not carry onto an airplane.
3. Name something you must not do in the classroom.
4. Name something you must not do during a test.
5. Name something you must not do or have in your apartment.
6. Name something you must do or have to enter an American university.
7. Name something you must do when you drive a car.

Infinithes; Modals; Imperatives 281

9.11 Have To

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

AFFIRMATIVE I don't have enough milk. I have to go Have to is similar in

shopping. meaning to must. Have to
If you want to return an item, you have to is Less formal. We use it for
show a receipt. personal obligations.
NEGATIVE A: The DVD player was cheaper in the first Don't have to means it's
store. Let's go back there. not necessary. You have
B: You don't have to go back there. Just tell a choice.
the salesperson, and she'll probably give
you the same price.
A: Can we sample those cookies?
B: Sure. If we don't like them, we don't
have to buy them.

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Tell if you have to or don't have to do these things at
this school. (Remember: don't have to means it's not necessary.)
EXAMPLES study before a test
I have to study before a test,
study in the library
I don’t have to study in the library. I can study at home.

1. wear a suit to school 6. call the teacher “professor

2. come to class on time 7. raise my hand to answer
3. stand up to ask a question ill class 8. take a final exam

4. do homework 9. wear a uniform

5. notify the teacher if I’m going to be 10. buy my own textbooks

absent

EXERCISE ^3 Ask your teacher what he or she has to or doesn't have to do.
EXAMPLE work on Saturdays

A: Do you have to work on Saturdays?

B: Yes, I do. or No, I don’t.

1. take attendance 5. work in the summer

2. give students grades 6. have a master’s degree

3. cal! students by their last names 7. work on Saturdays
4. wear a suit 8. come to school every day

282 Lesson 9
EXERCISE 0 ABOUT YOUIf you are from another country, write four sentences
about students and teachers in your country. Tell what they have to
or don't have to do. Use the ideas from the previous exerdses. You
may share your sentences with a small group or with the class.
EXAMPLE In my country, students have to wear a uniform.

1.

2.

3.

4.

EXERCISE 28 Tell what Judy has to or doesn't have to do in these situations.

Answers may vary.
EXAMPLE Judy has a coupon for cereal. The expiration date is tomorrow.
She has to use it by tomorrow or she won’t get the discount.

1. The coupon for cereal says “Buy 2, get 50*t off.

She has to in order to get the discount.
2. Judy has no milk in the house.
She has to more milk.
3. Eggs are on sale for $1.69, limit two cartons. She has three cartons of eggs,
She has to one of the cartons of eggs.
4. She has a rebate application. She has to fill out the application if she
wants to get money back.
She also has to the proof-of'purchase symbol
and the receipt to the manufacturer.
5. She wants to pay by check. The cashier asks for her driver’s license.
She has to
6. She has 26 items in her shopping cart. She can’t go to a lane that says
“ 10 items or fewer.
She has to another lane.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 283

9.12 Must and Have To

In affirmative statements, have to and must are very similar in meaning.

In negative statements, have to and must are very different in meaning.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

AFFIRMATIVE If you wish to return an item, you must Use must or have to for
have a receipt. rules. Must is more formal
You must send the rebate coupon by or more official, but we can
October 1. use have to for rules too.
You have to send the rebate coupon by
October 1.

I don't have any milk. I have to go to the Use have to for personal
store to buy some. obligations or necessities.
I need to buy a lot of things. I have to use
a shopping cart.
NEGATIVE You must not park in the handicapped Must not shows that
parking space. something is prohibited or
The store must not sell an item after the against the law.
expiration date.

The sign says, "3 for $1.00," but you don't Don't have to shows that
have to buy three to get the sale price. something is not necessary,
You don't have to pay with cash. You can that there is a choice.
use a credit or debit card.

EXERCISE ^3 Fill in the blanks with must not or don't have to.
must not
EXAMPLES You . take a shopping cart out of the parking lot.
We don’t have to shop every day. We can shop once a week.

1. If you sample a product, you buy it.

2. If you have just a few items, you use a shopping
cart. You can use a basket.
3. If you have a lot of items in your shopping cart, you
use the checkout that says “10 items or fewer.’'
4. You park in the handicapped parking space if
you don’t have permission.
5. You take your own bags to the
supermarket. The cashier will give you bags for your groceries.

284 Lesson 9
9.13 Might/May and Will
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I have a coupon for a new toothpaste. May and might have the same meaning. They
I might buy it. I may like it. show possibility.

A rebate check might take six to eight weeks. Compare maybe (adverb) with may or might
(modal verbs):
Maybe it will take eight weeks.
It may take eight weeks.
It might take eight weeks.
Those cookies taste great, but they may not The negative of may is may not. The nega
be healthy for you. tive of might is might not. We do not make a
I might not have time to shop next week, so contraction for may not and might not.
ni buy enough for two weeks.
If the price is 3 for $1.00, you will pay 34<t Will shows certainty about the future.
for one.
If the sign says "Two for one," the store will
give you one item for free.

EXERCISE @ Tell what may or might happen in the following situations.

Answers may vary.
EXAMPLE Meg needs to go shopping. She’s not sure what her kids want,
They might want a new kind of cereal.

1. She’s not sure if she should buy the small size or the large size of
cereal. The large size may cheaper.
2. If she sends in the rebate form today, she might
a check in about six weeks.
3. The store sold all the coffee that was on sale. The clerk said, “We
might more coffee tomorrow.”

4. Bananas are so expensive this week. If she waits until next week, the
price may

5. The milk has an expiration dace of June 27. Today is June 27. She’s
not going to buy the milk because it might
6. She’s not sure what brand of toothpaste she should buy. She might
buy the one she usually buys, or she might

Infinirives; Modals; Imperatives 285

 EXERCISE O Tell what may or might happen in the following situations.
If you think the result is certain, use will.
EXAMPLES If you don’t put money in a parking meter, you might get a ticket.
If you are absent from tests you may not pass the course.
If you don’t pass the tests, - you’ll fail the course.

1. If you drive too fast,

2. If you get a lot of tickets in one year,
3. If you don’t water your plants,
4. If you don’t take the final exam,
5. If you don’t lock the door of your house

6. If you eat too much,

7. If you work hard and save your money,

8. If the weather is nice this weekend,

9. If you park in the handicapped space without permission

9.14 Making Requests

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Park over there. We can use imperatives to make a request. The

Don't park in the handicapped space. imperative is the base form of the verb. The
subject is you, but we don't include you in the
Send the rebate coupon soon. sentence. For a negative, put don't for do not)
Do not wait. before the verb.

May I see your driver's license? We also use models to make requests.
Could you give me change for a dollar? Modals give the request a more polite tone.

286 Lesson 9
The Customer Service Counter
Before
You Reac
1. Do you have a check-cashing card at a local supermarket?
2. Do you pay with cash when you shop in a supermarket?

Read the following conversation, first between two friends (A and B),
CD 2, TR 12 and then between A and a customer service representative (C).
Pay special attention to requests.

A: 1 need to cash a check.

B: Let’s go to the customer service counter at Nick’s. Someone told me

they have a check-cashing service there.
A: Could you drive?
B: Wliy don’t we walk? It’s not far.
At the customer service counter:

C: Can I help you?

A: Yes. I’d like to cash a check.

C: Do you have a check-cashing card?

A: No, 1 don’t.
C: Here’s an application. Please fill it out.
A: I don’t have a pen. Could I use your pen?
C: Here’s a pen.
A: Thanks.

A few minutes later

A: Here’s my application.
C: May I see your driver’s license?
A: Here it is. Did 1 fill out the application correctly?
C: No. Please don’t write in the gray box. You made another mistake too.
You wrote the day before the month. Please write the month before
the day. For August 29, we write 8/29, not 29/8. Why don’t you fill
out another form? Here’s a clean one.

A: Thanks.
(continued)

Infinitives; Modals; Imperathes 287

 A few minutes later:
A: Here it is. Could you check to see if I filled it out right this time?
C: You forgot to sign your name. Please sign your name on the bottom line.
A: OK. Could you cash my check now?
C: I’m sorry, sir. We have to wait for approval. We’ll send you your
check-cashing card in the mail in a week to ten days. Can I help you
with anythingelse?
A: Yes. I’d like to buy some stamps.
C: Here you are. Anything else?
A: No. That’s it.

C: Have a nice day.

Nr OfWt Uw Oi^ ● N« WiR M TUl Am

Si«k*c Check Cashing

rout N4MI
^Application NOTKI:tta'

1 1 1
●SUfD
SOCIAL StCirtllY NUMnS otmn iiciMU'scMHt

I i
VI. MD, an n*ri IV con
STtUT ADomss

i 1 J
A0ACOOC HOMI mONt

I I I I i

SK>UU S NAM(
hwW

1 )
i 1 1 J L
SOCIAL SKUirTY AUMKR mtIBMD

1
1

COMnm TTMS SSCTION fOft <HtCK WWSG fiPimSGti

rout (M^orii/riNSiONftoviou VOUt f MTt OV( t*S mONI N IMHt HOWiCMC CAIM

iL >1 I I i i J oquAHMurr

srousrs (Mnovit SPOUSL'S iMnOYK'S fHOni suMSLt Mowio^

PAVKOU*

ii. )\ I I i

19
tAWNAML ST*n CHCtMMC «CO«JNThkMMI KPWlO-C

i i i
«W p> IIV*
to< to * (MtU <alM «■! »● r«4 « OT « M B r9«rM ■

NKn vuONir

□ □
SICHAlUtC Om

U 1,1,1 1 LJ-L I I I I

Ilf III I tkif

288 Lesson 9
9.15 Imperatives
Imperatives give instructions, warnings, and suggestions.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Please sign your name at the bottom. We use the imperative form to give
Write the month before the day. instructions.
Be careful when you fill out the application.
Don't write in the gray box.
Stand up. We use the imperative to give a command.
Walk, don't run!

Watch out! There's a car coming! We use the imperative to give a warning.
Don't move. There's a bee on your nose!
Always do your best. We use the imperative to give encouragement. We
Never give up. can put always and never before an imperative.
Have a nice day. We use the imperative in certain
Make yourself at home. conversational expressions.
Go away. We use the imperative in some angry, impolite
Leave me alone. expressions.
Let's get an application for check cashing. Let's = let us. We use let's + the base form to
Let's not make any mistakes. make a suggestion. The negative form is let's
not. Let's includes the speaker.

EXERCISE 19 Fill in the blanks with an appropriate imperative verb (affirmative

or negative) to give instructions. Answers may vary,
Go
EXAMPLE
to the customer service desk for an application.

1. out the application in pen.

2. a pencil to fill out an application,
3. all the information in clear letters.

4. If you have a middle name your middle initial,

5. anything in the box in the lower right corner,
6. If you are not married, out the second part
about spouse information.
7. When you give your telephone number, always
your area code.
8. your last name before your first name on thi.s
application.
9. the application to a person at the customer
service counter.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 289

 EXERCISE C3 Choose one of the activities from the following list. Use imperatfves
to give instructions on how to do the activity. (You may work with a
partner.)
EXAMPLE get from school to your house
Take the number 53 bus north from the corner of Elm Street. Ask the
driver for a transfer. Get off at Park Avenue. Cross the street and wait for a
number 18 bus.

1. hang a picture
2. change a tire
3. fry an egg
4. prepare your favorite recipe
5. hem a skirt
6. write a check

7. make a deposit at the bank

8. tune a guitar
9. get a driver’s license
10. use a washing machine
11. prepare for a job interview
12. get from school to your house
13. get money from a cash machine (automatic teller)
14. do a search on the Internet

15. send a text message

EXERCISE 34 Work with a partner. Write a list of command forms that the teacher
often uses in class. Read your sentences to the class.
EXAMPLE Open your books to page 10.
Don’t come late to class,

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

290 Lesson 9
EXERCISE E£| Fill in the blanks with an appropriate verb to complete this
conversation.

A: I need to cash a check.

B: We need to get some groceries. Let’s £0 to the

(ixiim/ili,')
supermarket.

A: Do you want to drive there?

B: The supermarket is not so far. Let’s _

III

A: It looks like rain.

B: No problem. Let’s an umbrella.

12)

A: Let’s . It’s late and the stores will close soon.

13)

B: Don’t worry. This store is open 24 hours a day.

A: We’re almost out of dog food. Let’s a
14)

20'pound bag.
B: Let’s not then. I don’t want to carry a
f5)

20'pound bag home. Let’s instead.

16)

EXERCISE E3 Work with a partner. Write a few suggestions for the teacher or

other students in this class using let's or let's not. Read your
suggestions to the class.
EXAMPLES Let’s review verb tenses.
let’s not speak our native lantiuaqes in class.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 291

9.16 Using Medals to Make Requests and Ask Permission
An imperative form may sound too strong in some situations. Modals can make a
request sound more polite.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

We use these modals in a question to make

Would
you cash my check, please? a request. These forms are more polite than
Could
"Cash my check."

May We use these modals in a question to ask

Could I use your pen, please? permission. These forms are more polite than
Can "Give me your pen."
I would like to cash a check. Would like has the same meaning as want.
How would you like your change? Would like is softer than want. The contraction
of would after a pronoun is 'd\
I'd like to cash a check.

Why don't you fill out another form? Use why don't you . . . ? and why don't
Why don't we walk to the supermarket? we . . . ? to offer suggestions.

May Salespeople often use these questions to

Can I help you? offer help to a customer.

EXERCISE i9 Read the following conversation between a salesperson (S) and a

customer (C) in an electronics store. Change the underlined words
to make the conversation more polite. Change the punctuation if
necessary. Answers may vary.
May I help you?
S: What (.lo vou need?
(cxumpL;)

C: 1 want to buy a new computer. Show me your latest models.

Ul (2)

S: Do you want to see the laptops or the desktops?

(3)

C: Show me the desktops.

N)

S: This is one of our most popular desktops.

C: Turn it on.
(5)

S: It is on. Just hit the space bar.

C: I don’t know how much memory to buy.

S: How do you use your computer?

C: We like to play games and watch movies.

292 Lesson 9
S: Then huy this computer, which has a lot of memory and speed.
C: Tell me the price.
il)

S: We have a great deal on this one. It’s $1,299. If you buy it this week,

you can get a $200 rebate from the manufacturer.

C: Let me
18)
take it home and try it out.

S: No problem. If you’re not happy with it, you can return it within

30 days and get your money back. Do you want to buy a ser\'ice contract?
(9)

C: What’s that?

S: If you have any problem with the computer for the next two years, we

will replace it for free. The contract costs $ 129.99.

C: Let me see the service contract.

(10)

S: Here’s a copy. Take this card to the customer service desk and someone

will bring you your computer.

C: Thanks.

S: Have a nice day.

C: You too.

InfiriitK’es; Modals; Imperatives 293

Summary of Lesson 9

1. Imperatives
Sit down. Don’t he late.
2. Let’s
Let’s go to the movies. Let’s not bo late.
3. Infinitive Patterns
He wants to go.
It’s necessary to learn English.
I’m afraid to stay.
1 use coupons to save money.
I want them to help me.
4. Modals

MODAL EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

can He can speak English. He has this ability.

An 18-year-old can vote. He has permission.
Can I borrow your pen? I'm asking permission.
can't You can't park here. It's a bus stop. It is not permitted.
I can't help you now. I'm busy. I am not able to.

should You should eat healthy food. It's good advice.

shouldn't You shouldn't drive if you’re sleepy. It's a bad idea.

may May I borrow your pen? I'm asking permission.

I may buy a new car. This is possible.
may not I may not be here tomorrow. This is possible.

might It might rain tomorrow. This is possible.

might not We might not have our picnic. This is possible.
must A driver must have a license. This is a legal necessity.
I'm late. I must hurry. This is a personal necessity.
must not You must not drive without a This is against the law.
license.

will The manufacturer will send you a This is in the future.

check.
will not You will not receive the check right
away.

would Would you help me move? I'm asking a favor.

would like I would like to use your pen. I want to use your pen.
could Could you help me move? I'm asking a favor.
have to She has to leave. It’s necessary.
not have to She doesn't have to stay. It's not necessary.

294 Lesson 9
Editing Advice

1. Don’t use to after a modal.

I must efe go.

2. Use to between verbs.

to

They like play.

3. Always use the base form after a modal.

He can swims.
drive
She can't driving the car.

4. Use the base form in an infinitive.

He wants to goes.

I wanted to worked.

5. We can introduce an infinitive with it + an adjective.

It's

Ts important to get exercise.

6. Use the correct word order in a question.

can’t you
Why you can't stay?

7. Use an infinitive after some adjectives.

to

I'm happy meet you.

to

It's necessary have a job.

8. Use to, not/or, to show purpose.

to

We went to the theater eff see a play.

9. Use the object pronoun and an infinitive after u’tmt, expect,

need, etc.
him to close
I want he closes the door.

Infinitives; Moilals; Imperatives 295

Editing Quiz
Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

● V#

To: !lovetodrive2(n)e*maU.com
Subject: Buying a GPS

Dear Son,

C qet
Recently I bought a flat-screen TV and I wanted to §et the best price. Now
(t'xmn/ili') (I'ximjili’)

you say that you want I help

Ill
you choose a new GPS.

I want you be a good shopper. First, do the research. Is important

(3)
compare
12)

prices at different stores, so buy the Sunday newspaper for look at ads.
(■<)

You can to look for prices online too. Remember that if you buy online.
15)

you have pay for shipping too. Go to the stores and try (7)use the product. It
(6)

might look good online, but you need to

(9)
see it and try it out.
(8)

It's not always easy make a decision. But if you follow this advice, you
(10)

can be a smart shopper. Let me know if you need help with something else. <4,

I'm always happy help you. And dear, when you(13)can help me move some
02)

furniture? I sometimes need you to help me too!

(i-))

Love, Mom

296 Lesson 9
Lesson 9 Test/Review

PART Q Fill in the first blanks with to or nothing (X). Then write the
negativeform in the second blank.
to
EXAMPLES I’m ready study Lesson 10.
I ’m notreadytostudy Lesson 11.
You should X
drive carefully.
You shouldn’t drive fast.

1. 1 need learn English. 1 Polish.

2. You must stop at a red light. You

on the highway.
3. The teacher expects pa.ss most of the students. She
all of the students,

4. We want study grammar. We

literature.

5. The teacher has _ give grades. He

an A to everyone.
6. We might have time for some questions later.
We time for a discussion,

7. It’s important practice American pronunciation now.

It British pronunciation.
8. It’s easy learn one’s native language.
It a foreign language,
9. Let’s speak English in class.
our native languages in class.
10. You must attend the meeting. Please be here at six o’clock.

late.

Infinitives; Modal.s; Imperatives 297

 PART B Change each sentence to a question.
EXAMPLES I’m afraid to drive.

Why are you afraid to drive?

He can help you.

When can he help me?

1. You should wear a seat belt.

Why
2. I want to buy some grapes.
Why
3. He must fill out the application.
When

4. She needs to drive to New York.

When

5. You can’t park at a bus stop.

Why
6. It’s necessary to eat vegetables.
Why
7. She has to buy a car.
Why
8. They’d like to see you.
When

PART 19 This is a phone conversation between a woman (W) and her

mechanic (M). Choose the correct words to fill in the blanks.

W: This is Cindy Fine. I’m calling about my car.

can’t
M: 1 hear you.
(o'umpJe: can't/miy noc) 11 coulil/ might)

you speak louder, please?

W: This is Cindy Fine. Is my car ready yet?

M: We’re working on it now. We’re almost finished.

W: When 1 pick it up?

(2 uouhJ/ fun)

M: It will be ready by four o’clock.

298 Lesson 9
W: How much will it cost?

M: $375.

W: I don’t have that much money right now.

(3 Caii/Mij(u)

I pay by credit card?

M: Yes. You use any major credit card.

(4 may / tnisht)

Later, at the mechanic’s shop:

M: Your car’s ready, ma’am. The engine problem is fixed. But you

replace your brakes. They’re not so good.

(5 may / should)

W: do it right away?
|6 Do I /un« lo/ Miiy I)

M: No, you do it immediately, but you

(7 imul not / don'i June to)

do it within a month or two. If you don’t do

(8 would / skouW

It soon, you have an accident.

<9 may / iiouhl)

W: How much will it cost to replace the brakes?

M: It cost about $200.

llOuvuld/will)

W: I like to make an appointment to take care

(II wiil/uvuldl

of the brakes next week. I bring my car in

(UCan/Willl

next Monday?

M: Yes, Monday is fine. You bring it in early

(13 could/shoiiidi

because we get very busy later in the day.

W: OK. See you Monday morning.

Infinitives: Modals; Imperatives 299

 PART Q Decide if the sentences have the same meaning or different
meanings. Write S for same, D for different.
EXAMPLES Would you like to go to a movie? Do you want to go to a movie? 5
We will not go to New York. We should not go to New York. D

1. You should go to the doctor. Y(>u can go to the doctor,

2. 1 may buy a new car. I must buy a new car.
3. Could you help me later? Would you help me later?
4. She must not drive her car. She doesn’t have to drive her car.
5. She has to leave immediately. She must leave immediately.
6. We will have a test soon. We may have a test soon.
7. I can’t go to the party. 1 might not go to the party.
8. You shouldn’t buy a car. You don’t have to buy a car.
9. May 1 use your phone? Could I use your phone?
10. He might not eat lunch. He may not eat lunch.
11. 1 should go to the doctor. I must go to the doctor.
12. I have to take my passport with me. I should take my passport
with me.

PART Circle the correct word(s) to complete each sentence.

1. If you sample a product in a supermarket, you (don’t have to/shouldn’t)
buy it.
2. If you have just a few items, you (shouldn’t / don’t have to) use a
shopping cart. You (can/ must) use a small basket.
3. You (must/should) use coupons to save money.
4. You (shouldn’t / don’t have to) pay with cash. You can use a
credit card.

5. Salesperson to customer: (May / Would) I help you?

6. You (must / should) make a list before going shopping.
7. You (don’t have to/ must not) take your own bags to the
supermarket. Bags are free.
8. Try this new pizza. You (should/ might) like it.
9. You (can’t/shouldn’t) use coupons after the expiration date.
10. You (must not / don't have to) park in a handicapped parking space.
It’s against the law.

300 Lesson 9
Expansion
Classroom
Activitl6S O Imagine that a friend of yours is getting married. You are giving
him or her advice about marriage. Write some advice for this person.
You may work with a partner or compare your advice to your partner's
advice when you are finished.

It’s important It’s not important

It’s important to be honest, It’s not important to do
everything together.

Q Imagine that a friend of yours is going to travel to the U.S. You are
giving him or her advice about the trip and life in the U.S. Write as
many things as you can in each box. Then find a partner and compare
your advice to your partner's advice.

It’s necessary OR It’s important It’s difficult OR You shouldn’t

OR You should

It’s necessary to have a passport. It’s difficult to understand

American English.

infinicives; Modals; imperatives 301

 0 Working in a small group, write a list to give information to a new
student or to a foreign student. If you need more space, use your
notebook.

should or You should bring your transcripts to this college.

shouldn’t

must or

have to

don’t have to

might or
might not

can or

can’t

O With a partner, write a few instructions for one of the following

situations.

EXAMPLE using a microwave oven

You shouldn’t put anything metal in the microwave.
You can set the power level.
You should rotate the dish in the microwave. If you don’t, the food might
not cook evenly.

a. preparing for the TOEFL®^

b. taking a test in this class
C. preparing for the driver’s test in this state

'The 7X)EFL* is the English a Hordfin Lirkciiagc.

302 Lesson 9
 0 Bring in an application. (Bring two of the same application,
if possible.) It can be an application for a job, driver's license, license
plate, apartment rental, address change, check-cashing card, rebate,
etc. Work with a partner. One person will give instructions. The
other person will fill it out.

0 Bring in ads from different stores. You can bring in ads from
supermarkets or any other store. See what is on sale this week.
Find a partner and discuss the products and the prices. Compare prices
at two different stores, if possible. What do these products usually
cost in your native country? Do you have all of these products in your
native country?

Talk
About It O Talk about ways you can save money when you shop.

0 Do you prefer to shop alone or with a friend or relative? Explain why.

Write
About It O Write about the differences between shopping in the U.S. and in
another country.
0 Imagine that a new classmate just arrived from another country.
Write a composition giving advice about shopping in the U.S.

Shopping Advice
1 recently bought a flat-screen TV In the U.S.

and would like to give advice about how to shop for

electronics here. The Sunday newspaper often has
flyers with the sale items for the week, You can

compare prices before you go to the store...

For more practice using grammarin context,

please visit our Web site.

Infinitives; Modals; Imperatives 303

 Lesson

<

\●. 1

i'll* V' *. S*

^1
mmar
v>
●●I

)unt and Noncount Nouns

t

f.
i
●! s. <-*'
s J

% >,

I
jantity Words
; I

I >

6i
n

E"
I itext
II
» ●

Jtrition and Health

4

t
I

i: -
■ .

V- '- . I

,!l
I k
.

1 I
. ji
: * *. p
5 ●*< 1 ●●

I
s

. 1

I
10.1 Count and Noncount Nouns—An Overview

Nouns can be divided into two groups: count and noncount nouns.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I eat four eggs a week. Count nouns have a singular and plural form,
I eat one apple a day. egg—eggs grape—grapes
Do you Like grapes? apple—apples
I like milk. Noncount nouns have no plural form.
I drink coffee every day.
Do you Like cheese?

A Healthy Diet
Before
You Reac 1. What kind of food do you like to eat?
What kind of food do you dislike?
2. What are some popular dishes from
your country or native culture?

●i)) Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to count
and noncount nouns.
CD 2, TR 13

flI
It is important to eat well to maintain good health. 1
I

A healthy diet consists of a variety of food.s.

You need carbohydrates. The best carbcdiydrates come from whole grain j;

bread, cereal, and pasta. Brown irce is much healthier than white rice. Sugar
is a carbohydrate too, but it has no real nutritional value.
Of course, you need fruits and vegetables too. But
not all vegetables are equally good. Potatoes can raise
the sugar in your blood, which can be a problem for NwMonFicu t
people with diabetes. It is better to eat carrots, broccoli,
Did You corn, and peas.
Know? ^ You also need protein. Red meat is high in protein,
Americans spend ’ but a diet with a lot of red meat can cause heart disease,
$23.7 billion on
diabetes, and cancer. Better sources of protein are
vitamin and mineral k
chicken, fish, beans, eggs, and nuts. Some people worry
that eggs contain too much cholesterol. (Cholesterol is
a substance found in animal foods.) But recent studies
show that eating one egg a day is not usually harmful
and gives us other nutritional benefits.

306 Lesson 10
 Many people think chat all fat is had. But this is not true. The fat in
nuts (especially walnuts) and olive oil is very healthy. The fat in butter and
cheese is not good.
It is not clear how much milk and other dairy products an adult needs.
It is true that dairy products are a good source of calcium, but a calcium
supplement can give you what you need without the fat and calories of
milk.
The best way to stay healthy is to eat the right kinds of food. Food
packages have information about nutrition and calories. You should read
the package to avoid artificial ingredients and high levels of fat and sugar. It
is also important to control your weight and to exercise every day.

10.2 Noncount Nouns

Noncount nouns fall into four different groups.

Group A; Nouns that have no distinct, separate parts. We look at the whole.
milk air meat
oil pork butter
water cholesterol poultry
coffee paper cheese
tea soup
yogurt bread

Group B; Nouns that have parts that are too small or insignificant to count.
nee snow hair
sugar sand grass
salt corn popcorn

Group C: Nouns that are classes or categories of things. The members of the
category are not the same.
money (nickels, dimes, dollars)
food (vegetables, meat, spaghetti)
candy (chocolates, mints, candy bars)
furniture (chairs, tables, beds)
clothing (sweaters, pants, dresses)
mail (letters, packages, postcards)
fruit (cherries, apples, grapes)
makeup (Lipstick, blush, eye shadow)
homework (compositions, exercises, reading)
(continued)

Count and Noncount Noun.s; Quantit>- Words 307

 Group D; Nouns that are abstractions.
love advice happiness
life knowledge education
time nutrition experience
truth intelligence crime
beauty unemployment music
luck patience art
fun noise work
help information health

EXERCISE 1 Fill in the blanks with a noncount noun. Answers will vary,
rice is healthier than
EXAMPLE Brown
rice
white -

1. Babies need to drink a lot of but adults don’t.

2. Food from animals contains.

3. Children like to eat but it’s not good for

their teeth.

4. Food packages have information about

5. Some people put in their coffee.

6. is a good source of kit.

is not a good source of far.
7. contains caffeine. Don’t drink it at night.
8. People with high blood pressure shouldn’t put a lot of
on their food.

9. Soda and candy contain a lot of

308 Le.sson 10
 EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks with a noncount noun from the lists on

pages 307-308. Answers may vary.

information
EXAMPLE Students at registration need

1. I get a lot of every day in my mailbox.

2. In the winter, there is a lot of in the northern

parts of the U.S.

3. In the U.S., people eat in a movie theater,
4. Students have to do every day.
5. When you walk on the beach, you get in

your shoes.
6. Money doesn’t buy
7. Our parents often give us a lot of about how to

live our lives.

8. Some cities have a lot of . Many people are
without jobs.

10.3 Count and Noncount Nouns

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I eat a lot of irce and beans, Count and noncount are grammatical terms,
rice = noncount noun but they are not always logical. Rice is very
beans = count noun small and is a noncount noun. Beans and peas
are also very small, but they are count nouns.
a. He eats a lot of fruit, a. Use fruit and jbod as noncount nouns when
a. She bought a lot of food for the party, you mean fruit and food in general,
b. Oranges and lemons are fruits that contain b. Use fruits and foods as count nouns when
vitamin C. you mean kinds of fruit or categories of
food.
b. Foods that contain a lot of cholesterol are
not good for you.
a. Candy is not good for your health, a. When you talk about candy in general,
b. There are three candies on the table. candy is noncount,
b. When you consider individual pieces of
candy, you can use the plural form.
Language Note:
Other words that have both a count and a noncount form are: time, experience, life, troubie,
noise, pie.

Count and Noncounr Nouns; Quantity Words 309

 EXERCISE O the blanks with the singular or plural form of the word in
parentheses (). Use the singular for noncount nouns. Use the
plural for count nouns.
peas salt
EXAMPLE Acid to the soup. Then put in some
(/wa) (salt)

1. Do you like to eat ?

(fruit)

2. Oranges, grapefruits, and lemons are that have a lot

(fruit)
of vitamin C.

3. When children eat a lot of they sometimes get sick.

4. Let’s go shopping. There is no in the house.

(footl)

5. Milk and eggs are that contain cholesterol.

(food)

6. She’s going to make and for dinner.

(rice) (Wn)

10.4 Describing Quantities of Count and Noncount Nouns

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

She ate three apples today. We can put a number before a count noun.
He ate four eggs this week.
I ate two slices of bread. We cannot put a number before a noncount
Please buy a bottle of olive oil. noun. We use a unit of measure, which we can
She drank three glasses of milk. count.

Ways we see noncount nouns:

BY SHAPE OR
BY CONTAINER BY PORTION BY MEASUREMENT' WHOLE PIECE OTHER

a bottle of water a slice (piece) a spoonful of a loaf of bread a piece of mail

a carton of milk of bread sugar an ear of corn a piece of
a jar of pickles a piece of meat a scoop of ice a piece of fruit furniture
a bag of flour a piece of cake cream a head of a piece of
a can of soda a piece (sheet) a quart of oil lettuce advice
(pop)' of paper a pound of meat a candy bar a piece of
a bowl of soup a slice of pizza a gallon of a tube of information
a cup of coffee a piece of candy gasoline toothpaste a work of art
a glass of milk a strip of bacon a bar of soap

'For a li>t oTco^^*e^sion^ from the American system ot measurement to the metric s>'stem, see Appendix O.
'Some Americans say “soda"; other.' >iiiv

310 Lesson 10
 EXERCISE a Fill in the blanks with a logical quantity for each of these
noncount nouns. Answers may vary.
EXAMPLES She bought one pound of coffee,

She drank _ two cups of coffee.

1. She ate meat.

2. She bought meat.

3. She bought bread,

4. She ate bread.
5. She bought rice.

6. She ate rice.

7. She bought sugar.

8. She put sugar in her coffee.

9. She ate soup.
10. She ate corn.

11. She bought gas for her car.

12. She put motor oil into her car’s engine.
13. She used paper to do her homework.

10.5 A Lot Of, Much, Many

Use many for count nouns. Use much for noncount nouns. Use a lot o/for both
count and noncount nouns.

COUNT (PLURAL) NONCOUNT

Affirmative He baked many cookies. He baked a lot of bread.

He baked a lot of cookies.

Negative He didn't bake many cookies. He didn't bake much bread.

He didn't bake a lot of He didn't bake a lot of
cookies. bread.

Question Did he bake many cookies? Did he bake much bread?

Did he bake a lot of cookies? Did he bake a lot of bread?
How many cookies did he How much bread did he
bake? bake?

Language Notes:
1. Much is rarely used in affirmative statements. Use a lot ofm affirmative statements.
2. When the noun is omitted (in the following case, cookies), use a lot, not a lot of.
He baked a lot of cookies, but he didn't eat a lot.

Count uiul Noncount Nouns; Quantity’ Words 311

 EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with much, many, or a tot of. In some cases, more
than one answer is possible,
EXAMPLES She doesn’t ear much
pasta.
Many American supermarkets arc open 24 hours a day.
A lot of
sugar is not good for you.

1. In the summer in the U.S., there's corn.

2. Children usually drink milk,

3. people have an unhealthy diet.

4. 1 drink coffee only about once a week. 1 don’t drink coffee.

5. There are places that sell fast food,

6. It’s important to drink water,

7. How glasses of water did you drink today?

8. How fruit did you eat today?
9. How cholesterol is there in one egg?
10. It isn’t good to eat candy,
11. We should eat vegetables.

10.6 A Few, A Little

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Count I bought a few bananas. Use a few and several with

She ate several cookies. count nouns or with quantities
She drank a few cups of tea. that describe noncount nouns
{cup, bowl, piece, etc.).
Noncount He ate a little meat. Use a little with noncount
He drank a little tea. nouns.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with a few, several, or a little.

a few
EXAMPLES He has good friends,
He has a little
time to help you.

1. Every day we study grammar.

2. We do exercises in class.

3. The teacher gives _ homework every day.

4. We do pages in the book each day.
5. students always get an A on the tests.
312 Le-sson 10
 6. It’s important to eat fruit every day.
7. It’s important to eat pieces of fruit every day.
8. I use milk in my coffee.
9. 1 receive mail every day.
10. I receive letters every day.

10.7 Some, Any, No, and A/An

SINGULAR COUNT PLURAL COUNT NONCOUNT

Affirmative I ate a peach. I ate some peaches. I ate some bread.

I ate an apple. I ate some apples.
Question Do you want a Do you want any Do you want any
sandwich? fries? salt?
Do you need some Do you need some
napkins? ketchup?
Negative I don't need a fork. There aren't any There isn't any salt
potatoes in the soup. in the soup.
There are no There is no salt in
potatoes in the soup. the soup.
Language Notes:
1. We can use any or some for questions with plural or noncount nouns.
2. Use any after a negative verb. Use no after an affirmative verb.
Wrong: I didn't eat no cherries.

EXERCISE O Fill in the blanks with a, an, some, or any. In some cases, more than
one answer is possible,
an
EXAMPLE I ate apple.

1. 1 ate corn.

2. I didn’t buy. potatoes,

3. Did you eat _ watermelon?

4. I don’t have . sugar,

5. There are apples in the refrigerator.

6. There aren’t. oranges in the refrigerator.
7. Do you want orange?
8. Do you want cherries?

9. I ate banana.

10. I didn’t eat _ strawberries.

Count and Noncounc Nouns; Quantity Words 313

 EXERCISE O Make a statement about people in this class with the words given
and an expression of quantity. Practice count nouns.
EXAMPLES Vietnamese students)
There are a few Vietnamese students in this class.
Cuban student(s)
There’s one Cuban student in this class.

1. Polish student(s) 6. man/men

2. Spanish-speaking student(s) 7. teacher(s)

3. American(s) 8. American citizen(s)
4. child(ren) 9. senior citizen(s)
5. woman/women 10. teenager(s)

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with an appropriate expression of quantity.

In some cases, more than one answer is possible. Practice
noncount nouns.

EXAMPLE Eggs have ^ lot of cholesterol.

1. You shouldn’t eat so much red meat because meat has. fat.

2. Only animal products contain cholesterol. There is

cholesterol in fruit.

3. Diet colas use a sugar substitute. They don’t have sugar.

4. There is sugar in a cracker, but not much.

5. Plain popcorn is healthy, but buttered popcorn has —
fat.

6. Coffee has caffeine. Tea has caffeine too, but not as much
as coffee.

7. She doesn’t drink tea. She drinks tea only occasionally,

8. 1 usually put butter on a slice of bread.

9. I’m going to put some sugar in my coffee. Do you want

sugar in your coffee?
10. My sister is a vegetarian. She doesn’t eat meat at all.
She doesn’t eat fish or chicken either.

EXERCISE f9 ABOUT YOU Ask a question with much and the words given. Use
eat or drink. Another student will answer. Practice noncount nouns.

EXAMPLES candy orange juice

A: Do you eat much candy? A: Do you drink much orange juice?

B: No. I don’t eat any candy. B: Yes. I drink a lot of orange juice.

314 Lesson 10
 Eat Drink

1. rice 7. apple juice

2. fish 8. lemonade
3. chicken 9. milk

4. pork 10. tea

5. bread 11. coffee

6. cheese 12. soda or pop

EXERCISE fO Ask a question with "Do you have ..." and the
ABOUT YOU

words given. Anotherstudent will answer. Practice both count and

noncount nouns.

EXAMPLES American friends

A; Do you have any American friends?

B: Yes. 1 have a lor of American friends,
free time

A: Do you have any free time?

B: No. I don’t have any free time.

1. money with you now 5. orange juice in your refrigerator

2. credit cards 6. plants in your home
3. bread at home 7. family pictures in your wallet
4. bananas at home 8. time to relax

EXERCISE 19 This is a conversation between a husband (H) and wife (W).

Choose the correct word(s) to fill in the blanks.

■^)) Where were you today? 1 called you from work

CD 2, TR 14
many times, but there was no answer.
C'Xiimpft's; much/ man?)

W: 1 went to the supermarket today. 1 bought

things.
(J a little/a feu-}

H: What did you buy?

W: There was a special on coffee, so 1 bought coffee.

(2 tl lot of / much)

1 didn’t buy fruit because the prices were very high.

(3 liny/no)
H: How money did you spend?
(4 much/many)
W: 1 spent money because of the coffee. I bought 10
(5 much/a Icn of)
one-pound bags. fcoTUinued)

Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity’ Words 315

 H: It rook you a long rime.
W: Yes. The store was very crowded. There were people
('6 much / mam)

in the store. And tlrere was traffic at that hour,

17 ii lot of/ much)
so it took me time to drive home.
|8 ii lot of / mudi)
H: There’s not time to cook.
(9 much/ many)
W: Maybe you can cook today and let me rest?
H: Uh ... 1 don’t have experience. You do it better.
(10 much / no)
You have . experience.
(M a lot of / much)
W: Yes. I have because 1 do it all the time!
112 a lot of/a lot)

EXERCISE fO This is a conversation between a waitress (W) and a customer (C).

Fill in the blanks with an appropriate quantity word. In some cases,
more than one answer is possible.
any oRSome coffee, sir?
1^^) W: Would you like (example)

C: Yes, and please bring me cream too. I don’t

(I)

need sugar. And I’d like a of orange juice too.

(2) (3)

A few minutes later:

W: Are you ready to order, sir?

C: Yes. I’d like the scrambled eggs with three of bacon. And some
(4)

pancakes too.
W: Do you want syrup with your pancakes?
15)

C: Yes. What kind do you have?

W: We have _ different kinds: strawberry, cherry, blueberry
(6)

maple . . .
C: I’ll have the strawberry syrup. And bring me butter too.
(7)

After die customer is finished eating:

W: Would you like dessert?

(8)
C: Yes. I'd like a _ cherry pie. And put ice cream on
19) (JO)

the pie. And I’d like more coffee, please.

(ID

316 Lesson 10
 After the customer eats dessert:

W: Would you like anything else?

C: Just the check. I don’t have _ cash with me. Can I pay by
(IZ)

credit card?

W: Of course.

Eat Less, Live Longer

Before
You Read 1. Do you think the American diet is healthy?
2. Do you see a lot of overweight Americans?

Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to

CD 2, TR 16 too much, too many, and a lot of.

About 66% of Americans

are overweight. The typical
American consumes too many
calories and too much fat and I
I
doesn’t get enough exercise. Many
American children are overweight
too. Children spend too much
time in front of the TV and not
enough time getting exercise. Fifty
percent of commercials shown
during children’s programs are for food products. Children see as many as
21 commercials advertising food per day.
Fifty percent of American pets are overweight too. Like their owners,
they eat too much and don't get enough exercise.
There is evidence that eating fewer calories can help us live longer.
Doctors studied the people on the Japanese island of Okinawa, who eat
40% less than the typical American. The Okinawan diet is low in calories
and salt. Also Okinawans eat a lot of fruit, vegetables, and fish and drink a
lot of green tea and water. Okinawa has a lot of people over the age of 100.
How can we live longer and healthier lives? The answer is simple: eat less
and exercise more.

Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity- Words .317

10.8 k Lot Of vs. Too Much/Too Many
( EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

It is good to eat a lot of fruit. k lot (of) shows a large quantity. It is a

In Okinawa, there are a lot of people over the neutral term.
age of 100.
I don't eat a lot in the morning.
You shouldn't eat a lot of ice cream because it Too much and too many show that a quantity
has too many calories. is excessive and causes a problem.
If you drink too much coffee, you won't sleep Use too many with count nouns.
tonight. Use too much with noncount nouns.

If you eat too much, you will gain weight. Use too much after verbs.

EXERCISE d Circle the correct words to fill in this conversation between a

mother (M) and her 12-year-old son (S).

■i))
'
worried about you, You spend too (muchi'f.Villll/lIc)
/(man^ hours in front
CD 2, TR 17
of the TV. And you eat too (much(I)/ many) junk food and don’t get
enough exercise. You’re getting fat.
S: Mom. I know 1 watch (a lot of / a lot) TV, but I learn (a lot/a lot of)
(21 (3)

from TV.

i
318 Lesson 10
 M: No, you don’t. Sometimes you have (a iot of / too much) homework,
(4)

but you turn on the TV as soon as you tjet home from school.
I’m going to make a rule: no TV until you finish your homework.
S: Oh, Mom. You have too (much / many) rules.
15)

M: That’s what parents are for: to guide their kids to make the right decisions.
There are (a lot of / coo many) things to do besides watchingTV. Why
(6)

don’t you go outside and play? When I was your age, we played outside.
S: “When / was your age.” Not again. You always say that.
M: Weil, it’s true. We had (too much / a lot of) fun outside, playing with
friends. 1 didn’t have (a lot of / too much) toys when I was your age.
(8)

And I certainly didn’t have video games or computer games. Also we

helped our parents (a lot / too much) after school. We cut the grass
(9)
and washed the dishes.

S: My friend Josh cuts the grass, throws our the garbage, and cleans the
basement once a month. His mom pays him (coo much / a lot of)
(10)

money for doing it, Maybe if you pay me. I’ll do it.
M: Not again. “Josh docs ic. Josh has it. Why can’t U” You always say that.
You’re not Josh, and I’m not Josh’s mother. I’m not going to pay you
for things you should do.
S: OK. Just tell me what to do, and I’ll do it.

There are (a lot of / coo much) leaves on the front lawn. Why don’t
nil

you start by putting them in garbage bags? And you can walk
Sparky. He’s getting fat too. He eats (too much / too many) and
112)

sleeps ail day. Both of you need more exercise.

EXERCISE fS ABOUT YOU Fill in the blanks with much or many, and complete
each statement.

EXAMPLE If 1 drink too much 1 won’t be able to sleep tonight.

coffee.

1. If the teacher gives too homework,

Coiinr and Noncounr Noiin.s; Quantity Words 319

 2. If I take too classes,

3. If I eat too candy,

4. If I’m absent too days

10.9 Too Much/Too Many vs. Too

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I don't eat ice cream because it's too Use too with adjectives and adverbs.
fattening.
He needs to eat more. He's too thin.

I don't eat ice cream because it has too many Use too much and too many before nouns.
calories and too much fat.

EXERCISE IS Fill in the blanks with too, too much, or too many.
Situation A. Some students are complaining about the school cafeteria.
They arc giving reasons why they don’t want to eat there,
too
EXAMPLE It’s noisy.

1. The food is _ _ greasy,

2. There are students. 1 can’t find a place to sit.

3. The lines are — long.
4. The food is _ _ expensive.
5. There’s noise.

Situation B. Some students are complaining about their class and school.
1. The classroom is. small,

2. We spend time reviewing old lessons.

3. We have to write compositions.
4. The teacher gives homework.

5. There are tests.

320 Lesson 10
EXERCISE 17 ■ ABOUT YOU Write a few sentences to complain about something:
your apartment, your roommate, this city, this college, and so on.
Use too, too much, or too many in your sentences.
EXAMPLE My roommate spends too much time in the bathroom in the morning.
1
He’s too meesy.

EXERCISE G3 Fill in the blanks with too, too much, or too many if a problem is
presented. Use a lot o/if no problem is presented.
EXAMPLE Strawberries are too
expensive this week. Let’s not
buy them.

1. There are noncount nouns in English.

2. “Rice is a noncount noun because the parts are
small to count.

3. If this class is hard for you, you should go to

a lower level.

4. Good students spend time doing their

homework.

5. If you spend time watching TV, you won’t

have time for your homework.
6. It takes time to learn English, but you can
do it.

7. Oranges have vitamin C.

8. If you are on a diet, don’t eat potato chips. They have

calories and fat.
9. Babies drink . milk,

10. If you drink. coffee, you won’t sleep.

'A itu'ssy person doo not put llis or her thinss in order.

Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity- Words 321

 EXERCISE 19 A doctor (D) and patient (P) are talking. Fill in the blanks with an
appropriate quantity word or unit of measurement to complete this
conversation. In some cases, more than one answer is possible.

I’m looking at your lab results and 1 see that your cholesterol level
●i)) D:

CD 2, TR 18 too
is very high. Also your blood pressure is high.
(example)

Do you use salt on your food?

(J)

P: Yes, Doctor. I love salt. 1 eat potato chips and

(2)

popcorn.

D: That’s not good. You’re overweight too. You need to lose 50 pounds.
What do you usually eat?
P: For breakfast 1 usually grab coffee and a
(3)

doughnut. 1 don’t have time for lunch, so I eat

(4)

cookies and drink

(5) (6)

soda while I’m working. I’m so busy that 1 have

<7)

time to cook at all. So for dinner, 1 usually stop at a fast-food place and
get a burger and fries.
D: That’s a terrible diet! How exercise do you get?
(8)

P: I never exercise. I don’t have _ time at all. I own

(9)

my own business and 1 have work. Sometimes I

(JO)

work 80 hours a week.

1
D: I’m going to give you an important advice.
(ID
/

You’re going to have to change your lifestyle,

P: I’m old to change my habits.
(12)

D: You’re only 45 years old. You’re young to die.

(13)

And if you don’t change your habits, you’re going to have a heart

attack. I’m going to give you a booklet about staying healthy. It has
information that will teach you about diet
(J4)

and exercise. Please read it and come back in six months.

322 Lesson 10
Summary of Lesson 10

Words that we use before count and noncount nouns:

COUNT (SINGULAR) COUNT (PLURAL) NONCOUNT

WORD EXAMPLE: BOOK EXAMPLE: BOOKS EXAMPLE: TEA

the X X X

a X

one X

two, three, etc. X

some (affirmatives) X X

any (negatives and questions) X X

no X X X

a Lot of X X

much (negatives and questions) X

many X

a little X

a few X

several X

Editing Advice

1. Don’t put a or an before a noncount noun.

some

1 want to give you aft advice.

2. Noncount nouns are always singular.

3 lot of

My mother gave me many advices.

pieces of
He received three mails today.
A

3. Don’t use a double negative.

any
He doesn't have fte time, or Hehasnotime.

Count and Nuncount Nouns; Quantity Words 323

 4. Don’t use much with an affirmative statement.

Uncommon: There was much rain yesterday.

Common: There was a Lot of rain yesterday.

5. Don’t use a or an before a plural noun.

She has a blue eyes.

6. Use the plural form for plural count nouns.

5

He has a lot of friend.

7. Omit o/after a lot when the noun is omitted.

My English teacher gives a lot of homework. My math teacher

gives a Lot of too.

8. Use of with a unit of measure.

of

I ate three pieces^bread.

9. Don’t use of after monj, mucli, a few, or a little if a noun follows
directly.

She has many ef friends.

He put a little of milk in his coffee.

10. Only use too/too much/too many if there is a problem.

a lot of

He has a good job. He earns -tGO-much money.

very
My grandfather is ete healthy.

11. Don’t use too much before an adjective or adverb.

I don't want to go outside today. It's too muc-h hot.

12. Don’t confuse too and to.

too

If you eat et much candy, you'd get sick.

324 Les.son 10
Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

My parents gave me a good advice: stay healthy. They told me to get

Q (exnm))L')
good nutrition and exercise every day. My parents follow their own advice,
(warnplt)
and, as a result, they’re too healthy. 1 try to follow their advices but
(I) (2)

sometimes I can’t. I’m very busy, and sometimes I don’t have no time for
(3)

exercise. When I was in high school, 1 had a lot of free time, but now I

don’t have a lot of. So for breakfast, I just have a cup coffee with a
t4) (5)

little of sugar and two pieces of toasts.

(6) (7)

1 have a lot of friend at college, and we often go out to eat after class.
(8)

But they always want to go to a fast food places. I know the food is
(9)

too much greasy. When I suggest a healthier restaurant, they say it’s to
(10) (/))

expensive. When I get home from work at night, I just heat up a frozen

dinner. 1 know this is not healthy, but what can I do?

Lesson 10 Test/Review
PART 1
Fill in the blanks with an appropriate measurement of quantity.
Answers may vary,
EXAMPLE a cup of coffee

1. a of water 6. a of mail

2. a of sugar 7. a of advice

3. a of milk 8. a of gasoline
4. a of furniture 9. a of paper
5. a of soup 10. a of toothpaste

Count and Noncounc Nouns; Quanrirv Words 325

 PART B Read the following composition. Choose the correct quantity word or
indefinite article.

some
I had problems when 1 first came to the U.S. First, I didn’t
som,; / anj / a littli;)
have money. friends of mine lent me
(I much/a/somO (2 A few/A iiiii; / A fexc of) (3 some/a/atix)

money, but I didn’t feel good about borrowing it.

Second, 1 couldn’t find apartment. I went to see
(4 ll/an/ no) (5 soiTu; / <1 littli’ / an)

apartments, but 1 couldn’t afford of them. For

(6 an / <in> / none) (7 <1 little / a few of / several)
months, 1 had to live with my uncle’s family, but the situation wasn’t good.

Third, I started to study English, but soon found job and

(S a / iinj/ some)
didn’t have time to study. As a result, I was failing my course.
(9 mi/ much/ a few}

However, little by little my life started to improve, and 1 don’t need

help from my friends and relatives anymore.

(}0 no / sonve / mudi)

Expansion
Classroom
Activities O Make a Ust of unhealthy things that you eat. Make a list of things
that you need to eat for a healthy diet.

Unhealthy things I eat Things 1 should eat

326 Lesson 10
 0 These are some popular foods in the U.S. Put a check {>/) in the
column that describes your experience of this food. Then find a partner
and compare your list to your partner's list.

I Don’t I Never
Food I Like Like Tried

pizza
hot dogs
submarine sandwiches
tacos

hamburgers
breakfast cereal
peanut butter
cheesecake
tortilla chips
potato chips
popcorn
chocolate chip cookies
fried chicken
pretzels

o Cross out the phrase that doesn't fit and fill in the blanks to make
a true statement about the U.S. or another country. Find a partner and
compare your answers.

EXAMPLE People in Argentina eat/don’t oat a lot of meat.

a. People in eat/don’t eat natural

foods.

b. People in drink/don’t drink tea.

c. People in shop/don’t shop for food every day.

d. People in eat/don’t eat in a movie theater,
e. People in drink/don’t drink
bottled water.

Talk
About It O Look at the dialogue that takes place in a restaurant on
pages 316-317. Do you think this man is eating a healthy breakfast?
Why or why not?

o Americans often eat some of these foods for breakfast: cereal and
milk, toast and butter or jelly, orange juice, eggs, bacon, coffee.
Describe a typical breakfast for you.

Count and Noncount Nouns; Quantity Words 327

 Q Most American stores sell products in containers: bags, jars, cans,
and so forth. How do stores in other countriessell products?

0 Do stores in other countries give customers bags for their

groceries, or do customers have to bring their own bags to the store?

0 Some things are usually free in an American restaurant: salt,

pepper, sugar, cream or milk for coffee, mustard, ketchup, napkins,
water, ice, coffee refills, and sometimes bread. Are these things free in
a restaurant in other countries?

0 The following saying is about food. Discuss the meaning. Do you

have a similar saying in your native language?

You are what you eat.

Write
About It 0 Describe shopping for food in the U.S. or in another country. You
may include information about the following:
● packaging
● open market vs. stores
● self-service vs. service from salespeople
● shopping carts
● fixed prices vs. negotiable prices
● freshness of food

0 Describe food and eating habits in your native country.

food in Mexico

In my country, Mexico, we have our main meal in the

middle of the day. We eat a lot of rice and beans, We
don’t use much bread, like Americans do. Instead, we

eat tortillas with most of our meals ...

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

328 Lesson 10
 Lesson

Grammar
Adjectives
Noun Modifiers

Adverbs

Context
Great Women

Helen Keller (1882-1968)

Helen Keller

Before
You Read 1. Do you know of any special schools for handicapped people?
2. What kinds of facilities or services does this school have for
handicapped people?

Read the following textbook article. Pay special attention to

CD 2, TR 19 adjectives and adverbs.

Do you know of anyone with a disability'

who did remarkable things? Helen Keller was
a truly remarkable woman.
Helen Keller was a healthy baby. But
when she was 19 months old, she had a
sudden fever. The fever disappeared, but
she became blind and deaf. Because she couldn’t hear, it was difficult for
her to learn to speak. As she grew, she was angry and frustrated because
she couldn’t understand or communicate with people. She became wild,
Did You throwing things and kicking and biting.
Know? Wlien Helen was seven years old, a teacher, Anne Sullivan, came to
In Washington. D.C., live with Helen’s family, First, Anne taught Helen how to talk with her
there is a speciai fingers. Helen was excited when she realized that things had names. Then
coliege for deaf Anne taught Helen to read by the Braille system. Helen learned these skills
students—
quickly. However, learning to speak was harder. Anne continued to teach
Gallaudet
University.
Helen patiently. Finally, when Helen was ten years old, she could speak
clearly enough for people to understand her.
Helen was very intelligent. She went to an institute for the blind,
where she did very well in her studies. Then she went to college,' where she
graduated with honors when she was 24 years old. Helen traveled extensively
with Anne. She worked tirelessly, traveling all over America, Europe, and
Asia to raise money to build schools for blind people. Her main message was
that handicapped people are like everybody else. They want to live life fully
and naturally. Helen wanted all people to be treated equally.
Wliile she was in college, Helen wrote her first of many books.
The Story of My Life, in 1903.

'In the U.S., the worth tolitge and nriivcrsicj iisiinlly hiive the s.nme tnciinin};.

330 Lesson 11
11.1 Adjectives and Adverbs
( EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Helen was a healthy baby. Adjectives describe nouns. We can use adjectives
She seemed intelligent. before nouns or after the verbs be, become,
She became blind. bok, seem, and other sense-perception verbs.
Anne Sullivan was a wonderful teacher.

Anne taught Helen patiently. Adverbs of manner tell how or in what way we
Helen learned quickly. do things. We form most adverbs of manner by
People want to live life fully. putting -ly at the end of an adjective. Adverbs
of manner usually follow the verb phrase.

EXERCISE Q Decide if the underlined word is an adjective {adj.) or adverb {adv.).

adj.
EXAMPLES Helen was a healthy baby.
adv.
When Helen couldn’t communicate, she threw things angrily.

1. She seemed wild.

2. She was blind and deaf because of a serious illness.

3. She had a good teacher.

4. She learned to speak clearly.

5. Anne was a patient woman.

6. She worked tirelessly with Helen.

7. Helen learned enthusiastically.

8. Helen wanted to liye a full life.

9. She was a remarkable woman.

10. We should respect all people ecuially.

Helen Keller and Anne Sullivan

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverks 331

11.2 Adjectives
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Anne was a patient teacher. Adjectives describe nouns.

Helen was an intelligent person.
Anne was a good friend. Adjectives are always singular.
I have many good friends. Wrong: I have many goods friends.
Helen felt frustrated when she couldn’t Some -ed words are adjectives: marn'ed,
communicate. divorced, excited, frustrated, handicapped,
She was excited when she learned her first worried, finished, tired, crowded.
word.
Handicapped people can live a full life.
Helen had an interesting life. Some -ing words are adjectives: interesting,
She was an amazing woman. boring, amazing, exdting.
Helen was a normal, healthy baby. Sometimes we put two adjectives before
Anne was a patient, intelligent teacher. a noun. We can separate the two adjectives
with a comma.

Some people have an easy childhood. Helen After an adjective, we can substitute a
had a hard one. singular noun with one and a plural noun with
Do you like serious stories or funny ones? ones to avoid repeating the noun.
Anne was a kind teacher. Only use an article before an adjective
Anne was kind. if a noun follows.
Wrong: Anne was a kind.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with an appropriate adjective. (Change a to an if

the adjective begins with a vowel sound.) Answers may vary.
wild
EXAMPLES When Helen couldn’t communicate, she became
Helen was a n interesting person.

1. Helen was a baby.

2. Before Helen learned to communicate, she felt
very

3. She had a life.

4. She wanted treatment for blind people.
5. Helen had a . teacher.

6. Helen was a very woman.

7. The story about Helen Keller was

8. people can read with the Braille method.

332 Lesson 11
EXERCISE O Fill in the blanks with an appropriate adjective. (Change a to an if
the adjective begins with a vowel sound.) Answers may vary.
EXAMPLES This is a big class,

This is a class.

1. This classroom is

2. The classrooms at this school are

3. English is a language.
4. This book is very
5. We sometimes have tests,

6. We read a story about Helen Keller.

7. Did you learn any words in the story?

EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Ask a question of preference with the words given.
Follow the example. Use one or ones to substitute for the noun.
Another student will answer,

EXAMPLES an easy excrcise/hard

A: Do you prefer an easy exercise or a hard one?
B: I prefer a hard one.
funny movies/serious
A: Do you prefer funny movies or serious ones?
B: 1 prefer funny ones.

1. a big city/small
2. an old house/new
3. a cold climate/warm
4. a small car/big
5. a soft mattress/hard
6. green grapes/red
7. red apples/yellow
8. strict teachers/easy
9. noisy children/quiet
10. used tcxtbooks/new

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 333

A Special Athlete
Before
You Read 1. Do you know any disabled people who participate in sports?
2. Did you see the most recent Olympic games?

●i)) Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to nouns
that describe nouns.
CD 2, TR 20

; I

Gina McWUliams is an inspiring person and great athlete.

I
I,
I
As a child, she loved
sports, but when she was I
I

I
26 years old, she was in
a car accident and lost I.
! ;

part of her right leg. She 4 i:

still wanted to compete t i

in sports. She tried
many sports, including
waterskiing and
0
● V basketball, which she
played in a wheelchair,
before she decided on
volleyball. At the 2008
Paralympic Games’ in
China, she and her
team won the silver
»1 «

medal. When Gina’s not

practicing volleyball, she’s busy raising her two children and working as a
sports director for disabled adults and children.

In the rnraKm/>tc Cizmcj. .uhlctc* with pii)*sical anJ visual disabilitie'.* vompoie.

334 Lesson 11
11.3 Noun Modifiers

EXAMPLES EXPLANATIONS

G1na is a volleyball player. We can use a noun to describe another noun.

Her team won a silver medal.

Gina sometimes uses a wheelchair. Sometimes we write the two nouns as one
She can play basketball. word. The noun modifier and the noun become
She enjoys waterskiing. a compound word.
a. Gina played wheelchair basketball, The first noun is more specific. The second
b. Was she a basketball coach? noun is more general. In sentence (a),
wheelchair basketball is a specific kind of
basketball. In sentence (b), basketball coach
is a specific kind of coach.
Does Gina have a driver's license? Sometimes the first noun ends with's or -ing.
Did she have a skiing accident?
A chair with wheels is a wheelchair. When two nouns come together, the first one
A language that uses signs is sign language. is always singular.
A girl who is sixteen years old is a
sixteen-year-old girl.
Language Note:
There are many noun -i- noun combinations. Here are a few:
winter coat driver's license fingernail
cell phone bachelor's degree flashlight
wedding irng master's degree haircut
garbage can shopping cart daylight
summer vacation washing machine eyebrow
TV show skiing accident dishwasher
math course running shoes doorknob
art museum reading glasses drugstore
peanut butter baking dish earring

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks. Make sure that the noun modifier is singular.
EXAMPLE A store that sells groceries is a grocery store

1. A store that sells books is a

2. A store that has departments is a

3. A department that sells shoes is a
4. Language that communicates with signs is
5. Glasses for eyes are
6. A pot for flowers is a
7. A garden of roses is a
8. A bill of five dollars is a

Adjectives; Noun Modifier.s; .Adverbs 335

 9. A child who is six years old is a
10. A vacation that lasts two weeks is a
11. A brush for teeth is a
12. A man who is 6 feet tall is a

EXERCISE Fill In the blanks by putting the words in parentheses () in the

correct order. Make any other necessary changes.

Last night 1 saw a TV program about the Paralympic Games.

Ifxampli.’; /)Togram/7 V'J

One of the athletes is Christina Ripp. Christina is in a

. But that didn’t stop her from becoming a

(I chaiT/u-lu'i’Js)

.. She became interested in basketball when she

(2 player/haskctball)

was just a . She played on her

13 jL’ars otJ)

at the University of Illinois. In 2005, she got her

(4 [eam/colli’gtf)

in . In 2008, she won a

15 dt'ip'^e./bai'lu’loTy (6 aitnimfiin

at the Paralympic Games in China.

(7 medal/gaU)

EXERCISE m iri the blanks by putting the two nouns in the correct order.
Make any other necessary changes.
wheelchair basketball
EXAMPLE A popular sport at the Paralympic Games is
((’ajIct'lbait/ii’ficdc/iaiT)

1. Christina Ripp has a

(collegc/cducation)

2. Gina McWilliams had a

faccidt’m/i-ar)

3. Gina is a
(t'ullcybuit/pidjcr)

4. Helen Keller lost her when she

(siKhtA7«)

was a
(19 monifu aid/baby)

5. Helen Keller had a

(digrei/coltege)

336 Lesson 11
 EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Ask and answer. Put the two nouns in the irght order and
make any other necessary changes. Ask another student the question.
EXAMPLE Do you have a {iiccnse/driveT’s)!
A. Do you have a driver’s license?
B. No. I don’t have a driver’s license yet.

1. What’s your favorite (f)rogram/TV)?

2. Do you have a {phone/celi.y
3. How many (phone/calls) do you make a day?
4. How many (messages/text) do you receive a day?
5. Are you wearing a (ring/wedding)?
6. What do you usually do during your (swmmer/vacation)?
7. Do you bring a (bag/books) to class?
8. Did you buy your (text/books) at the school (boolcs/storc)?

11.4 Comparing Adverbs of Manner and Adjectives

An adverb of manner tells hoiv we do something. It describes the verb (action) of the
sentence. An adjective describes a noun.
r ADJECTIVES ADVERBS EXPLANATION

Anne was a patient teacher. She taught patiently. We form most adverbs of
Helen was a quick learner. She learned quickly. manner by putting -ly at the
She had a clear voice. She spoke clearly. end of an adjective.
This is a fast car. He drives fast. Some adjectives and adverbs
I have a late class. I arrived late. have the same form.
We had a hard test. I studied hard.
I have an early appointment. I need to wake up early.
Helen was a good student. She did well in school. The adverb well is completely
different from the adjective
form good.

Observe word order with adverbs.

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Helen learned sign language quickly. An adverb of manner usually follows the verb
Helen quickly learned sign language. phrase or it can come before the verb. It cannot
come between the verb and the object.
Wrong: Helen learned quickly sign language.
Helen learned very quickly. You can use very before an adverb of manner.
She did very well in college.

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverb.s 337

 EXERCISE Q Check {/) if the sentence is true or false.

True False
EXAMPLE Helen lost her hearing slowly.
1. Anne taught Helen patiently.
2. Helen learned quickly.
3. Helen never learned to speak clearly.
4. Helen didn’t do well in college.
5. Helen wanted deaf people to be treated differently
from hearing people.

11.5 Spelling of -ly Adverbs

ADJECTIVE ENDING EXAMPLE ADVERB ENDING ADVERB

y easy Changeyto / and easily

lucky add -ly. luckily
happy happily
consonant + le simple Drop the e and simply
double add -y. doubly
comfortable comfortably
U full Add -y. fully
e nice Just add -ly. nicely
free freely
brave bravely
Language Note: There is one exception for the last rule: true—truly.

EXERCISE fSI Write the adverb form of each adjective. Use correct spelling.
1. bad _ 7. responsible
2. good 8. polite
3. lazy_ 9. fast
4. true. 10. constant

5. nice 11. terrible

6. full 12. beautiful

338 Lesson 11
EXERCISE 11 Fill in the blanks with the adverb form of the underlined adjective.
EXAMPLE He’s a careful driver. He drives carefully

1. She has a beautiful voice. She sings

2. You are a responsible person. You always act
3. You have neat handwriting. You write
4. I’m not a good swimmer. I don’t swim

5. He is a cheerful person. He always smiles

6. He is fluent in French. He speaks French
7. You have a polite manner. You always talk to
people
8. Nurses are hard workers. They work

9. She looks sad. She said goodbye

10. You are a patient teacher. You explain the
grammar

11. My answers are correct. I filled in all the

blanks

EXERCISE 12 ■ ABOUT YOU Tell how you do these things.

EXAMPLE write a composition
I write a composition carefully and slowly.

1. speak English
2. speak your native language
3. dance

4. walk

5. study
6. do your homework
7. drive

8. sing
9. type
10. work

11. dress for class

12. dress for a party

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 339

 EXERCISE 13 Read the story of Helen Keller's teacher, Anne Sullivan. Find the
mistakes with adjectives, adverbs, and noun modifiers in the
underlined words. Correct them. Not all underlined words have a
mistake. If the underlined words are correct, write C.

C
When Helen was a small child, she was a blind and deaf. She behaved
(cxampU) (I’xumple) (J)

wild. When she was a seven-yearsold child, her parents found a wonderful
12) (}) <4)

teacher to work with her. The teacher’s name was Anne Sullivan.

Anne was from a poorly immigrant family. She had a terrible life.
(5) (6)

When she was a child small, she had a disease that left her almost blind.
(7)

When she was eight years old, her mother died. A few years later, her
(8)

father abandoned the family, and Anne went to live in an orphanage.

When she was 14 years old, she could not see clear and she could
19)

not read. But she got the opportunity to go to a school for the blind. So at

the age of 14, she started school elementary. She was a student very britrht
(10) (H)

and graduated from high school as the t^ student.

(12)

She heard about a job to teach a blind girl, Helen Keller. Anne went to
(13)

live with Helen’s family. Anne worked patient with Helen, showing her that
(J4)

things had names. Within one month, Helen learned sipms lanizuage. After
(j?)

that, Helen learned quickly and wanted to study in school. Anne attended
(16)

classes college with Helen, spelling out the lectures and reading to her after
07)

class. Helen graduated from college with honors. Anne got marry in 1905
08)

when Helen was 23. But it wasn’t a happy marriage, and Anne separated
( 9)

from her husband. She continued to help Helen for the rest of her life.

But her sight eves became worse and she became completely blind. She
120)

died in 1936. Helen lived until 1968.

340 Lesson 11
EXERCISE d Use the adjective in parentheses or change it to an adverb to fill in
the blanks.

CO 2, TR21 I have two friends who are complete opposites. My friend Paula complains

constantly
(exumfile: constant
everything. I always tell her that she is a
(I fu’ulthj)

person, and that is the most important thing in life. But she is never

. She says that everyone is . When she drives, she

(2 happy) (3 im/wlite)

behaves. to Other drivers. She says they’re all butl

(4 rude) (■5 cniry)

think Paula is the crazy one. She doesn’t make changes .. She
(6 eosu)

had to move two months ago, and she hates her apartment.
(7 neu')

1 think it’s a _ apartment, but she finds something wrong with

(8 nice)

everything.

1 have another friend, Karla. Karla is handicapped, in a wheelchair,

but she has a attitude about life. She’s also an

(9 posiiiiv) 00 ut'liiv)

person. She swims . She’s always learning new things. She’s

(O good)

Studying French and can speak it now. She learns

02 /lusm) 03 (|uick)

and is about everything. She goes to museums

04 curious) 05 /rrt)iii-nl)

and knows a lot about art. She is a good role model for her friends.

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 341

Grandma Moses

Before
You Reac 1. Do you know of any old people who have a healthy, good life?
2. Who is the oldest member of your family? Is he or she in good health?

Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to yery

CD 2, TR 22
and too.

They say you can't teach an old dog new tricks. But is this
really true? Anna Mary Moses proved that even elderly people can start a new
career or take up a new hobby.
Anna Mary Moses was born in 1860.
She had a very hard life working as a
farmer’s wife in New York State. She was
always interested in art, but she was too
busy working on the farm and raising
her five children to paint. In her 70s, she
became too weak to dc^ hard farm work.
She liked to do embroidery, but as she embroidery
grew older, she couldn’t continue because
of arthritis. It was easier for her to hold a
paintbrush than a needle, so she started
to paint. She painted pictures of farm
life. A New York City art collector saw
her paintings in a drugstore window
and bought them. Today, some of her
paintings are in major art museums.
When she was 92, she wrote her
autobiography. At the age of 100, she
Ik.
Grandma Moses
iL

illustrated a book. She was still painting

when she died at age 101. Better known as “Grandma Moses,” she created
1,600 paintings.

342 Lesson 11
11.6 Too vs. Very
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Grandma Moses was very old when she wrote Very shows a large degree. It doesn't indicate
her autobiography. any problems.
Her paintings became very popular.
She was too busy working on the farm Too shows that there is a problem.
to paint. We often use an infinitive phrase after foo.
She became too weak to do farm work.

EXERCISE 15 Fill in the blanks with very or too.

EXAMPLES Basketball players are very tall.

I’m too
short to touch the ceiling.

1. In December, it’s _ cold to go swimming outside,

2. June is usually a nice month.
3. Some elderly people are in good health,
4. Some elderly people are sick to take care of themselves.
5. It’s important to know English,
6. This textbook is long to finish in three weeks.
7. The president has a important job.
8. The president is busy to answer all his letters,
9. Some Americans speak English fast for me. I can’t

understand them.

10. I can speak my own language _ well.

11. When you buy a used car, you should inspect it carefully.
12. A turtle moves slowly,
13. If you drive slowly on the highway, you might get a ticket.
14. Gina McWilliams is a good athlete.
15. When Grandma Moses had arthritis, embroidery became
difficult for her.

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverb.s 343

11.7 Too and Enough
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Too + Adjective/Adverb In her 70s, Grandma Moses was Use too before adjectives
too weak to do farm work. and adverbs.
I'm working too hard. I need to Be careful: Don't use too
relax. much before adjectives
and adverbs.
Wrong: I'm working
too much hard.

Adjective/Adverb + Enough She was talented enough to get Enough means "as much
the attention of an art collector. as needed." Use enough
She painted skillfully enough to after adjectives and
get her pictures in art museums. adverbs.

Enough + Noun When she was younger, she didn't Use enough before
have enough time to paint. nouns.

EXERCISE 16 Fill in the blanks with too or enough plus the word in parentheses ().
EXAMPLES Your son is four years old. He’s too young to go to first grade.
(young)

My sister is 18 years old. She’s old enough to get a driver’s license.

(old)

1. I can’t read Shakespeare in English. It’s for me.

()uirj)

2. My brother is 21 years old. He’s to get married.

(old)

3. My grandfather is 90 years old and in bad health. My family takes

care of him. He’s to cake care of himself.

(sick)

4. I saved $5,000.1 want to buy a used car. 1 think 1 have

(money)

5. I’d like to get a good job, but 1 don’t have

x/vnc'ML'c')

6. She wants to move that piano, but she can’t do it alone. She’s not

(strong)

7. The piano is. for one person to move.

(Iictii'y)

8. 1 sit at my desk all day, and I don’t get

(exercise)

344 Les.son 11
EXERCISE fa Find the mistakes with the underlined words and correct them. Not
all underlined words have a mistake. If the underlined words are
correct, write C.

CD 2, TR 23 We just read a story about Grandma Moses. We learned

that you are never too nrtteh old to learn something new.
\
I always thought I was too old to learn another language,
(I)

but now that I’m in the U.S. I have no choice. Most of

the students in class are young and learn very quick.

12)

But I am 58 years old, and I’m not a learner at my age. I don’t catch
(3)

on as quickly as my younger classmates. However, most of them have a

job, so they don’t have enough time to study. Some of them have small
(4)

children, so they are very busily

O)
and don’t always have enough(6)energy

to do their homework. I’m not working and my children are enough old
17)

to take care of themselves. In fact, they’re in college also. So I have

enough time to do all my homework. My kids are proudly of me for going

w (91

to college at my age. My teacher always tells me I’m doing too well in her
(10)

class. After learning English, I’m planning to get a degree in history. I am

too interested in this subject. It was my favorite subject when I was in high
01)

school. When I finish my degree. I’ll be in my 60s. It will probably be

too late for me to find a job in this field, but I don’t care. I just have a very
02) 03)

great love of this subject. My kids think it will he too much hard for me
1141

because history books are hardly to read. But I am too motivated, so I know
05) 06)

1 can do it. Besides, if Grandma Moses could learn to paint in her 70s and

write a book when she was 92,1 can certainly study history at my age.

Grandma Moses is a very well role model. Who says you can’t teach an
07)

old dog news tricks?

06)

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 345

Summary of Lesson 11

1. Adjectives aiid Adverbs;

ADJECTlVtS ADVERTS

She has a beautiful voice. She sings beautifully.

She is careful. She drives carefully.
She has a late class. She arrived late.
She is a good driver. She drives well.

2. Adjective Modifiers and Noun Modifiers:

ADJECTIVE MODIFIER NOUN MODIFIER

a clean window a store window

a new store a shoe store
warm coats winter coats
a new license a driver’s license

3. Very/Too/Enough;
He’s very healthy.
He’s too young to retire. He’s only 55.
He’s old enough to understand life.
He has enough money to take a vacation,

Editing Advice

1. Don’t make adjectives plural.

Those are importants ideas.

2. Put the specific noun before the general noun.

truck driver
He is a driver truck.

3. Some adjectives end in -ed. Don’t omit the -ed.

ed

I'm finish with my project.

4. If the adjective ends in -cd, don’t forget to include the verb be.
is
He married.

346 Lesson 11
 5. A noun modifier is always singular.

She is a Letters carrier.

6. Put the adjective before the noun.

very important
He had a^meeting very important.
7. Don’t use an article before an adjective if there is no noun.

Your house is a beautiful.

8. Don’t confuse too and var^. Too indicates a problem.

very

My father is tee healthy.

9. Don’t confuse coo much and too. Too much is followed by a noun. Too is
followed by an adjective or adverb.

It's too meeb hot today. Let's stay inside.

10. Put enough after the adjective.

old
He's enough e\4 to drive.

11. Don’t use very before a verb. Very is used only with adjectives and adverbs.

He very likes the U.S. very much, or He really likes the U.S.

12. Put the adverb at the end of the verb phrase.

late
He late came home.
slowly
He opened slowly the door. A

13. Use an adverb to describe a verb. Use an adjective to describe a noun.

ly
He drives careful.

That man is very nicely.

welt

You speak English very §ee4.

Adjecdve.s; Noun Modifier.s; Adverbs 347

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

really C
I admire my aunt Rose. She’s very intelligent. She married and has
(I’liimpli'l (I’xiimpk)

three grown children. When her children became enough old to take care
(2) (3)

of themselves, she decided to go back to college. She wants to study

programming computer. Some people say she’s too much old to start a
14) (5)

new career, but she doesn’t pay any attention. She loves computers.
(6)

She works part-time at a flowers shop. She thinks it’s a job very interesting.
17) (8)

She meets a lot of interestings people. She’s a very nice to everyone, and
(9) (/O)

everyone loves her. Whenever I need advice, 1 can go to her. She listens

patiently and treats everyone kind.

(Ji) (12)

Rose came to the U.S. from Guatemala when she was 18. She had five

younger sisters and brothers. Her mother died when she was young
(13)

and she had to take care of her brothers and sisters. She took care of them

wonderfully. She didn’t speak one word of English when she left Guatemala.
(14)

She learned quickly English, and now she speaks English very good.
(15) (16)

She’s not only my aunt; she’s a good friend.

(17)

348 Lesson 11
Lesson 11 Test/Review

PART Q Fill in the blanks by putting the two words in the correct order.
Make any other necessary changes. Some words are already in the
correct order.

EXAM RLE Grandma Moses was a ^ woman when she starred to paint.
(uvmun/olA)

1. She painted
(pictures/htauliful/x^)

2. She was not __ to learn something new.

(old/wo)

3. When Helen Keller was a. she

(bahy/nineteen/months/ohi)

became very sick.

4. Helen communicated with

(langiuige/signij

5. Gina McWilliams was in a when she was

(car/acciiient)

26 years old.

6. Her won the

(v-olleylwU/leam) (medal/silivr)

7. She sometimes uses a

(chair/uheek)

8. She played volleyball to be in the Paralympic

(u-elt/snough)

Games.

PART Sue and her brother, Don, are very different. Fill in the blanks with
the correct form, adjective or adverb, of the word in parentheses ()
to describe them.

EXAMPLE Siu>isa patient person. Don does everything impatiently

(paiifnt) (impiiiiem)

1. Sue has handwriting. Don writes .. 1 can’t

(neat) (sloppy)

even read what he wrote.

2. She talks . He talks

(calm) (fast)

3. She speaks English . He has a time with English.

(fluent) (hard)

4. She learns languages . Learning a new language is

(easy) (Ji//iculi)

for Don.

Adjecth'es; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 349

 5. She types . He makes a lot of mistakes. He needs someone
(iiccuraii')

to check his work

6. She has a very voice. He speaks

(soft) (Ivuil)

7. She sings . He sings like a chicken.

((viiuci/ul) (sicW

8. She is always very _ ,. He sometimes behaves

(rcs/ionsibk) (chiUisfi)

9. She saves her money He buys things he doesn’t need.

(care/ul)

He spends his money

(/oolish)

10. She exercises He’s very about exercising.

ireguiar) (hty)

Expansion
Classroom
Activities O Circle the words that best describe your behaviors. Find a partner
and compare your personality to your partner's personality. How many
characteristics do you have in common?
a. 1 usually spend my money carefully foolishly
b. I do my homework willingly unwillingly
C. I write compositions carefully carelessly
d. 1 usually walk slowly quickly
e. I write neatly sloppily
f. 1 talk fast calmly
g. 1 write my language well poorly
h. Before a test, 1 study hard a little

i. I exercise regularly infrequently

j. I play tennis well poorly
k. I like to live dangerously carefully
1. I make important decisions quickly slowly and methodically
m. 1 learn languages easily with difficult^'
n. 1 learn math easily with difficulty
0. 1 make judgments logically intuitively

350 Lesson 11
 Q Name something.
EXAMPLE Name some things you do well.
I speak my native language well.
I swim well,

a. Name some things you do well,

b. Name some things you don’t do well,
c. Name some things you do quickly,
d. Name some things you do slowly,
e. Name something you learned to do easily.

Talk
About It Q In a small group or with the entire class, discuss the situation of
older people in your native culture. Who takes care of them when they
are too old or too sick to take care of themselves? How does your
family take care of its older members?

0 In a small group or with the entire class, discuss the situation of

handicapped people in the U.S. or in another country. Are there
special schools? Are there spedal facilities, such as parking, public
washrooms, and elevators?

0 Discuss the meaning of this quote by Grandma Moses:

"What a strange thing is memory, and hope. One looks backward,
the other forward; one is of today, the other of tomorrow. Memory is
history recorded in our brain. Memory is a painter. It paints pictures
of the past and of the day."

o Aristotle said, "The sign of a great teacher is that the

accomplishments of his students exceed his own." What do you
think this means?

Adjectives; Noun Modifiers; Adverbs 351

Write
About It 0 Write about a famous woman you know about who accomplished
something in spite of a handicap or age.

O Write about a woman whom you admire very much. You may write
about a famous woman or any woman you know (family member,
teacher, doctor, etc.).

My Grandmother
My grandmother \e a person ! admire very much. After
her third child was born (my mother), my grandfatherdied
and my grandmotherhad to raise her family all alone. She
took a job as a housekeeper to support her children ..,

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

^ please visit our Web site.

352 Lesson 11
 Lesson

Grammar
Comparatives

Superlatives

Context
U.S. Geography

The Willis Tower, Chicago

> ,
1
J
I

^ 'T|
l!
'I'.-.
I ’
Si
)

II.
\

The Space Needle, Seattle

The Empire State Building, New York

U.S. Facts

Before
You Read 1. In your opinion, what is the most interesting city? Why is it interesting?
2. What cities or regions have the best climate?

Read the following information. Pay spedal attention to comparative

CD 2,TR 24 and superlative forms.^

1. In area, the United States is the third largest country in the world
(after Russia and Canada). In population, the U.S. is also the third
largest country in the world (after China and India).
2. The biggest city in the U.S. in population is New York. It has about
8 million people.
3. The tallest building in the U.S. is the Willis Tower, in Chicago
(442 meters or 1,450 feet tall). But it is not the tallest building in
the world. That building is in Dubai (818 meters or 2,684 feet tall).
4. New York City has the highest cost of living in the U.S. But the cost of
living in Tokyo is much higher than in New York.
Did You 5. Hispanics are the fastest growing minority in the U.S. In 2003,
Know? ^ Hispanics passed African-Americans as the largest minority'.
Before 1849. the 1 6. Rhode Island is the smallest state in area (1,145 square miles or
population of 1 2,700 square kilometers).
California was very
small. In 1849. I?. Alaska is the largest state in area. Alaska is even larger than Colombia,
South America.
gold was found in J
California and about A 8. The least populated state is Wyoming. It has slightly more than half a
100,000 people M million people.
rushed there to
9. California is the most populated state. It has about 37 million people.
try to get rich^^^A There are more people in California than in Peru.
10. Valdez, Alaska, gets the most snow—about 326 inches per year.
11. Phoenix, Arizona, gets the most sunshine. Eighty-five percent of the
days are sunny.
12. Mount McKinley is the highest mountain in the U.S. (20,320 feet or
6,193 meters). It is in Alaska.
13. There are five great lakes in the U.S. The biggest is Lake Superior. The
others are Lake Huron, Lake Michigan, Lake Erie, and Lake Ontario.
14. The state that is the farthest north is Alaska. The state that is the
farthest south is Hawaii.

“See K for mnp of the U.S.

354 Lesson 12
 15. The tallest waterfall in the U.S. is in
California. But Niagara Falls, in New
York and Ontario, Canada, is more
famous. It is one of the most popular
tourist attractions. Twelve million
tourists a year visit Niagara Falls. It has
the greatest volume of water.
16. The most recent state to join the U.S. is
Hawaii. It joined in 1959.
17. The oldest state is Delaware. It became
a state in 1787.

Niagara Falls

12.1 Comparatives and Superlatives—An Overview

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Los Angeles is bigger than Chicago. We use the comparative form to compare two
There are more people in California than items.
in Peru.

New York City is the biggest city in the U.S. We use the superlative form to point out the
California is the most populated state in number-one item in a group of three or more.
the U.S.

EXERCISE O Circle the correct word to complete the statement.

EXAMPLE Chicago is {bigger /Qmailer^ than Los Angeles.

1. The tallest building in the world (is / isn’t) in the U.S.

2. Alaska has a (larger/smaller) population than Wyoming.
3. The U.S. is (bigger/smaller) than Russia.
4. (Alaska / California) has the largest area.
5. The fastest-growing minority is (Hispanics / African Americans).
6. There are (more / fewer) Hispanics than African Americans in the U.S.
7. The most populated state is (Alaska / California).
8. The U.S. (is / isn’t) the largest country in the world in area.

Comparatives; Superlatives 355

12.2 Comparative and Superlative Forms
of Adjectives and Adverbs
SIMPLE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE

One-syllable adjectives and tall taller tallest

adverbs* fast faster fastest

Two-syllable adjectives that easy easier easiest

end in y happy happier happiest

Other two-syllable adjectives frequent more frequent most frequent

active more active most active

Some two-syllable adjectives simple simpler simplest

have two forms.
* *
more simple most simple
common commoner commonest
more common most common

Adjectives with three or more important more important most important

syllables difficult more difficult most difficult

●ly adverbs quickly more quickly most quickly

brightly more brightly most brightly

Irregular adjectives and good/well better best

adverbs bad/badly worse worst
far farther farthest
little less least
a lot more most

Language Notes:
‘Exceptions to one-syllable adjectives:
bored more bored the most bored
tired more tired the most tired

Other two-syllable adjectives that have two forms:

handsome, quiet, gentle, narrow, clever, friendly, tender, stupid

356 Lesson 12
Spelling Rules for Short Adjectives and Adverbs
RULE SIMPLE COMPARATIVE SUPERLATIVE

Add -er and -est to short adjectives and tail taller tallest
adverbs. fast faster fastest

For adjectives that end in e, add -r and -st. nice nicer nicest
late later latest

For adjectives that end in y, change y to i easy easier easiest

and add -er and -est. happy happier happiest
For words ending in consonant-vowel- big bigger biggest
consonant, double the final consonant, sad sadder saddest
then add -er and -est.

Exception: Do not double final w.

new—newer—newest

EXERCISE Give the comparative and superlative forms of the word,

EXAMPLES fat fatter fattest

important more important most Important

1. interesting
2. young
3. beautiful

4. good
5. common

6. thin

7. carefully
8. pretty
9. bad

10. famous

11. lucky
12. simple
13. high
14. delicious

15. far

16. foolishly

Conipararives; Superlatives 357

12.3 Superlative Adjectives
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

New York is the biggest city in the U.S. We use the superlative form to point out the
California is the most populated state in number-one item of a group of three or more.
the U.S. Use the before a superlative form.
China has the largest population in the We often put a prepositional phrase at the
world. end of a superlative sentence:
in the world in my family
in my class in my country
Niagara Falls is one of the most popular We often put "one of the" before a superlative
tourist attractions in the U.S. form. Then we use a plural noun.
The Willis Tower is one of the tallest
buildings in the world.

EXERCISE Fill in the blanks with the superlative form of the word in
parentheses (). Include the before the superlative form.
EXAMPLE Alaska is the largest state in area.
(larxi:t

1. lake in the U.S. is Lake Superior.

(Mg)

2. river in the U.S. is the Missouri River.

(long)

3. mountain in the U.S. is Mount McKinley.

(higli)

4. Niagara Falls is one of tourist attractions.

(jHIputll)

5. San Francisco is one of cities in the U.S.

(dxpi;nsn\.‘)

6. San Francisco is one of American cities.

(beauti)ui)

7. Harvard is one of universities in the U.S.

(good)

8. The Willis Tower is building in the U.S.

(tall)

9. The economy is one of problems in the U.S.

(bad)

10. Boston is one of cities in the U.S.

(old)

358 Lesson 12
EXERCISE a ABOUT YOU Talk about the number-one person in your family for
each of these adjectives.
EXAMPLES interesting
My aunt Rosa is the most interesting person in my family.
tall
My brother Carlos is the tallest person in my family.

1. intelligent 7. serious

2. kind 8. nervous

3. handsome/beautiful 9. strong
4. stubborn 10. funny
5. lazy 11. responsible
6. tall 12. neat

EXERCISE Write a superlative sentence about each of the followingitems.

You may include "one of the ..." plus a plural noun.
EXAMPLE big problem today
The economy is one of the biggest problems in the U.S. today.
OR

Unemployment is the blackest problem in my country today.

1. exciting sport

2. interesting story in this book

3. bad tragedy in the world or in the U.S.

4. important invention of the last 100 years

5. interesting city in the world

6. big problem

7. bad job

Comparatives; Superlatives 359

 8. good job

9. hard teacher at this school

10. popular movie star

12.4 Word Order with Superlatives

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

What is the biggest lake in the U.S.? A superlative adjective comes before
California is the most populated state. a noun.

The Willis Tower is the tallest building in When the verb be connects a noun to a
the U.S. superlative adjective + noun, there are
OR two possible word orders.
The tallest building in the U.S. is the
Willis Tower.

The Hispanic population is growing the most We put superlative adverbs after the verb
quickly in the U.S. (phrase).
The population of India is increasing the
most rapidly in the world.
It rains the most in Hawaii. We put the most, the least, the best, and the
It snows the most in Alaska. worst after a verb.

Phoenix gets the most sunshine. We put the most, the least, the fewest, the
Alaska has the least sunshine in the winter. best, and the worst before a noun.

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Name the person in your family who is the superlative
in each of the following activities. Put the superlative form after
the verb phrase,
EXAMPLES cook well
My mother cooks the best in the family,
eat a lot
My brother eats the most in my family.

1. talk a lot 4. speak English well 7. speak softly

2. drive well 5. stay up late 8. eat a lot

3. walk fast 6. get up early 9. dress badly

360 Lesson 12
 EXERCISE O ABOUT YOU Name the person In your family who Is the superlative
in each of the following activities. Put the superlative form before
the noun.

EXAMPLE watch a lot of TV

My brother watches the most TV. He watches TV four hours a day.

1. spend a lot of money

2. get little mail
3. drink a lot of coffee

4. spend a lot of time in the bathroom

5. spend a lot of time on the telephone
6. have a bad temper
7. make few mistakes in English

A Tale of Two Cities^

Before
You Read 1. Compare this city to another city.
2. Do you have any friends or relatives in American cities? Do you
visit them?

San Francisco Chicago

-These statistics are from 2007.

Comparatives; Superlatives 361

 1^)) Look at the following chart. Then read the sentences that follow.
CD 2, TR 25 Pay special attention to comparative forms.

San Francisco Chicago

Population 800,000 2,900,000

Average cost of home $765,000 $286,800
Unemployment 7% 5.7%

Cost of living (100 = national average) 177 128

Average family income $68,023 $45,505

84.6% of 71.8% of
High school graduates
population population
Average temperature in July 62 degrees 74 degrees
Average temperature in January 53 degrees 26 degrees
Rainfall (inches annually) 20.3 37.4

Number of clear days (no clouds) 160 84

per year

Air pollution (amount of ozone in air; 42 79

U.S. average = 100)
Robberies (per 100,000 people) 514 546

● Chicago has a larger population than San Francisco.

● A house in San Francisco is more expensive than a house in Chicago.
● Unemployment in San Francisco is higher than in Chicago.
● The average family income is more in San Francisco than in
Chicago, but San Francisco has a higher cost of living.
● San Francisco has fewer high school graduates than Chicago.
● San Francisco has a better climate than Chicago. Chicago gets
more rain than San Francisco. San Francisco is sunnier than
Chicago.
● Chicago is warmer in the summer.
● Chicago is colder in the winter.
● Chicago has more air pollution than San Francisco.
● San Francisco has less crime than Chicago.

362 Lesson 12
12.5 Comparisons
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Chicago has a larger population than We use the comparative form to compare
San Francisco. two items. We use than before the second
Houses in San Francisco are more expensive item of comparison.
than houses in Chicago.
Chicago is colder than San Francisco in the Omit than if the second item of comparison
winter, but it is warmer in the summer. is not included.

San Francisco has less crime than Chicago. The opposite of more is less or fewer.
San Francisco has fewer people than Chicago.
The cost of living in San Francisco is much Much or a little can come before a
higher than in Chicago. comparative form.
Unemployment is a little higher in San
Francisco.

Formal: You know more about American cities When a pronoun follows than, the correct form
than I do. is the subject pronoun {he, she, I, etc.). Usually
Informal: You know more about American an auxiliary verb follows {is, do, did, can, etc.).
cities than me. Informally, many Americans use the
Formal: I can speak English better than object pronoun {him, her, me, etc.) after than.
he can. An auxiliary verb does not follow.
Informal: I can speak English better
than him.

EXERCISE B Circle the correct words to complete the statement.

EXAMPLE Chicago hasC(morey less) crime than San Francisco.

1. Chicago has a (larger / smaller) .1

►t'- -
population than San Francisco.
Z’
2. Chicago is a {safer/ more dangerous)
place to live than San Francisco.
3. Houses in Chicago are (more expensive/
less expensive) than houses in San
Francisco.

4. Winter in Chicago is (better / ivorse)

than winter in San Francisco.

5. Chicago has (more/ less) rain than San

Francisco.

Comparatives; Superlathes 363

 EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Compare yourself to another person, or compare two
people you know using these adjectives.
EXAMPLES tall
I’m taller than my father,
talkative
My mother is more talkative than my father.

1. tall 5. thin 9. successful

2. educated 6. quiet 10. strong

3. friendly 7. stubborn 11. nervous

4. lazy 8. patient 12. polite

EXERCISE 10 Compare adults and children. Talk in general terms. You may discuss
your answers,

EXAMPLE responsible
Adults are more responsible than kids.

1. polite 4. playful 7. shy

2. strong 5. sweet 8. patient
3. imaginative 6. friendly 9. serious

EXERCISE f9 Compare the dty you live in now to another city you know.
EXAMPLES big
Tokyo is bigger than Boston,
crowded
Tokyo is more crowded than Boston.

1. crowded 4. noisy 7. cold in winter

2. modern 5. beautiful 8. dirty

3. small 6. interesting 9. sunny

364 Lesson 12
12.6 Word Order with Comparisons
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Houses in San Francisco are more expensive Put comparative adjectives after the verb
than houses in Chicago. be or before a noun.
I want to move to a warmer climate.

The Hispanic population is growing Put comparative adverbs after the verb
more quickly than the African-American (phrase).
population.
It rains more in Chicago. Put more, less, better, and worse after
It snows more in Chicago. a verb.

San Francisco has more sunshine than Put more, less, fewer, better, and worse before
Chicago. a noun.

San Francisco has less pollution.

EXERCISE fO Compare yourself to another person, or compare two people you

know using these verb phrases,
EXAMPLES work hard
My mom works harder than my dad.
talk a lot
My brother talks more than my sister.

1. talk fast 5. work hard

2. gossip a lot 6. drive carefully

3. worry a lot 7. spend a lot on clothes
4. speak English fluently 8. make decisions quickly

EXERCISE fO Compare this dty to another city you know. Use better, worse, fewer,
less, or more.
EXAMPLES factories
Chicago has more factories than Ponce,
public transportation
Moscow has better public transportation than Los Angeles.

1. traffic 5. pollution 9. apartment buildings

2. people 6. sunshine 10. job opportunities
3. rain 7. factories 11. tall buildings
4. crime 8. snow 12. homeless people

Comparatives; Superlatives 365

 EXERCISE 14 Make compansons with the following words. Give your reasons.
You may work with a partner or in a small group.
EXAMPLE men/women-have an easy life In my opinion, men have an easier life than
women. Women have to work two jobs—in the office and at home.

1. men/women—have responsibilities

2. American women/women in my native culture—have an easy life

3. married men/single men—are responsible

4. American teenagers/teenagers in my native culture-have freedom

5. American teenagers/teenagers in my native culture—have

responsibilities

6. American children/children in my native culture—have toys

7. American children/children in my native culture—have a good

education

8. American teachers/teachers in my native culture—get respect

EXERCISE 13 Fill in the blanks with the comparative or superlative form of the
word in parentheses (). Include than or the where necessary,
EXAMPLES August is usually hotter than
May in Chicago.
{holj

January is usually the coldest

. month of the year in Chicago.
kold)

1. Los Angeles is San Francisco.

fu'crm)

2. Seattle is city in Washington.

(big)

366 Lesson 12
 3. The state of Hawaii is south in the U.S.
(/ar)

4. Mexico City is New York City.

(cTou'iled)

5. New York City is Los Angeles.

(cTou'Jeil)

6. Mexico City is one of cities in the world.

('ctou’Ji'J)

7. San Francisco is one of cities in the U.S.

(Iwauii/ul)

8. building in the world is not in the U.S.

iidlO

EXERCISE f9 Two students in Seattle are talking. Fill in the blanks with
appropriate words to make comparatives and superlatives.

■^)) I’m planning to visit Chicago.

CD 2, TR 26
B: You’re going to love it. It’s a beautiful city. In fact, it’s one of
the mc?6t beautiful cities in the U.S.
fi'xnnipLO
A: It’s the second largest city, isn’t it?

B: Not anymore. Los Angeles is now _ Chicago.

(I)

A: What should 1 see while I’m there?

B: You can visit the Willis Tower. It’s building in

{2)

the U.S. It has 110 stories. On a clear day, you can see for many miles.

A: Did you go to the top when you were there?

B: When 1 was there, the weather was bad. It was raining. I hope you
have weather than 1 had. When are you going?
(3)

A: In August.

B: Ugh! August is the month of the year. It’s often 90

(4)

degrees or more. If you get hot, you can always go to the beach and cool off.
A: Is Chicago near an ocean?

B: No. It’s near Lake Michigan.

A; Is it big like Lake Washington?

B: It’s much. than Lake Washington. In fact, it’s
(5)

one of the . lakes in the U.S.

<6)

(continued)

Comparatives; Superlatives 367

 A: Is Chicago very rainy?
B: Not in the summer. It’s sunny. In fact, it’s much
17)
than Seattle.

A: What do you suggest that I see?

B: You should see the famous architecture downtown. The

architects in the U.S. designed buildings in

(8)

Chicago.
A: Do I need to take taxis everywhere, or does Chicago have a good public

transportation system?
B: Taxis are so expensive! They’re much than
(9)

the buses and trains. You should use the public transportation. But
remember that there’s a lot of crime in Chicago, so it’s not safe to travel
alone at night. It’s. in the daytime.
(JO)
A: Does Chicago have . crime than Seattle?
(in
B: Yes. But if you’re careful, you’ll be OK. I’m sure you’ll enjoy it. It’s an
interesting place because it has people from all over the world. In fact,
I think it’s one of cities in the U.S.
02)

'»-V!

■ ^2 ●

-A

Chicago skyline

368 Lesson 12
Summary of Lesson 12

1. Adjectives
SHORT ADJECTIVES

Chicago is a big city.

Chicago is bigger than Boston.
New York is the biggest city in the U.S.
LONG ADJECTIVES

Houston is a populated city.

Chicago is more populated than Houston.
New York is the most populated city in the U.S.
2, Adverbs
SHORT ADVERBS

She walks fast.

She walks faster than her husband.
Her son walks the fastest in the family.
'LY ADVERBS

You speak English fluently.

You speak English more fluently than your brother.
Your sister speaks English the most fluently in your family.
3. Word Order
VERB (PHRASE) * COMPARATIVE ADVERB

She speaks English more fluently than her husband.

She talks more than her husband.

COMPARATIVE ADJECTIVE ● NOUN

She has more experience than her husband.
She has a better accent than her sister.

Editing Advice

1. Don’t use a comparison word when there is no comparison.

California is a bigger state.

2. Don’t use more and -er together.

My new car is owe better than my old one.

3. Use than before the second item in a comparison.

than

He is younger that his wife.

Compurative.s; Superlatives 369

 4. Use the before a superlative form.
the

China has biggest population in the world.

5. Use a plural noun after the phrase “one of the.”

3

Jim is one of the tallest boy in the class.

A

6.' Use the correct word order.

drives faster
She fas-tet^Hves than her husband.
more

I have responsibilities mere than you.

A

person
My uncle is the pe-rsee most interesting in my family. A

7. Don’t use the with a possessive form.

My the best friend lives in London.

8. Use correct spelling.

happier
She is happyer than her friend.

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C

1 used to live in Mexico City. Now I live in St. Louis. These cities are
C bigger
very different. Mexico City is more biger than St. Louis. In fact, it’s
(exuniplt') (e.vnmplt’)

one of the biggest city in the world. It’s certainly the most large city in
(2)

Mexico. St. Louis has no mountains. Mexico City is surrounded by tall

i3l

mountains. I think Mexico City is prettyer that St. Louis. It has beautiful
14)

parks. Mexico City is more interesting St. Louis. It has great museums.
15)

370 Lesson 12
 But Mexico Cit>' has a few serious problems: it has more pollution than
(6)

St. Louis. My the oldest brother still lives there and he always complains
a>

about the air quality. And I hate the subway. I think it’s the more crowded
(8)

subway in the world.

No city is perfect. Each one has advantages and disadvantages. But my

heart is in Mexico City because my family and best friends live there.
(9)

Lesson 12 Test/Review

PART a Find the mistakes with word order and correct them. Not every
sentence has a mistake. If the sentence is correct, write C.
EXAMPLES You ^nore^no\^about the U.S. than I do.
Soccer is more interesting than football for me. C

1. I have problems more than you.

2. I earlier woke up than you.
3. Paris is the cit^' most beautiful in the world.
4. She speaks English more fluently than her brother.
5. You faster type than I do.
6. My father is the most intelligent person in the family.
7. Your car is expensive more than my car.
8. You sing more beautifully than I do.
9. I travel more than my friend does.
10. You have more money than I do.

PART Q Fill in the blanks with the comparative or the superlative of the word
in parentheses (). Add the or than if necessary.
EXAMPLES New York City is bigger than Chicago.

New York Citv’ is the biggest city in the U.S.

ll’ig)

1. Mount Everest is mountain in the world.

(high)

2. A D grade is a C grade.

Comparatives; Superlatives 371

 3. Johnson is one of last names in the U.S.
(common)

4. Tokyo is Miami.
(populated)

5. June 21 is day of the year.

(long)

6. The teacher speaks English I do.

lu-ell)

7. Lake Superior is lake in the U.S.

(large)

8. Children learn a foreign language adults.

(i/iiieW))

9. Do you think that Japanese cars are

(good)

American cars?

10. A dog is a cat.

(friendly)

11. Do you think women drive men?

(cure/idly)

12. Who is student in this class?

(good)

13. The teacher speaks English I do.

(/liietillv)

14. A dog is intelligent, but a monkey is

(imelligetu)

Expansion
Classroom
ActivitlBS 0 Form small groups of three to five students. Fill in the blanks to
give information about yourself. Compare your list with the lists of
other members of your group to make superlative statements.
EXAMPLE Susana has the most relatives in this city.

a. number of relatives I have in this city _

b. my height
c. number of letters in my last name
d. number of sisters and brothers I have _

e. number of hours I watch TV per week

f. number of hours 1 exercise per week
g- money I spent today
h. distance I travel to come to this school

372 Lesson 12
 i. cups of coffee I drank today
j. number of miles I usually drive or walk per day
k. number of movies I usually see per year

Q Work with a partner from the same native culture,if possible.

Compare American men and men from your native culture. Compare
American women and women from your native culture. Report some of
your ideas to the class.

o Find a partner. Choose one of the following pairs and decide which
of the two is better. Write five reasons why it is better. One person will
make a statement saying that one is better than the other. The other
person will follow with, "Yes, but..." and give another point of view.
EXAMPLE A: I think dogs are better pets than cats. They are more loyal.
B: Yes, but dogs need more attention.

● cats and dogs

● travel by train and travel by plane
● houses and condos
● spring and fall
● voice mail and answering machines
● leaving a spoken message or a text message

Talk
About It O your opinion, what is the biggest problem in the U.S. today?

O Talk about the advantages and disadvantages of living in a big dty.

Compare a big city to a small city or town.

o In choosing where to live, what is the most important thing to

consider?

Comparatives; Superlatives 373

Write
About It Q Write about the biggest problem in the world today. Why is this a
problem? How can we solve the problem?

0 Choose one of the following topics to write a comparison:

a. Compare your present car with your previous car.
b. Compare two cities you know well.
C. Compare American women and women in your native culture,
d. Compare American men and men in your native culture,
e. Compare soccer and American football,
f. Compare your life in the U.S. and your life in your native country.
Compare a place where you lived before with the place where you
live now.

Quito and Chicago

I am from Quito, Ecuador. 1 lived there for 21 years

before 1 came to Chicago. There are many differences

between Quito and Chicago. One difference is the
climate. In Quito, the temperature is almost the same
all year. The summers in Chicago are much hotterand
the winters are much colder than in Quito. Another

difference is the altitude. Chicago is at sea level and

Quito is high in the mountains ...

For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

374 Lesson 12
Lesson

Grammar
Auxiliary Verbs with
Too and Either

Auxiliary Verbs in
Tag Questions

Context
Dating and Marriage
Dating and Marriage
Before
You Read 1. How is dating different from marriage?
2. Do American married couples spend more or less time together than
couples in your native culture?

Read the following magazine article. Pay special attention to

CD 2, TR 27 auxiliary verbs and too and either.

Most married couples want to spend time together, but

the busy American lifestyle often doesn't allow it.
Meg and Don are a typical American couple.
Before Meg and Don met, they were both lonely. Meg wanted to get
married, and Don did too. Meg
believed that marriage would mean a
lot of togetherness, and Don did too. s >
When they were dating, Don didn't m ■
get together with friends very often,
and Meg didn’t either. They spent
all their free time together. They
discovered they had a lot in common. 1

A year after they met, they

decided to get married. As they planned their wedding, they discovered their
first differences while making decisions about their wedding: Meg wanted
a big wedding, but Don didn’t. Meg wanted an outdoor wedding, hut Don
didn’t. They solved their differences by having a big indoor wedding.
As a married couple, they are now facing the realities of busy schedules
and different interests. Don works hard, and Meg does too. They often have
to work overtime. Don likes to cook, and Meg does too, but they rarely ha\’e
time to do it. They often bring home carry-out dinners or eat in fast-food
restaurants. On weekends, Don likes to go fishing, but Meg doesn’t. So
Don takes fishing trips with his friends. Meg likes to go to movies, but Don
doesn’t. He prefers to stay home and watch TV when he comes home from
work. Both of them arc planning to take college courses soon, which will give
them even less time together.
So how do they solve these differences and stay close as a married
couple? Once a month, they invite friends over on a weekend to have dinner
and watch a movie or a football game on TV. When Don goes on a fishing
trip, Meg gets together with her best friend and they go to a movie. That
way, Don enjoys himself, and Meg does too.
Even though the realities of marriage are different from the romance of
dating, Meg and Don are finding ways to adjust to married life.

376 Lesson 13
13.1 Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either
The auxiliary verbs are do, does, did, the modals, and be. We use auxiliary verbs
with too and either to show similarity and avoid repetition of the same verb phrase.
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Don is busy, and Meg is too. For affirmative statements, use the
Don likes to cook, and Meg does too. auxiliary verb + too.
Don was lonely, and Meg was too.
Don lived alone, and Meg did too.
Don doesn't have much free time, and Meg For negative statements, use the
doesn't either. auxiliary verb + either.
Don didn't get together with friends very often,
and Meg didn't either.
Don: I like to cook. In informal speech, we often say me too
Meg: Me too. and me neither.
Don: I don't have much time.
Meg: Me neither.
American: Meg has a hard job, and Don does too. When have is the main verb, Americans
British: Meg has a hard job, and Don has too. usually use do, does, did as a substitute.
The British often use have, has, or had.

EXERCISE O Fill in the blanks with an auxiliary verb + too to show what Meg and
Don have in common. Make sure that you use the same tense as the
main verb.

EXAMPLE Don likes to cook, and Meg doestoo

1. Don has a hard job, and Meg

2. Don is a hard worker, and Meg
3. Don will take some college courses next semester,
and Meg
4. Don was lonely before, and Meg
5. Don worked last Saturday, and Meg

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with an auxiliary verb + either to show what Meg
and Don have in common. Make sure you use the same tense as the
main verb.

EXAMPLE Don doesn’t like fast food, and Meg doesn’t either

1. Don didn’t finish college, and Meg

2. Don isn’t interested in baseball, and Meg

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 377
 3. Don doesn’t have much free time, and Meg
4. Don can’t find time to cook, and Meg
5. Don doesn’t have any brothers or sisters, and Meg

13.2 Auxiliary Verbs with Opposite Statements

We can use auxiliary verbs to show contrast and avoid repetition of the same
verb phrase.
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Don Likes to go fishing, but Meg doesn't. We can use but to connect opposite
Don is happy watching TV, but Meg isn't. statements. We often put a comma
Don doesn't like to go to movies, but Meg does. before but.
Don didn’t want to have a big wedding, but Meg did.
Meg: I want a big wedding. In conversation, we don't need but
Don: I don't. when one person says the opposite
Meg: I'm not interested in sports. of another.
Don: I am.

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with an auxiliary verb to show what Meg and Don
don't have in common.

EXAMPLES Don likes to go fishing, but Meg doesn’t .

1. Meg likes to go to movies, but Don
2. Meg doesn’t like to watch football on TV, but Don
3. Meg reads when she has free time, but Don
4. Don wanted to have a small wedding, but Meg
5. Meg is interested in politics, but Don
6. Meg isn’t interested in cars, but Don
7. Meg can play the piano, but Don

EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks to compare the U.S. and another country you know. Use
and.. .too or and... either for similarities between the U.S. and the
other country. Use but for differences. Use an auxiliary verb in all cases.
EXAMPLE The U.S. is a big country. and Russia is too.
OR

The U.S. is a big country, but Cuba isn’t.

1. The U.S. has more than 300 million people.

378 Lesson 13
 2. The U.S. is in North America,
3. The U.S. has a president,
4. The U.S. doesn’t have a prime minister,

5. The U.S. fought in World War II,

6. The U.S. was a colony of England,
7. Americans like football,
8. Americans don’t celebrate Labor Day in May,

9. American public schools are closed on December 25,

10. The U.S. has a presidential election every four years,

EXERCISE Q ABOUT YOU Check (>/) yes or no to tell what is true for you.
Exchange your book with another student. Make statements about
you and the other student.
EXAMPLE I don’t speak Spanish, but Luis does.

Yes No

1. I speak Spanish.
2. I’m interested in football.

3. I’m interested in soccer.

4. I have a car.

5. [ use the Internet every day.

6. I can drive.

7. I plan to move to another city.

8. I’m going to buy a computer this year.
9. I would like to visit Paris.

10. I exercise every day.

11. I’m studying math this semester.
12. I studied English when 1 was in elementary school.
13. I finished high school.
14. I’m a vegetarian.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Eit/ier; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 379
 Fill in the blanks in the conversation below. Use an auxiliary verb
EXERCISE Q
and too or either when necessary.
I’m moving on Saturday. Maybe you and your brother can help me.
●i))
A:

CD 2. TR 28
Are you working on Saturday?
B: My brother is working on Saturday, but I tti not
■

s I can help you.

A: I need a van. Do you have one?
B: I don’t have one, but my brother . I’ll ask him
ti)

if we can use it. By the way, why are you moving?

A: There are a couple of reasons. I got married recently. I like the
apartment, but my wife She says it's too small for
(2)

two people.
B: How many rooms does your new apartment have?
I
I A: The old apartment has two bedrooms, and the new one
But the rooms are much bigger in the new one.
(3)

and there are more closets. Also, we’d like to live near the lake,

B: but apartments there are very expensive.

(4)

A: We found a nice apartment that isn’t so expensive. Also, I’d like to own

a dog, but my present landlord doesn’t permit pets.

B: Mine doesn’t ,. What kind of dog do you plan
(5)

to get?

A: 1 like big watchdogs. Maybe a German Shepherd or a Doberman.

I don’t like small dogs, but my wife
(6)

B: I don’t like small dogs either. They just make a lot of noise.
A: So now you know my reasons for moving. Can I count on you

for Saturday?
B: Of course you can.

380 Lesson 13
13.3 Tag Questions
f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Married life is hard, isn't it? A tag question is a short question that we put
You don't like to go fishing, do you? at the end of a statement. Use a tag question
Meg and Don work hard, don't they? to ask if your statement is correct or if the
Americans don't have much free time, listener agrees with you.
do they? The tag question uses an auxiliary verb in the
same tense as the main verb.

Saturday with Meg and Don

Before
You Read 1. When families talk about “quality time,” what do you think they mean?
2. What do you like to do in your free time?

■<» Read the following conversation between Meg (M) and Don (D).
CD 2, TR 29 Pay special attention to tag questions.

M: Would you like to go out to a movie

tonight?

D: Not really.

M: Before we got married, you always

wanted to go to movies, didn’t you?
D: I suppose so. But I’m tired now. I’d
rather stay home and watch TV or rent a movie.

M: You’re always tired, aren’t you?

D: Well, actually, yes. I work hard all week, and now 1 just want to relax.
M: When we got married, we planned to spend a lot of time together,
didn’t we?

D; I know. But married life is hard. Besides, we spend a lot of time together
on weekends, don’t we?

M: Yes, we do. We go shopping, we do the laundry, we visit your parents,

we cut the grass, we clean the house. But we don’t have any fun together
anymore, do we?

(continued)

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Eit/icr; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 381
 D: Fishing is fun for me. Next weekend I’m going fishing with my buddies.
But you don’t like fishing, do you?
M: Not really.
D: Before we got married, you said you’d try fishing with me, didn’t you?
M: Yes, I did. But I was just trying to please you then. I realize I like to eat
fish, but I don’t like to catch them.
D: Well, somebody has to catch them if you want to eat them.
M: But we never eat them because we don’t have time to cook. Now that
it’s Saturday, we’re both too tired to cook. What are we going to do for
dinner tonight?
D: We can get some carryout from that new Chinese place nearby, can’t we?
M: I suppose so.
D: You’re not happy, are you?
M: That’s not true! I love you, but I just want to spend more quality time
with you.
D: 1 have an idea. Let’s invite some friends over next weekend, and we can
make our special fish recipe for them. That will be fun, won’t it?
M: That’s a great idea.

13.4 Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions

AFFIRMATIVE STATEMENTS NEGATIVE TAG QUESTIONS EXPLANATION

Don likes fishing, doesn't he? An affirmative

statement has a
You're always tired, aren't you?
negative tag question.
We can eat out. can't we? Make a contraction with
the auxiliary verb + not
We planned to spend time together. didn't we?
and then use a subject
Meg is unhappy. isn't she? pronoun.

NEGATIVE STATEMENTS AFFIRMATIVE TAG QUESTIONS EXPLANATION

You aren't happy. are you? A negative statement

has an affirmative tag
You don't like fishing. do you? question. Use the
We never have fun together anymore. do we? auxiliary verb + a
subject pronoun.

382 Lesson 13
Spedal Cases with Tag Questions
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

There isn't a Lot of free time, is there? If the sentence begins with there is or
There are a lot of things to do, aren't there? there are, use there in the tag.
This is a typical marriage, isn't it? If the sentence begins with this or that,
That will be fun, won't it? use it in the tag.
These are normal problems, aren't they? If the sentence begins with these or
Those romantic days are over, aren't they? those, use they in the tag.
Informal: I'm irght, aren't I? Am I not? is a very formal tag. Informally,
Formal: I'm irght, am I not? we usually say aren't I?

EXERCISE a Add a tag question. All the statements are affirmative and have an
auxiliary verb.
EXAMPLE This class is large. isn’t it?

1. You’re a foreign student,

2. You can understand English,
3. We’ll have a test soon,
4. We should study,
5. There’s a library at this school,
6. You’d like to improve your English
7. This is an easy lesson,
8. I’m asking too many questions,

EXERCISE 8 Add a tag question. All the statements are negative and have an
auxiliary verb.
EXAMPLE You can’t speak Italian can you?

1. You aren’t an American citizen,

2. The teacher can’t speak your language,
3. We shouldn’t talk in the library,
4. You weren’t absent yesterday,
5. There aren’t any Japanese students in this class
6. This exercise isn’t hard,

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Eithur; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 383
 EXERCISE Q Add a tag question. All the statements are affirmative. Substitute
the main verb with an auxiliary verb in the tag question.
EXAMPLE You have the textbook, don’t you?

1. English has a lot of irregular verbs

2. You want to speak English well,
3. You understood the explanation,.
4. You have a cell phone,
5. They bought a laptop last week, _
6. We had a test last week,

EXERCISE oi Add a tag question. All the statements are negative.

EXAMPLE We don’t have class on Saturday, do we?

1. The teacher doesn’t pronounce your name correctly,

2. Your brother didn’t take the last test,
3. You didn’t bring your dictionary today,
4. We don’t always have homework,
5. I don’t have your phone number,
6. Your mother doesn’t speak English,

EXERCISE f3 This is a conversation between two acquaintances/ Bob (B) and

Sam (S). Sam can't remember where he met Bob. Fill in the blanks
with a tag question.

B: Hi, Sam.

S: Uh. hi.. .

B: You don’t remember me do you?

(I'Xdm/ili;)

S: You look familiar, but 1 can’t remember your name. We were in the

same chemistry class last semester,

(J)
B: No.

S: Then we probably met in math class,

(1)

B: Wrong again. I’m Meg Wilson’s brother.

S: Now 1 remember you. Meg introduced us at a parry last summer,
? And your name is Bob,
(3) (41

is a person kmnx' wt;!!.

384 Lesson 13
 B: That’s right.

S: How are you, Bob? You graduated last year,

(5)

B: Yes. And I’ve got a good job now.

S: You majored in computers,

(6}

B: Yes. But I decided to go into real estate.

S: And how’s your sister Meg? I never see her anymore. She moved back
to California,
(7)

B: No. She’s still here. But she’s married now, and she’s very busy.

S: Who did she marry?

B: Don Tripton. You met him,
18)

S: Yes, 1 think so. Say hello to Meg when you see her. It was great

seeing you again, Bob.

EXERCISE 19 A mother (M) is talking to her daughter (D). Fill in the blanks with
a tag question.

M: You didn’t get your scholarship, did you?

((fxumplc;)
D: How did you know?

M: Well, you look very disappointed. You can apply again next
7
year,
(I)

D: Yes. But what will 1 do this year?

M: There are government loans, ?

12)

D: Yes.

M: And you don’t have to pay them back until you graduate
?

13)

D: No.

M: And your professors will give you letters of recommendation

?

(4)

D: I’m sure they will.

M: So don’t worry. Just try to get a loan, and you can apply again next
year for a scholarship.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either: Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 385
13.5 Answering a Tag Question
STATEMENT WITH TAG QUESTION SHORT ANSWER EXPLANATION

Meg and Don are married Yes, they are. When we use a negative tag,
now, aren't they? we expect the answer to
They work hard, don't they? Yes, they do. be yes.
They don't have much free No, they don't. When we use an affirmative
time, do they? tag, we expect the answer
Meg doesn't like to go No, she doesn't. to be no.
fishing, does she?
Don: You aren't happy, Meg: Yes, I am. I Love you. Answering yes to an
are you? affirmative tag shows
Meg: You like to go to Don: No, I don't. I like to disagreement.
movies, don't you? stay home and watch TV. Answering no to a negative
tag shows disagreement.

EXERCISE fO (^oniplete the answer in the left column. Then check the meaning of
the answer in the right column. You may work with a partner.

A: You don’t have a car, do you? Person B has a car.

B: Yes, Ido. Person B doesn’t have a car.
(cjanipL')

A: You aren’t married, are you? Person B is married.

B: No, Person B isn’t married.
nt

A: You don’t like this city, do you? Person B likes this cit>'.
B: No, Person B doesn’t like this city.
(2)

A: You don’t have a watch, do you? Person B has a watch.

B: Yes, Person B doesn’t have a watch.
(3)

A: You don’t speak Russian, do you? Person B speaks Russian.

B: No Person B doesn’t speak Russian.
(4)

A: You can drive, can’t you? Person B can drive.

B: No, Person B can’t drive.
15)

A: The U.S. is the biggest country in Person B agrees with the statement.
the world, isn’t it? Person B doesn’t agree with the
B: No, statement.
(6)

A: You work on Saturday, don’t you? Person B works on Saturday.

B: Yes, Person B doesn’t work on Saturday.
(7)

386 Lesson 13
EXERCISE d 3 statement to another student and add a tag question. The
other student will tell you if this information is correct or not.
EXAMPLES You speak Polish don’t you?
No, I don’t. I speak Ukrainian.
You aren’t from Poland, are you?
No, I’m not. I’m from Ukraine.
You came to the U.S. two years ago, didn’tyou?
Yes, I did.

1. You’re not married,

2. You have a cell phone,
3. You didn’t study English in elementary school,
4. You have the textbook,
5. You don’t live alone,
6. You’ll take another English course next semester,
7. You won’t graduate this year,
8. You took the last test,
9. You have to work on Saturday,
10. The teacher doesn’t speak your language,
11. You can drive,
12. This class isn’t too hard for you,
13. There was a test last Friday,
14. You don’t speak German,
15. r m asking you a lot of personal questions,

EXERCISE d Fill in the blanks with a tag question and an answer that tells if the
information is true or not.

A: You come from Russia, don’t you?

B: I come from Ukraine.

(U

A: They speak Polish in Ukraine

12)

B: They speak Ukrainian and Russian.

13)

A: Ukraine isn’t part of Russia

(4)

B: . Ukraine and Russia are different. They were

(5)

both part of the former Soviet Union.

A: You come from a big city,

(6) (continued)

Auxiliary Vcrlw with Too aiul Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 387
 B: .. I come from Kiev. It’s the capital of Ukraine.
(7)

It’s very big.

A: Your parents aren’t here.
B: . We came together two years ago. I live with tliem.
(9)

A: You studied English in your country,

(10)

B: I studied only Russian and German. I never

(ij)

studied English there.

A: You’re not going to go back to live in your country,

(J2)

B: . I’m an immigrant here. 1 plan to become an

(13)

American citizen.

EXERCISE B3 This is a conversation between Meg (M) and her best friend,
Lydia (L). Fill in the blanks with tag questions and answers.
M: Hello?
CO 2, TR31
L: Hi, Meg. This is Lydia.

M: Oh, hi, Lydia.

L: Can you talk? 1 hear the TV in the background. Don’s home, isnthe?
(«nmpli')
M: .he . He’s watching TV, as usual.
11) (2)

L: Are you busy?

M: I’m always busy, ?

(3)
L: Well you
i-i) IS)

M: But I can make some time for you. What’s up?

L: I have a new boyfriend. His name is Peter.

M: Bur you’re dating Michael, 7

(6)

L: . Not anymore. We broke up a month ago.

(7)

The last time 1 talked to you was over a month ago, 7

(8)

M: Over a month ago? That’s terrible. We used to talk every day.

L: Now that you’re married, you don’t have much free time anymore
7

(9>

388 Lesson 13
M: . I almost never have time for myself anymore.
(JO) (IJ)

Or for my friends. Tell me about your new boyfriend.

L: We have so much in common. We both like sports, the same kind of

music, the same kind of food. ... If we get married, we’ll have the rest
of our lives to have fun together.
M: You’re not thinking of getting married,. 7

(12)
L: .. Not yet. I’m just dreaming.
fl3)

M: Dating is so much fun 7

(14)

L: It . But marriage isn’t, 7

(15) (16) (17)

M: “Fun” is not a word that describes marriage.

L: But you had a lot of fun with Don before you got married, 7

US)

M: we . But things changed after the wedding.

(19) (20)

Now all we do together is laundry, shopping, and cleaning.

L: That doesn’t sound very interesting. But there are good things about
being married 7

(21)

M: Of course. Don’s my best friend. We help each other with all

our problems.

L: Before you got married, I was your best friend,

7

(22)

But now I almost never see you.

M: You’re right, Lydia. I’ll try harder to call you more often.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 389
Summary of Lesson 13

1. Use auxiliary verbs to avoid repetition of the same verb phrase.

f AFFIRMATIVE AND SHORTENED AFFIRMATIVE + TOO

Meg has a job, and Don does too.

Meg is busy. and Don is too.

NEGATIVE AND SHORTENED NEGATIVE 4 f/THE/?

Meg doesn't work on Saturdays, and Don doesn't either.

Meg can't find free time, and Don can't either.

f AFFIRMATIVE BUT SHORTENED NEGATIVE

Meg finished college, but Don didn't.

^ Don likes fishing, but Meg doesn't.

NEGATIVE BUT SHORTENED AFFIRMATIVE

Don doesn't like movies, but Meg does.

Don didn't want a big wedding, but Meg did.

2. Use auxiliary verbs in tag questions.

f AFFIRMATIVE NEGATIVE TAG

You're busy now. aren't you?

We have a hard Life, don't we?
There are a lot of things to do, aren't there?

f NEGATIVE AFFIRMATIVE TAG

You don't like fishing, do you?

I can't go fishing alone, can I?
^ We never have time together, do we?

390 Le.s,son 13
Editing Advice

1. Don’t omit the auxiliary from a shortened sentence with too or either.
do
My brother has a new house, and I too.
didn't
John didn't take the test, and I either.

2. Don’t confuse too and either.

either
Jack doesn't speak French, and his wife doesn't ef©o.

3. If half your sentence is negative and half is affirmative, the

connecting word is but, not and.
but
He doesn't speak French, his wife does.

4. Be careful to answer a tag question correctly.

No

New York isn't the capital of the U.S., is it? Yes, it isn't.

5. Use a pronoun (or there) in the tag question.

it

That's your hat, isn't that?

there

There's some milk in the refrigerator, isn't it?

6. Be careful to use the correct auxiliary verb and the correct tense.
did

Her sister didn't go to the party, dees she?

will
She won't go back to her country, dees she?

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Ta^ Questions 391
Editing Quiz

Don is calling Meg on her cell phone. Some of the shaded words and
phrases have mistakes. Find the mistakes and correct them. If the
shaded words are correct, write C.

D: Hi, Meg.

M: Hi, Don. What’s up?

D: Some friends are coming over this afternoon to watch the football game,
c don’tyou
I told you, didn’t I? You remember, do you?
(fxfltnpk) (exampk)
M: Of course I am.
ID

D: Can you pick up some things before you come home?

M: I think we have enough food at home. We have snacks, aren’t we?

i2)

D: Yes, we do. But we don’t have any cheese and crackers, don’t we?
(3) 14)

M: Yes, we don’t. I’ll get some. Who’s coming tonight?

15)

D: Sam called today. He’s coming, but Nancy doesn’t.

16)

M: Why not?
D: They can’t find a babysitter for their daughter, Pam.
M: Tell them to bring their daughter. Pam’s eight and Sofie does, too.
(7)

I’m sure they can find something to do together.

D: But Sofie has a violin lesson this afternoon, doesn’t she?
<8)

M: That’s tomorrow, not today. I sure hope Sam’s wife is coming. We can
watch a movie while you guys watch football. She doesn’t like football,
and I too.
(9)

D: How do you know? You never even watch football.

M: Don’t you remember? I cried to watch football with you guys last time, and

Nancy was too, but we just saw a bunch of guys falling on top of each other.
(10)

D: You can understand it if you try, can’tyou?

nil

M: If I try. But the point is chat I don’t want to try.

392 Lesson 13
Lesson 13 Test/Review

PART Q This is a conversation between two students who are meeting for
the first time. Fill in the blanks with an auxiliary verb to complete
this conversation. Use either or too when necessary.

C: Hi. My name is Carlos. I’m a new student.

am too
E: 1 . My name is Elena.
(exampli'i
C: I come from Mexico.

E: Oh, really? 1 . I come from a small town in the

m

northern part of Mexico.

C: 1 come from Mexico City. 1 love big cities.
E: 1 . I prefer small towns.
(21

C: How do you like living here in Los Angeles?

E: 1 don’t like it much, but my sister — ,. She has a
(3)

good job, but I . 1 miss my job back home.

<41

C: 1 love it here, and my family The climate is

(5)

similar to the climate of Mexico City.

E: What about the air quality? Mexico City doesn’t have clean air, and
Los Angeles so you probably feel right at home.
(6)

C: Ha! You’re right about the air tiuality, but there are many nice things
about Los Angeles. Would you want to get a cup of coffee and continue
this conversation? I don’t have any more classes today,
E: Yes, I but 1 have to go home now. 1 enjoyed
(?)

our talk.

C: I . Maybe we can continue it some other time.

(8)

Well, see you in class tomorrow.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Either; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 393
 PART Q In this conversation, a new student is trying to find out information
about the school and class. Add a tag question.
isn’t there?
A: There’s a parking lot at the school
B: Yes. It’s east of the building.
A: The teacher’s American,

B: Yes, she is.

A: She doesn’t give hard tests,

(2)

B: Not too easy, not too hard.

A: We’ll have a day off for Christmas,

(i)

B: We’ll have a whole week off.

A: We have to write compositions

(4)
B: A few.

A: And we can’t use a dictionary when we write a composition

(5;
B: Who told you that? Of course we can. You’re very nervous about
school,
(6)

A: Yes, I am. It isn’t easy to learn a new language,

(7)
B: No.

A: And I should ask questions about things I want to know,

(8)

B: Yes, of course. You don’t have any more questions,

(9)
A: No.

B; Well, I’ll see you in the next class. Bye.

394 Lesson 1.3

Expansion
Classroom
Activities 0 Complete each statement. Then find a partner and compare yourself
to your partner by using an auxiliary verb.
Chinese
EXAMPLES A: I speak
B: 1 do too. OR 1 don’t.
A: Idon’rspc-nk Spanish
B: I don't either, or I do.

a. I speak
b. I don’t speak
c. I can

d. I have

e. I don’t have.

f. I’m

g- I usually drink every day.

h. I’m going to next week.

1. I come from

J- I’m wearing today.

k. I bought _ last week,
1. I went last week.

m. I don’t like

n. I brought to the U.S.

0. I don’t like to eat

P- 1 can’t very well.

q- 1 should more.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Eit/ier; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 395
 © The teacher will read each statement. If the statement is true for
you, stand up. Students will take turns making statements about any
two classmates.

EXAMPLE Teacher: Stand up if you drank coffee this morning.

Student: I drank coffee this morning, and Tom did too.
Mario didn’t drink coffee this morning, and Sofia didn’t either.
Stand up if you ...
● have more than five sisters and brothers
● walked to class today
● will graduate in the next two years
● are wearing running shoes
● have a photo of a family member in your pocket or bag
● want to review this lesson
● went to a movie last week
● can’t swim
● plan to buy a car soon
● are tired now
● aren’t married
● ate pizza today
● speak Polish
● don’t like this game
● can understand American TV
● didn’t take the last test

O Find a partner. Tell your partner some things that you think you
know about him or her and about his or her native culture or country.
Your partner will tell you if you are right or wrong.
EXAMPLES The capital of your country is New Delhi, isn’t it?
Hindus don’t eat beef, do they?
You’re studying engineering, aren’t you?

O Tell the teacher what you think you know about the U.S. or
Americans. You may work with a partner. The teacher will tell you
if you're right or wrong.
EXAMPLES Most Americans don’t speak a foreign language, do they?
Alaska is the largest state, isn’t it?

396 Lesson 13
Talk
About It o Do you think young people have realistic expectations of marriage?

0 Some people say that opposites attract. Do you think that two
people who are opposites in many ways can have a good marriage?

0 What do you think are the ingredients of a good marriage?

Write
About It Choose two sports, countries, people, or stores and write sentences
comparing them.

My Mother and My Father

My mother and my father have some things in
common and some big differences too. My mother is
the oldest of five children, and my father is too. So

they both had a lot of responsibilities growing up. My

father finished high school, but my mother didn’t. My
mother didn't have the opportunity. But they are both
very intelligent...

For more practice using grammar in context,

^ please visit our Web site.

Auxiliary Verbs with Too and Eitlier; Auxiliary Verbs in Tag Questions 397
 Lesson

Grammar
Verb Review

Context
Washington Interns

The Supreme Couti, Washington. D.C.

Washington Interns
Before
You Reac 1. How can a college student get work experience?
2. What do most college students do during their summerbreak?

Read the Information and e-mail that follows it. Pay special
CD 2, TR32
attention to verb tenses.

Some college students want to find interesting work and gain

valuable experience over the summer. One way is to work as an intern
in Washington, D.C. Interns don’t get paid; the reward comes from
the experience and knowledge they gain. Interns learn about the U.S.
government and politics.

To I I chen>scns<»Pc*mail.com

Subject: Mv inrcmslup

Dear Mom and Dad,

I can't believe it! I'm working at the Supreme Court now. I’m gaining so
much experience here. When I go to law school next year. I'll have a much
greater understanding of American law. And when I apply for a job, this
internship will look really good on my resume'.
At first, I felt a little lost and lonely because I didn't know anyone. But
that soon changed. Through my classes and job, I meet new and interesting
people every day.
Besides my work. I'm taking classes at Georgetown University. My professors
are great! I'm learning so much. My knowledge about American law is
increasing greatly.
I have an interesting roommate, too. She's from California. Her name is Nicole.
She's working at the Department of Education. She's planning to become
a teacher. We have a small but comfortable apartment. We have to shop
and make our own meals. So besides learning about the Supreme Court, I'm
learning how to cook. I'm becoming much more responsible. Are you surprised?

ii‘sutiW is a JiKiinu'nl iliat lists job expctii-ncc .in J eiUic.ition. A person lockini; for a job usually writes a resume.

400 Les.son 14
Whenever Nicole and I have free time, we go to see the interesting places in
Washington. But we rarely have free time because of our jobs and our classes.
We might go to the art museum this weekend if we have enough time.
There is one thing I don't like: I have to wear formal clothes every day.
I can't wear jeans at my job. We must look very professional for work. I
didn't have the irght kind of clothes when I arrived, so I went shopping
and spent about $500 on new clothes. I hope you don't mind. I put the
charges on your credit card. As you know. I'm not making any money here.
But don't worry. I promise I won't spend any more money on clothes.
When I get home. I'll tell you much more about my experience this summer.
I know I should write more often, but I just don't have the time.
Love,
Lena

I« ► .//

FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions)

About Washington Internships

● How does a student get an internship?

Students should contact their senators or representatives
to apply for an internship.

● Whatkindofworkdointernsdo?

They work in research, help plan events, manage

databases, and write for newsletters.

● Where do they live?

They live in orvcampus apartments at nearby universities.

● Do they have to take classes?

Yes, they do. And they must participate in other activities.
.1
n*
* How busy is their schedule?
It is very busy. Interns learn about education, politics, and
government

* Will they receive college credit for the internship?

Yes.They will receive six hours of college credit

Verb Review 401

 T—r

14.1 Verbs

Simple Present Tense

EXAMPLES USES

Washington is the capital of the U.S. Facts

Some students want summer jobs.

Some interns in Washington take classes
at Georgetown University.
Interns students have vacation in Customs and habits
the summer.
Many American students wear jeans to class.

Interns take classes every day. When they Regular activities

have free time, they go to interesting places.

I have a great roommate now. With nonaction verbs

I like my job now.

When I get home. I'll tell you more. In a future time clause

If you become an intern in Washington, you In a future clause

will get valuable experience.
My roommate is from California. She comes With place of origin
from San Diego.

Present Continuous Tense

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Lena is writing a letter to her parents now. Actions that are happening now

Lena is learning how to cook. Actions that are happening in a present time
She isn't making any money this summer. period

Future Tense

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

They are going to return to college in the fall. Plans for the future (use be going to)
Nicole is going to become a teacher.
I will never forget this experience. Predictions (use wUi or be going to)
This experience is going to help me in my
future.

I'll write more later. Promises (use will)

402 Lesson 14
simple Past Tense
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

I went shopping because I needed clothes. Actions that happened at a specific time in
I spent $500 on clothes. the past
I used your credit card.

Be

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Washington, D.C., is the capital of the U.S. To classify or define the subject

Washington is interesting. To describe the subject

The Supreme Court is in Washington. To tell the location of the subject

Nicole is from San Diego. With a place of origin

She was born in California. With born

There are many government buildings With there

in Washington.

Modals

f EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Lena can wear jeans to class. Permission

Lena can study at night. Ability
She should write to her parents more often. Advisability
If you want more information about
internships, you should write to your senator.
She must look professional in her job. Necessity
Interns must participate in activities.
They might go to the art museum this Possibility
weekend.
Lena may visit Nicole in California next year.

Infinitives

EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Lena wants to have an internship. An infinitive doesn't show tense.

It's important to be on time.

Imperatives
EXAMPLES EXPLANATION

Write to me. An imperative uses the base form.

Don't worry about me. A negative imperative uses don’t + base form.

Verb Re\'iew 403

 EXERCISE D Without Looking at the reading on pages 398-399, fill in the blanks
with the correct tense or form of the verb in parentheses (). Some
answers may vary.

r
I can’t beliave it! I at the Supreme Court now. I
beliciu) (I U'ork) (2 gnin)

SO much experience here. When I to law school next year,

(3 go)

a much greater understanding of American law. And when

(4 /uiu'J

for a job, this internship really good on my resume.

(5 upplx) (6 look)

At first, I a little lost and lonely because I

(7 fed) (8 not/knou')

anyone. But that soon . Through my classes and job,

(9 clwngi.')

new and interesting people every day.

(JOnu'et)

Besides my work, 1 classes at Georgetown University.

Ill lokt')

My professors . great! 1 so much. My knowledge

(12 be) (13 kam)

about American law rapidly.

(14 mcnw)

an interesting roommate, too. She from

(151uu«) (16 b,-)

California. Her name is Nicole. She at the Department of

117 uwk)

Education. She’s planning to _ a teacher. We a small

118 become) (19 have)

but comfortable apartment. We have to and our

(20 shop) (21 make)

own meals. So besides learning about the Supreme Court, I

(22 leam)

how to cook. I much more responsible. Are you surprised?

(23 become)

Whenever Nicole and 1 free time, we to see

(24 have) (25 go)

the interesting places in Washington. But we rarely free time

(26 luive)

because of our jobs and our classes. We might to the art

(27 go)

museum this weekend if we enough time.

(28 halt)

There is one thing I don’t like: 1 have to wear formal clothes every day.

1 can’t blue jeans at my job. We must very

(29 wear) (30 look)

404 Lesson 14
 professional for our jobs. I the right kind of clothes when 1
(3/ mi/hm'e)

, so I - shopping and about $500 on

(32 arTiiv) (33 go) (34 sjvml)

new clothes. I hope you _ . I the charges on your

135 not'^mind) (36 pm)

credit card. As you .1 any money here. But don’t

(37 kncHi') (38 no[/muleO

. I promise I _ any more money on clothes.

(39 uony) (40 not/spendj

When I home, I you much more about my

(41 get) (42 tdl)

experience this summer. I I should more often,

(43 linou) (44 UTitO

but I just the time.

(45 noi//uuv)

Love

Lena

14.2 Statements and Questions

Simple Present Tense

r BASE FORM -S FORM

Interns wear formal clothes. Lena lives with a roommate.

They don't wear jeans. She doesn't live alone.
Do they wear formal clothes to class? Does she live in a dorm?
No, they don't. No, she doesn't.
What do they wear to class? Where does she live?
Why don't they wear jeans to work? Why doesn't she live in a dorm?
How many students wear jeans? Who lives in a dorm?

Present Continuous Tense

IS + VERB + INC ARE + VERB + ING

Nicole is planning to become a teacher. They are taking classes.

Lena isn't planning to become a teacher. They aren't taking English classes.
Is she planning to teach in California? Are they taking classes at Georgetown?
No, she isn't. Yes, they are.
Where is she planning to teach? What kind of classes are they taking?
Why isn't she planning to teach in California? Why aren't they taking English classes?
Who is planning to teach in California? How many students are taking classes?

Verb Review 405

Future Tense

WILL BE GOING TO

They will go home at the end of the summer. Lena is going to buy books.
They won't go on vacation. She isn't going to buy more clothes.
Will they go back to college? Is she going to buy a computer?
Yes, they will. No, she isn't.
When will they go back to college? What is she going to buy?
Why won't they go on vacation? Why isn't she going to buy a computer?
Who will go back to college? Who is going to buy a computer?

Simple Past Tense

REGULAR VERB IRREGULAR VERB

She used her parents' credit card. She bought new clothes.
She didn't use cash. She didn't buy jeans.
Did she use their card a lot? Did she buy formal clothes?
No, she didn't. Yes, she did.
Why did she use their card? Why did she buy formal clothes?
Why didn't she use cash? Why didn't she buy jeans?
Who used the card? Who bought formal clothes?

Be

PRESENT PAST

They are in Washington, D.C. Lena was lost at first.

They aren't at college. She wasn't happy.
Are they in California? Was she alone?
No, they aren't. Yes, she was.
Why are they in Washington? Why was she alone?
Why aren't they in California? Why wasn't she happy?
Who is in California? Who was alone?

Modals

f CAN SHOULD

She can wear jeans to class. She should study every day.
She can't wear jeans to work. She shouldn't go to parties every day.
Can she wear jeans at college? Should she study history?
Yes, she can. Yes, she should.
What can she wear? What else should she study?
Why can't she wear jeans to work? Why shouldn't she go to parties?
Who can wear jeans? Who should study?

406 Lesson 14
EXERCISE Q Fill in the blanks with the negative form of the underlined verb.
isn’t
EXAMPLE Lena js in Washington this summer. She at home.

1. She’s getting experience. She money ft)r her work.

2. She bought new clothes. She _ jeans.
3. She writes a lot for her classes. She

a lot of letters.

4. She’ll finish college next year. She college

this summer.

5. She’s going to return to college in the fall. She

to Washington next summer.
6. She can wear jeans to class. She jeans to work.
7. She must look professional at work. She
informal at work.

EXERCISE Q Pill in the blanks with a question about interns, based on the
responses that follow.
EXAMPLES Do interns get money for their work?
No, they don’t. They get experience, not money.
Will the internship end in September?
No, it won’t. The internship will end in August.

1.

Yes, they do. They have to take classes.

2.

No, they don’t live in dorms. They live in apartments.

3.

Yes, they are. They are very busy with classes, work, and activities.
4.

Yes, they will. They will receive six hours of college credit.
5.

No, she can’t. Lena can’t wear jeans to work.

6.

Yes, she is. She’s learning how to cook.

7.

No, she didn’t. She didn’t know anyone when she arrived in Washington.

Verb Re\'ie\v 407

 8.

Yes, she does. She works at the Supreme Court.

9.

Yes, she did. She bought some new clothes.

EXERCISE Q Write a question with the wh- words given. Use the same tense.
An answer Is not necessary.
EXAMPLE Lena is calling her mother. Why is she calling her mother?
1. Lena will go home soon. When

2. Her mother doesn’t remember the roommate’s name. Why

3. Lena can’t go home for a weekend. Why

4. Lena doesn’t have much money. How much money

5. Lena is learning a lot this summer. What

6. She doesn’t have time to write letters. Why

7. Lena went to Virginia last weekend. With whom

8. Nicole comes from a different state. Where

from?

9. Lena didn’t cook before this summer. Why

10. Someone went to Virginia. Who

11. The internship will help Lena in the future. How

12. She is working at a branch of the government. At which branch

13. Lena felt lonely at first. Why

408 Lesson 14
 14. She can’t wear jeans to work. Why

15. She must take classes. How many classes

16. She is going to get college credits for her internship. How many credits

17. Lena should call her parents more often. How often

EXERCISE Q Lena (L) is talking to her mother (M) on the phone. She is calling
from Washington, D.C. Fill in the blanks with the correct form of the
words in parentheses ().
M: Hello?
-I))
CD 2, TR33
L: Hi, Mom. This is Lena.
m
M: Hi, Lena. I happy to
(exumpie: be) (J hear)

your voice. You You just send short text messages.

(2 netei/cnll)

L: I’m sorry, Mom. I much rime.

(3 nol/kaw)

M: Why time?
14 you/noi/haiv)
L: I have to work, go to classes, and participate in activities all day.
Last weekend we to Virginia.
(5xo)
M: Who 7

16 Jrite)

L: No one. We the Metrc7. Public transportation is

(7 use)

really good here.

M: enough to eat this summer? Who
fS you/n,:tl
for you?
(9 cook)

L: I to this summer.
(JOleum) (II cook)

surprised?
(12 be/you)
M: Yes, I am. When you were home, you never
(13 cook)

You It.
(14 lu.iW

L: Not anymore. Nicole and I often and

(15 cooh)
our friends for dinner on the weekends.
(16 invite)

(continwed)

Verb Review 409

 M: Who Nicole?
(17hel
L: I you in my last e-mail. She’s my roommate.
06 leli)
?

(19 you/noi/Ti’im.’mK.T)
M: Yes, of course. Now 1 . How could I forget?
120 ermemlvT)

L: She’s the same age as I am—19. She from

(21 comO

California.

M: How ?
it?
(22 Iv/yoiiT-jof'J (23 yoH/likel
L: It’s great! I so much this summer.
(24 Uam)
M: you in the future?
(25 this inteTnsfii(>/lKlp)

L: Yes, it will. It will be great on my resume.

M: enough money?
(26 you/kavo)
L: No, 1 don’t. I _ most of the money you
(27 spend)
. me when 1 got here.
(28 gue)
M: You my credit card. But don't spend money on
(2 9 enn/ »se)

foolish things.
L: I won’t.

M: I you. home for a

(30 miss) (31 you/can/come)
weekend? We _ for your ticket.
(32 pay)
L: I can’t. Mom. We activities on weekends, too.
(33 have)
M: again next week?
(34 jou/cuil)
L: If I time, I But I
(35 hau') (36 call)
so little free time.
(37 hai'e)

M: I’m sure you have enough time for a ten-minute phone call to your mother.
L: You’re right. I you again next week. Give my
(38 call)
love to Dad.

M: I will.

410 Lesson 14
Editing Advice

1. Use the correct word order for questions.

your brother work
Where does work-your brother?
can’tyou
Why yeu can't find a job?
is your brother
How old your brother is?

2. Don’t forget to use do, does, or did in a question.

does your father live
Where lives your father?
did give
When the teacher §eve a test?

3. Don’t use be with a simple present-tense or past-tense verb.

I am- eat breakfast every morning.

saw

Yesterday, he was see a good movie.

4. Use the base form after do, does, and did.

go

I didn't wefft to the party.

buy
Did you bought a new car?

5. For the simple present tense, use the -5 form when the subject is
he, she, it, or a singular noun. Use the base form in all other cases.
5

Lisa never drink coffee in the morning.

A

My friends usually visits me on Saturday.

6. Use the correct past form for irregular verbs.

left

We leaved the party early.

fell
He felt down on the ice.

7. Use the base form after to.

drive
I wanted to drove to New York.

He likes to eats popcorn.

Verb Review 411

 8. Use the base form after a modal.
etudy
She should studies more.

We must to obey the law.

I can't helpwf you now.

9. Connect two verbs with to (unless one is a modal).

to

I forgot do the homework.

A

to

She needs find a job.

A

10. Don’t use the present continuous tense with nonaction verbs.

I am knowing the answer now.

5

He k hearing the noise in the next room.

11. Don’t use he before a simple future verb.

The doctor will be see you at 3 p.m.

12. Use the correct form of be.

were

They was late to the meeting.

are

You Is always on time.

13. Use the correct negative form.

don't
They net know the answer.
don't
You doesn't need a pen.

14. Don’t forget to include a form of be in a present continuous sentence.

IS

She washing the dishes now.

A

am

I studying now.
A

15. Don’t use the future tense in a time clause or an i/clause. Use the
simple present tense.

When I wlU graduate, I will get a job.

ane

You will fail the course if you wlll-be absent more than five times.

412 Lesson 14
 16. Do not use the -I'ng form for the simple present tense.

I drinkw§ coffee every morning.

17. Do not forget the -d in itsecl to.

I use to Live in Mexico.

18. Don’t forget to after impersonal expressions like: it’s necessary, it’s
impossible, it’s important.
to

It's important Learn English. A

Editing Quiz

Some of the shaded words and phrases have mistakes. Find the
mistakes and correct them. If the shaded words are correct, write C.

C live
A: Does your family lives in the U.S.?
{example) (exampky

B: Yes, but L doesn’t live with them.

in

A: Why you don’t live with them?

12)

B: They live in Lexington. I use to live with them there, but I finded a job
(3) (4) (5)

here, so I was moved.

(6)

A: When you moved here?

(7)

B: Three years ago. 1 don’t like to be so far from them, but I’m have no
(8) (9)

choice. 1 didn’t realized how much I would miss them. I lonely at

(10) (in

times, but my mom call me almost every day, so that helps.

iI2) 113)

A: I’m know how you feel. When I left home for the first time, it was very
(14) (15) 116)

hard for me.

B: Where your family lives?

(17)

Verb Re\ ie\v 413

 A: They back in my country. They want visit me very much. When 1
(18) (19)

will save enough money, I’m going to send them a plane ticket. 1 having
(20) (21) (22)

tw'o jobs now, so soon I’ll be have enough money for their trip.
123)

A: How long they’ll stay here?

(24)

B: My mom can to stay for six months. She’s retired. But my dad still working,
(25) (26)

SO he can stay only for two weeks.

(27)

A: How often do you talk to your parents?

(28)

B: It’s expensive talk by phone, so we usually send e-mail.

(29) (30)

A: How much costs a phone card?

(31)

B: A phone card cost about $ 10, but we can only talk for about 30 minutes.
(32) (33)

A: Wow. That’s expensive.

B: I prefer to saving my money for their trip.

(34)

Lesson 14 Test/Review

PART 1 Fill in the blanks with the correct tense or form of the words in
parentheses ().
come
from India. I to the
(example: come) (I ilecide/mote)

U.S. ten months ago. It was difficult my friends

(2 leai'c)

and family, but I to the U.S. and have more

(3 uiint/come)

opportunities.

When I in India, I was a draftsman. When

(4 live)

to the U.S. in July, 1

(5 come) (6 not/find)
a job at first because my English wasn’t good enough. Last September,

a job in a restaurant. I don’t like my job at all.

<7 find)

414 Lesson 14
 a better job soon. 1 know 1
(S want/finS (9 set)
a better job when I English better.
(lOs/waW
my money now. When I
fli SUU') (12 hate)

enough money, I engineering courses at the

(13 begin/take)
university. My parents proud of me when
(14 he)

(15 graduate)
Right now I _ ESL courses at a college near my
(J6 take)
house. I English in India, bur it was different
(17 study)
from American English. When I listen to Americans at my job or on TV,

_ a lot of things they say. Sometimes when

(IS can/not/»mliTsiaml)

with Americans at my job, they

(20 not/unde73tand)

me. They sometimes at my pronunciation. They

(21 laugh)
aren’t bad people, but they that it is hard
(22 not/understaml)

another language and live in another country.

(2J h’um)

1 usually by myself at work. I

(24 stay)
more, but I’m very shy.
(25 Icnou) ( 2d shouH/ptactice)
When I _ in India, 1
(27 M (28 K.v)

in a big house with my parents, sisters and brothers, and grandparents.

Now I a small apartment and live alone.
(29lu«'i.')
Sometimes I lonely. I would like
(JO hW

_ married someday, but first 1 want

(31 get)
some money and
(32 earn) (33 5«vf)

for my future.

PART Write the negative form of the underlined words,

EXAMPLE He moved to the U.S. He didn’t move
to England.

1. He studied English in India. He German.

2. He wants to work as an engineer. He in a

restaurant.

Verb Review 415

 3. He is going to study engineering. He art.

4. He is taking courses at a community college now. He

courses at a university'.
5. He’s saving his money to get married. He his

money to go back to his country.

6. His coworkers know that he is a foreigner. They
how difficult his life is.

7. He should practice English with Americans. He

be shy.
8. He can understand some TV programs. He
all TV programs.

PART B statement. Then write a yes/no question about the

words in parentheses (). Write a short answer using the words in
parentheses ().
EXAMPLE He studied English in India. (American English) (no)
Did he study American English? No, he didn’t.

1. He’ll study engineering, (accounting) (no)

2. Americans don’t understand him. (Indians) (yes)

3. He’s studying English now. (American English) (yes)

4. He lives in a small apartment, (with his family) (no)

5. He can understand British English well. (American English) (no)

6. It is hard to learn another language, (live in another country) (yes)

7. He wants to get married, (next year) (no)

8. He lis’ed with his parents in India, (with his grandparents) (yes)

416 Lesson 14
PART Q Read each statement. Then write a wh- question with the word in
parentheses (). An answer is not necessary.
EXAMPLE He left India, (why)
Why did he leave India?

1. He is saving his money, (why)

2. He is going to get married, (when)

3. Some people laugh at him. (who)

4. He is lonely, (why)

5. His parents aren’t in the U.S. (why)

6. He didn’t find a job at first, (why)

7. He will graduate from the university, (when)

8. He came to the U.S. alone, (why)

9. His coworkers don’t understand his accent, (why)

10. He lived in a big house, (when)

Verb Review 417

Expansion
Classroom
Activities 0 Interview a student from another country. Use the words below to
ask and answer questions. Practice the simple present, the present
continuous, the future, and the simple past tenses,
EXAMPLES you/from Asia
A: Are you from Asia?
B: Yes, I am. or No, I’m not.

where/you/from
A: Where are you from?
B: I’m from Pakistan.

a. when/you/leave your country

b. how/you/come to the U.S.
c. you/come/to the U.S. alone
d. where/you/born
e. what language(s)/you speak
f. you/return to your country next year
g- you/have a job now
h. you/have a job in your country
1. how many brothers and sisters/you/have
]● your country/big
k. your country/have a lot of problems
1. you/live in an apartment in your hometown
m. you/study English in your country
n. what/you/studythis semester
0. what/you/studynext semester
P- yoLi/like this class
q- the teacher/speak your language
r. this class/hard for you
5. who/your teacher last semester
t. who/your teacher next semester

418 Lesson 14
 Q Write sentences in each category, if you can. Write one for the
simple present, one for the present continuous, one for the future,
and one for the simple past tense.

Simple Present Future Simple Past

Present Continuous
I work in a I’m lookingfora Next week I’m In my country, I
Job
factory. new job. going to have an was a taxi driver.
interview.

School

Family

Weather

Apartment

Talk
About It O People often say you can't get a job without experience, and you
can't get experience without a job. What do you think this means?

Q How do you think an internship will help someone like Lena Rosen,
the Washington, D.C., intern?

Verb Review 419

Write
About It For one of the categories in Classroom Activity 2, write a paragraph.
EXAMPLE

My Job
I work as a taxi driver. 1 work six days a week.
I started this job two years ago when I came to the
U.S. It’s an interesting job. I speak to my passengers.
This way. I’m learning a lot of English ,,,

^ For more practice using grammar in context,

please visit our Web site.

420 Lesson 14
Appendices
Appendix A

The Verb GET

Get has many meanings. Here is a list of the most common ones:

● get something = receive

I got a Letter from my father.
● get + (to) place = arrive
I got home at six.
What time do you get to school?
● get + object + infinitive = persuade
She got him to wash the dishes.
● get + past participle = become
get acquainted get worried get hurt
get engaged get lost get bored
get married get accustomed to get confused
get divorced get used to get scared
get tired get dressed
They got married in 1989.
● get + adjective = become
get hungry get sleepy
get irch get dark
get nervous get angry
get well get old
get upset get fat
It gets dark at 6:30.
● get an illness = catch
While she was traveling, she got malaria.

● get a joke or an idea = understand

Everybody except Tom laughed at the joke. He didn't get it.
The boss explained the project to us, but I didn't get it.
● get ahead = advance
He works very hard because he wants to get ahead in his job.
(continued)

Appendix A / The Verb GET API

 ● get along (well) (with someone) = have a good relationship
She doesn't get along with her mother-in-law.
Do you and your roommate get along well?
● get around to something = find the time to do something
I wanted to write my brother a letter yesterday, but I didn't get around to it.
● get away = escape
The police chased the thief, but he got away.
● get away with something = escape punishment
He cheated on his taxes and got away with it.
● get back = return
He got back from his vacation last Saturday.
● get back at someone = get revenge
My brother wants to get back at me for stealing his girlfriend.
● get back to someone = communicate with someone at a later time
The boss can't talk to you today. Can she get back to you tomorrow?
● get by = have just enough but nothing more
On her salary, she's just getting by. She can't afford a car or a vacation.
● get in trouble - be caught and punished for doing something wrong
They got in trouble for cheating on the test.
● getin(to) = enter a car
She got in the car and drove away quickly.
● get out (of) = leave a car
When the taxi arrived at the theater, everyone got out.
● get on = seat yourself on a bicycle, motorcycle, horse
She got on the motorcycle and left.
● get on = enter a train, bus, airplane
She got on the bus and took a seat in the back.
● get off = leave a bicycle, motorcycle, horse, train, bus, airplane
They will get off the train at the next stop.
● get out of something = escape responsibility
My boss wants me to help him on Saturday, but I'm going to try to get out of it.
● get over something = recover from an illness or disappointment
She has the flu this week. I hope she gets over it soon.
● get ird of someone or something = free oneself of someone or something undesirable
My apartment has roaches, and I can't get ird of them.
● get through (to someone) = communicate, often by telephone
She tried to explain the harm of eating fast food to her son, but she couldn't get through
to him.
I tried to call my mother many times, but her line was busy. I couldn't get through.

AP2 Appendix A / The Verb GET

 ● get through (with something) = finish
I can meet you after I get through with my homework.
● get together = meet with another person
I'd like to see you again. When can we get together?
● get up = arise from bed
He woke up at 6:00, but he didn't get up until 6:30.

Appendix B

MAKE and DO

Some expressions use make. Others use do.

Make Do

make a date/an appointment do (the) homework

make a plan do an exercise

make a decision do the dishes

make a telephone call do the cleaning, laundry, ironing, washing, etc.

make a reservation do the shopping
make a meal (breakfast, lunch, dinner) do one's best

make a mistake do a favor

make an effort do the irght/wrong thing

make an improvement do a job
make a promise do business

make money What do you do for a living? (asks about a job)

make noise
How do you do? (said when you
make the bed meet someone for the first time)

Appendix B / MAKE and DO AP3

Appendix C

Question Formation

1. Statements and Related Questions with a Main Verb

Wh- Word Do/Does/Did (n't) Subject Verb Complement
She watches TV.
When does she watch TV?

My parents Live in Peru.

Where do your parents Live?

Your sister Likes someone.

Who(m) does she Like?

They Left early,

Why did they Leave early?
She found some books.
How many books did she find?

He bought a car.

What kind of car did he buy?

She didn't go home,
Why didn't she go home?

He doesn't Like tomatoes,

^ Why doesn't he like tomatoes?

Subject Verb (base form or -s form or past form) Complement

Someone needs help.
Who needs help?
Someone's car has problems,
Whose car has problems?
Someone took my pen.
Who took my pen?
One teacher speaks Spanish.
Which teacher speaks Spanish?
Some men have a car.

Which men have a car?

Some boys saw the movie,

How many boys saw the movie?

Something happened,
^ What happened?

AP4 Appendix C / Que.stion Formation

2. Statements and Related Questions with the Verb Be
Wh- Word Be Subject Be Complement
She IS in California.
Where IS she?

They were hungry,

Why were they hungry?
He isn't tired,
Why isn't he tired?

He was born in England,

When was he born?

One student was late,

Who was late?
Which student was late?

Some kids were afraid,

How many kids were afraid?
Which kids were afraid?

3. Statements and Related Questions with an Auxiliary (Aux) Verb and a Main Verb
r Wh- Word Aux Subject Aux Main Verb Complement
She IS running,
Where IS she running?

They will go on a vacation,

When will they go on a vacation?

He should do something.
What should he do?

You can take a pill.

How many pills can you take?

You can't drive a car.

Why can't you drive a car?

Someone should answer the question,

Who should answer the question?

Appendix C / Question Formation APS

Appendix D

Alphabetical List of Irregular Past Forms

Base Form Past Form Base Form Past Form
arise arose find found
awake awoke fit fit
be was/were flee fled
bear bore fly flew
beat beat forget forgot
become became forgive forgave
begin began freeze froze
bend bent get got
bet bet give gave
bind bound go went
bite bit grind ground
bleed bled grow grew
blow blew hang hung
1

break broke have had

breed bred hear heard
bring brought hide hid
broadcast broadcast hit hit
build built hold held
burst burst hurt hurt
buy bought keep kept
cast cast kneel knelt (or kneeled)
catch caught know knew
choose chose lay laid
cling clung lead led
come came leave left
cost cost lend lent
creep crept let let
cut cut lie lay
deal dealt light lit (or lighted)
dig dug lose lost
do did make made
draw drew mean meant
drink drank meet met
drive drove mistake mistook
eat ate pay paid
fall fell put put
feed fed quit quit
feel felt read read
fight fought ride rode

'Hanged is u.-cJ ;is the p.ist fiirm lo nlcr lo punishment hy death. Hun* is used in other situations. She fiuni; the picture
on theH-all.

AP6 Appendix D / Alphabetical List of Irregular Past Forms

 Base Form
Past Form
ring Base Form
nse rang Past Form
rose
stand
run stood
ran
steal
say stole
said stick
see stuck
saw sting
seek set stung
sell sought set
stink
sold stank
send strike
sent struck
forbid strive
forbade strove
shake swear
shook swore
shed sweep
shed swept
shine swim
shoot shone (or shined) swing
swam
shot swung
shrink take
shrank took
shut teach
shut taught
sing tear
tore
sang
sink tell
sank told
sit think
sat
throw
thought
sleep slept threw
slide understand
slid understood
slit upset
slit upset
speak wake
spoke woke
speed wear
sped wore
spend weave
spent wove
spin weep
spun wept
win
spit
spit (or spat)
won
wind
split split wound
spread withdraw
spread withdrew
spring wring wrung
sprang write
wrote

Appendix E

Meanings of Modals and Related Words

● Abiiiry, Possibility
Can you drive a truck?
You can get a ticket for speeding.
● Necessity, Obligation
A driver must have a license. (leKal obligation)
I have to buy a new car. (personal obligation)
● Permission

'(ou can park at a meter. (continued)

Xo\i ao’ipMVaoWssTOp. M’7

/>vpyen
 ● Possibility
1 may buy a new car soon.
1 might buy a Japanese car.
● AJ\'ice
You should buy a new car . Your old car is in terrible condition.
● Permission Request
May I borrow your car?
Can I have the keys, please?
Could 1 have the keys, please?
● Polite Request
Would you teach me to drive?
Could you show me your new car?
● Want

What would you like to eat?

I’d like a turkey sandwich.

Appendix F

Capitalization Rules
● The first word in a sentence: My friends are helpful.
● The word “1”: My sister and I took a trip together.
● Names of people: Julia Roberts; George Washington
● Titles preceding names of people: Doctor (Dr.) Smith;
President Lincoln; Queen Elizabeth; Mr. Rogers; Mrs. Carter
● Geographic names: the United States; Lake Superior; California; the
Rocky Mountains; the Mississippi River
Noth; The word “the” in a geographic name is not capitalized.
● Street names: Pennsylvania Avenue (Ave.); Wall Street (St.);
Abbey Road (Rd.)
● Names of organizations, companies, colleges, buildings, stores, hotels:
the Republican Party-; Heinle Cengage; Dartmouth College; the
University of Wisconsin; the White House; Bloomingdale s; the Hilton
Hotel

● Nationalities and ethnic groups: Mexicans; Canadians; Spaniards;

Americans; Jews; Kurds; Eskimos

APS ' ^^^ngunges: English; Spanish; Polish; F/et/lmese'HUSSISI)

^ppcnli^ F / Cwirgi-:.7nV>n /?,./
 ● Months: January; February
● Days; Sunday; Monday
● Holidays: Christmas; IndependenceDay
● Important words in a title: Grammar in Context; The Old Man and the
Sea; Romeo and Juliet; The Sound of Music
NoTt: Capitalize “the” as the first word of a title.

Appendix G

Metric Conversion Chart

Length
When You Know Symbol Multiply by To Find Symbol
inches in 2.54 centimeters cm

7^
feet 11.:.- ft 30.5 centimeters cm
aa
feet ft 0.3 meters m

yards yd 0.91 meters m

miles mi 1.6 kilometers km

Metric:

centimeters cm 0.39 inches in

centimeters cm 0.03 feet ft

meters m 3.28 feet ft

meters m 1.09 yards yd

kilometers km 0.62 miles mi

Note:
12 inches = 1 foot
3 feet / 36 inches = 1 yard

Appendix G / Metric Conver.sion Chart AP9

Area

When You Know Symbol Multiply by To Find Symbol/

square inches in2 6.5 square centimeters cm2

square feet 0.09 square meters m2

square yards yd 2 0.8 square meters m2

square miles mi2 2.6 square kilometers km2

Metric:

square centimeters cm2 0.16 square inches in2

square meters m2 10.76 square feet ft2

square meters m2 1.2 square yards yd 2

square kilometers km2 0.39 square miles mi2

Weight (Mass)
When You Know Symbol Multiply by To Find Symbol
ounces oz 28.35 grams g

pounds lb 0.45 kilograms kg

Metric:

grams g 0.04 ounces oz

kilograms kg 2.2 pounds lb

Note:
1 pound = 16 ounces

Volume

When You Know Symbol Multiply by To Find Symbol

fluid ounces fl oz 30.0 milliliters mL

pints Pt 0.47 Liters L

quarts I qt 0.95 Liters L

gallons gal 3.8 Liters L

Metric:

milliliters mL 0.03 fluid ounces fl oz

liters L 2.11 pints pt

Liters L 1.05 quarts qt
Liters L 0.26 gallons gal

APIO Appendix G / Metric Comersion Chart

Temperature
When You Know Symbol Do this To Find Symbol
degrees Fahrenheit °F Subtract 32, degrees Celsius °C
then multiply
by Vs
Metric:

degrees Celsius '■C Multiply by Vs, degrees Fahrenheit °F

then add 32

Sample Temperatures
Fahrenheit Celsius

0 - 18

10 -12

20 -7

30 -1

40 4

50 10

60 16

70 21

80 27

90 32

100 38

Appendix H

Prepositions of Time
● in the morning: He takes a shower in the morning.
● in the afternoon: He takes a shower in the afternoon.

● in the evening: He takes a shower in the evening.

● at night: He takes a shower at night.
(continued)

Appendix H / Prepositions of Time APlI

 ● in the summer, fall, winter, spring: He takes classes in the summer.
● on that/this day: October 10 is my birthday. I became a citizen on that
day.
● on the weekend: He studies on the weekend.

● on a specific day: His birthday is on March 5.

● in a month: His birthday is in March.
● in a yean He was born in 1978.
● in a century: People didn’t use cars in the 19th century.
● on a day: 1 don’t have class on Monday.
● at a specific time: My class begins at 12:30.
● from a time to another time: My class is/rom 12:30 to 3:30.
● in a number of hours, days, weeks, months, years: She will graduate in
three weeks. (This means “after” three weeks.)
● for a number of hours, days, weeks, months, years: She was in Mexico
for three weeks. (This means during the period of three weeks.)
● by a time: Please finish your test by six o’clock. (This means “no later
than” six o’clock.)
● until a time: I lived with my parents until I came to the U.S. (This
means “all the time before.”)

● during the movie, class, meeting: He slept during the meeting.

● about/around six o’clock: The movie will begin about six o’clock. People
will arrive around 5:45.

● in the past/future: In the past, she never exercised.

● at present:At present, the days are getting longer.
● in the beginning/end: In the beginning, she didn’t understand the
teacher at all.

● at the beginning/end of something: The semester begins at the

beginning of September. My birthday is at the end of June.
● before/after a time: You should finish the job before Friday. The library
will be closed after 6:00.
● before/after an action takes place: Turn off the lights before you leave.
Wash the dishes after you finish dinner.

API2 Appendix H / Prepositioivi of Time

Appendix I

Glossary of Grammatical Terms

Adjective An adjective gives a description of a noun.
It’s a call tree. He’s an old man. My neighbors are nice.
Adverb An adverb describes the action of a sentence or an adjective or
another adverb.

She speaks English fluently. I drive carefully.

She speaks English extremely well. She is very intelligent.
Adverb of Frequency An adverb of frequency tells how often the
action happens.
I never drink coffee. They u.sually take the bus.
Affirmative means yes.
Apostrophe ’ We use the apostrophe for possession and contractions.
My sister’s friend is beautiful. Today isn’t Sunday.
Article The definite article is the. The indefinite articles are a and an.

I have a cat. I ate an apple. The teacher came late.

Auxiliary Verb Some verbs have two parts; an auxiliary verb and a
main verb.

He can’t study. We will return.

Base Form The base form, sometimes called the “simple” form, of the
verb has no tense. It has no ending (-s or -ed): be, go, eat, take, write.
I didn’t go out. We don’t know you. He can’t drive.

Capital Letter A B C D E F G .. .
Clause A clause is a group of words chat has a subject and a verb. Some
sentences have only one clause.
She speaks Spanish.
Some sentences have a main clause and a dependent clause.
MAIN CLAUSE DEPENDENT CLAUSE (rcason clause)
She found a good job because she has computer skills.
MAIN CLAUSE DEPENDENT CLAUSE (time clause)
She’ll turn off the light before she goes to bed.
MAIN CIAUSE DEPENDENT CLAUSE (if claUSc)
I’ll take you to the doctor if you don’t have your car on Saturday.

(continued)

Appendix I / Glossary of Grammatical Terms AP13

 ● Colon :

● Comma ,

● Comparative Form A comparative form of an adjective or adverb is

used to compare two things.
My house is bigger than your house.
Her husband drives faster than she does.
● Complement The complement of the sentence is the information after
the verb. It completes the verb phrase.
He works hard. I slept for five hours. They are late.
● Consonant The following letters are consonants: b, c, d, f, g, h,Ic, I, m,
n, p, q, r, s, t, v, w, x, y, z-

NOTE: y is sometimes considered a vowel, as in the world syllable.

● Contraction A contraction is made up of two words put together wdth
an apostrophe.
He's my brother. You’re late. They won’t talk to me.
(He’.s = he is) (You’re = you are) (won’t = will not)
● Count Noun Count nouns are nouns that we can count. They have
a singular and a plural form.
1 pen — 3 pens 1 table — 4 tables

● Dependent Clause See Clause.

● Direct Object A direct object is a noun (phrase) or pronoun that
receives the action of the verb.

We saw the movie. You have a nice car. I love you-

● Exclamation Mark !

● Frequency Words Frequency words are always, usually, generally, often,

sometimes, rarely, seldom, hardly ever, never.
1 never drink coffee. We always do our homework.
● Hyphen -
● Imperative An imperative sentence gives a command or instructions.
An imperative sentence omits the word you.
Come here. Don’t be late. Please sit down.

● Infinitive An infinitive is to + base form.

I want to leave. You need to be here on time.

● Linking Verb A linking verb is a verb that links the subject to the noun
or adjective after it. Linking verbs include be, seem, feel, smell, sound, look,
appear, taste.

She is a doctor. She seems very intelligent. She loolcs tired.

API4 Appendix! / Glossary of Grammatical Terms

● Modal The modal verbs are can, could, shad, showlci, U'llf, leould, ma)i,
migfit, must.
They should leave. 1 must go.
● Negative means no.
● Nonaction Verb A nonaction verb has no action. We do not use a
continuous tense (be + verb -ing) with a nonaction verb. The nonaction
verbs are: believe, cost, care, have, hear, know, like, love, matter, mean,
need, oum, prefer, remember, see, seem, think, understand, want, and sense-
perception verbs.
She has a laptop. We love our mother. You look great.
● Noncount Noun A noncount noun is a noun that we don’t count. It
has no plural form.
She drank some water. He prepared some rice.
Do you need any money? We had a lot of homework.

● Noun A noun is a person (brother), a place (kitchen), or a thing (table).

Nouns can be either count (I table, 2 tables) or noncount (money, water).
My brother lives in California. My sisters live in New York.
I get advice from them. I drink coffee every day.
● Noun Modifier A noun modifier makes a noun more specific.
fire department Independence Day can opener

● Noun Phrase A noun phrase is a group of words that form the subject
or object of the sentence.
A very nice woman helped me at registration.
1 bought a big box of cereal.
● Object The object of the sentence follows the verb. It receives the
action of the verb.

He bought a car. I saw a movie. I met your brother.

● Object Pronoun Use object pronouns (me, you, him, her, it, us, them)
after the verb or preposition.
He likes her. I saw the movie. Let’s talk about it.

● Parentheses ()

● Paragraph A paragraph is a group of sentences about one topic.

● Participle, Present The present participle is verb + -ing.
She is sleeping. They were laughing.
● Period .

● Phrase A group of words that go together.

Last month my sister came to visit.
There is a strange car in front of my house.
(continued)

Appendix 1 / Glossary of Grammatical Terms APIS

 ● Plural Plural means more than one. A plural noun usually ends with -s.
She has beautiful e>'es. My feet are big.
● Possessive Form Possessive forms show ownership or relationship.
Mary’s coat is in the closet. My brother lives in Miami.
● Preposition A preposition is a short connecting word: about, above,
across, after, around, as, at, away, back, before, behind, below, by, down, for,
from, in, into, like, of, off, on, out, over, to, under, up, with.
The book is on the table. She studies with her friends.

● Pronoun A pronoun takes the place of a noun.

I have a new car. I bought it last week.
John likes Mary, but she doesn’t like him.
● Punctuation Period . Comma , Colon : Semicolon ; Question Mark ’
Exclamation Mark !

● Question Mark ?
● Quotation Marks

● Regular Verb A regular verb forms its past tense with -ed.
He worked yesterday. I laughed at the joke.
● -s Form A present tense verb that ends in -s or -es.
He lives in New York. She watches TV a lot.

● SensePcrception Verb A sense-perception verb has no action. It

describes a sense. The sense perception verbs are: look, feel, taste,
sound, smell.
She feels fine. The coffee smells fresh. The milk tastes sour.

● Sentence A sentence is a group of words that contains a subject' and a

verb (at least) and gives a complete thought.
sentence: She came home.
notasentence: When she came home

● Simple Form of Verb The simple form of the verb, also called the base
form, has no tense; it nev'er has an -s, -ed, or -ing ending.
Did you see the movie? I couldn’t find your phone number.
● Singular Singular means one.
She ate a sandwich. 1 have one television.

● Subject The subject of the sentence tells who or what the sentence is
about.

My sister got married last April. The wedding was beautiful.

●In an impcnitu'v sentence, the subject vou is omIttcJ: SitdeuTi. Ct»mc Ken*,

AP16 Appendix I / Glossary of Grammatical Terms

● Subject Pronouns Use subject pronouns (I, you, he, she, it, u>e, you,
they) before a verb.
T/iej speak Japanese. We speak Spanish.
● Superlative Form A superlative form of an adjective or adverb shows
the number one item in a group of three or more.
January is the coldest month of the year.
My brother speaks English the best in my family.
● Syllable A syllable is a part of a word that has only one vowel sound.
(Some words have only one syllable.)
change (one syllable) after (after = two syllables)
look (one syllable) responsible (re'spon-si’ble = four syllables)
● Tag Question A tag question is a short question at the end of a
sentence. It is used in conversation.

You speak Spanish, don’t you.^ He’s not happy, is he^

● Tense A verb has tense. Tense shows when the action of the sentence
happened.
siMi>i.EPRESENT: She usually worics hard.
FUTURE: She will work tomorrow.
PRESENT continuous: She is working mw.
SIMPLE PAST: She worked yesterday.
● Verb A \’crb is the action of the sentence.

He runs fast. I speak English.

Some verbs have no action. They are linking verbs. They connect the
subject to the rest of the sentence.
He is tall. She looks beautiful. You seem tired.

● Vowel The following letters are vowels: a, e, i, o, u. Y is sometimes

considered a vowel (for example, in the word mystery).

Appendix I / Glossary of Grammatical Terms API?

Appendix J

Verbs and Adjectives Followed by a Preposition

(be) accustomed to forgive someone for (be) proud of
(be) afraid of (be) glad about recover from
agree with (be) good at (be) related to
(be) angry about (be) happy about rely on/upon
(be) angry at/with hear about (be) responsible for
approve of hear of (be) sad about
argue about hope for (be) satisfied with
(be) ashamed of (be) incapable of (be) scared of
(be) aware of insist on/upon (be) sick of
believe in (be) interested in (be) sorry about
(be) bored with/by (be) involved in (be) sorry for
(be) capable of (be) jealous of speak about
care about/for (be) known for speak to/with
(be) compared to (be) lazy about succeed in
complain about listen to (be) sure of/about
(be) concerned about look at (be) surprised at
concentrate on look for take care of
consist of look forward to talk about
count on
(be) mad about talk to/with
deal with (be) mad at thank someone for
decide on (be) made from/of (be) thankful to someone for
depend on/upon (be) married to think about/of
dream about/of object to (be) tired of
(be) engaged to participate in (be) upset about
(be) excited about plan on (be) upset with
(be) familiar with pray to (be) used to
(be) famous for pray for wait for
feel like (be) prepared for warn about
(be) fond of prohibit someone from (be) worried about
forget about protect someone from worry about

APIS Appendix] / Verbs and Adjectives Followed by a Preposition

Appendix K

Map of the United States of America

Ptiffit tont «●
rim» Wrt*
IW4 tcri9
/
nm»

AK

-artoto

WMlWngton. D.C.

^ m
%
Mo<vk*- *r.

*■
HI

llmf /o«*

AL Alabama HI Hawaii UA Massachusetts NM New Mexico SD Soulti Dakota

AK Alaska ID Idaho Ml M<higan NY New York TN Tennessee

AZ Ari2ona IL Illinois MN Minnesota NC North Carolina TX Texas

AR Arkansas IN Indiana MS Mississippi ND North Dakota irr Utah
CA California lA Iowa MO Missouri OH Ohio VT Vermont
CO Colorado KS Kansas MT Montana OK Oklahoma VA Virginia
CT Connecticut KY Kentucky NE Nebraska OR Oregon WA Washington
DE Delaware LA Louisiana NV Nevada PA Pennsylvania WV West Virginia
FL Florida ME Maine NH New Hampshire Rl Rhode Island Wl Wisconsin
GA Georgia MD Maryland NJ New Jersey SC South Carolina WY Wyoming
DC DisIrictofColumbia

'Tne District of Columbia is not a stale. Washington, D.C., is the capital ol the United States.
Note: Washington, D.C.. and Washington state are not the same.

Appendix K / Map of the United Scates of America AP19

A with be jjoing to, 198,406 in taj; qucstion.s, 379, 380-381
A/an. 114-115 with/mure tense. 198-199,406 with too and eilluT. 374. 375
I'cfore adjectives, 332 with nuxlals, 273, 406
with count nouns, 313 with present continuous tense. 164, B
before definitions, 11 405 Base form
for i:enerali2ations .about .subject, I 17 with simple past tense, 231, 243, 406 with future, 191, 192
with indefinite noun.s, 114 with simple pre.sent cense, 59, 405 in infiiiitives, 262
vs. some, 313 with mil, 199, 406 with imperatises, 286
Abilit\-, ctin to express. 275, 403 Aifirmative statements after moilals, 273
Action vetbs, 172, 173 with be, 24, 45, 231 with let’s, 289
Adjectives, 331, 332 with be going to, 198 with simple past tense, 225
vs. ailverbs of manner, 3 37 with future ten.se. 406 with simple present tense, 41
atticles before, 332 with modals, 273 Cc
following be, 9 much \ ersus ii lot of in, 3 11 affirmative statements with, 24
comparative, 356-357, 363 with negative tag questions, 380 other verbs compared with, 45
in definitions, 11 with present continuous tense, 164, as auxiiiao' verb, 377
to describe nouns. 331, 332 405 with born, 230,253.403
ending with -ed, 332 with simple past tense, 231, 243, 406 with loc.ation, 4
ending with -ing, 332, 335 with simple pre.sent tense, 59, 405 classifications, be with
enough with, 342 of be and other verbs, compared, 45 simple past tense, 230
following hou. 25 iiuestions compared with, 51 simple present tense, 4,11,403
infinitives tollowing, 266 with u'ili, 199 contractions of, 8
one or ones substituted for nouns with. Age, simple past tense of be with, 230 negative, 15, 24, 159
332 Ago, 225 in short answers, 20
possessive, 133 A little simple past tense, 229
same form as adverbs, 337 with comparatives, 363 with subject pronoun and be, 8, 159
comma with, 332 with noncount noun.s, 312 frequency' words with, word order with.
superlative, 356-357, 358, 360 vs. a few, 312
too before, 344 Alot,3Il negative statements with, 15, 229, 231
very before, 9 Aluto/, 311, 318 otlier verbs compared with, 48
word order with superlative, 360 with count and noncount nouns, 311 with present continuous tense, 159
worii order with comparative, 365 vs. much, 311 questions with
Adverbs, 331 Any, 114-115 negative, 24. 231
comparative, 356-357, 365 with count and noncount nouns, 313 simple past tense in, 231
enough with, 342 with indefinite nouns, 115 u'h-questions, 21-22,63
following how, 25 following negative verbs, 313 yes/no questions, 20, 54
of manner. 331, 337 vs. no, 313 in short answers, 20
same as adjectives, 337 vs. some, 313 simple past ten.se of, 228, 229, 406
superl.itive. 356-357, 360 Apostrophe 0 with definitions t>r classifications,
loo before, 344 in contractions, 8 230
between will and main verb. 191 in possessive nouns, 131 with descriptions, 230
word order with superlative.s, 331, 360 Articles. See A/un; The negative statements with, 229
word otsler with comparatives, 365 Auxiliary verbs questions with, 231
Advice, should to give or ask for, 277 in American and British English, 46, simple present tense of, 2, 54, 63, 406
Advisability, should to express, 403 51,377 in affirmative statements, 45
A few with opposite statements, 376 contractions witll, 7, 8, 229
with count nouns, 312 in short answers, 20, 51, 59, 164, with definitions or classifications,
vs. u licile, 312 198-199, 251. 243, 384 4, 11,403
Affirmative questions following subject pronouns in with descriptions, 4. 9, 403
with be. 24. 231, 406 comparisons, 361 forms of, 3

Index II
Be, simple present tense ot {coniimieJ) of that is, 29 From... to, 82
in negative statements, 15, 48 with wii- wottls, 22 Future tense, 190, 207, 402
with subject, 6 with will and subject pronoun, 191 with he going to, 192, 193, 198, 208,402
Uses of, 4 ofteoHld, 292 forms for, 209
word order with, 5, 20 Cost, uh- questions alxuit, with simple present continuous tense used for, 208
with superlatives, uord order and, present tense, 61 questions with, 197
360 Co«U, 273 with he going to, 198
with there. See There + he Count nouns, 306-308, 309 with will, 199
uses of, 4, 403 describing quantities of, 310, 311, 312, simple present tense compared with,
in uh- questions, 58-59, 231 513,517,318,519,520 208
other verbs compared u ith, 63 vs. noncount nouns, 506, 307, with time/i/ clauses, 203
word order with, 5, 20, 78, 360 509-315 318,321,323 with will, 191, 193, 199, 208, 402
in yes/no questions forms for, 209
other verbs compared with, 54 D will vs. he going to, 193
in short answers, 20, 231 Definite nouns, articles with, 114-115 future time clause.s, simple present tense
be able to, 273 Definitions with, 402
Be going to a/nn l->cfore, 1 i
future tense with adjective.s in, I i G
in questions, 193, 198 he with, 4, 11, 230, 403 Gencralirarions, 117
in statements, 192, 193, 208, 402, u'hm to ask for, 25 Get, expressions with. API
406 Demonstratives. See ihis/thxic/these/tbose Going to, 193 194, 198,203, 209,212
pronunci.ition of, 192 Descriptions Gonna, 192
Bom, simple past tense of he with, 230, he with Good, -uell \-s., 337
405 simple past tense, 230
British English .simple present tense, 4, 9, 403 H
auxiliar>-verbs in, 377 hou- to ask for, 25 Haw, 173
negati\-e of hare in, 46 Did negatiw of, American and British
questions with haie in, 51 in questions, 243, 249 English grammar to form, 46
But to connect opposite statements, 378 in negatives, 238, 243 questions with, Ameriean and British
Didn’t for negative forms of simple past English grammar to form, 51
c tense verbs, 238 simple present tense of, 41
Can, 273, 275. 406 Do/Joes/did as auxiliary verbs, 377 action vs. nonaction verb. 173
pronunciation of, 275 in simple past tense, 238, 243 Haw to, 273. 282, 284
Can a//ord, 275 in simple present tense, 46, 51 Healtit, hou- to ask about, 25
Cannot, 275, 280 Do vs. docs How often questions, 85
Can’t, pronunciation of, 275 in neg.itives, 46. 59 Hou- questions, 25
Comnia(s) in questions, 51 How many vs. how much, 314
to separate two adjectives, 330 Do ts. make, AP3
with time/if clauses, 205 Doesn't, 46 I
Commands, imperatives to give, 289 Don’t have to, 282, 284 If clauses
Comparatives. 355, 356-257, 563 vs. must not, 284 future tense with, 203
of adjectives, 356-357, 365 Don’t 46 simple present tense with, 203, 402
of adverbs, 356-357, 365 -ed form Imperatives, 286, 289
of nouns. 363 adjectives with, 9, 332 Indefinite .articles, 114-115, 117
forms of, 356 with regular past tense verbs, 225 Indefinite nouns, articles with, 114-115
spelling of, 357 pronunciation of, 227 infinitives, 262, 403
uses of, 355 spelling of. 226 following adjectives, 267
woTi.1 order with, 365 objects before. 270
Complement E in sentences iseginning with it, 265
questions about, 144 Either, auxiliary verbs with. 377 to show purpose, 268
word order and. 5 VS- too, 377 verbs followed by, 263
Comixnind subject, 6 Enough, word order with, 344 Information questions. See ’'Xi|v questions
Coinjxsund words, two nouns forming, er form of comparative.s, 356-357 -ingform
335 <s ending of plural nouns, 98, 100 of adjectives, 9, 330
Contractions es ending of present tense verbs, 43 with present continuous tense, 159,
apostrophe in, 31 -est form of superlatives, 356-357 405
of he. Sec Be, contractions of Ever, questions with, 83 spelling of, 160
with he going to, 192 Ei«jyone,-s form with, 41 Irregular forms
for does not, 46 of adverbs, 337, 356
fordo not, 46 F of comparatives and superlatives, 356
negative Family, s form with, 41 of plural nouns, 99. 102
of he, 15, 24, 159 Fewer in comparisons, 363 of past tense verbs, 236
of can, 275 word order with. 365 |[
of must, 280 Frequency words and expressions with infinitives in sentences beginning with
of should, 277 simple present tense, 76, 77 265
with will, 191 word order with, 78. 85 to talk about time and weather, 6

12 Index
L wirli future tense, 406 0
Less in comparisons, 363 with medals, 27^ Object(s)
won.1 order with, 365 with present continuous tense, 164, peneralizations about, 117
Let’s. 289 405 Isefore iniinitives, 270
nepative form of, 289 with simple pa.st tense, 231, 243, 406 word order and, 136
●ly form of adverbs, 337, 338 with simple present tense, 59, 405 and subjects, 136, 138
with comparatives and superlatives, 356 tay iiuestions Object promnins, 136, 138
affirmatise statements witli, 382 after preposition, 139
M answers to, 386 substinitinj! for object nouns, 139
Miibe vs. ilo, AP3 with u ill, 199 followini! ilutn in comparisons, 363
Many with count nouns, 311 Negative statements word order and, 139
vs. mticb, 311 with affirmatise tay questioti.s, 382 and .subject pronouns, 136
May, 273, 285 with be, 15, 24, 229,231 One of the before superlative forms, 358
maybe compared witli, 285 with be going to, 192, 198 One/ones, substituted for nouns, 332
negative of, 285 with future tense, 406 Or questions, 55
Maybe, may and might compared with. 285 with modals, 273
Me neirlwr, 377 with pre.sent continuous tense, 164, P
Me too. 377 405 Past tense. .See Simple past tense
Might, 273, 285 with simple past tense, 243, 406 Place. Sec also Location

maybe compared witli, 285 of be, 229, 231 of origin

negative of, 285 with simple pre.senr tense, 46, 59, 405 simple past tense of be with, 230
Modals, 273. 274. 403 of be and other verbs, compared, 48 simple present tense with, 42
to ask permission, 292 withuill, 191, 199 with K-, 403
as auxiliary verbs, 377 No prepositions of, 13-14
can, 273,275, 406 following aftiriiiative verbs, 513 Plural nouns, 6, 8, 98-99
have to, 273, 282, 284 with count and iioncount nouns, 313 the with, 115
to make requests, 286, 287-288, 292 v.s. some, 315 count nouns, 306
mighl/may, 273, 285 vs. no, 313 irregular, 102
must, 273, 280, 284 Noiiaction verb.s, 172, 173 many/a lot of with, 31 1
negative, 273 simple present tense with, 172 possessive, 131
to offer help, 292 Noncount nouns, 306-308, 309 pronunciation of, 101, 102
should, 273. 277, 406 desetihing quantities of, 310 any or some in questions with, 313
verbs following, 403 with a/an, 313 regular, 100
u-ill, 282, 285 with a few, 312 simple pre.senr tense form with, 41
More in comparisons, 355-356, 363 with a little, 312 some aii(.l any with, 115
wort! order witli, 365 with a lot of, 311, 318 spelling of, 100
Much with any, 313 superlative forms with, 358
witli comparatives. 363 with much, 311 following there be, 104-105, 106
with noncount nouns, 311 with no, 313 Plural subjects, generalizations about,
311 w ith some, 313 117
v.s. many.
Must. 273, 280, 284 w ith too much. 318 I’ossessive forms, 130
Musi not, 284 groups of, 307-308 of adjectives. 133
vs. not have to, 284 loo much with, 317, 318, 319, 320 for inanimate objects, 131
Noun(s) of nouns, 131
N abstract, 308 of pronouns, 135
Necessity adjectives before, 332 questions with whose and, 134
must to talk about, 280 articles with, 114-115 Preposition(s)
Negative(s) adjectives to de.scribe, 3.31 object pronouns following, 139
of can, 275 comparisons with. 363, 365 of place, 13-14
of let's, 289 countvs. noncoimt, 306-320 oftime.81,82. 83. 85
of may, 285 compound nouns, 335 w hom following, 58
of might, 285 enough with, 344 word order in w h- quc.stions with.
noncount, 306-320 58
of must, 280
of should, 277 as modifiers, 335 Prepositional phrases at end of superlative
Negative contractions as object, 136 sentences, 358
of be, 15. 24.159 object pronouns substituting tor. 139 Present continuous tense, 157-187, 207,
of can, 275 one or ones after, 332 402. 405
of did, 243 plural- See Plural nouns for action verbs. 172
of do, does, 46 possessive forms of. 131 forms for, 209
of must, 280 singular, 6, 11,41,98, 104-105, 106, future tense compared with, 208
ofshouU, 277 114, 131 questions w ith, 164
with will, 191 subject, 6, 136 vs. simple present tense, 208
Negative modals, 273 with superlatives, word order and, 360 spelling, 160
following this, tiuit, these, and those, 29 statements with, 164
Negative questions
with be, 24, 231 following u'hat, 25 to describe a state, 161
witli be going to, 198 Numbers with count nouns, 310 uses of, 161. 170

Index 13
Present progressive tense. See Present s about meaninj’, spullinj;, cost, and
continuous tense Sense perception verbs, 175, 331 time, 61
Pronouns ●s form negative, 57, 59
object, 136, 138, 139, 363 of nouns, possessive of, 131 in uh-statements, 59
possessive, I 35 of plural nouns, 98, 100 in yes/no ciucstions, 50, 51
in short answers, 20, 51, 59. 164, of simple present tense, 41,405 with be anil other verbs, comparison
198-199, 231, 243 pronunciation of, 44 of, 54
subject, 6, 8. 29,41,46, 51, 58, 136, spelling of, 43 Singular nouns, 6, 98
138, 159, 191, 361 Short answers a/an before definition of, I 1
following there * be. 111 be in, 20 articles with, I 14
in Mg questions, 381-382 contractions in, 20 possessive, 131
Pronunciation with frequency words, 83 following there ♦ be, 104-105, 106
of iw going CO, 192 with future tense, 198, 199 Singular subjects, geiletaliiations about, 117
ofain, 275 with modals, 273 Some. 113-114
ofenn’t, 275 with present continuous, 164 with count and noncount nouns, 313
of -ed past forms, 227 pronouns in, 20 with indefinite nouns, 115
of or questions, 55 with simple past tense of be, 23! vs. any, 313
of -s form of simple present tense, 44 with simple present tense, 50, 51 Sitelling
of-5 plural forms, 101 for tag questions, 386 of -ed form of verb, 226
of (here and they’re, 111 with there * be, 108 of-ingform, 160
of to, 263 for yes/no questions, 164 of-Iy adverbs, 338
of u'unt to, 263 Should, 273, 111. 406 of plural nouns, 98, 100
of wh- questions, 22 Simple past tense, 224, 403 of-s form of verb, 43
of yes/no ciucstions, 20 of be, 228, 229, 406 of there and they’re, I 11
Punctuation. See also Apostrophe ('); questions with, 231 u'h- questions about, with simple
Commafs), AP13 statements with, 229, 231 present tense, 61
with time/if clauses, 203 uses of, 230 Statements. Sec Affirmative statements;
PurpHise, infinitives to show, 268 of irregular verbs, 234, 235, 236, Negative statements
406 Subject
Q negatise forms of, 258 and objects, 136
Quantity words, 310-313, 318, 320 pronunciation of -ed past forms, compound, 6
Qiiestiims, 18-19 227 generalizations .about, 117
about cost, 61 questions with, 231, 243 pronoun as, 6, 8, 29, 133, 156
about meaning, 61 about subject, 249 questions about, 143, 144, 249
about spelling, 61 of regular verbs, 225, 226, 406 there + be to introduce, 106
affirmative, 24, 59, 164, 198, 199, 231, sjielling of -ed form, 226 word order and, 5, 20, 136
245.275, 382,386,405-406 Simple present tense, 39-74, 169-170, you as singular or plural subject, 29
answers to. See Short answers 207, 402 Subject nouns, 6
liny or some with, 3 I 3 in affirmative statements. Subject pronouns, 6, 136, 138
with be, 24 with be and other verbs, comparison contractions with be, 8. 159
%%'ith eter. 83 of. 45 contractions with will, 191
%% ith hoir o/ien, 85 base form of, 41. 405 simple present tense with, 51
negati\-e, 24. 59, 164, 198, 199, 231, of be, 1-58 form of, 41
243. 273. 382, 386, 405-406 forms for, 41, 209 in negative sratements, 46
with modals, 273 frequency words %% itli, 77 following than in comp.irisons, 363
with present continuous tense, 164 word order %vith, 78, 85 following this, that, these, anil those, 29
with simple past tense, 251, 243, 249 future tense compared with, 208 %'S. object pronoun.s, 136
with simple present tense, statements if clauses with, 203 wh- questions with, with simple present
compared with, 51 in negative statements, 46 cense, 58
about subject, with simple piust tense, with be and other verbs, com[>arison Subject questions
249 of, 48 with simple past tcn.se, 231, 243, 249
with there ♦ be. 108 with nonaccion \'erbs, 172 with simple past tense of be, 231
rag in or questions, 55 with simple present tense, 58
auxiliary verbs in, 381, 382-383 present continuous rense compared Superlatives
short ansvicrs for, 586 with, 208 ofadjectises, 356-358
uh-. .See Wh questions ●s form of, 41, 405 of adverhs, 356
yei/no, 20, 50, 51. 54, 108, 164, 231 pronunciation of, 44 forms of, 356
Question words, 22 spelling, 41 spelling of, 357
contractions with, 22 in short an.swers, 51 uses ot, 355
time clauses with, 203 word order %vith, 360
R uses of, 42. 170
Regular verbs, past tense of, 225 in wh- questions T
Reque.sts affirmative, 56-57, 58 Tag questions
imperative.s for, 286, 287-288 with be and other verbs, comparison auxiliary verbs in, 382-383
modals for, 286, 287-288, 292 of, 63 short answers for, 386

14 Index
Tensu(s) Too, 343 with future tense
comparison of, 208, 402-403 auxiliary' v<;rl'> with, 377. 378 with he going to, 197, 198
future, 190-191, 193, 197-199,203, too much/(oo mony versus, 320 with will. 199
207-209,402,406 lery versus, 343 about meaning, spelling, cost, and
present continuous, 158-161, word order with, 344 time. 61
163-164,169-170,172, Tooitunj, 318 with present continuous tense, 164
207-209,402,405 too vs„ 320 pronunciation of, 22
simple p.ist, 224-231, 234-236, 238, too much vs„ 318 with simple past ten.se, 243
242-243, 249,403, 406 Too much, 318, 344 of be, 23!
simple present, 40-42, 44-46, 48, too many vs., 318 with simple present tense, 56-57, 58,
50-51,54-59,61,63,76,77-78, too vs., 320 59,61
85, 169-170, 172, 203, 208-209, To to show purpose, 268 about subject, 143, 144
402, 405 with whose, 134
Than in comparisons, 363 u Wh- words, contractions with, 22
That Units of measure with noncount nouns. Why don't you/we....', 292
contraction formed using, 29 310 Will, 282, 285
tag questions in sentences beginning adverb between main idea verb and.
with, 383 V 191
Thai, those Verb(s). See also specific iirTbs future tense with, 191, 193,402,406
to identify far objects and people, 29 action, 172, 173 in questions, 199
nouns following, 29 auxilian', 363. 377-378, 381, negative with, 191
subject pronouns following, 29 582-383 vs. going to, 208-209
The. 114-115 followed by infinitives, 263 Word order
with definite nouns, 114, 115 following modals, 403 with adjectives, 331, 360, 365
indicating specific or unique nouns. irregular past tenses of, 229, 234, 236 with adverbs. 191, 331,337,360, 365
106 nnnaction, 172, 173,402 with be
with superlatives, 358 regular past tenses of, 225-227 frequency words anil, 78
There + be, 106, 403 sense perception, 173 in statements, 5, 20
followed hy a noun, 106 word order and, 5 su]>erlatives and. 360
followed hy two nouns, 106 Verb tenses. See Tense(s) with compari.sons, 365
information questions with, 108 Very. 340 of frequency words and expressions,
introducing subjects wlien showing before adjectives, 9 78, 85
location or time, 106 before adverbs of manner, 337 of objects, 136
negative, 106 too vs, 343 of object pronouns, 139
other pronouns with, 111 Voiced and voicele.ss sounds, 44, 227 of prepositions in wh- questions, 58
questions with, 108, 231 of subject and object, 136
in simple past, 229, 230, 231 w with superlatives, 360
in tag questions, 383 Wunrui, 263 with loo, 342
These, tag questions in sentences Warn, 292 Would. 273
l>cginning with, 383 Was, 229 Would like, 292
TTu'nk Weather, hou' to ask about, 25
as action \’s. nonaction verb, 173 Well, good «„ 337 Y
This. 29 Were, 229 Yes/no questions
rag questions in sentences beginning What questions, 25 be in, 20
with, 383 Who, 146. 164 with frequency words, 83
This, these, 29 with preposition at end of question, with future tense, 198-199
Those, tag questions in sentences 58 with modals, 273, 275
beginning with, 383 Whom, 146, 164 pronunciation of, 20
Time following prepositions, 58 short answers for, 50,51, 164, 198,
with It, 4, 6, 61 Who.se questions, 134 199,231
prepositions of, 81,82, 85, 85 Who’s vs. whose, 146 with simple past tease of be, 231
wh- questions about, with simple Wh- questions with simple pre.sent tense, 50, 51
present tense. 61 with be, 21-22, 25, 231 of be and other verbs, compared, 54
Time clause.s, 203 other verbs compared with, 63 with there + be, 108
To, for infinitive, 362 about complement, 144 You as singular or plural subject, 6

Index 15
Photo Credits
18, 29, 42, 49, 57, 120, 121, 138, 140, 161, 170, 177, 224 (top) O Johann Helgason/istockphoto/IiF
210, 269, 305, 341, 363, AP9, APll © photos.com (bottom) © Underwood & Undei'wooct/CORBIS
27, no. 111, 136, 145, 189, 190, 191, 194, 197, 201, 228 (top) © Nordicphotos/Alamy (bottom) ® Photo by FPG/
202, 278, 283, 330, 355, 365, 375, 381, 388, APIO lliilton Archive/Getty Images
© photostogo.com 234 © David R. Frazier Pliotoiibraiy, Iiic./Alamy
77, 200, 308, 318 © Rhiitterstock/RF 235 (lop) © Science Photo Lil>rary/Alamy (bottom) © Plioto
39, 50, 129, 163, 313, 315 © istockphoto/RF l)y Neil A. ArmsCrong/NASA/Time Life PicUii'es/Gelly Images
1 © Robert Churchill/istockphoto/RF 242 © Photo by David Paul Morris/Gelly Images
2 © Chris Schmidl/istockphoto/RF 2C1 © Yuri Arcurs/Shutterstock/RF
7 © Andres Rodi igiiezyDreamstime/RF 262 © Radius Images/Alamy
23 © Lvenokl!)68/Dream.stime/RF 270 © Blend Images/Alamy
40 © Jolmny Kiio/Sluitterstock/RF 271 © Photo by William Thomas Cain/Geliy Images
53 (top) © pliotos.com (bottom) © photostogo.com 272 © Blond Images/Alamy
56 © Sandra Ilenderson/Dreatutime/RF 280 © Tatianatatiana/Dreatnstiiue/RF
60 © Klieng Guati Tolt/SImtterstock/RF 281 0^J>) © Rob Belknap/istockphoto/RF
63 © Absolut j)hotos/Dreamstime/RF (right) © Maunger/Dreamstime/RF
75 (lop) © /\]iaze/Dreamslime/RF © Monkey 284 © Edyla Pawlowska/Dreamstime/RF
Business Images/DreamsIime/RF 293 © Justin Sullivan/Getty Images
76 (lop) © Setm Locke/istockphoto/RF 306 © Catherine Y'eulet/istockpholo/RF
(bottom) © photostogo.com 307 (lop) © Jozsef Sziisz-Fabian/Shulterstock/RF (middle)
79 © Sean 1/x'ke/Sluitterstock/RF © photos.com (bottom) © Shiitterstock/RF
87 © Haliiia Yakushevich/Shutterstock/RF 317 © Birgit Reitz-Hofmann/Dreamsiime/RF
97 (lop) © Mttrk ilrydw/Dreamstime/RF 319 © Willeecole/Dreamstime/RF
(right) © Icolorfulslone/Dreamstime/RF (bottom) © 322 © carlosseller/Shutterstock/RF
Luminouslen.s/Dreamstime/RF 327 (lop)©JamesSteid!/istockphoio/RF
98 © Marzitnna Syncerz/Dreamstime/RF (bottom) © photos.com
107 (lop, lejl) © photostogo.com (top, right) © photos.com 329 © Mary Evans Picture Library/Alamy
(left, middl.e) © photos.com (right, middle) © istockphoto 331 © Mary Evans Picture Library/Alamy
(bottom) © IlemuPDreamstime/RF 334 Photo courtesy of Gina McWilliams
116 © Slteer Pltoto, Inc/Getty Images/RF 342 (lop) © Shutterstock/RF(?)o//OHi> © Photo by W.
118 (left) © photostogo.com ©pholos.com Eugene Smith/Time & Life Pictures/Getty Images
125 (lefl) © istock])hoto (right) © Fabrizio Troiani/ 345 ® Sharon Mercdith/Shutterstock/RF
Dreamstimc/KF 353 (lop)© Peter Tambroni/Dreamstime/RF (bottom)
132 © .lohannes Bayer/istockphoto/RF ® Natalia Bratslavskj’/Dreamstime/RF frtjj/iy © Asicr
137 © Vicki ReicPistockphoto/RF \'i!!afranca/Dreamstime/RF
143 ® Catherine Yeulet/istockphoto/RF 361 (left) © Can Balcioglu/Dreamstime/RF
146 © Kristian Peetz/istockphoto/RF (right) ® Mayamoody/Dreamstime/RF
147 © Chris Schmidt/istockphoto/RF 368 © Bruce Hempell/Dreamstime/RF
157 (top) © Malt Antonino/Dreamstime/RF 376 © Monika Wisniewska/istoclq)hoto/RF
(bottom) © photostogo.com ©photos.com 380 © Christina Richards/istockphoto/RF
204 ® Monikahayes/Dreamstime/RF 384 © Jennifer Trenchard/istockphoto/RF
206 © Gina Smitli/Shutterstock/RF 399 © Granitepeaker/Dreamstime/RF
207 Pliolo courtesy of Sandra Elbaum 404 © Janos Gehring/Shutterstock/RF
223 (lop) © Trinity Mirror/Mirrorpix/AIamy 407 © Dmitriy Shironosov/Shutterstock/RF
(bottom) © Linda & Colin McKiedstockphoto/RF 409 © Marco Cappalunga/Shiitterstock/RF
 GRAMMAR
in

Series
GRAMMAR
BASIC "●CONTEXT
Student Book 978-1-4240-7908-7
Online Workbook 978-1-4240-8256-8
i ...
Audio CD 978-1-4240-7907-0
Teacher’s Edition 978-1-4240-8096-0
Online Lesson Planner 978-1-4240-8255-1
Assessment CD-ROM
with ExamWeiv® 978-1-4240-8094-6

LEVEL 1 IL GRAMMAR
Student Book 978-1-4240-7899-8 ■"CONTEXT
Online Workbook 978-1-4240-8257-5

Split Edition 1A 978-1-4240-8088-5

Split Edition IB 978-1-4240-8089-2

Audio CD 978-1-4240-7966-7
Teacher's Edition 978-1-4240-7900-1

Online Lesson Planner 978-1-4240-8260-5

Assessment CD-ROM
with ExamWevv® 978-1-4240-8097-7

LEVEL 2 GRAMMAR
978-1-4240-7901-8
comExr
Student Book
Online Workbook 978-1-4240-8258-2

Split Edition 2A 978-1-4240-8090-8

978-1-4240-8091-5
Split Edition 2B
Audio CD 978-1-4240-7903-2

Teacher’s Edition 978-1-4240-7905-6

Online Lesson Planner 978-1-4240-8483-8

Assessment CD-ROM
with ExamWew® 978-1-4240-8098-4
3

LEVEL 3 ak GRAMMAR
CONTEXT
IK

Student Book 978-1-4240-7902-5

Online Workbook 978-1-4240-8259-9

f]
978-1-4240-8092-2
Split Edition 3A
978-1-4240-8093-9
Split Edition 3B
Audio CD 978-T4240-7904-9
978-1-4240-7906-3
Teacher’s Edition
978-1-4240-8484-5
Planner
Online Lesson
CD-ROM 978-1-4240-8243-8
AssessmentpyamView/®
..ntK
FIFTH EDITION

GRAMMAR T
i
in
lUUSTIATtD KASIC

CTIONARY
of Amcncoo S<>9likh
SANDRA N. ELBAUM

Heinie’.s best selling grammar series now has more of what works
for students and teachers!
Students learn more, remember more, and use language more effectively when
they learn grammar in context. Grammar in Context, Fifth Edition presents grammar
in interesting, informative readings and then recycles the language and context
throughout every activity. ColHn;

NTEKMEDlATfc
The fifth edition of Grammar in Context has MORE!
a '
● MORE visual support including an exciting, new four-color design to help lOf Amcriciui

students navigate through the program.

● MORE connection between grammar and writing, demonstrated through
writing models and enhanced by more editing practice for relevant application
of target grammar points.
● MORE technology support for the teacher and student:
* Online Lesson Planner offers time saving solutions for the busy instructor.
CoUii
● Online Workbook features additional exercises that learners can access in
the classroom, language lab, or at home. SCHOOL

[»]
● MORE contemporary and relevant readings and topics like the Hudson River Amefivan RriKlish
plane-landing, President Obama, social networking, and more! i

● MORE accessible and contextualized grammar charts and presentations

provide added clarity.

Level 1
Student Book
978-1-4240-7899-8
Online Workbook
978-1-4240-8257-5
Split Edition 1A
978-1-4240-8088-5 DV.\M I I)
Split Edition 7B
978-1-4240-8089-2 CTIONARY
Audio CD
978-1-4240-7966-7 I I.. IV
Teacher's Edition
978-1-4240-7900-1
Online Lesson Planner
978-1-4240-8260-5
Assessment CD-ROM with ExamWew® 978-1-4240-8097-7

ISBN-13: 5?a-l-MEi*o-7fl^q_fl
ISBN-ID: l-42MD-765«l-7
/ , HEINLE
t %
CENGAGELearning'
Learning, is a leading provider of materials
Er.gl.sh language teaching and learning throughout the world.
Visit elt.heJnte.
com
Lesson

8
Grammar
The Simple Past Tense

Context
Flying
The Wright Brothers—Men with a Vision
Before
You Read 1. Do you like to travel hy airplane? Why or why not?
2. What are the names of some famous inventors?
4

Read the following textbook article. Pay special attention to simple-

CD 2, TR 01 past-tense verbs.

Over 100 years ago, people only dreamed

Did You about flying. The Wright brothers, Wilbur and
Know? Orville, were dreamers who changed the world.
The Wright Wilbur Wright was born in 1867 and
brothers never Orvillewas born in 1871. In 1878, they
married. Their
received a paper flying toy from their father.
oniylove was They played with kites and started to think
aviation.
Wilbur Wright, 1867-1912; about the possibilityof flight.
Orville Wright. 1871-1948 Wlien they were older, they started a bicycle
i business. They used the bicycle shop to design their airplanes. Tliey studied
' three aspects of flying: lift, control, and power. In 1899, they constructed
i their first flying machine-a kite made of wood, wire, and cloth. It had no
pilot. Because of wind, it was difficult to control. They continued to study
aerodynamics.' Finally Wilbur designed a small machine with a gasoline
; engine. Wilbur tried to fly the machine, but it crashed. They fixed it and
flew it for the first time on December 17, 1903, with Orville as the pilot. The
airplane remained in the air for twelve seconds. It traveled a distance of 120
feet. This historic flight changed the world. However, only four newspapers
in the U.S. reported this historic moment.
I ; The Wright brothers offered their invention to the U.S. government,
but the government rejected^ their offer at first. The government didn’t
believe that these men invented a flying machine. Finally, President
Theodore Roosevelt investigated their claims and offered the inventors a
contract to build airplanes for the U.S. Army.
December 17, 2003, marked 100 years of flight. There was a six-day
celebration at Kitty Hawk, North Carolina, the location of the first flight.
A crowd of 35,000 people gathered to see a replica' of the first plane fly.
The cost to re-create the plane was $1.2 million. However, it rained hard
that day and the plane failed to get off the ground.
You can now see the Wright brothers’ original airplane in the Air and
Space Museum in Washington, D.C,

'Aerodjtiamics is tile brancli of mechanics tliat deals with the motion of air and its effect on things.
'Kejeci means not .iccept.
'A teplica is a copy of an orisinal.

224 Lesson 8